Cambridge International AS & A Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/11
Paper 1 Pure Mathematics 1 May/June 2022
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2022 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some
Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 19 printed pages.

© UCLES 2022 [Turn over

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the specific content of the
mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:
 the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
 the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
 the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:
 marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the scope of the
syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
 marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
 marks are not deducted for errors
 marks are not deducted for omissions
 answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the question as
indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may be limited
according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in
mind.

© UCLES 2022 Page 2 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Mathematics Specific Marking Principles

1 Unless a particular method has been specified in the question, full marks may be awarded for any correct method. However, if a calculation is required then
no marks will be awarded for a scale drawing.

2 Unless specified in the question, answers may be given as fractions, decimals or in standard form. Ignore superfluous zeros, provided that the degree of
accuracy is not affected.

3 Allow alternative conventions for notation if used consistently throughout the paper, e.g. commas being used as decimal points.

4 Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored (isw).

5 Where a candidate has misread a number in the question and used that value consistently throughout, provided that number does not alter the difficulty or
the method required, award all marks earned and deduct just 1 mark for the misread.

6 Recovery within working is allowed, e.g. a notation error in the working where the following line of working makes the candidate’s intent clear.

© UCLES 2022 Page 3 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons
outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea
must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula
without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more ‘method’ steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise;
and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on
an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full
credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are
given for correct work only.

 A or B marks are given for correct work only (not for results obtained from incorrect working) unless follow through is allowed (see abbreviation FT above).
 For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if the answer is correct to 3 significant figures or would be correct to 3 significant figures if rounded (1
decimal place for angles in degrees).
 The total number of marks available for each question is shown at the bottom of the Marks column.
 Wrong or missing units in an answer should not result in loss of marks unless the guidance indicates otherwise.
 Square brackets [ ] around text or numbers show extra information not needed for the mark to be awarded.

© UCLES 2022 Page 4 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Abbreviations

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no ‘follow through’ from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen Or Implied

SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the
light of a particular circumstance)

WWW Without Wrong Working

AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2022 Page 5 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1(a) x2 – 8x + 11 = (x – 4)2 … or p = − 4 B1 If p and q-values given after their completed square

expression, mark the expression and ISW.
… 5 or q = − 5 B1

1(b)
(x – 4)2 − 5 = 1 so (x – 4)2 = 6 so x  4   6 M1 Using their p and q values or by quadratic formula

8  24 A1 Or exact equivalent.
x  4  6 or No FT; must have  for this mark.
2
ISW decimals 1.55, 6.45 if exact answers seen.
If M0, SC B1 possible for correct answers.

Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 a  12 d  12 B1 For correct equation.

30 B1 n
2
 2a   30  1 d   15 For correct equation in a and d. If using
2
 a  l  , must
replace l with an expression involving a and d.

a = 72, d = 5 B1 Both values correct SOI.

50 M1 Using sum formula with their a and d values obtained

S50 
2
 2  their a   49  their d   via a valid method.

S50 = 2525 A1

© UCLES 2022 Page 6 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(a) 2 M1 For selecting the term in x4 .

2 3 k2 
x 4
term is 10   2 x   
 x 

80k 4 x 4  a  80k 4 A1 For correct value of a. Allow 80k 4 x4 .

[ x 2 term is [6 ](2kx)2  1 = 24k2x2 ] b  24k 2 B1 For correct value of b. Allow 24k 2 x2 .

3(b) 80k 4  24k 2  216  0  10k 4  3k 2  27  0

 
M1 Forming a 3-term equation in k (all terms on one side)
with their a and b and no x’s.

 2k 2

 3 5k 2  9   0 [⇒ k 2

3
2
9
or  ]
5
M1 Attempt to solve 3-term quartic (or quadratic in another
variable) by factorisation, formula or completing the
square – see guidance.

3 A1 6
k    OE e.g.  ,  1 .5 , AWRT  1 .22
2 2
Omission of  A0.
Additional answers A0.
If M1 M0, SC B1 can be awarded for correct final
answer, max 2/3.

© UCLES 2022 Page 7 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(a) sin 3 sin 2 sin 3 1  sin   sin 2  sin   1 *M1 Using a common denominator.
  
sin   1 1  sin   sin   1)(1  sin    sin   1)(1  sin  
 sin 3 1  sin    sin 2  sin   1 
 
  sin   1)(1  sin   


sin 2  sin 4
1  sin 2
DM1
 
Reaching  1  sin  in denominator.
2

SOI by  cos 2
.



sin 2 1  sin 2  DM1 Using
s in 
2
s i n 2  c o s 2  1
in numerator.
in denominator and isolating

cos 2


 tan 2  1  sin 2   A1
AG - Using/stating tan 
sin
is sufficient for A1.
cos
May be working from both sides provided the argument
is complete.
A0 if θ or brackets missing throughout, or sign errors.
Allow recovery if AG follows from their working.

Alternative method for Q4(a)

 tan  (1  sin  )  
2 2 
sin 2 1  sin 2  *M1
Using tan 
sin
and s i n 2  c o s 2  1 .
1  sin 
2 cos

sin 2  sin 4 DM1 Factorising denominator.

1  sin  )(1  sin  

sin 2  sin 3  sin 3  sin 4 sin  1  sin    sin   sin   1 DM1 Factorising numerator.
3 2

 sin   1)(1  sin    sin   1)(1  sin  

© UCLES 2022 Page 8 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(a) sin 3 sin 2 A1 AG

 A0 if θ or brackets missing throughout, or sign errors.
sin   1 1  sin 
Allow recovery if AG follows from their working.

4(b)   
 tan 2  1  sin 2   tan 2  1  sin 2   leading to  2 tan 2   0 M1 Obtaining a (trig function)2 = 0 WWW.

tan   0 leading to   π A1 Ignore extra solutions outside the interval  0, 2π  .

Alternative method for Q4(b)

sin 2 sin 2 M1 Obtaining a (trig function)2 = 0 WWW.

 (1  sin 2
 )  (1  sin 2 ) leading to
cos 
2
cos 
2

sin 2  sin 4  sin 2  sin 4 leading to  2 sin 2   0

sin   0 leading to   π A1 Ignore extra solutions outside the interval  0, 2π  .

© UCLES 2022 Page 9 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(a) 1 2  π  π 2 B1 1 2
Sector area = r    r Using r  with θ in radians SOI.
2  6   12  2
B0 if using a value for r.

π  1  π  3  B1 SOI Finding triangle area.

BD = sin r   r  and AD = cos r   r Decimals B0 unless exact values seen in working.
6  2  6  2 
1 π  π  1 1 3 
so triangle area =  sin r  cos r     r  r
2 6  6  2 2 2 
1  π  π  1 3 1
or r  cos r  sin    r  r 
2  6  6  2 2 2

1 2 3 2 B1 r2  π 3 π π
Area of BCD = πr  r OE e.g.    with cos and sin evaluated.
12 8 4 3 2  6 6
Must be exact, in terms of r 2 .
ISW

© UCLES 2022 Page 10 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(b)  3  B1 SOI by length of AD, CD or arc, or by perimeter.

 r   π
1 2  
Angle BAC = sin   
 r   3
 
 

1 M1 SOI Finding length by Pythagoras, or by trigonometry

Length AD = cos r   r 
π 1
[so length CD = r] π
3  2  2 with their angle BAC, provided BAC  .
6

π M1 π
Length of arc BC = r  SOI Using r with  in radians. Condone   .
3 6

3 1 π A1  3 1 π  π
Perimeter of BCD = r r r with e.g. cos evaluated.
 2  3 
OE e.g. r 
2 2 3   3
Must be exact, in terms of r.
ISW

© UCLES 2022 Page 11 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(a) x2  4 *M1 For clearing denominator and expanding brackets.

y
x2  4
leading to x 2
 
 4 y  x2  4  leading to x 2 y  4 y  x 2  4
If swap variables first, look for y 2 x  4 x  y 2  4 .

x 2 y  x 2  4 y  4 leading to x 2 1  y   4 y  4 leading to x 2  ... DM1 For making x 2 the subject.

If swap variables first, look for
y2 1 x  4x  4  y2 

4y  4 4y  4 4x  4 A1 4 x  4
x2  leading to x  leading to [f 1  x ]  OE e.g.
x 1
without ± in final answer.
1 y 1 y 1 x

Alternative method for Q6(a)

y2  4 8 8 *M1 For division and reaching x  1  ...  or y  1  ...

x 2
leading to x  1  2 leading to x  1  2
y 4 y 4 y 4

y2  4 
8
leading to y 2 
8
4  
DM1 For making y 2 or x 2 the subject.
x 1 x 1

8 A1 OE without ± in final answer.

 y    f 1  x    4
x 1

© UCLES 2022 Page 12 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(b) 8 x2  4 8  x2  4  8  x2  4 M1 A1 Using common denominator or division to reach 1.

1    2  Remainder 8 .
x2  4 x2  4 x2  4  x  4  x2  4
WWW

0  f  x  1 B1 B1 B1 for each correct inequality. B0 if contradictory

statement seen.
Accept f  x   0, f  x   1; 1  f  x   0;  0,1
SC B1 for 0 ⩽ f(x) ⩽ 1.

6(c) Because the range of f does not include the whole of the domain of f (or any B1 Accept an answer that includes an example outside the
of it) 12
domain of f, e.g. f(4) = . Must refer to the domain or >
20
2. Need not explicitly use the term ‘domain’ but must not
refer just to the range.

Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(a) 2 M1 1 2
1
1 1  1 x  1 M0
 3x  2 2  x  1  3x  2   x  1  x2  x  1 Equating curve and line, attempt to square;
4
2 2  4

1 M1 Forming and solving a 3TQ by factorisation, formula or

 x 2  2 x  3  0   x 2  8 x  12  0   x  6  x  2    0 completing the square – see guidance.
4

(2, 2) and (6, 4) A1 A1 A1 for each point, or A1 A0 for two correct x-values.
If M0 for solving, SC B2 possible: B1 for each point or
B1 B0 for two correct x-values.

© UCLES 2022 Page 13 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(b)  6 *M1 For intention to integrate and subtract (M0 if squared).

 1
1 
Area =    3x  2  2   x  1 [dx]

 2  2 

2 3
1 
6 B1 B1 B1 for each bracket integrated correctly (in any form).
   3x  2  2   x 2  x  
 9  4  2

2 3
1   2 3  1   DM1  ( F(their 6) – F(their 2)) with their integral.
   16  2    36  6      4  2    4  2    Allow 1 sign error.
 9 4   9 4  

4 A1 AWRT 0.444.
9 4
SC1 B1 for if *M1 B1 B1 DM0 .
9
4
SC2 B1 for if *M1 B0 B0 DM0, provided limits
9
stated.

Alternative method for question 7(b)

6 1 *M1 For intention to integrate and subtract (M0 if squared).

Area =   3x  2  2 [dx ]  area of trapezium (or triangle + rectangle)
2

2 3

6
24 2 3 6
 24  B1 B1 for bracket integrated correctly (in any form).
  3x  2 2   4   or    3x  2  2      2  4  B1 FT B1 FT for using correct formula with their values.
9 2  2  9 2  2 

 2 3
2 3  DM1 (F(their 6) – F(their 2)) using their integral.
   16  2   4  2   12  Allow 1 sign error.
 9 9  

© UCLES 2022 Page 14 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(b) 4 A1 AWRT 0.444.

9 4
SC1 B1 for if *M1 B1 B1 DM0 .
9
4
SC2 B1 for if *M1 B0 B0 DM0, provided limits
9
stated.

© UCLES 2022 Page 15 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(a)  30   60  B2,1,0 B2 for fully correct, B1 with two elements correct.
EITHER (1){Translation}   OR (2){Translation}   { } indicates different elements.
 0   0  Accept angle in radians.

(3){Stretch} {factor 2} {in x-direction} B2,1,0 B2 for fully correct, B1 with two elements correct.
{ } indicates different elements.

(4) Stretch factor 4 in y-direction and correct order B1 Stretch, y-direction and factor and correct order.
Correct order is either (1) then (3) or (3) then (2).
(4) can be anywhere in the sequence.

8(b) 1   2 M1 SOI
4sin  x  30   2 2  sin 1     45
2   2 

1 M1 SOI. The M marks are independent.

x  30  45 or 135  x  2  45  30  or x  2 135  30 
2

x = 150°, x = 330° A1 5π 11π

Both exact values, condone , .
6 6
A0 if extra solutions in the interval.
Ignore other solutions outside 0,360 .
3

© UCLES 2022 Page 16 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(a)
Express as  x 32   y 12  26  9 1  36 M1 Completing the square on x and y or using the form
x2  y2 2gx 2fy c 0, centre  g,f  and radius

g2  f 2  c .
SOI by correct answer.

Centre (−3, 1) B1

Radius 6 B1

So lowest point is (−3, −5) A1 FT FT on their centre and their radius.

9(b) Intersects when x 2   kx  5  6 x  2  kx  5  26  0

2 *M1 Substituting y  kx  5 into their circle equation or
rearranging and equating y.
or  x  3   kx  5  1  36
2 2

x 2  k 2 x 2  10kx  25  6 x  2kx  10  26  0 DM1 Rearranging to 3-term quadratic (terms grouped, all on

one side). Allow 1 error.
or x 2  6 x  9  k 2 x 2  12kx  36  36
A1 Correct quadratic (need to see 9 as constant term).
 
leading to k 2 x 2  x 2  6 x  12kx  9   0 or k 2  1 x 2   6  12k  x  9   0

 6 12k 
2
 
 4 k 2  1  9 [ 0] DM1 Using discriminant b 2  4ac   0 with their values.
Allow if in square root.
 leading to 144k 2  144k  36  36k 2  36  0 
 

4 A1 Need not see method for solving.

[108k2 – 144k = 0 leading to] k = 0 or k =
3

4 A1 4
k  0, k  Do not accept  k  0.
3 3

© UCLES 2022 Page 17 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(a) d2 y 4 d2 y B1 d2 y
 6  1 
2
 0 minimum or  10  minimum Sub x  1 into , correct conclusion. WWW
dx 2
 1 3
dx 2 dx 2

10(b) dy 2 *M1 d2 y
 2 x3  2  c  Integrating (at least one term correct).
dx x dx 2

0 = −2 + 2 + c leading to c = [0] DM1 dy

Substituting x  1,  0 (need to see) to evaluate c.
dx
DM0 if simply state c  0 or omit c.

1 4 2 A1 FT Integrated. FT their non-zero value of c if DM1

y x    their c  x  k awarded.
2 x

9 1 DM1 9
  2  k leading to k = [2] Substituting x = –1, y = to evaluate k (dep on *M1).
2 2 2

1 2 A1 4
y  x4   2 OE e.g. 2 x 1 . or
2 x 2
A0 (wrong process) if c not evaluated but correct answer
obtained.

10(c) dy 2 M1 dy
 2 x3  2  0 Their  0.
dx x dx

Leading to x 5  1 M1 Reaching equation of the form x5  a .

So only stationary point is when x = −1 A1 x  1 and stating e.g. ‘only’ or ‘no other solutions.

© UCLES 2022 Page 18 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(d) dy *M1 dy
At x = 1,   4 Substituting x  1 into their .
dx dx

dx dx dy 1 DM1 OE Using chain rule correctly SOI.

   5
dt dy dt 4

5 A1 OE e.g. 1.25.
4

© UCLES 2022 Page 19 of 19

Cambridge International AS & A Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/12
Paper 1 Pure Mathematics 1 May/June 2022
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2022 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some
Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 21 printed pages.

© UCLES 2022 [Turn over

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the specific content of the
mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:
 the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
 the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
 the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:
 marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the scope of the
syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
 marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
 marks are not deducted for errors
 marks are not deducted for omissions
 answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the question as
indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may be limited
according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in
mind.

© UCLES 2022 Page 2 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Mathematics Specific Marking Principles

1 Unless a particular method has been specified in the question, full marks may be awarded for any correct method. However, if a calculation is required then
no marks will be awarded for a scale drawing.

2 Unless specified in the question, answers may be given as fractions, decimals or in standard form. Ignore superfluous zeros, provided that the degree of
accuracy is not affected.

3 Allow alternative conventions for notation if used consistently throughout the paper, e.g. commas being used as decimal points.

4 Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored (isw).

5 Where a candidate has misread a number in the question and used that value consistently throughout, provided that number does not alter the difficulty or
the method required, award all marks earned and deduct just 1 mark for the misread.

6 Recovery within working is allowed, e.g. a notation error in the working where the following line of working makes the candidate’s intent clear.

© UCLES 2022 Page 3 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons
outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea
must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula
without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more ‘method’ steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise;
and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on
an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full
credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are
given for correct work only.

 A or B marks are given for correct work only (not for results obtained from incorrect working) unless follow through is allowed (see abbreviation FT above).
 For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if the answer is correct to 3 significant figures or would be correct to 3 significant figures if rounded (1
decimal place for angles in degrees).
 The total number of marks available for each question is shown at the bottom of the Marks column.
 Wrong or missing units in an answer should not result in loss of marks unless the guidance indicates otherwise.
 Square brackets [ ] around text or numbers show extra information not needed for the mark to be awarded.

© UCLES 2022 Page 4 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Abbreviations

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no ‘follow through’ from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen Or Implied

SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the
light of a particular circumstance)

WWW Without Wrong Working

AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2022 Page 5 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 Coefficient of x 4  15 B1 Condone inclusion of x4 . Can be seen as part of an expansion.

Coefficient of x2  240a 2 B1 Condone inclusion of x 2 . Can be seen as part of an expansion.

‘Their 240’a2 – ‘their 15’ M1 Forming an equation of the form pa2 = q, where p and q are
constants. Condone inclusion of powers of x as long as they then
disappear.

1 A1 OE
a= or 0.25
4 1 1
Do not condone extra ‘answer’ of  ,or allow or similar.
4 16

Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 r = 0.8 B1 OE

a = 12.5 B1 OE

S  12.5  1  0.8  M1 a
Using with ‘their a’ and ‘their r’ but r must be  1 .
1 r

125 1 A1 1
S  , 62 or 62.5 12
2 2 2 or similar does not get A1.
1
5

© UCLES 2022 Page 6 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3  3    B1 B1 Marks can be awarded for correct unsimplified expressions ISW.

 3(4 x  7) 2   4 12   1 3 1

  3
y   
  1 x  (4 x  7) 2  8x 2
  c 
 4    
 2 
 2   2 

5 1 3
1 M1 5
  9  2  8  4 2  c [⇒c = 5] Using (4, ) in an integrated expression (defined by at least one
2 2 2
correct power) including + c.

3 3 1 A1 Condone c = 5 as their final line if either y = or f(x) = seen

y  4 x  7  2  8x 2  5 . elsewhere in the solution. Coefficients must not contain
6
unresolved double fractions.

Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(a) 2  6k  k  k  6 or 6k  k  k  6  6k B1 OE
or 2d = 6 leading to d = 3, ⸫ 6k – 3 = k A correct equation in k only. Can be implied by correct final
answer.

6 B1 OE
k or 0.6
10

© UCLES 2022 Page 7 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(b) d=3 B1 Correct value of d can be implied by a correct final answer.

Working may be seen in part (a) but must be used in (b).

30 M1 It needs to be clear that the candidate is using a correct sum

S30   2  ‘their k’  29  ‘their d’ formula. There is no requirement to check the candidates working
2
for d but it must be clearly identified.

S30 = 1323 A1 ISW if corrected to 1320.

© UCLES 2022 Page 8 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(a) 1 M1 Equating the equations of curve and line and substituting x  0 .

4  02  0  k 2  0  a Condone slight errors e.g. ± sign errors.
2

3 3
2
1 3 M1 3
4   k  k2   a Equating the equations of curve and line and substituting x  .
4 4 2 4 4
Condone slight errors e.g. ± sign errors.

k = 2, a   2 A1 A1 WWW

Alternative method for question 5(a)

*M1 3
 x  0   x 
3
  0 or x  4 x  3  0 [⟹ 4 x  3 x  0]
2
Use 0, to form a quadratic equation. Do not allow
 4 4
 x  0  x    0 .
3
 4

1 1 DM1 Equating the equations of curve and line and rearranging so that
4 x 2  kx  k 2  x  a leading to 4 x 2   k  1 x  k 2  a   0 terms are all on same side. Condone slight errors e.g. ± sign errors.
2 2

k = 2, a   2 A1 A1 WWW

Alternative method for question 5(a)

b 3 c 3 *M1 Using sum and product of roots. Condone ± sign errors.

   0 and  0 
a 4 a 4

1 2 DM1 3
k 1 3 k a Equating the equations of curve and line and equating to and 0.
 and 2 0 4
4 4 4

k = 2, a   2 A1 A1 WWW

© UCLES 2022 Page 9 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(b) 1 7 1 7 *M1 7
4 x 2  kx  k 2  x   4 x 2  kx  x  k 2    0 OE Substitute a   and rearrange so that terms are all on same
2 2 2 2 2
side, condone ± sign errors. Watch for multiples.

*DM1 Use of b2 – 4ac with the coefficients from their 3-term quadratic.
 k  1  4  4  k 2  
2 1 7
Both coefficients ‘b’ and ‘c’ must consist of two components.
2 2

 7 k 2  2k  57 A1 OE

 k  3 7 k  19  or other valid method DM1 Factorising or use of the formula or completing the square. Must
be evidence of an attempt to solve for this mark.
Dependent upon both previous method marks.

19 A1 OE e.g. AWRT  2.71. No ISW if inequalities used.

k = 3, k =  SC: If second DM1 not scored, SC B1 available for correct final
7
answers.

Alternative method for question 5(b)

1 7 *M1 Equating gradients and equating line and curve.

8 x  k  1 and 4 x 2  kx  k 2  x 
2 2

1 7 *DM1 Forming an equation in x or k only.

4 x 2   8 x  1 x  (8 x  1)2  x  or
2 2
k 1 2  k 1 1 2 k 1 7
4( ) k  k  
8  8  2 8 2

28 x 2  8 x  3 or 7 k 2  2k  57 A1 OE A correct 3 term quadratic in x or k only.

14 x  3 2 x  1 or  k  3 7 k  19  or other valid method DM1 OE Factorising or use of the formula or completing the square.
Must be evidence of an attempt to solve for this mark. Dependent
upon both previous method marks.

© UCLES 2022 Page 10 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(b) 19 A1 OE e.g. AWRT  2.71. No ISW if inequalities used.

k = 3, k =  SC: If second DM1 not scored, SC B1 available for correct final
7
answers.

Question Answer Marks Guidance

6 Line meets curve when: M1 Equating line and curve and rearranging so that terms are all on
1 1 same side, condone sign errors, and making a valid attempt to
2x  2  5x 2 leading to 2 x — 5x 2 2   0  solve by factorising, using the formula or completing the square.
1 1
or 4 x  8 x  4  25 x leading to 4 x 2  17 x  4   0 
2
Factors are:(2 x 2 -1)( x 2 -2), (4x-1)(x-4) and (2y-5)(y-10).
y2
or x  leading to 2 y 2  25 y  50   0 
25

1 A1 SC: If M1 not scored, SC B1 available for correct answers, could

x ,x  4 just be seen as limits.
4

1 1 *M1 Intention to integrate and subtract areas. Condone missing brackets

Area =  5x 2  (2 x  2) dx =  5x 2  2 x  2 dx and/or subtraction wrong way around.

10 3 
4 DM1 3
 10 10 1 1 1 
  x 2  x 2  2 x  =    8  16  8         Integrating( kx 2 seen) and substituting ‘their points of
 3  1   3   3 8 16 2   intersection’ (but limits need to be found, not assumed to be 0 and
4 something else).

45 13 A1 OE exact answer.
or 2 or 2.8125 45 45
16 16 Condone  if corrected to . A0 for inclusion of π.
16 16
SC: If *M1 DM0 scored, SC B1 available for correct answer.

© UCLES 2022 Page 11 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6 Alternative method for question 6

1 1 M1 Equating line and curve and rearranging so that terms are all on
Line meets curve when: 2 x  2  5 x 2 ⇒ 2 x — 5 x 2 2   0  same side, condone sign errors, and making a valid attempt to
or 4 x 2  8 x  4  25 x ⇒ 4 x 2  17 x  4   0  solve by factorising, using the formula or completing the square.
1 1
2
y Factors are:(2 x2 -1)( x2 -2), (4x-1)(x-4) and (2y-5)(y-10).
or x  ⇒ 2 y 2  25 y  50   0 
25

1 A1 SC: If M1 not scored, SC B1 available for correct answers, could

x ,x  4 just be seen as limits.
4

1 *M1 Intention to integrate and subtract areas. Or integrate curve and

Area =  5 x 2 dx 
 { (2 x  2)dx or area of trapezium} subtract area of trapezium.

4
10 3   2 DM1 3
4 1 15 
 x 2     x  2 x  1 or  sum of ‘their y values’ ‘their ’ Integrating ( kx 2 seen) and substituting ‘their points of
 3  1  4 2 4  intersection’ (but limits need to be found, not assumed to be 0 and
4
15
  10   10 1     1 1  1  5  15  something) or a trapezium using the correct formula (‘their ’
    8         16  8       or   10   4
 3   3 8     16 2   2  2 4 1
must be ‘their 4’ – ‘their ’ but not 0).
4

45 13 A1 OE exact answer.
or 2 or 2.8125
16 16 45 45
Condone  if corrected to . A0 for inclusion of π.
16 16
SC: If *M1 DM0 scored, SC B1 available for correct answer.

© UCLES 2022 Page 12 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(a) ˆ  2 B1 OE
 AOB
  10 Sight of 0.2 from s  r but 10   2 is not enough.
2 π
ISW if  .
10 5

5π  6 1 B1 OE e.g. 0.724c AWRT or 41.5 degrees AWRT.

[B Ô C ] or π  0.2
30 6 5π
2
But not 3 – fraction within a fraction.
10
ISW incorrect simplifications.

Alternative method for question 7(a)

10π 10π B1 10π

OR [Arc AC =] or  Arc BC   2 or 7.2 AWRT. Sight of or 5.2 or 7.2.
6 6 6

5π  6 1 B1 OE e.g. 0.724c AWRT or 41.5 degrees AWRT.

[B Ô C ] or π  0.2
30 6 5π
2
But not 3 – fraction within a fraction.
10
ISW incorrect simplifications.

© UCLES 2022 Page 13 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(b)  5π  6   5π  6  M1 OE
[BP] = 10sin   and [OP ] = 10cos   Any correct method for both lengths, for their angle BOC (which
 30   30 
may have been incorrectly ‘simplified’ but not 0.2) or length BP
[= 6.6208…] and [= 7.494…]
1
and O B̂ P. May be seen as part of ab sin C .
OR 2
Sight of correct method enough. Can be implied by the next A1.
 5π  6   5π  3 
[BP] = 10sin   and [O B̂ P] =  
 30   15 
[= 6.6208…] and [= 0.84719…]

1  5π  6   5π  6  A1 OE Can be implied by any answer in range (24.7, 24.9) or a final

Area of ∆OBP =  10sin   10cos   or answer in the range (11.3, 11.5) WWW.
2  30   30 
1  5π  6    5π  3  
 10  10sin    sin   
2  30    15  
[=24.809]

1  5π  6  M1 1 2
[Sector BOC] =  102  their   Use of r  with their angle BOC (may have been incorrectly
2  30  2
‘simplified’ but not 0.2).
  5π  6  
  50  30   36.1799...
   

Area of region BPC = 11.4 A1 CAO

© UCLES 2022 Page 14 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(a) 1  1  a  b  12  0  a  b  10 B1 B1 B1 for each equation. Allow unsimplified. Can be implied by

correct values for a and b.
4  36  2a  6b  12  0  2a  6b  28

a  4, b  6 B1

 their a their b  B1 FT Or x  2, y  3

Centre is   ,   2, 3
 2 2 

© UCLES 2022 Page 15 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(b) 1  their y 1  3 1  3 4 *M1 Using their centre correctly.

Gradient of AC is [   ]
1  their x 1  2 1  2 3

1  3 A1 FT Use of m1m2  1 to obtain the gradient of the tangent.

Gradient of tangent is   
4  4
their
3

3 3 7 DM1 Using 1,1 with their gradient of the tangent at A.

Equation: y  1  ‘their  ’  x  1 or y   x 
4 4 4

3 x  4 y  7 or 4 y  3 x  7 . or integer multiples of these A1

Alternative method for question 8(b)

dy dy *M1 Implicit differentiation with at least one y term differentiated

2x  2 y 46 0 correctly.
dx dx

dy dy 6 A1
8  6   
dx dx 8

3 3 7 DM1 Using 1,1 with their gradient of the tangent at A.

Equation: y  1  ‘their  ’  x  1 or y   x 
4 4 4

3 x  4 y  7 or 4 y  3 x  7 . or integer multiples of these A1

Alternative method for question 8(b)

dy 1 
1 *M1 Rearranging to form y  and differentiating using the chain rule.
 {25  ( x  2)2 } 2  2 x  4 
dx 2

dy 1 
1
6 A1
 (25  9) 2  6   
dx 2 8

© UCLES 2022 Page 16 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(b) 3 3 7 DM1 Using 1,1 with their gradient of the tangent at A.

Equation: y  1  ‘their  ’  x  1 or y   x 
4 4 4

3 x  4 y  7 or 4 y  3 x  7 . or integer multiples of these A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(a) dy  1 
1
   
1 B1 B1 Correct differentiation of 3 x  1 and no other terms and correct
 3  4  (3x  1)  3   3  6(3x  1) 2 
2 1
dx  2    differentiation of 4  3x  1 2 . Accept unsimplified.

 d2 y  1 3 3 B1 dy
    6  3x  1 2  3 [ 9  3x  1 2 ]
 
 2 WWW. Accept unsimplified. Do not award if is incorrect.
dx
 dx  2

9(b) dy 1 M1 dy
 0 leading to 3  6  3x  1 2  0

Setting their = 0.
dx dx

1 A1 CAO – do not ISW for a second answer.

 3x  1 2  2  3x  1  4 leading to x  1

y = −4 [coordinates (1, −4)] A1 Condone inclusion of second value from a second answer.

d2 y 3
9 A1 d2 y
 

2
 9 3  1  1 2 = or > 0 so minimum Some evidence of substitution needed but . Do not award if
dx 8 dx 2
d2 y
is incorrect or wrongly evaluated. Accept correct
dx 2
consideration of gradients either side of x  1 .

4
© UCLES 2022 Page 17 of 21
9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(a) x  1 or x  1, x  1 or  ,1 , 1,    x

   B1 Must be x not f 1  x  or y. Do not accept 1  x  1 .

10(b) 2x  1 *M1 Setting y = , removing fraction and expanding brackets.

y leading to  2 x  1 y  2 x  1 leading to 2 xy  y  2 x  1
2x 1

2 xy  2 x  y  1 leading to 2 x  y  1  y  1 DM1 Reorganising to get x =. Condone ± sign errors only.

y 1
leading to x 
2  y  1

x 1 x 1 1 1 1 A1 x 1
[f 1  x ]  ,  or  OE. Must be in terms of x. Do not allow  2.
2  x  1 x  1 2 x 1 2 x 1

10(c)
 their f  3    M1 Correct order of operations and substitution of x = 3 needed.
2
1
leading to their f 1  3  4  f 1  3  1,1  4 
 

5 A1

10(d) Sight of ‘not one to one’ or ‘many to one’ or ‘one to many’ B1 Any reason mentioning 2 values, or + and — , such as: square root
gives 2 values or horizontal line test crosses curve twice or
2 values because of turning point or 2 values because it is a
quadratic.

© UCLES 2022 Page 18 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(e) 2 2x 1 2 2x  1 B1 AG
f  x  1   + = Do not condone equating expressions and verification.
2x 1 2x 1 2x 1 2x  1

f   x   4  2 x  1 *M1 For k  2 x  12 and no other terms or correct use of the product or
2

 2 x  1 2  2  2 x  1
  or
quotient rule then ISW.
or 2  2 x  1 +   2 x  1 2  2 x  1
1 2

(2 x  1) 2

Gradient m = −4 A1 Differentiation must have clearly taken place.

Equation of tangent is y  3  4  x  1   y  4 x  7  DM1 Using (1, 3) in the equation of a line with their gradient.

7  A1 FT SOI from their straight line or by integration from 0 to ‘their 7/4’.

Crosses axes at  ,0  and  0, 7 
4 

49 A1 OE e.g. 6.13 AWRT.

[Area =] If M0 A0 DM0, SC B2 available for correct answer.
8

© UCLES 2022 Page 19 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(a)   
4cos 4 x  cos 2 x  3  0  4 cos 2 x  3 cos 2 x  1  0 M1 Attempt to solve 3 term quartic (or quadratic in another variable).

3 A1 3
 cos2 x    cos 2 x  1 If M0 scored then SC B1 is available for sight of [and 1].
4   4

3  3 M1 Square rooting ‘their cos 2 x ’. Allow without ±. May be implied

 cosx     their OE    
4  2  by correct final answer(s). Ignore 1 .

π 5π 7π 11π A1 Dependent on preceding M1 only. Exact answers needed.

[x =] , , , A1 for any 2 correct answers A1 A1 for 4 correct answers and no
6 6 6 6
A1 FT others inside the range 0 ⩽ x ⩽ 2 A0 A1 FT can be awarded for
 5
two exact answers that are 2  ‘their and ’ within the range
6 6
0 ⩽ x ⩽ 2.

SC: If all 4 answers given in degrees (30, 150, 210, 330) or non-
exact (AWRT 0.524, 2.62, 3.67, 5.76 or 0.167, 0.833, 1.17,
1.83) and no others then SC B1.

© UCLES 2022 Page 20 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(b) 1  1  16k B1 State that this root is less than 0, needs to be linked to cos 2 x .
cos2x = < 0 [⸫ no solutions].
8 Can be achieved by substituting a value for k ⩾ 0.

1  1  16k *M1 Must use quadratic formula. Allow any value of k but not ±3.
[cos2x] = Condone + rather than ±.
8

Substituting k  5 and obtain 1 from the formula DM1 Or argue logically if k > 5 ⇒ 1  16 k  81 ⇒ >1.

cos2 x = 1 or cos2 x > or ⩾ 1 A1 Needs to be linked to cos2 x.

Concluding statement having considered both ± cases. ⸫ no A1 Dependent upon all previous marks having been scored.
solutions

Alternative method for question 11(b)

1  1  16k B1 State that this root is less than 0, needs to be linked to cos 2 x .
cos2x = < 0 [⸫ no solutions].
8 Can be achieved by substituting a value for k ⩾ 0.

1  1  16k *M1 Must use quadratic formula. Allow any value of k but not ±3.
[cos2x] = Condone + rather than ±.
8

1  1  16k DM1 ∗ represents any inequality or =.

*1 ⇒ 1  1  16k * 8 ⇒ 1  16 k * 81
8

k *5 A1 ∗ represents any inequality or =.

Concluding statement having considered both ± cases. ⸫ no A1 Dependent upon all previous marks having been scored.
solutions

© UCLES 2022 Page 21 of 21

Cambridge International AS & A Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/13
Paper 1 Pure Mathematics 1 May/June 2022
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2022 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some
Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 14 printed pages.

© UCLES 2022 [Turn over

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the specific content of the
mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:
 the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
 the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
 the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:
 marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the scope of the
syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
 marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
 marks are not deducted for errors
 marks are not deducted for omissions
 answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the question as
indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may be limited
according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in
mind.

© UCLES 2022 Page 2 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Mathematics Specific Marking Principles

1 Unless a particular method has been specified in the question, full marks may be awarded for any correct method. However, if a calculation is required then
no marks will be awarded for a scale drawing.

2 Unless specified in the question, answers may be given as fractions, decimals or in standard form. Ignore superfluous zeros, provided that the degree of
accuracy is not affected.

3 Allow alternative conventions for notation if used consistently throughout the paper, e.g. commas being used as decimal points.

4 Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored (isw).

5 Where a candidate has misread a number in the question and used that value consistently throughout, provided that number does not alter the difficulty or
the method required, award all marks earned and deduct just 1 mark for the misread.

6 Recovery within working is allowed, e.g. a notation error in the working where the following line of working makes the candidate’s intent clear.

© UCLES 2022 Page 3 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons
outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea
must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula
without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more ‘method’ steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise;
and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on
an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full
credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are
given for correct work only.

 A or B marks are given for correct work only (not for results obtained from incorrect working) unless follow through is allowed (see abbreviation FT above).
 For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if the answer is correct to 3 significant figures or would be correct to 3 significant figures if rounded (1
decimal place for angles in degrees).
 The total number of marks available for each question is shown at the bottom of the Marks column.
 Wrong or missing units in an answer should not result in loss of marks unless the guidance indicates otherwise.
 Square brackets [ ] around text or numbers show extra information not needed for the mark to be awarded.

© UCLES 2022 Page 4 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Abbreviations

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no ‘follow through’ from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen Or Implied

SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the
light of a particular circumstance)

WWW Without Wrong Working

AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2022 Page 5 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 1 3 B1 OE
4C1 p  x soi Can be seen in an expansion.
p3

4 B1 OE
 144 Correct with correct power of p and only one p term.
p2

1 B1 B1 2
p OE ± etc. Allow ±0.167 for B1 B1.
6 12
1
SC B1 for  B1 only,
36

Question Answer Marks Guidance

2(a) [p =] 3 B1

2(b) 1 B1
[q =]
2

2(c) [r =] ‒2 B1

© UCLES 2022 Page 6 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(a) n B1 Must show a useful intermediate step.

8   n  1 d   5863 leading to n 8   n  1 d   11726
2 WWW AG.
11726
leading to  n  1 d  8
n

3(b) 11726 *M1 OE Use of correct un formula with expression from (a) or
4   n  1 d  139 leading to  8  135 Sn formula to eliminate d.
n

11726 A1
n= = 82
143

11726 DM1 Substitute their n into a correct un or Sn formula

81d  8
82

5 A1 138
d Accept OE fraction only
3 81
If M0 DM0 scored them SC B1 B1 for correct n and d
values only.

Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(a)
 x  1 2

 2  x  1  5  3 , or  x  1  1   6  3
2 M1 M1  1
M1 for dealing with   and M1 for dealing with
0
 .
0  3

 y  x2  4 x  1 A1 Answer only given full marks.

© UCLES 2022 Page 7 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(b) {Stretch}{x direction or horizontally or y-axis invariant}{ factor ½} B2, 1, 0 Additional transformation B0.

Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(a) 6 y  2  7 y1/2 [= 0] *M1 OE Rearrange to a 3-term quadratic.

 1  1  DM1 Or use of formula or completing the square.

 2 y 2  1 3 y 2  2  [= 0] or e.g.  2u  1 3u  2  [= 0]
 
  

1 2 A1 Answers only SC B1 if DM1 not scored.

[ y1/2 ] ,
2 3

1 4 A1 Answers only SC B1 if DM1 not scored.

 y  ,
4 9

5(b) Use of tan x = their y values M1 Must have at least 2 values of y from part (a).

x  14[.0], 24[.0], A1 FT for 180 + angle (twice).

x  194[.0], 204[.0] A1 FT AWRT

© UCLES 2022 Page 8 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(a)
 2  x  4 
2
9 B1 B1 OE When a and b stated give priority to marking
algebraic expression.

6(b) y  7 B1 Allow f(x) > –7 or (–7, ) Don’t allow x > –7.

6(c) y9 M1 2 operations correct. Allow a sign error.

 x  4 2 
2

y9 M1 2 operations correct. Allow a sign error.

x  4 
2

x9 A1 FT  x b
[f 1  x  ] 4  OE FT on their answer to (a) i.e. – a   .
2  2 

6(d) fg(x) = f(2x + 4) = 2  2 x  4  4   9 M1 Allow 2  2 x  4 2  16  2 x  4   23 .

2

8 x 2  9 only A1

© UCLES 2022 Page 9 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(a) Equation of BC is  y 23 x B2, 1, 0 OE forms y  4  3  x  2  or y  2  3  x  0  .

7(b)  x  2   2  3x  4   20 *M1 OE
2 2

Sub line equation into equation of circle to eliminate y.

10(x – 2)2 = 20 or [10](x2 – 4x + 2)[= 0] A1 OE Accept (10x2 – 40x + 20).

4    16  8 DM1 Correctly solving their quadratic.

x  2     2 or x 
2

x 2 2 A1 OE only solution. Answer only SC B1 If DM1 not scored.

y 3 2 4 A1 OE only solution. Answer only SC B1 If DM1 not scored.

Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(a)  dy  B1 B1 Allow unsimplified versions.

 dx   ½ x 1/2  2 x 3/2
 

dy 1 3 M1 Substitute x = 1 into a differentiated y.

At x = 1,   2 
dx 2 2

3 A1 3 13
Equation of tangent is y  5    x  1 WWW Or y   x  .
2 2 2

© UCLES 2022 Page 10 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(b) x 3/ 2 B1 OE Integrate to find area under curve, allow unsimplified

 8 x1/ 2 versions.
3/ 2

 128  2  M1 Apply limits 1 → 16 to an integrated expression.

 3  32    3  8  
   

Area under line = 15  5 = 75 B1 16


Or by 5dx .
1

Required area = 75 ‒ 66 = 9 A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(a) AC M1 OE Correct working in degrees is acceptable throughout.

6sin 0.9  or AC 2  62  6 2  2  6  6cos1.8
2

AC = 9.40 A1 SOI
Accept 9.39 – 9.41, may be used but not seen for A1.

Angle CAB = ½(π ‒ 1.8) M1 SOI

Expect 0.6708 (or 0.671).

Arc CD = their 9.40  their 0.6708 M1 Expect 6.306 (or 6.31), do not accept 6 for their AC or 1.8
for CAB.

[Perimeter = 6 + 3.40 + 6.306 =] 15.7 A1 Accept 15.69 – 15.72.

© UCLES 2022 Page 11 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(b) Sector ADC ‒ ABC = ½  their 9.402  their 0.6708 – ½  62  sin 1.8 M1 M1 Accept correct use of their answers from part (a).

[29.64 ‒ 17.53 =] 12.1 A1 AWRT

Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(a)   4 x  2 1  B1 B1 OE If more than one function of x present then B0 B0.


1
1
16 

4 or eg     x  0.5  
1
or
1
16 x  8
 

0  (1 / 24) M1 Apply limits to an integral, ∞ must be used correctly.

1/24 A1 Allow 0.0417 AWRT.

10(b) dy
dx

 2  4 x  2 
3
 4
B1 B1 Allow unsimplified forms.

dy B1 SOI
Recognise = ‒1
dx

8 M1 Must be numerical.
their  their  1
dy
 4x  23
Must be some attempt to solve their equation and 0.
dx

(0, ¼) A1 A1 Accept x = 0, y = ¼. y = ¼ must be from x = 0 not x = –1.

© UCLES 2022 Page 12 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(a) m M1 All x terms in the numerator. OE e.g. mx 2  cx   m .

mx  c    mx 2  cx  m  0
x

b 2  4ac  0  c 2  4m 2  0 M1 OE b2 – 4ac = 0 is implied by c2 – 4m2 = 0.

c     2m A1 SOI. Allow  at this stage.

mx 2 [  ] 2mx  m  0  x 2    2 x  1  0 M1 Sub c = +2m Ignore substitution of -2m.

 x  1 A1
2
 0  x  1 only

y  m only or (‒1, m) only A1

Alternative method to question 11(a)

dy m M1 As this is a method mark a sign error is allowed.


dx x 2

m M1 A1 dy
2
 m  x2  1 Equating their and m and attempt to solve.
x dx

x = ±1 or x  1 A1 If x  1 and y  m are the only answers offered here

award the final M1 A1.

Selecting x = –1 as the only answer and attempt to find y M1

y  m or (‒1, m) A1

© UCLES 2022 Page 13 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(b) 1 *M1 1
Equation of normal is y  m   x  1 Through their P with gradient , OE
m m
1 m2  1
e.g. y  x .
m m
1
Allow use of the gradient of the curve as  with
 m 
  their x 2 
their P.
Coordinates of P must be in terms of m only.

x 1 m DM1 OE Equating their normal equation to the equation of the

 m
m m x
  
x 2  x 1  m 2  m 2   0 curve and removing x from the denominator.

 x  1  x  m 2    0  x  m2 A1 or

x
2 2
m 2  1  1  2m 2  m 4  4m 2 m  1  m  1


 m2

2 2

m 1 A1  1 
y  or  m2 ,  , ignore the coordinates of P.
m2 m  m

© UCLES 2022 Page 14 of 14

Cambridge International AS & A Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/12
Paper 1 Pure Mathematics 1 February/March 2022
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the February/March 2022 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 15 printed pages.

© UCLES 2022 [Turn over

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the specific content of the
mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the scope of the
syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the question as
indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may be limited
according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in
mind.

© UCLES 2022 Page 2 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
Mathematics Specific Marking Principles

1 Unless a particular method has been specified in the question, full marks may be awarded for any correct method. However, if a calculation is required
then no marks will be awarded for a scale drawing.

2 Unless specified in the question, answers may be given as fractions, decimals or in standard form. Ignore superfluous zeros, provided that the degree of
accuracy is not affected.

3 Allow alternative conventions for notation if used consistently throughout the paper, e.g. commas being used as decimal points.

4 Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored (isw).

5 Where a candidate has misread a number in the question and used that value consistently throughout, provided that number does not alter the difficulty or
the method required, award all marks earned and deduct just 1 mark for the misread.

6 Recovery within working is allowed, e.g. a notation error in the working where the following line of working makes the candidate’s intent clear.

© UCLES 2022 Page 3 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons
outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea
must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula
without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more ‘method’ steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise;
and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on
an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full
credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are
given for correct work only.

• A or B marks are given for correct work only (not for results obtained from incorrect working) unless follow through is allowed (see abbreviation FT above).
• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if the answer is correct to 3 significant figures or would be correct to 3 significant figures if rounded (1
decimal place for angles in degrees).
• The total number of marks available for each question is shown at the bottom of the Marks column.
• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not result in loss of marks unless the guidance indicates otherwise.
• Square brackets [ ] around text or numbers show extra information not needed for the mark to be awarded.

© UCLES 2022 Page 4 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
Abbreviations

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no ‘follow through’ from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen Or Implied

SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the
light of a particular circumstance)

WWW Without Wrong Working

AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2022 Page 5 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 2 4 B1 B1 2 4
2x 3 x 3 and may be seen as sums of 1 and a fraction.
f ( x ) =
2
−
4
[ +c ] 3 3

3 3

5 = 12 ‒ 12 + c M1 Substituting (8,5) into an integral.

2 4 A1 Fractions in the denominators scores A0.

 f ( x ) = 3 x 3 − 34 x 3 + 5

Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 x 2 + 2cx + 4 = 4 x + c leading to x 2 + 2cx − 4 x + 4 − c [ = 0 ] *M1 Equate ys and move terms to one side of equation.

b 2 − 4 ac = ( 2c − 4 ) − 4 ( 4 − c )
2 DM1 Use of discriminant with their correct coefficients.

 4c 2 − 16c + 16 − 16 + 4c =  4c 2 − 12c A1
 

b 2 − 4ac > 0 leading to ( 4 ) c ( c − 3) > 0 M1 Correctly apply ‘> 0’ considering both regions.

c < 0, c > 3 A1 Must be in terms of c.

SC B1 instead of M1A1 for c ⩽ 0, c ⩾ 3

© UCLES 2022 Page 6 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(a)  2 
2 B1 Can be seen within an expansion.
C2 × ( 3x )  2 
6 4

x 

15 × 34 × 22 B1 Identified. Powers must be correct.

4860 B1 Without any power of x

3(b) Their 4860 and one other relevant term M1 Using their 4860 and an attempt to find a term in x‒3

3
2 
3 A1 Must be identified.
Other term = 6C 3 ( 3 x )  2  or 6C 3 × 33 × 23 or 4320 If M0 scored then SC B1 for 4320 as the only answer.
x 

[4860 ‒ 4320 =] 540 A1

© UCLES 2022 Page 7 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4 ar 2 = a + d B1

ar 4 = a + 5d B1

a 2 r 4 = a ( a + 5d ) leading to a 2 + 5ad = ( a + d )
2 *M1 Eliminating r or complete elimination of a and d.

3ad − d 2 = 0 leading to  d = 3a OR [ r = 2 leading to ] d = 3a A1

 

20 DM1 Use of formula with their d in terms of a.

S20 = [ 2a + 19 × 3a ]
2

590a A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(a) 2[{ ( x − 2 ) } {+3}]

2 B1 B1 B1 for a = 2, B1 for b = 3.
2 ( x − 2 ) +6 gains B1B0
2

5(b)  {2}  B2,1,0 B2 for fully correct, B1 with two elements correct. {}
{Translation}   OR {Stretch} {y direction} {factor 2} indicates different elements.
 {3} 

 {2}  B2,1,0 B2 for fully correct, B1 with two elements correct. {}

{Stretch} {y direction} {factor 2} OR {Translation}   indicates different elements.
 {6} 

© UCLES 2022 Page 8 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(a) ( x + 1)2 + ( 3 x − 22 )2 = 85 M1 OE. Substitute equation of line into equation of circle.

10 x 2 − 130 x + 400 [ = 0 ] A1 Correct 3-term quadratic

[10] ( x − 8)( x − 5) leading to x = 8 or 5 A1 Dependent on factors or formula or completing of square

seen.

(8, 4), (5, ‒5) A1 If M1A1A0A0 scored, then SC B1 for correct final answer
only.

6(b) Mid-point of AB = (6 12 ,- 12 ) M1 Any valid method

Use of C = (‒1, 2) B1 SOI

r 2 = ( −1 − 6 12 ) + ( 2 + 12 )
2 2 M1 Attempt to find r2. Expect r 2 = 62 1 .
2

Equation of circle is ( x + 1) + ( y − 2 ) = 62 12
2 2 A1 OE.

© UCLES 2022 Page 9 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(a) ( sin θ + 2cosθ )( cosθ + 2sin θ ) − ( sin θ − 2cosθ )( cosθ − 2sin θ ) *M1 Obtain an expression with a common denominator
( cosθ − 2sin θ )( cosθ + 2sin θ )

(
5sin θ cosθ + 2cos 2 θ + 2sin 2 θ − 5sin θ cos θ − 2sin 2 θ − 2cos 2 θ ) A1

cos 2 θ − 4sin 2 θ

=
(
4 cos 2 θ + sin 2 θ )
2 2
cos θ − 4sin θ

4 DM1 Use cos 2 θ + sin 2 θ = 1 twice

(
cos 2 θ − 4 1 − cos 2 θ )
4 A1 AG
2
5cos θ − 4

7(b) 4 M1 Make cos θ the subject

2
= 5 leading to 25cos 2 θ = 24
5cos θ − 4
24
leading to cosθ = = ( ± ) 0.9798
25 

θ = 11.5° or 168.5° A1
A1 FT FT on 180º ‒ 1st solution

© UCLES 2022 Page 10 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(a) ( −2 ) 2 + y 2 = 8 leading to y = 2 leading to A = ( 0, 2 ) B1

Substitute y = their 2 into circle leading to ( x − 2 )2 + 4 = 8 M1 Expect x = 4.

B = (4, 2) A1

 (8 − ( x − 2) )dx
8(b) Attempt to find [ π ]
2 *M1

 ( x − 2 )3    x3  A1
[ ]
π  8 x −  or [ π ] 8 x −  − 2 x 2 + 4 x  
 3    3  


  DM1 Apply limits 0 → their 4.

[ π ]  32 −
16   64
 or [ π ] 32 −  − 32 + 16  
 3   3 

Volume of cylinder = π × 22 × 4 = 16π B1 FT OR from π  22 dx with their limits from (a).

FT on their A and B

éê Volume of revolution = 26 2 π -16π =ùú 10 2 π A1 Accept 33.5

ë 3 û 3

© UCLES 2022 Page 11 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(a)  1  4 ± 16 − 4 M1 A1 OE. Answer must come from formula or completing square.

 x 2 = = 2± 3 If M0A0 scored then SC B1 for 2 ± 3 only.
  2

[ x =]( 2 ± ) M1 Attempt to square their 2 ± 3

2
3

7+4 3 , 7−4 3 A1 Accept 7 ± 4 3 or a = 7, b = ±4, c = 3

SC B1 instead of second M1A1 for correct final answer only.

Alternative method for question 9(a)

1
2
*M1 A1 OE
-4 x 2 + 1 = 0 leading to ( x + 1) = 16 x leading to x 2 - 14 x + 1 = 0

14  196 - 4 DM1 Attempt to solve for x

x=
2

7+4 3 , 7−4 3 A1 SC B1 instead of second M1A1 for correct final answer only.

9(b)  1 
2 M1 SOI
[gh ( x ) =] m  x 2 − 2  + n
 
 

 1
 1 A1 SOI
 gh ( x ) = m  x − 4 x 2 + 4  + n ≡ x − 4 x 2 + 1
 
 

m = 1, n = −3 A1 A1 WWW

© UCLES 2022 Page 12 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(a) 12 5 12 M1 5 12 5
tan A = or cos A = or sin A = OR tanB = or cos B = or sin B =
5 13 13 12 13 13

A = 1.176 B = 0.3948 A1 Allow 1.18 or 67.4°, Allow 0.395 or 22.6°.

π
May be implied by − 1.176
2

DE = 4 B1 If trigonometry used accept AWRT 4.00

Arcs = 5 × their1.176 and 8 × their 0.3948 M1 Or corresponding calculations in degrees.

[Perimeter = 5.880 + 3.158 + 4 =] 13.0 A1 Accept 13.

If DE is outside the given range this mark cannot be awarded.

10(b) Area of triangle = 1

× 5 × their12 [ = 30] B1 FT
2

Area of sectors = 1
× 52 × their 1.176 + 12 × 82 × their 0.3948 M1 Or corresponding calculations in degrees
2

[Area = 30 ‒ 14.70 ‒12.63 =] 2.67 A1 Allow 2.66 to 2.67

© UCLES 2022 Page 13 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(a) dy
dx
{
= − k ( 3x − k )
−2
} {×3} {+3} B2, 1, 0

−3k M1 dy
+ 3 = 0 leading to ( 3)( 3 x − k ) = ( 3) k
2
Set = 0 and remove the denominator
( 3x − k ) 2
dx
leading to 3 x − k = [ ± ] k

k± k A1 OE
x=
3

11(b) 4± 4 B1 Substitute x = a when k = 4. Allow x = 2.

a= leading to a = 2
3

f '' ( x ) = f '  −12 ( 3x − 4 ) + 3 = 72 ( 3x − 4 )

−2 −3 B1 Allow 18k ( 3 x − k )−3
 

> 0 (or 9) when x = 2 → minimum B1 FT 3

FT on their x = 2, providing their x  and f ′′ ( x ) is correct
2

© UCLES 2022 Page 14 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme February/March 2022
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(c) 3 M1 Condone one error.

Substitute k = ‒1 leading to g′ ( x ) = +3
( 3x + 1) 2

g′ ( x ) > 0 or g′ ( x ) always positive, hence g is an increasing function A1 WWW. A0 if the conclusion depends on substitution of
values into g′ ( x ) .

Alternative method for question 11(c)

k± k M1 Allow the statement ‘no turning points’ for increasing or

x= when k = ‒1 has no solutions, so g is increasing or decreasing
3
decreasing

Show g’(x) is positive for any value of x, hence g is an increasing A1 Or show g(b) > g(a) for b > a → g, hence g is an increasing
function function

© UCLES 2022 Page 15 of 15

Cambridge International AS & A Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/11
Paper 1 Pure Mathematics 1 October/November 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2021 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 19 printed pages.

© UCLES 2021 [Turn over

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the specific content of the
mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the scope of the
syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the question as
indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may be limited
according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in
mind.

© UCLES 2021 Page 2 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Mathematics Specific Marking Principles

1 Unless a particular method has been specified in the question, full marks may be awarded for any correct method. However, if a calculation is required then
no marks will be awarded for a scale drawing.

2 Unless specified in the question, answers may be given as fractions, decimals or in standard form. Ignore superfluous zeros, provided that the degree of
accuracy is not affected.

3 Allow alternative conventions for notation if used consistently throughout the paper, e.g. commas being used as decimal points.

4 Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored (isw).

5 Where a candidate has misread a number in the question and used that value consistently throughout, provided that number does not alter the difficulty or
the method required, award all marks earned and deduct just 1 mark for the misread.

6 Recovery within working is allowed, e.g. a notation error in the working where the following line of working makes the candidate’s intent clear.

© UCLES 2021 Page 3 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons
outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea
must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula
without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more ‘method’ steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise;
and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on
an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full
credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are
given for correct work only.

• A or B marks are given for correct work only (not for results obtained from incorrect working) unless follow through is allowed (see abbreviation FT above).
• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if the answer is correct to 3 significant figures or would be correct to 3 significant figures if rounded (1
decimal place for angles in degrees).
• The total number of marks available for each question is shown at the bottom of the Marks column.
• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not result in loss of marks unless the guidance indicates otherwise.
• Square brackets [ ] around text or numbers show extra information not needed for the mark to be awarded.

© UCLES 2021 Page 4 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Abbreviations

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no ‘follow through’ from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen Or Implied

SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the
light of a particular circumstance)

WWW Without Wrong Working

AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2021 Page 5 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1(a) 1 1 B1 OE. Multiply or use binomial expansion. Allow

1− + 2 unsimplified.
x 4x

1(b) 1 + 12 x + 60 x 2 + 160 x 3 B2, 1, 0 Withhold 1 mark for each error; B2, 1, 0.

ISW if more than 4 terms in the expansion.

1(c) their (1× 12 ) + their ( −1× 60 ) + their ( 14 × 160 ) M1 Attempts at least 2 products where each product contains
one term from each expansion.

[12 − 60 + 40 =] −8 A1 Allow ‒8x.

© UCLES 2021 Page 6 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 kx 2 + 2 x − k = kx − 2 leading to kx 2 + ( − k + 2 ) x − k + 2 [ = 0] *M1 Eliminate y and form 3-term quadratic. Allow 1 error.

( − k + 2 ) 2 − 4k ( − k + 2 ) DM1 Apply b 2 − 4 ac ; allow 1 error but a, b and c must be

correct for their quadratic.

5k 2 − 12k + 4 or ( −k + 2 )( −k + 2 − 4k ) A1 May be shown in quadratic formula.

( −k + 2 )( −5k + 2 ) DM1 Solving a 3-term quadratic in k (all terms on one side) by

factorising, use of formula or completing the square.
Factors must expand to give their coefficient of k2.

2 A1 WWW, accept two separate correct inequalities.

<k<2 If M0 for solving quadratic, SC B1 can be awarded for
5
correct final answer.

© UCLES 2021 Page 7 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3 3cosθ (2 tan θ − 1) + 2(2 tan θ − 1) [ = 0] M1 Or similar partial factorisation; condone sign errors.

(2 tan θ − 1) (3cosθ + 2) [ = 0] M1 OE. At least 2 out of 4 products correct.

1 2
[leading to tanθ = , cosθ = − ]
2 3

26.6º, 131.8º A1 A1 WWW. Must be 1 d.p. or better.

Final A0 if extra solution within the interval.
SC B1 No factorisation: Division by 2tan θ ‒1 leading to
131.8° or division by 3cosθ + 2 or similar leading to 26.6°.

Alternative method for question 3

 sinθ   sin θ  M1 sinθ

6cos θ   − 3cosθ + 4   − 2 [ = 0] Using tanθ =
cosθ
and reaching a partial factorisation;
 cosθ   cos θ 
6cos θ sin θ − 3cos 2θ + 4sin θ − 2cosθ [ = 0] condone sign errors.

2sinθ ( 3cosθ + 2 ) − cosθ ( 3cosθ + 2 ) [ = 0]

(2 sinθ − cosθ ) ( 3cosθ + 2 ) [ = 0] M1 At least 2 out of 4 products correct.
1 2
[leading to tanθ = , cosθ = − ]
2 3

26.6º, 131.8º A1 A1 WWW. Must be 1 d.p. or better.

Final A0 if extra solution within the interval.
SC B1 No factorisation: Division by 2tan θ ‒1 leading to
131.8° or division by 3cosθ + 2 or similar leading to 26.6°.

© UCLES 2021 Page 8 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(a) 5a B1 Use of correct formula for sum to infinity.

1 − ( ± 14 )

8 *M1 Use of correct formula for sum of 8 terms and form

 2a + 7 ( −4 ) 
2 equation; allow 1 error.

4a = 8a − 112 leading to a = [ 28] DM1 Solve equation to reach a value of a.

a = 28 A1 Correct value.

4(b) their 28 + ( k − 1)( −4 ) = 0 M1 Use of correct method with their a.

[ k =] 8 A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(a) a=5 B1

b=2 B1

c=3 B1

© UCLES 2021 Page 9 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(b)(i) 3 B1

5(b)(ii) 2 B1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(a) π B1 SOI; allow 60°.

Recognise that at least one of angles A, B, C is
3

π π M1 SOI e.g. may see 2π or 4π.

One arc 6 × their leading to two arcs 2 × 6 × their Use of correct formula for length of arc and multiply by 2.
3 3

Perimeter = 6 + 4π A1 Must be exact value.

Alternative method for question 6(a)

Calculate circumference of whole circle = 12π B1

1 1 M1 SOI e.g. may see 2π or 4π.

One arc × 12π leading to two arcs 2 × × 12π
6 6

Perimeter = 6 + 4π A1 Must be exact value.

© UCLES 2021 Page 10 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(b) 1 2 π M1 Use of correct formula for area of sector.

Sector = × 6 × their   SOI e.g. may see 6π or 12π.
2 3

1 π 1   π  M1 A1 M1 for attempt at strategy with values substituted:

2
( ) 3 2
( )
× 62 × their   − × 62 × sin  their    + 6π  = 6π − 9 3 +6π 
  3 
area of segment + area of sector
A1 if correct (unsimplified).

Area = 12π − 9 3 A1 Must be simplified exact value.

Alternative method for question 6(b)

1 2 π M1 Use of correct formula for area of sector.

Sector = × 6 × their   SOI e.g. may see 6π or 12π.
2 3

1  π  1   π  M1 A1 M1 for attempt at strategy with values substituted:

2  3  2
( )
2 ×  × 62 × their    − × 62 × sin  their   
  3 
2 × sector – triangle
A1 if correct (unsimplified).

Area = 12π − 9 3 A1 Must be simplified exact value.

Alternative method for question 6(b)

1 2 π M1 Use of correct formula for area of sector.

Sector = × 6 × their   SOI e.g. may see 6π or 12π.
2 3

1 π 1   π  M1 A1 M1 for attempt at strategy with values substituted:

( ) ( )
2 ×  × 62 × their   − × 62 × sin  their     + 2 × segment + triangle
2 3 2   3 
A1 if correct (unsimplified).
1   π 
2
( )
× 62 × sin  their     = 12π − 18 3 + 9 3 
  3 

Area  = 6π − 9 3 + 6π  = 12π − 9 3 A1 Must be simplified exact value.

© UCLES 2021 Page 11 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(a) r 2  = ( 5 − 2 ) + ( 7 − 5)  = 13
2 2 B1 r 2 = 13 or r = 13
 

Equation of circle is ( x − 5) + ( y − 2 ) = 13
2 2 B1 FT OE. FT on their 13 but LHS must be correct.

7(b) ( x − 5)2 + ( 5x − 10 − 2 )2 = 13 M1 Substitute y = 5 x − 10 into their equation.

26 x 2 − 130 x + 156 [ = 0] A1 FT OE 3-term quadratic with all terms on one side.

FT on their circle equation.

[ 26] ( x − 2)( x − 3) [ = 0] M1 Solve 3-term quadratic in x by factorising, using formula or

completing the square. Factors must expand to give their
coefficient of x2.

(2, 0), (3, 5) A1 A1 Coordinates must be clearly paired; A1 for each correct
point. A1 A0 available if two x or y values only.
If M0 for solving quadratic, SC B2 can be awarded for
correct coordinates, SC B1 if two x or y values only.

( AB )2 = ( 3 − 2)2 + ( 5 − 0 )2 M1 SOI. Using their points to find length of AB.

AB = 26 A1 ISW. Dependent on final M1 only.

© UCLES 2021 Page 12 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(b) Alternative method for question 7(b)

 y + 10 
2 M1 y + 10
− 5  + ( y − 2 ) = 13
2
Substitute x = into their equation.
 5
 5 

26 y 2 26 y A1 FT OE 2-term quadratic with all terms on one side. FT on their

− [ = 0] circle equation.
25 5

[ 26] y ( y − 5) [ = 0] M1 Solve 2-term quadratic in y by factorising, using formula or

completing the square. Factors must expand to give their
coefficient of y2.

(2, 0), (3, 5) A1 A1 Coordinates must be clearly paired; A1 for each correct
point. A1 A0 available if two x or y values only.
If M0 for solving quadratic, SC B2 can be awarded for
correct coordinates, SC B1 if two x or y values only.

( AB )2 = ( 3 − 2)2 + ( 5 − 0 )2 M1 SOI. Using their points to find length of AB.

AB = 26 A1 ISW. Dependent on final M1 only.

Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(a)
{−3 ( x − 2 ) }
2
{+14} B1 B1 B1 for each correct term; condone a = 2, b = 14.

8(b) [k =] 2 B1 Allow [x] ⩽ 2.

© UCLES 2021 Page 13 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(c) [Range is] [y] ⩽ –13 B1 Allow [f(x)] ⩽ –13, [f ] ⩽ –13 but NOT x ⩽ –13.

8(d) 14 − y M1 y −14
y = −3 ( x − 2 ) + 14 leading to ( x − 2 )2 =
2
Allow . Allow 1 error in rearrangement if x, y on
3 −3
opposite sides.

14 − y A1 y −14
x = 2(±) Allow .
3 −3

14 − x A1 x −14
[f −1 ( x )] = 2 − OE. Allow . Must be x on RHS; must be negative
3 −3
square root only.

Alternative method for question 8(d)

14 − x M1 x −14
x = −3 ( y − 2 ) + 14 leading to ( y − 2 )2 =
2
Allow . Allow 1 error in rearrangement if x, y on
3 −3
opposite sides.

14 − x A1 x −14
= 2(±) Allow .
3 −3

14 − x A1 x −14
[f −1 ( x )] = 2 − OE. Allow . Must be x on RHS; must be negative
3 −3
square root only.

© UCLES 2021 Page 14 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(e)
{
[g(x) =] −3 ( x + 3 − 2 )
2
} + {14 + 1} B2, 1, 0
{
OR −3 ( x + 3)
2
} + {12 ( x + 3)} + {3}
g ( x ) = −3x 2 − 6 x + 12 B1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(a) f ( x ) = 23 x3 − 7 x + 4 x −1 [ +c ] B2, 1, 0 Allow terms on different lines; allow unsimplified.

− 13 = 23 − 7 + 4 + c leading to c = [2] M1 Substitute f(1) = − 1 into an integrated expression and

3
evaluate c.

f ( x ) = 23 x3 − 7 x + 4 x −1 + 2 A1 OE.

© UCLES 2021 Page 15 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(b) 2 x 4 − 7 x 2 − 4 [ = 0] M1 Forms 3-term quadratic in x2 with all terms on one side.

Accept use of substitution e.g. 2 y 2 − 7 y − 4 [ = 0] .

( 2x 2
)(
+ 1 x2 − 4 ) [ = 0] M1 Attempt factors or use formula or complete the square.
Allow ± sign errors. Factors must expand to give their
coefficient of x2 or e.g. y. Must be quartic equation.
Accept use of substitution e.g. ( 2 y + 1)( y − 4 ) .

x = [ ±] 2 A1 If M0 for solving quadratic, SC B1 can be awarded for

[ ±] 2 .
2 3 4  14  B1 B1 B1 B1 for correct coordinates clearly paired; B1 for each
 3 ( 2 ) − 7 ( 2 ) + 2 + 2 leading to   2, − 3  correct point; B1 B0 if additional point.
  
2 4   26 
 3 ( −2 ) − 7 ( −2 ) + −2 + 2 leading to   −2, 3 
3

   

9(c) f ′′ ( x ) = 4 x + 8 x −3 B1 OE

© UCLES 2021 Page 16 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(d) f ′′ ( 2 ) = 9 > 0 MINIMUM at x = their 2 B1 FT FT on their x = [ ± ] 2 provided f ′′ ( x ) is correct.

Must have correct value of f ′′ ( x ) if x = 2 .

f ′′ ( −2 ) = −9 < 0 MAXIMUM at x = their − 2 B1 FT FT on their x = [ ±] 2 provided f ′′ ( x ) is correct.

Must have correct value of f ′′ ( x ) if x = −2 .
Special case: If values not shown and B0B0 scored, SC B1
for f ′′ ( 2 ) > 0 MIN and f ′′ ( −2 ) < 0 MAX

Alternative method for question 9(d)

Evaluate f ' ( x ) for x-values either side of 2 and –2 M1 FT on their x = [ ± ] 2

MINIMUM at x = their 2, MAXIMUM at x = their 2 A1 FT FT on their x = [ ± ] 2 . Must have correct values of f ' ( x ) if
shown.
Special case: If values not shown and M0A0 scored SC B1
f ′ ( 2 ) − /0/+ MIN and f ' ( −2 ) +/0/ − MAX

Alternative method for question 9(d)

Justify maximum and minimum using correct sketch graph B1 B1 Need correct coordinates in (b) for this method.

© UCLES 2021 Page 17 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(a)  ( 3x − 2 )− 12  B2, 1, 0 Attempt to integrate

  ÷ {3}
 −1/ 2 

− 23 [ 0 − 1] M1 M1 for applying limits 1 → ∞ to an integrated expression

(either correct power or dividing by their power).

2 A1
3

10(b) ( 3x − 2 )−2 *M1 A1 M1 for attempt to integrate y2 (power increases); allow 1

[ π]  y 2
dx = [ π ]  ( 3x − 2 ) dx = [ π ]
−3
error. A1 for correct result in any form.
−2 × 3

DM1 Apply limits 1 and 2 to an integrated expression and

[ π ]  −
1 1 
  − 1 subtract correctly; allow 1 error.
 6  16 

5π A1 OE
32

© UCLES 2021 Page 18 of 19

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(c) dy 3 −
5 M1 M1 for attempt to differentiate (power decreases); allow 1
= − × 3 ( 3x − 2 ) 2 error.
dx 2

dy 9 *M1 Substitute x = 1 into their differentiated expression; allow 1

At x = 1, =− error.
dx 2

2 DM1 Forms equation of line or evaluates c using (1, 1) and

[Equation of normal is] y − 1 = ( x − 1) OR evaluates c −1
9 gradient .
dy
their
dx

7 A1 OE e.g. AWRT 0.778; must clearly identify y-intercept

At A, y =
9

© UCLES 2021 Page 19 of 19

Cambridge International AS & A Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/12
Paper 1 Pure Mathematics 1 October/November 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2021 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 21 printed pages.

© UCLES 2021 [Turn over

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the specific content of the
mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the scope of the
syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the question as
indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may be limited
according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in
mind.

© UCLES 2021 Page 2 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Mathematics Specific Marking Principles

1 Unless a particular method has been specified in the question, full marks may be awarded for any correct method. However, if a calculation is required
then no marks will be awarded for a scale drawing.

2 Unless specified in the question, answers may be given as fractions, decimals or in standard form. Ignore superfluous zeros, provided that the degree of
accuracy is not affected.

3 Allow alternative conventions for notation if used consistently throughout the paper, e.g. commas being used as decimal points.

4 Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored (isw).

5 Where a candidate has misread a number in the question and used that value consistently throughout, provided that number does not alter the difficulty or
the method required, award all marks earned and deduct just 1 mark for the misread.

6 Recovery within working is allowed, e.g. a notation error in the working where the following line of working makes the candidate’s intent clear.

© UCLES 2021 Page 3 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons
outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea
must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula
without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more ‘method’ steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise;
and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on
an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full
credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are
given for correct work only.

• A or B marks are given for correct work only (not for results obtained from incorrect working) unless follow through is allowed (see abbreviation FT above).
• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if the answer is correct to 3 significant figures or would be correct to 3 significant figures if rounded (1
decimal place for angles in degrees).
• The total number of marks available for each question is shown at the bottom of the Marks column.
• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not result in loss of marks unless the guidance indicates otherwise.
• Square brackets [ ] around text or numbers show extra information not needed for the mark to be awarded.

© UCLES 2021 Page 4 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Abbreviations

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no ‘follow through’ from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen Or Implied

SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the
light of a particular circumstance)

WWW Without Wrong Working

AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2021 Page 5 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 2cos 2θ − 7 cos θ + 3[ = 0] M1 Forming a 3-term quadratic expression with all terms on the
same side or correctly set up prior to completing the square.
Allow ± sign errors.

( 2cosθ − 1)( cosθ − 3) = 0 DM1 Solving their 3-term quadratic using factorisation, formula or
completing the square.

1 A1
[cos θ = or cos θ = 3 leading to] θ = −60° or θ = 60°
2

θ = −60° and θ = 60° A1 FT π

FT for ± same answer between 0 ° and 90 ° or 0 and .
2
π
± or ± 1.05 AWRT scores maximum M1M1A0A1FT.
3
Special case: If M1 DM0 scored then SC B1 for
θ = −60° or θ = 60° , and SC B1 FT can be awarded for
± ( their 60°) .

© UCLES 2021 Page 6 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

2(a) 1 B1
Stretch with [scale factor] either ± 2 or ±
2

1 B1
Scale factor in the x-direction
2

 0 B1
Translation   or translation of 3 units in negative y-direction
 −3 

2(b) ( 10 , 9) B1 B1 B1 for each correct co-ordinate.

Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(a)  2 + 3 M1 Clear evidence of applying f twice with x = 5.

f ( 5 ) = [ 2] and f ( their 2 ) = [5] OR ff ( 5 ) =  
 2 −1 
x+3
+3
OR x − 1 and an attempt to substitute x =5.
x+3
−1
x −1

5 A1

© UCLES 2021 Page 7 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(b) x+3 y+3 *M1 Setting f(x) = y or swapping x and y, clearing of fractions and
= y  x + 3 = xy − y OR = x  y + 3 = xy − x expanding brackets. Allow ± sign errors.
x −1 y −1

y+3  x + 3 DM1 Finding x or y = . Allow ± sign errors.

xy − x = y + 3  x = OE OR y + 3 = xy − x  y =   OE
y −1  x −1 

x+3 A1 4
[f −1 ( x ) or y ] = OE e.g. 1 + etc. Must be a function of x, cannot be x = .
x −1 x −1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

4 8 *B1 For ( 3x + 2 )−1

y=− 3 [ +c ]
( 3x + 2 ) DB1 8
For −
3

8 M1  2
2 Substituting  2, 5  into their integrated expression –
5 =− 3 +c  3
3 ( 3 × 2 + 2) defined by power = -1, or dividing by their power. + c needed

8 A1 8 −1
y=− +6 OE e.g. y = − (3x + 2 ) + 6
3 ( 3x + 2 ) 3

© UCLES 2021 Page 8 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(a) [(3rd term – 1st term) = (5th term – 3rd term) leading to…] *M1 OE. From the given terms, obtain 2 expressions relating to
−6 3 sin x − 2cos x = 10cos x + 6 3 sin x the common difference of the arithmetic progression, attempt
to solve them simultaneously and achieve an equation just
leading to − 12 3 sin x = 12cos x 
  involving sinx and cosx.
OR
[(1st term + 5th term) = 2 × 3rd term leading to…] 12cos x = −12 3 sin x

Elimination of sinx and cosx to give an expression in tanx DM1 sinx

For use of = tanx
 1  cosx
 tanx = − 
 3

5π A1 CAO. Must be exact.

[ x =] only
6

5(b) d = 2cosx or d = 2cos(their x) B1 FT Or an equivalent expression involving sinx and cosx e.g.
−3 3sin ( their x ) − cos ( their x )  = − 3 

FT for their x from (a) only. If not ± 3 , must see

unevaluated form.

25 M1 25
S25 =
2
(
2 × ( 2cos ( their x ) ) + ( 25 − 1) × ( their d ) ) Using the correct sum formula with
2
, (25 — 1) and with

( ( )
 = 12.5 2 × − 3 + 24 − 3 
 ( ))
a replaced by either 2(cos(their x)) or ± 3 and
d replaced by either 2(cos(their x)) or ± 3 .

−325 3 A1 Must be exact.

© UCLES 2021 Page 9 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6 a or their a B1 SOI
ar = 54 and = 243
1− r

54 *M1 Forming a 3-term quadratic expression in r or a using their

= 243 (1 − r ) leading to 243r 2 − 243r + 54 [ = 0] [ 9r 2 − 9r + 2 = 0] 2nd term and S∞. Allow ± sign errors.
r
OR a 2 − 243a + 13122 [ = 0]

k ( 3r − 2 )( 3r − 1) [ = 0] OR ( a − 81)( a − 162 ) [ = 0] DM1 Solving their 3-term quadratic using factorisation, formula or
completing the square. If factorising, factors must expand to
give ±their coefficient of r 2 .

 2 DM1 May be implied by final answer.

54 ÷  their  = a OR 54 ÷ ( their 81) = r
 3

512  A1 OE. Must be exact.

2 
9 8
2
Tenth term =  OR 81 ×   OR 54 ×    Special case: If B1M1DM0DM1 scored then SC B1 can be
243  3  3   awarded for the correct final answer.

© UCLES 2021 Page 10 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(a) EITHER M1
ˆ = 0.6435 … and ABC
By using trigonometry: BAC ˆ = π − 0.6435
2
OR
By Pythagoras: AP = 12 ⇒ BP = 3 so tan ABC ˆ = 9 3
= 0.9486…
10
= 0.3162…
3 10 10
OR
Using ∆PBC and either the sine or cosine rule
ˆ = 3 or cos ABC
sin ABC ˆ = 10
10 10

A1 AG. Final answer must be 1.25, more accurate value

ˆ = π − 0.6435 or tan-1 9 or sin −1 3 or cos −1 10 or
ABC 1.24904… with no rounding to 3sf seen as the final answer
2 3 10 10
gets M1A0.
1.249 ( 04…) or 71.56° = 1.25 radians (3 sf) If decimals are used all values must be given to at least 4sf
for A1.

7(b) 9 M1 Using correct method(s) to find BC.

BC = ( their 3)2 + 92 or [= 90 , 3 10 or 9.48697…]
sin1.25

1 M1 Using tan −1 3 or 1.25 and their BC, but not 9 or 15, in

× ( their BC ) × tan −1 3 [ = 56.207 or 56.25]
2
Area of sector =
2 correct area of sector formula.

1 B1
Area of triangle PBC = 13.4 to 13.6 or ×9×3
2

[Area = ( 56.207 or 56.25 ) – their 13.5 =] 42.7 or 42.8 A1 AWRT

© UCLES 2021 Page 11 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(a) Terms required for x2: −5 × 24 × ax + 10 × 23 × a 2 x 2  = −80ax + 80a 2 x 2  B1 Can be seen as part of an expansion or in correct products.

2× (±their coefficient of x) + 4× (±their coefficient of x2) *M1

x2 coefficient is 320a2 – 160a = −15 DM1 Forming a 3-term quadratic in a, with all terms on the same
 64a 2 − 32a + 3  ( 8a − 3)( 8a − 1) side or correctly setting up prior to completing the square and
solving using factorisation, formula or completing the square.
If factorising, factors must expand to give their coefficient of
a2 .

1 3 A1 OE.
a= or a = Special case: If DM0 for solving quadratic, SC B1 can be
8 8
awarded for correct final answers.

© UCLES 2021 Page 12 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(b) 320a2 – 160a = k  320a 2 − 160a − k [ = 0] M1 Forming a 3-term quadratic in a with all terms on the same
side. Allow ± sign errors.

Their b2 – 4ac [= 0], [1602 – 4×320×(–k) = 0] M1 Any use of discriminant on a 3-term quadratic.

k = –20 A1

1 B1 1
a= Condone a = from k = 20.
4 4

Alternative method for question 8(b)

 a k  M1 Allow ± sign errors.

320a2 – 160a = k and divide by 320  a 2 − =
 2 320 

 1
2
1 k  M1  1
2

Attempt to complete the square  a −  − =  Must have  a − 

4  16 320   4


1 A1
a=
4

k = –20 B1

© UCLES 2021 Page 13 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(b) cont’d Alternative method for question 8(b)

320a2 – 160a = k and attempt to differentiate LHS [ 640a − 160] M1 Allow ± sign errors.

Setting their ( 640a − 160 ) = 0 and attempt to solve. M1

1 A1
a=
4

k = –20 B1

© UCLES 2021 Page 14 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(a)  dV  9  1
2 B1 OE. Accept unsimplified.
 dr =  2  r − 2 
   

  M1 Correct use of chain rule with 1.5, their differentiated

  dV
dr dr dV 1.5 = 1.5 1.5  expression for and using r = 5.5 .
= × = = dr
dt dV dt their dV  9 1  112.5 
2

dr   5.5 −  
 2 2 

3 1 A1
0.0133 or or [ metres per second]
225 75

9(b)   B1 FT dV dV
Correct statement involving or their , 1.5 and 0.1.
  dr dr
dV
or their
dV 1.5
= or 15 OR 0.1 =
1.5  = 2 × 1.5 OE 
dr dr 0.1 dV   1
2 
their  9 r −  
dr   2 

9  1
2
 1 10 B1 OE e.g. AWRT 2.3
  r −  = 15   r = + Can be implied by correct volume.
 2  2  2 3

[Volume =] 8.13 AWRT B1 −3 + 5 30

OE e.g. . CAO.
3

© UCLES 2021 Page 15 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(a) k B1
[f '(x) =] 2 x −
x2

 k  M1 Setting their 2-term f '(2) = 0, at least one term correct and

f '(2) = 0  2 × 2 − 2 = 0   k = … attempting to solve as far as k = .
 2 

k = 16 A1

10(b) 2k M1 Evaluate a two term f''(2) with at least one term correct.
f''(2) = e.g. 2+ Or other valid method.
23

 2k  A1 FT WWW. FT on positive k value.

 2 + 23  > 0 ⇒ minimum or = 6 ⇒ minimum
 

10(c) When x = 2, f(x) = 14 B1 SOI

[Range is or y or f(x)] ⩾ their f(2) B1 FT Not x ⩾ their f(2)

© UCLES 2021 Page 16 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(a) dy 1 1 B1 OE. Allow unsimplified.

= + 4
dx 2
3( x − 2) 3

  *M1 Substituting x = 3 into their differentiated expression –

dy  1 1 5 defined by one of 3 original terms with correct power of x.
Attempt at evaluating their at x = 3 + =
dx  2 4
6
 3(3 − 2) 3 

−1  6 *DM1 dy
Gradient of normal = =−  Negative reciprocal of their evaluated .

dy  5 dx
their
dx

6 DM1 Using their normal gradient and A in the equation of a

Equation of normal y − = ( their normal gradient )( x − 3) straight line.
5
Dependent on *M1 and *DM1.
 6 
 y = − 5 x + 4.8  5 y = −6 x + 24 
 

[When y = 0,] x = 4 A1 or (4, 0)

© UCLES 2021 Page 17 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(b)   M1 For intention to integrate the curve (no need for limits).
1 7 1
Area under curve =   x + −  dx Condone inclusion of π for this mark.
2 10 1 [ ]
 ( x − 2 ) 
 3


2 A1 For correct integral. Allow unsimplified.

1 2 7 3( x − 2) 3 Condone inclusion of π for this mark.
x + x−
4 10 2

 2
 M1 Clear substitution of 3 and 2.5 into their integrated
9 3   6.25 3 × 0.5 3  expression (with at least one correct term) and subtracting.
 + 2.1 −  −  + 1.75 − 
4 2  4 2 
 

0.48[24] A1 If M1A1M0 scored then SC B1 can be awarded for correct

answer.

[Area of triangle =] 0.6 B1 OE

[Total area =] 1.08 A1 Dependent on the first M1 and WWW.

© UCLES 2021 Page 18 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

12(a) Centre is (3, – 2) B1

( their −2 ) − 4 [= *M1 Finding gradient using their centre (not (0, 0)) and P (5,4).
Gradient of radius = 3]
( their 3) − 5
1 DM1 Using P and the negative reciprocal of their gradient to find
Equation of tangent y − 4 = − ( x − 5) the equation of AB.
3

17 A1
Sight of [x =]17 and [y =]
3

 1 17  289 A1 1
Or 48 or AWRT 48.2.
 Area = 2 × 3 × 17 =  6 6
 

Alternative method for question 12(a)

dy dy B1
2x + 2 y −6+4 =0
dx dx

dy dy  dy 1 *M1 Find the gradient using P (5,4) in their implicit differential

At P: 10 + 8 − 6 + 4 = 0  = −  (with at least one correctly differentiated y term).
dx dx  dx 3

1 DM1 Using P and their value for the gradient to find the equation
Equation of tangent y − 4 = − ( x − 5) of AB.
3

17 A1
Sight of [x =]17 and [y =]
3

 1 17  289 A1 1
Or 48 or AWRT 48.2.
 Area = 2 × 3 × 17 =  6 6
 

© UCLES 2021 Page 19 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

12(a) Alternative method for question 12(a)

cont’d
 1
 dy 1 B1 OE. Correct differentiation of rearranged equation.


(
 y = −2 ± 40 − ( x − 3)
2
) 2
OE leading to 
 dx
(
= ( 3 − x ) 31 + 6 x − x 2 )
−
2

1 *M1 Find the gradient using x = 5 in their differential (with clear

dy
( )  dy 1
−
= ( 3 − 5 ) 31 + 6 ( 5 ) − ( 5 )
2
 dx = − 3 
2
use of chain rule).
dx  

1 DM1 Using P and their value for the gradient to find the equation
Equation of tangent y − 4 = − ( x − 5) of AB.
3

17 A1
Sight of [x =]17 and [y =]
3

 1 17  289 A1 1
Or 48 or AWRT 48.2.
 Area = 2 × 3 × 17 =  6 6
 

© UCLES 2021 Page 20 of 21

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

12(b) Radius of circle = 40 , B1 Or 2 10 or 6.32 AWRT or r 2 = 40 .

1  1 3 M1 1 2
Area of ∆CRQ = × (their r ) 2 sin120  = × 40 ×  Using r sinθ with their r and 120 or 60 [ ×3 ]
2 2
 2 2 
OR 1
1  1  Using ×base ×height in a correct right-angled triangle
Area of ∆CQX = × 40cos30 × 40cos60 OE  = × 30 × 10  2
2  2  [ ×6 ].
OR
π
Area of circle ‒ 3× Area of segment = 40π ‒ 3 × (40 ‒ 10 3)
3
OR
1
QR = 120 or 2 30 and area = QR 2 sin60 Use of cosine rule and area of large triangle
2

30 3 A1 AWRT 52[.0] implies B1M1A0.

3 See diagram for points stated in ‘Answer’ column.

© UCLES 2021 Page 21 of 21

Cambridge International AS & A Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/13
Paper 1 Pure Mathematics 1 October/November 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2021 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 15 printed pages.

© UCLES 2021 [Turn over

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the specific content of the
mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the scope of the
syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the question as
indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may be limited
according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in
mind.

© UCLES 2021 Page 2 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Mathematics Specific Marking Principles

1 Unless a particular method has been specified in the question, full marks may be awarded for any correct method. However, if a calculation is required
then no marks will be awarded for a scale drawing.

2 Unless specified in the question, answers may be given as fractions, decimals or in standard form. Ignore superfluous zeros, provided that the degree of
accuracy is not affected.

3 Allow alternative conventions for notation if used consistently throughout the paper, e.g. commas being used as decimal points.

4 Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored (isw).

5 Where a candidate has misread a number in the question and used that value consistently throughout, provided that number does not alter the difficulty or
the method required, award all marks earned and deduct just 1 mark for the misread.

6 Recovery within working is allowed, e.g. a notation error in the working where the following line of working makes the candidate’s intent clear.

© UCLES 2021 Page 3 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons
outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea
must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula
without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more ‘method’ steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise;
and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on
an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full
credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are
given for correct work only.

• A or B marks are given for correct work only (not for results obtained from incorrect working) unless follow through is allowed (see abbreviation FT above).
• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if the answer is correct to 3 significant figures or would be correct to 3 significant figures if rounded (1
decimal place for angles in degrees).
• The total number of marks available for each question is shown at the bottom of the Marks column.
• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not result in loss of marks unless the guidance indicates otherwise.
• Square brackets [ ] around text or numbers show extra information not needed for the mark to be awarded.

© UCLES 2021 Page 4 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Abbreviations

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no ‘follow through’ from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen Or Implied

SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the
light of a particular circumstance)

WWW Without Wrong Working

AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2021 Page 5 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 {Reflection} {[in the] x-axis} *B1 DB1 {} indicate how the B1 marks should be awarded
or throughout.
{Stretch of scale factor -1} {parallel to y-axis}

 0   B1 B1 Or Translation 3 units in the positive y-direction.

Then {Translation}    N.B. If order reversed a maximum of 3 out of 4 marks
 3   awarded.

Alternative method for question 1

 0   B1 B1 Or Translation 3 units in the negative y-direction.

{Translation}   
 −3  

Then {Reflection} {in the x-axis} *B1 DB1 N.B. If order reversed a maximum of 3 out of 4 marks
or {Stretch of scale factor -1} {parallel to y-axis} awarded.

© UCLES 2021 Page 6 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

2(a) 1 + 6ax + 15a 2 x 2 B1 Terms must be evaluated.

2(b) their 15a 2 ± ( 3 × their 6a ) *M1 Expect 15a 2 − 18a .

15a 2 − 18a = −3 A1

( 3)( a − 1)( 5a − 1) [ = 0] DM1 Dependent on 3-term quadratic.

Or solve using formula or completing the square.

1 A1 WWW. If DM0 awarded SC B1 if both answers correct.

a = 1,
5

© UCLES 2021 Page 7 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(a)
{5 ( y − 3) } 2
{+5} B1 B1 Accept a = ‒3, b = 5

3(b) f ′ ( x ) = 5 x 4 − 30 x 2 + 50 B1

( ) M1
2
5 x 2 − 3 + 5 or b 2 < 4ac and at least one value of f’(x) > 0

> 0 and increasing A1 WWW

Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(a) 84 − 3 ( n − 1) = 0 M1 OE, SOI. Allow either = 0 or < 0 (to -3).

Smallest n is 30 A1 SC B2 for answer only n = 30 WWW.

4(b)  2k  k M1 A1 M1 for forming an equation using correct formula.

  168 + ( 2k − 1)( −3)  =   168 + ( k − 1)( −3)  A1 for at least one side correct.
 2  2

k = 19 A1

© UCLES 2021 Page 8 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(a) 9 B1 AG. OE using cosine rule.

Angle XYC = sin −1   = 0.9582
 11 
9
or sin XYC = leading to XYC = 0.9582
11

5(b) XY = 112 − 92 = 40 or using 0.9582 and trigonometry *M1 A1

AB = 9 + 11 − theirXY B1 FT OE e.g. 20 − 2 √ 10 , 2 + 9 − 2 10 + 11 − 2 √ 10

Arc AC = 11 × 0.9582 M1

π M1
Arc BC = 9×
2

Perimeter = [13.6(8) + 10.5(4) +14.1(4) =] 38.4 A1 AWRT. Answer must be evaluated as a single decimal.

Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(a) B1 A reflection of the given curve in y = x (the line y = x can

be implied by position of curve).

© UCLES 2021 Page 9 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(b) −x *M1 Squaring and clearing the fraction. Condone one error in
y= (
leading to x 2 = y 2 4 − x 2 ) squaring – x or y
4 − x2

( )
x2 1 + y 2 = 4 y 2 DM1 OE. Factorisation of the new subject with order of
operations correct. Condone sign errors.

2y DM1  4 y2 
x = (±) x = (±)  OE is acceptable for this mark.
1+ y 2 2 
 (1 + y 
Isolating the new subject. Order of operations correct.
Condone sign errors.

−2 x A1 Selecting the correct square root.

f −1 ( x ) = Must not have fractions in numerator or denominator.
2
1+ x

6(c) 1 or a = 1 B1 Do not allow x = 1 or −1 < x < 1

6(d) −2 x B1 −2 x
[ fg ( x ) = f ( 2 x ) =] Allow or any correct unsimplified form.
4 − ( 2x)
2 2
4 − 4x

−x −x x B1 Result of cancelling 2 in numerator and denominator.

fg ( x ) = or 2
1 − x 2 or 2 1 − x2
1− x 2 1− x x −1

© UCLES 2021 Page 10 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(a) tan x + cos x = k(tan x ‒cos x) leading to sin x + cos 2 x = k (sin x − cos 2 x ) M1 sinx
Use tanx = and clear fraction.
cosx

sinx + 1 − sin 2 x = ksinx − k + ksin 2 x *M1 Use cos 2 x = 1 − sin 2 x twice to obtain an equation in sine.

ksin 2 x + sin 2 x + ksinx − sinx − k − 1 = 0 DM1 Gather like terms on one side of the equation.

( k + 1) sin 2 x + ( k − 1) sin x − ( k + 1) = 0 A1 AG. Factorise to obtain answer.

7(b) 5sin 2 x + 3sin x − 5 = 0 B1

−3 ± 9 + 100 M1 Use formula or complete the square.

sin x =
10

x = 48.1°, 131.9° A1 AWRT. Maximum A1 if extra solutions in range.

A1 FT FT for 180 ‒ their answer or 540 – their answer if sinx is
negative
If M0 given and correct answers only SCB1B1 available.
If answers in radians; 0.839, 2.30 can score SCB1 for
both.

© UCLES 2021 Page 11 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(a) 5 1
− 
1 M1 5 
  − x 2 − x 2  dx
 2 
( )
OR as 2 separate integrals   − x1/2  dx −  x −1/2 dx
2 

 5 2 2 
3
 1  A1 A1 A1 If two separate integrals with no subtraction SC B1 for
 x − x {−} 2 x 2  each correct integral.
 2 3   

 16  5 1  DM1 1
10 − − 4  −  − − 1 Substitute limits → 4 at least once, must be seen.
 3   8 12  4

9 A1 WWW. Cannot be awarded if π appears in any integral.

or 1.125
8

8(b)  dy  1 −
3 B1
 dx = − x 2
  2

1 M1 Substitute x = 1 into a differential.

When x = 1, m = −
2

[Equation of normal is] y − 1 = 2 ( x − 1) M1 1 1− p

Through (1, 1) with gradient − or =2
m 1

[When x = 0,] p = ‒1 A1 WWW

© UCLES 2021 Page 12 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(a) x 2 + ( 2 x + 5) = 20
2
leading to x 2 + 4 x 2 + 20 x + 25 = 20 M1 Substitute y = 2 x + 5 and expand bracket.

( 5 ) ( x 2 + 4 x + 1) [ = 0] A1 3-term quadratic.

−4 ± 16 − 4 M1 OE. Apply formula or complete the square.

x=
2

(
A = −2 + 3,1 + 2 3 ) A1 Or 2 correct x values.

(
B = −2 − 3,1 − 2 3 ) A1 Or all values correct.
SC B1 all 4 values correct in surd form without working.
SC B1 all 4 values correct in decimal form from correct
formula or completion of the square

AB 2 = their ( x2 − x1 ) + their ( y2 − y1 )
2 2 M1 Using their coordinates in a correct distance formula.
Condone one sign error in x2 − x1 or y2 − y1

 AB 2 = 48 + 12 leading to  AB = 60 A1 OE. CAO. Do not accept decimal answer. Answer must

  come from use of surd form in distance formula.

© UCLES 2021 Page 13 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(b) x 2 + m2 ( x − 10 ) = 20
2 *M1 Finding equation of tangent and substituting into circle
equation.

( ) (
x 2 m 2 + 1 − 20m 2 x + 20 5m 2 − 1 ) [ = 0] DM1 OE. Brackets expanded and all terms collected on one side
of the equation.

( )(
[b 2 − 4ac =]400m 4 − 80 m 2 + 1 5m 2 − 1 ) M1 Using correct coefficients from their quadratic equation.

( ) (
400m 4 − 80 5m 4 + 4m 2 − 1 = 0 → ( −80 ) 4m 2 − 1 = 0 ) A1 OE. Must have ‘=0’ for A1.

1 A1
m=±
2

Alternative method for question 9(b)

Length, l of tangent, is given by l 2 = 10 2 − 20 M1

l = 80 A1

20 1 M1 A1 Where α is the angle between the tangent and the x-axis.

tan α = =
80 2

1 A1
m=±
2

© UCLES 2021 Page 14 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(a) f ′′ ( x ) = − ( 12 x + k )
−3 B1

f ′′ ( 2 ) > 0  − (1 + k ) > 0
−3 M1 Allow for solving their f ′′ ( 2 ) > 0

k < −1 A1 WWW

10(b)  ( 1 x − 3)−1  B1 B1 1 
−1

 (( )  x −2
f ( x ) = 1
x − 3) − ( −2 )
−2 −2 
dx =  2  −  Allow −2  x + k  OE for 1st B1 and − (1 + k ) x OE
 2
  −1 × 12   4 2 
  for 2nd B1

3 12 = 1 - 12 + c M1 Substitute x = 2, y = 3 1 into their integral with c present.

2

−2 x A1 OE
f ( x) = − +3
( 1
2
x − 3) 4

10(c) M1 Substitute k = −3 and set to zero.

( 12 x − 3)
−2 −2
− ( −2 ) =0

A1
( 12 x − 3)
2
leading to = 4  12 x − 3 = ( ± ) 2 leading to x = 10

(10, ‒ 12 ) A1 Or when x = 10, y = ‒1 ‒ 2 1 + 3 = ‒ 1

2 2

f ′′ (10 )  = − ( 5 − 3)
−3
→  < 0 → MAXIMUM A1 WWW
 

© UCLES 2021 Page 15 of 15

Cambridge International AS & A Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/11
Paper 1 Pure Mathematics 1 May/June 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2021 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 17 printed pages.

© UCLES 2021 [Turn over

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the specific content of the
mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the scope of the
syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the question as
indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may be limited
according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in
mind.

© UCLES 2021 Page 2 of 17

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Mathematics Specific Marking Principles

1 Unless a particular method has been specified in the question, full marks may be awarded for any correct method. However, if a calculation is required
then no marks will be awarded for a scale drawing.

2 Unless specified in the question, answers may be given as fractions, decimals or in standard form. Ignore superfluous zeros, provided that the degree of
accuracy is not affected.

3 Allow alternative conventions for notation if used consistently throughout the paper, e.g. commas being used as decimal points.

4 Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored (isw).

5 Where a candidate has misread a number in the question and used that value consistently throughout, provided that number does not alter the difficulty or
the method required, award all marks earned and deduct just 1 mark for the misread.

6 Recovery within working is allowed, e.g. a notation error in the working where the following line of working makes the candidate’s intent clear.

© UCLES 2021 Page 3 of 17

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons
outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea
must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula
without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more ‘method’ steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise;
and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on
an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full
credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are
given for correct work only.

• A or B marks are given for correct work only (not for results obtained from incorrect working) unless follow through is allowed (see abbreviation FT above).
• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if the answer is correct to 3 significant figures or would be correct to 3 significant figures if rounded (1
decimal place for angles in degrees).
• The total number of marks available for each question is shown at the bottom of the Marks column.
• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not result in loss of marks unless the guidance indicates otherwise.
• Square brackets [ ] around text or numbers show extra information not needed for the mark to be awarded.

© UCLES 2021 Page 4 of 17

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Abbreviations

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no ‘follow through’ from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen Or Implied

SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the
light of a particular circumstance)

WWW Without Wrong Working

AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2021 Page 5 of 17

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 1 B1 B1 OE. Accept unsimplified.

[ y =] − + 8 x 4 [+ c]
x3

1 M1 1 
4 = –8 + +c Substituting  , 4  into an integrated expression
2 2 

1 23 A1 OE. Accept −x−3 ; must be 8; y = must be seen in

y=− 3
+ 8x4 +
x 2 working.

Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 10(2a + 19d) = 405 B1

20(2a + 39d) = 1410 B1

Solving simultaneously two equations obtained from using the correct sum M1 Reach a = or d =
formulae [a = 6, d = 1.5]

Using the correct formula for 60th term with their a and d M1

60th term = 94.5 A1 189

OE, e.g.
2

© UCLES 2021 Page 6 of 17

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(a) 243 B1

−810x B1

+1080x2 B1

3(b) (4 + x)2 = 16 + 8x + x2 B1

Coefficient of x2 is 16 × 1080 + 8 × (−810) + 243 M1 Allow if at least 2 pairs used correctly

11043 A1 Allow 11043x2

Question Answer Marks Guidance

4 a=2 B1

π B1 2π
b= or
4 8

c=1 B1

© UCLES 2021 Page 7 of 17

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5 (−12)2 = 8k × 2k M1 Forming an equation in k

k = −3 A1

Using correct formula for S∞ [r = 0.5, a = −384] M1 With −1 < r < 1

S∞ = −768 A1

Alternative method for Question 5

2k M1
r2 =
8k

r = [ ± ] 0.5 A1

Using correct formula for S∞ [r = 0.5, a = −384] M1 −1 < r < 1

S∞ = −768 A1

© UCLES 2021 Page 8 of 17

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6 ( 2k − 3) x 2 − kx − ( k − 2 ) = 3x − 4 *M1 Equating curve and line

( 2k − 3) x 2 − ( k + 3) x − ( k − 6 ) [ = 0] DM1 Forming a 3-term quadratic

( k + 3)2 + 4 ( 2k − 3 )( k − 6 ) [ = 0] DM1 Use of discriminant (dependent on both previous M

marks)

9k 2 − 54k + 81[ = 0] [leading to k 2 − 6k + 9 = 0 ] M1 Simplifying and solving their 3-term quadratic in k

k=3 A1

Alternative method for Question 6

( 2k − 3) x 2 − kx − ( k − 2 ) = 3x − 4 *M1 Equating curve and line

k +3 3 + 6x DM1 Differentiating and solving for x or k

2 ( 2k − 3) x − k = 3 ⇒ x = or k =
4k − 6 4x − 1

 k +3 
2
 k +3   k +3  DM1 Substituting their x into equation or their
Either ( 2k − 3)   −k  − ( k − 2) = 3 −4
 4 k − 6   4 k − 6   4k − 6  3x 2 + 3x − 6 3x + 6
k= 2
or k = into derivative
 3x 2 + 3x − 6   3x 2 + 3x − 6  2x − x −1 2x + 1
Or 4 x  2  − 6 x −  2 =3 equation (dependent on both previous M marks)
 2x − x −1   2x − x −1 

9k 2 − 54k + 81[ = 0] [leading to k 2 − 6k + 9 = 0] M1 Simplifying and solving their 3-term quadratic in k

(or solving for x)

k=3 A1

SC If M0, B1 for differentiating, equating to 3 and

solving for x or k

© UCLES 2021 Page 9 of 17

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(a) cos 2θ − sin 2θ 1 − sin 2θ sin 2θ sin 2θ + cos 2θ M1 May start with 1 − tan 2θ
Reach 2
or 2
− 2
or 2
− 2tan 2θ
cos θ 1 − sin θ cos θ cos θ
2
2sin θ cos2θ
or sec2 θ − 2
or 2 − sec2 θ or
cos θ cos 2θ

1 − tan 2θ A1 AG, must show sufficient stages

7(b) 1 − tan 2θ = 2tan 4θ ⇒ 2tan 4θ + tan 2θ −1 [= 0] M1 Forming a 3-term quadratic in tan 2θ or e.g. u

tan 2θ = 0.5 or −1 leading to tanθ = [ ± ] 0.5 M1

θ = 35.3° and 144.7° (AWRT) A1 Both correct. Radians 0.615, 2.53 scores A0.

© UCLES 2021 Page 10 of 17

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(a) 2 π M1
Either Let midpoint of PQ be H: sin HCP = ⇒ Angle HCP =
4 6
4 π
Or sin PSQ = ⇒ Angle PSQ =
8 6
π
Or using cosine rule: angle PCQ =
3
π
Or by inspection: triangle PCQ or PCT is equilateral so angle PCQ =
3

π π 2 A1 AG
Angle PCS = π − − = π
6 6 3

8(b) 2π 8π M1 Length of two arcs PS and QR

Perimeter = 2 × 4 × or 8π −
3 3

+2π × 2 M1 Adding circumference of two semicircles

28π A1 Must be a single term

3

© UCLES 2021 Page 11 of 17

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(c) 1 2 π 8π M1 Uses correct formula for sector

Area sector CPQ = ×4 × =
2 3 3

Area of segment of large circle beyond CPQ M1 Attempts to find area of segment
8π 1 2  π  8π
= − × 4 × sin   = − 4 3
3 2 3 3

Area of small semicircle = π × 2 or area of small circle = π × 22 M1

Area of plate = Large circle – [2 ×] small semicircle – [2 ×] segment area M1

 8π  20π A1 AG
π × 42 − π × 22 − 2 ×  − 4 3  = +8 3
 3  3

Alternative method for Question 8(c)

1 2π 16π M1 Uses correct formula for sector

Area of sector PCS = × 42 × =
2 3 3

1 2 π M1 Uses correct formula for triangle

Area of triangle PCQ = × 4 × sin = 4 3
2 3

Area of small semicircle = π × 2 or area of circle = π × 22 M1

Area of plate = [2 ×] large sector + [2 ×] triangle – [2 ×] small semicircle M1

 16π  20π A1 AG
2
 3 
( ) 2
 + 2 4 3 − π×2 =
3
+8 3

© UCLES 2021 Page 12 of 17

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(a) Range of f is f(x) ⩾ −4 B1 Allow y, f or ‘range’ or [ −4, ∞ )

9(b) y = (x – 2)2 – 4 ⇒ (x – 2)2 = y + 4 ⇒ x – 2 = + ( y + 4) or ± ( y + 4) M1 May swap variables here

 f −1 ( x )  = ( x + 4) + 2 A1
 

9(c) 5 5 7 M1 Equating and simplifying to a 3-term quadratic

(x – 2)2 – 4 = – x + 2 ⇒ x2 – 4x + 4 – 4 = – x + 2 [⇒ x 2 − x − 2 = 0]
3 3 3

7 ± 7 2 − 4 ( 3)( −6 ) M1 Solving quadratic

( 3x + 2 )( x − 3) [ = 0] or OE
6

x = 3 only A1

© UCLES 2021 Page 13 of 17

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(d) f-1 (12) = 6 M1 Substitute 12 into their f–1 (x) and evaluate

g(f–1 (12)) = 6a + 2 M1 Substitute their ‘6’ into g(x)

g(g(f–1 (12))) = a(6a + 2) + 2 = 62 M1 Substitute the result into g(x) and = 62

6a2 + 2a – 60 [= 0] M1 Forming and solving a 3-term quadratic

10 A1
a= − or 3
3

Alternative method for Question 9(d)

g(f–1 (x)) = a ( )
x + 4 + 2 + 2 or gg(x) = a ( ax + 2 ) + 2 M1 Substitute their f-1 (x) or g(x) into g(x)

g(g(f–1 (x))) = a a (( ) )
x+4+2 +2 +2 M1 Substitute the result into g(x)

g(g(f–1 (12))) = a(6a + 2) + 2 = 62 M1 Substitute 12 and = 62

6a2 + 2a – 60 [= 0] M1 Forming and solving a 3-term quadratic

10 A1
a= − or 3
3

Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(a) When y = 0 x2 − 4 x − 77 = 0 [⇒ ( x + 7 )( x − 11) = 0 or ( x − 2 ) = 81 ]

2 M1 Substituting y = 0

So x-coordinates are −7 and 11 A1

© UCLES 2021 Page 14 of 17

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(b) Centre of circle C is (2, −3) B1

1 1 M1 For either gradient (M1 sign error,

Gradient of AC is − or Gradient of BC is M0 if x-coordinate(s) in numerator)
3 3

Gradient of tangent at A is 3 or Gradient of tangent at B is −3 M1 For either perpendicular gradient

Equations of tangents are y = 3x + 21, y = −3x + 33 A1 For either equation

Meet when 3x + 21 = −3x + 33 M1 OR: (centre of circle has x coordinate 2) so x

coordinate of point of intersection is 2

Coordinates of point of intersection (2, 27) A1

Alternative method for Question 10(b)

dy B1
Implicit differentiation: 2 y seen
dx

dy dy M1 Fully differentiated = 0 with at least one term

2x − 4 + 2 y +6 =0
dx dx involving y differentiated correctly

Gradient of tangent at A is 3 or Gradient of tangent at B is −3 M1 For either gradient

Equations of tangents are y = 3x + 21, y = −3x + 33 A1 For either equation

Meet when 3x + 21 = −3x + 33 M1 OR: (centre of circle has x coordinate 2) so x

coordinate of point of intersection is 2

Coordinates of point of intersection (2, 27) A1

© UCLES 2021 Page 15 of 17

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(a) dy −0.5 B1 B1 B1 All correct with 1 error, B2 if all correct

= 3 ( 3x + 4 ) − 1
dx

1 *M1 Substituting x = 4 into a differentiated expression and

Gradient of tangent = − and Gradient of normal = 4
4 using m1 m2 =−1

Equation of line is (y – 4) = 4(x – 4) or evaluate c DM1 With (4, 4) and their gradient of normal

So y = 4x – 12 A1

11(b) 3 (3x + 4 )
−0.5
−1 = 0 M1 dy
Setting their =0
dx

Solving as far as x = M1 dy −0.5

Where contains a ( bx + c ) a, b, c any values
dx

5  5 
0.5
5 13 A1
x= , y = 2 3× + 4 − =
3  3  3 3

11(c) d2 y 9 −1.5 M1 dy dy
= − ( 3x + 4 ) Differentiating their OR checking to find +ve
dx 2
2 dx dx
5
and -ve either side of their x =
3

5 d2 y A1
At x = is negative so the point is a maximum
3 dx 2

© UCLES 2021 Page 16 of 17

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(d) 4 1 B1 B1 B1 for each correct term (unsimplified)

Area =   2 ( 3 x + 4 ) − x dx =  ( 3x + 4 ) − x 2
0.5 1.5
  9 2

4 1 2  4 1.5 256 32 M1 Substituting limits 0 and 4 into an expression obtained

 (16 ) − ( 4 )  − ( 4 ) =
1.5
−8− by integrating y
9 2  9 9 9

8 A1 152
16 Or
9 9

© UCLES 2021 Page 17 of 17

Cambridge International AS & A Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/12
Paper 1 Pure Mathematics 1 May/June 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2021 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 22 printed pages.

© UCLES 2021 [Turn over

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the specific content of the
mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the scope of the
syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the question as
indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may be limited
according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in
mind.

© UCLES 2021 Page 2 of 22

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Mathematics Specific Marking Principles

1 Unless a particular method has been specified in the question, full marks may be awarded for any correct method. However, if a calculation is required then
no marks will be awarded for a scale drawing.

2 Unless specified in the question, answers may be given as fractions, decimals or in standard form. Ignore superfluous zeros, provided that the degree of
accuracy is not affected.

3 Allow alternative conventions for notation if used consistently throughout the paper, e.g. commas being used as decimal points.

4 Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored (isw).

5 Where a candidate has misread a number in the question and used that value consistently throughout, provided that number does not alter the difficulty or
the method required, award all marks earned and deduct just 1 mark for the misread.

6 Recovery within working is allowed, e.g. a notation error in the working where the following line of working makes the candidate’s intent clear.

© UCLES 2021 Page 3 of 22

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons
outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea
must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula
without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more ‘method’ steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise;
and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on
an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full
credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are
given for correct work only.

• A or B marks are given for correct work only (not for results obtained from incorrect working) unless follow through is allowed (see abbreviation FT above).
• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if the answer is correct to 3 significant figures or would be correct to 3 significant figures if rounded (1
decimal place for angles in degrees).
• The total number of marks available for each question is shown at the bottom of the Marks column.
• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not result in loss of marks unless the guidance indicates otherwise.
• Square brackets [ ] around text or numbers show extra information not needed for the mark to be awarded.

© UCLES 2021 Page 4 of 22

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Abbreviations

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no ‘follow through’ from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen Or Implied

SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the
light of a particular circumstance)

WWW Without Wrong Working

AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2021 Page 5 of 22

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1(a) (4x – 3)2 or (4x +(– 3))2 or a = −3 B1 k(4x – 3)2 where k ≠ 1 scores B0 but mark final answer, allow
recovery.

+ 1 or b = 1 B1

1(b) [For one root] k = 1 or ‘their b’ B1 FT Either by inspection or solving or from

242 – 4 × 16 × (10 – k) = 0 WWW

3 B1 SC B2 for correct final answer WWW.

[ Root or x =] or 0.75
4

© UCLES 2021 Page 6 of 22

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

2(a) 1 B1 Allow shift and allow by 1 in x-direction or [parallel to/on/in/

Translation   along/against] the x-axis or horizontally.
0 ‘Translation by 1 to the right’ only, scores B0

Stretch B1 Stretch. SC B2 for amplitude doubled.

Factor 2 in y-direction B1 With/by factor 2 in y-direction or [parallel to/on/in/along/against]

the y-axis or vertically or with x axis invariant
‘With/by factor 2 upwards’ only, scores B0.
Accept SF as an abbreviation for scale factor.

3 Note: Transformations can be in either order

2(b) [−sin 6x][ + 15x] or [sin(−6x)][ + 15x] OE B1 B1 Accept an unsimplified version. ISW.
B1 for each correct component – square brackets indicate each
required component.

If B0, SC B1 for either sin(−2x) + 5x or –sin(2x) + 5x or

 2  5
sin 6x – 15x or sin  − x  + x
 3  3

© UCLES 2021 Page 7 of 22

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(a) 1.2679 B1 AWRT. ISW if correct answer seen. 3 – 3 scores B0

3(b) 1.7321 B1 AWRT. ISW if correct answer seen.

3(c) Sight of 2 or 2.0000 or two in reference to the gradient *B1

This is because the gradient at E is the limit of the gradients of the DB1 Allow it gets nearer/approaches/tends/almost/approximately 2
chords as the x-value tends to 3 or ꝺx tends to 0.

Question Answer Marks Guidance

4 [Coefficient of x or p =] 480 B1 SOI. Allow 480x even in an expansion.

 1  3 k 
2 M1 Appropriate term identified and selected.
 Term in x or q =  [10 ×] ( 2 x )  x 2 
   

[10 × 23k2 =] 80k2 A1 80k 2

Allow
x

p = 6q used (480 = 6 × 80k2 or 80 = 80k2) M1 1

Correct link used for their coefficient of x and (p and q) with
x
no x’s.

[k2 = 1 ⇒] k = ±1 A1 A0 if a range of values given. Do not allow ± 1 .

© UCLES 2021 Page 8 of 22

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(a) ff(x) = 2(2x2 + 3)2 + 3 M1 Condone = 0.

8x4 + 24x2 + 21 A1 ISW if correct answer seen. Condone = 0.

5(b) 8x4 + 24x2 + 21 = 34x2 + 19 ⇒ 8x4 + 24x2 – 34x2 + 21 – 19 [= 0] M1 Equating 34x3 + 19 to their 3-term ff(x) and collect all terms on
one side condone ± sign errors.

8x4 – 10x2 + 2[= 0] A1

[2](x2 – 1)(4x2 – 1) M1 Attempt to solve 3-term quartic or 3-term quadratic by

factorisation, formula or completing the square or factor theorem.

 2 1  1 A1 If factorising, factors must expand to give 8x4 or 4x4 4 or their ax4

 x = 1 or 4 leading to  x = 1 or x = 2 otherwise M0A0 due to calculator use.
 
1 1
Condone ±1, ± but not or 1 .
2 4

© UCLES 2021 Page 9 of 22

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6 1 B1 SOI
Gradient AB =
2

1 *M1 Equating given perpendicular bisector with the line through

Lines meet when −2 x + 4 = ( x − 8) + 3 (8, 3) using their gradient of AB (but not -2) and solving.
2
Solving as far as x = Expect x = 2, y = 0.

Using mid-point to get as far as p = or q = DM1 8+ p 3+ q

Expect = 2 or =0
2 2

p = −4, q = −3 A1 Allow coordinates of B are (−4, −3).

Alternative method for Question 6

1 B1 SOI
Gradient AB =
2

q−3 1 *M1 Equating gradient of AB with their gradient of AB (but not -2) and
= [leading to 2q = p − 2] , using mid-point in equation of perpendicular bisector.
p −8 2
q+3 8+ p 
= −2  +4 [leading to q = −11 − 2 p ]
2  2 

Solving simultaneously their 2 linear equations DM1 Equating and solving 2 correct equations as far as p = or q = .

p = −4, q = −3 A1 Allow coordinates of B are (−4, −3).

© UCLES 2021 Page 10 of 22

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6 Alternative method for Question 6

1 B1
Gradient AB =
2

q −3 1 *M1 Equating gradient of AB with their gradient of AB (but not -2) and
= [leading to p = 2q + 2] , using mid-point in equation of perpendicular bisector.
p −8 2
q+3  5q + 23 
y− = −2 ( x − ( q + 5 ) ) leading to y = −2 x + 2 
2  

5q + 23 DM1 Equating and solving as far as q or p =

their =4q =
2

p = −4, q = −3 A1 Allow coordinates of B are (−4, −3).

© UCLES 2021 Page 11 of 22

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(a) 11 − 5 M1 For substituting (1,5) into circle equation or showing

(5 – 1)2 + (11 – 5)2 = 52 or
5 −1 3
gradient = .
2

For both circle equation and gradient, and proving line is A1 Clear reasoning.
perpendicular and stating that A lies on the circle

Alternative method for Question 7(a)

2 M1 Both equations seen and attempt to solve.

( x − 5) + ( y − 11) = 52 and y − 5 = − ( x − 1)
2 2

3 2 17
May see y = − x +
3 3

Solving simultaneously to obtain (y – 5)2 = 0 or (x – 1)2 = 0 ⇒ 1 A1 Clear reasoning.

root or tangent or discriminant = 0 ⇒ 1 root or tangent

Alternative method for Question 7(a)

dy 10 − 2 x 10 − 2 M1 Attempting implicit differentiation of circle equation and

= = substitute x = 1 and y = 5.
dx 2 y − 22 10 − 22

2 A1 Clear reasoning.
Showing gradient of circle at A is −
3

7(b) Centre is (−3, −1) B1 B1 B1 for each correct co-ordinate.

Equation is (x + 3)2 + (y + 1)2 = 52 B1 FT FT their centre, but not if either (1, 5) or (5, 11). Do not accept
522 .

© UCLES 2021 Page 12 of 22

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(a)  3  B1 SOI
 a + b = 2 × a   b = 2a
 2 

182 = a(b + 3) OE or 2 correct statements about r from the GP, B1 SOI

18 b+3
e.g. r = and b + 3 = 18r or r 2 =
a a

324 = a(2a + 3) ⇒ 2a2 + 3a – 324[= 0] M1 Using the correct connection between AP and GP to form a
or 3-term quadratic with all terms on one side.
b2 + 3b – 648[= 0]
or
6r2 – r – 12[= 0]
or
4d2 + 3d – 162[= 0]

(a – 12)(2a + 27)[= 0] M1 Solving their 3-term quadratic by factorisation, formula or

or completing the square to obtain answers for a, b, r or d.
( b − 24 )( b + 27 ) [ = 0]
or
( 2r − 3)( 3r + 4 ) [ = 0]
or
( d − 6 )( 4d + 27 ) [ = 0]
a = 12, b = 24 A1 WWW. Condone extra ‘solution’ a = −13.5, b = −27 only.

© UCLES 2021 Page 13 of 22

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(b) Common difference d = 6 B1 FT a

SOI. FT their
2

20 M1 Using correct sum formula with their a, their calculated d and 20.
S20 = ( 2 × 12 + 19 × 6 )
2

1380 A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

9 Curve intersects y = 1 at (3, 1) B1 Throughout Question 9: 1 < their 3 < 5

Sight of x = 3

Volume = [ π ]  ( x − 2 ) [ dx ] M1 M1 for showing the intention to integrate ( x − 2 ) .

Condone missing π or using 2 π.

A1 Correct integral. Condone missing π or using 2 π.

[ π ]   1 2
1 2
x − 2 x  or [ π ]  ( x − 2 ) 
2  2 

 52   their 32  M1 Correct use of ‘their 3’ and 5 in an integrated expression.

= [ π ]  − 2 × 5 −  − 2 × their 3   Condone missing π or using 2 π. Condone +c.
 2   2   Can be obtained by integrating and substituting between 5 and 2
5 3 and then 3 and 2 then subtracting.
= [ π]  + as a minimum requirement for their values
2 2 

Volume of cylinder = π × 12 × ( 5 − their 3) [ = 2π ] B1 FT Or by integrating 1 to obtain x (condone y if 5 and their 3 used).

[Volume of solid = 4 π − 2π =] 2π or 6.28 A1 AWRT

© UCLES 2021 Page 14 of 22

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9 Alternative method for Question 9

Curve intersects y = 1 at (3, 1) B1 Sight of x = 3

Volume of solid = π  ( x − 2 ) − 1[ dx ] M1 B1 M1 for showing the intention to integrate ( x − 2 )

B1 for correct integration of –1.
Condone missing π or 2 π for M1 but not for B1.

A1 Correct integral, allow as two integrals.

[ π ]   1 2
1 2
x − 3 x  or [ π ]  ( x − 3)  Condone missing π or using 2 π.
2  2 

 52   their 32  M1 Correct use of ‘their 3’ and 5 in an integrated expression.

= [ π ]  − 3 × 5  −  − 3 × their 3   Condone missing π or using 2 π. Condone +c.
 2   2   Can be obtained by integrating and substituting between 5 and 2
and then 3 and 2 then subtracting.

[Volume of solid = 4 π − 2π =] 2π or 6.28 A1 AWRT

© UCLES 2021 Page 15 of 22

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(a) 1 + sinx 1 − sinx (1 + sinx ) − (1 − sinx )

2 2 *M1 For using a common denominator of (1 − sinx )(1 + sinx ) and
− ≡
1 − sinx 1 + sinx (1 − sinx )(1 + sinx ) reasonable attempt at the numerator(s).

≡
(
1 + 2sinx + sin 2 x − 1 − 2sinx + sin 2 x ) DM1 For multiplying out the numerators correctly. Condone sign errors
for this mark.
(1 − sinx )(1 + sinx )
4sinx 4sinx DM1 For simplifying denominator to cos 2 x .
≡ ≡
1 − sin x cos 2 x
2

4sinx 4tanx A1 AG.

≡ ≡ Do not award A1 if undefined notation such as s, c, t or missing
cosxcosx cosx
x’s used throughout or brackets are missing.

Alternative method for Question 10(a)

4tanx 4sinx 4sinx *M1 sinx

≡ ≡ Using tanx = and cos2 x = 1 − sin 2 x
cosx cos x 1 − sin 2 x
2
cosx

−2 2 DM1 Separating into partial fractions.

≡ +
1 + sinx 1 − sinx

−2 2 DM1 Use of 1-1 or similar

≡1 + + −1
1 + sinx 1 − sinx

1 − sinx 1 + sinx A1
≡− +
1 + sinx 1 − sinx

© UCLES 2021 Page 16 of 22

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(b) 1 *B1 OE. WWW.

cosx =
2

π DB1 Or AWRT 1.05

x=
3

x = 0 from tanx = 0 or sinx = 0 B1 π

WWW. Condone extra solutions outside the domain 0 to but
2
B0 if any inside.

Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(a) dy M1 dy
= 0 so 6 ( 3 × 2 − 5) − k × 22 = 0
3
At stationary point Setting given = 0 and substituting x = 2 into it.
dx dx

3 A1 OE
[k = ]
2

11(b) 6 1 *M1 dy
[ y =] ( 3x − 5)4 − kx3 [+c] . A1FT Integrating (increase of power by 1 in at least one term) given dx
4×3 3
1 1
. Expect ( 3x − 5) − x3 .
4

2 2
FT their non zero k.

7 1 1 3 DM1 Using (2,-3.5) in an integrated expression. + c needed.

− = ( 3 × 2 − 5) − × × 23 + c [leading to −3.5 + c = −3.5 ]
4

2 2 3 2 Substitution needs to be seen, simply stating c = 0 is DM0.

1 1 A1 y = or f(x)= must be seen somewhere in solution.

y= ( 3x − 5 )4 − x3
2 2

© UCLES 2021 Page 17 of 22

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(b) Alternative method for Question 11(b)

81 4 541 3 x3 *M1 dy
[ y =] x − x + 675 x 2 − 750 x ( +c ) or -270 x3 − k
3 2 2
A1 FT From dx = 162 x − 810 x − kx − 1350 x − 750 . FT their k
2 2 3

7 81 541 3 DM1 Using (2, -3.5) in an integrated expression. + c needed

− = × 24 − × 2 + 675 × 22 − 750 × 2 + c
2 2 2

81 4 541 3 625 A1 y = or f(x)= must be seen somewhere in solution.

y= x − x + 675 x 2 − 750 x +
2 2 2

11(c) B2,1,0 FT FT their k.

[3 ×] 18 ( 3x − 5)2  [ −2kx ] Square brackets indicate each required component.
B2 for fully correct, B1 for one error or one missing component,
B0 for 2 or more errors.

Alternative method for Question 11(c)

486 x 2 − 1623 x + 1350 or −1620 x − 2kx B2,1,0 FT FT their k.

B2 for fully correct, B1 for one error, B0 for 2 or more errors.

11(d)  d2 y  M1 OE. Substituting x = 2 into their second differential or other valid

=  54 ( 3 × 2 − 5 ) − 4k or 48
2
[At x = 2]  2 method.
 dx 

[> 0] Minimum A1 WWW

© UCLES 2021 Page 18 of 22

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

12(a) ˆ = 2π], [ PAQ

[By symmetry] [6 × PAQ ˆ =] 2π÷6, M1

Explaining that there are six sectors around the diagram that make A1 AG
up a complete circle.

Alternative method for Question 12(a)

Using area or circumference of circle centre A ÷ 6 M1 400π 40π

or
6 6

Justification for dividing by 6 followed by comparison with the A1 AG

sector area or arc length.

Alternative method for Question 12(a)

Explain why ∆PAQ is an equilateral triangle M1 Assumption of this scores M0

ˆ = π A1 AG
Using ∆PAQ is an equilateral triangle ⸫ PAQ
3

Alternative method for Question 12(a)

2π M1
Using the internal angle of a regular hexagon =
3
ˆ = 2π , equilateral triangles
ˆ + OAB
Or FAO
3

A1 AG
ˆ = 2π —  π + 2π + π  = π
PAQ  
 2 3 2 3

© UCLES 2021 Page 19 of 22

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

12(a) Alternative method for Question 12(a)

20 M1
Sinθ = , with θ clearly identified
40

π π ˆ
ˆ and by similar triangles = PAQ A1 AG
θ = , 2θ = = FAO
6 3

12(b) Each straight section of rope has length 40 cm B1 SOI

π *M1 Use of rθ with r = 20 and θ in radians

Each curved section round each pipe has length rθ = 20 ×
3

Total length = 6 × ( ( their 40 ) + kπ ) DM1 6 × (their straight section + their curved section).
Their curved section must be from acceptable use of rθ – this
could now be numeric.

240 + 40π or 366 (AWRT) (cm) A1 Or directly: (6 × diameter) + circumference

© UCLES 2021 Page 20 of 22

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

12(c) 1 π 1 B1
[Triangle area =] × 40 × 40 × sin   or × 40 × 20 3 or
2 3
  2
400 3 or 693(AWRT)

[Total area of hexagon = 6 × 400 3 =] 2400 3 B1 3

Condone 4800
2

Alternative method for Question 12(c)

1 π B1
[Trapezium area =] × ( 40 + 80 ) × 40sin   or 1200 3 or 2080
2 3
(AWRT)

[Total area of hexagon = 2 × 1200 3 =] 2400 3 B1 √3

Condone 4800
2

Alternative method for Question 12(c)

Area of triangle ABC = 400 3 or 693 (AWRT) or B1

4 × Area of half of triangle ABC = 4 ×200 3 or 1390 (AWRT)
or Area of rectangle ABDE = 1600 3 or 2770 (AWRT)

[Total area of hexagon = 2 × 400 3 +1600 3 =] 2400 3 B1 √3

Condone 4800
Or [= 4 ×200 3 +1600 =] 2400 3 2

If B0B0, SC B1 can be scored for sight of 4160 (AWRT) as final

answer.

© UCLES 2021 Page 21 of 22

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

12(d) Each rectangle area = 40 × 20 (= 800) B1 SOI, e.g. by sight of 4800

1 2 1 π  200π  B1 SOI.
Each sector area = r θ = × 202 ×  =
2 2 3 3 

Total area = 2400 3 + 4800 + 400π or 10 200 (cm2) (AWRT) B1 Or directly: part (c) + 6800 + area circle radius 20.

© UCLES 2021 Page 22 of 22

Cambridge International AS & A Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/13
Paper 1 Pure Mathematics 1 May/June 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2021 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 17 printed pages.

© UCLES 2021 [Turn over

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the specific content of the
mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the scope of the
syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the question as
indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may be limited
according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in
mind.

© UCLES 2021 Page 2 of 17

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Mathematics Specific Marking Principles

1 Unless a particular method has been specified in the question, full marks may be awarded for any correct method. However, if a calculation is required
then no marks will be awarded for a scale drawing.

2 Unless specified in the question, answers may be given as fractions, decimals or in standard form. Ignore superfluous zeros, provided that the degree of
accuracy is not affected.

3 Allow alternative conventions for notation if used consistently throughout the paper, e.g. commas being used as decimal points.

4 Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored (isw).

5 Where a candidate has misread a number in the question and used that value consistently throughout, provided that number does not alter the difficulty or
the method required, award all marks earned and deduct just 1 mark for the misread.

6 Recovery within working is allowed, e.g. a notation error in the working where the following line of working makes the candidate’s intent clear.

© UCLES 2021 Page 3 of 17

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons
outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea
must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula
without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more ‘method’ steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise;
and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on
an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full
credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are
given for correct work only.

• A or B marks are given for correct work only (not for results obtained from incorrect working) unless follow through is allowed (see abbreviation FT above).
• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if the answer is correct to 3 significant figures or would be correct to 3 significant figures if rounded (1
decimal place for angles in degrees).
• The total number of marks available for each question is shown at the bottom of the Marks column.
• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not result in loss of marks unless the guidance indicates otherwise.
• Square brackets [ ] around text or numbers show extra information not needed for the mark to be awarded.

© UCLES 2021 Page 4 of 17

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Abbreviations

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no ‘follow through’ from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen Or Implied

SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the
light of a particular circumstance)

WWW Without Wrong Working

AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2021 Page 5 of 17

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 8 B1 Allow any correct form

f ( x ) = 2 x + x
3
[ +c ]

7 = 16 + 4 + c M1 Substitute f(2) = 7 into an integral.

c must be present. Expect c = ‒13

8 A1 Allow y = , f ( x ) or y can appear earlier in

f ( x ) = 2 x3 + − 13
x answer

Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 B2, 1, 0 Expect ( 2 x − 1)1/ 2 − 2

f ( x ) = 
 −1  (( 2 x − 1)1/2 ) × 1
3
3
× 2 ×  ( −2 )
2

( 2 x − 1)1/ 2 − 2  0 → 2 x − 1  4 or 2 x − 1 < 4 M1 SOI. Rearranging and then squaring, must have

power of ½ not present
Allow ‘=0’at this stage but do not allow ‘ ≥ 0’ or
‘ ˃ 0’
If ‘–2’ missed then must see ⩽ or < for the M1

Value [of a] is 2½ or a = 2½ A1 5
WWW, OE e.g. , 2.5
2
Do not allow from ‘=0’ unless some reference to
negative gradient.

© UCLES 2021 Page 6 of 17

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3 x 2 − 4 x + 3 = mx − 6 leading to x 2 − x ( 4 + m ) + 9 *M1 Equating and gathering terms.

May be implied on the next line.

b 2 − 4ac leading to ( 4 + m )2 − 4 × 9 DM1 SOI. Use of the discriminant with their a, b and
c

4 + m = ±6 or ( m − 2 )( m + 10 ) = 0 leading to m = 2 or −10 A1 Must come from b 2 − 4ac = 0 SOI

Substitute both their m values into their equation in line 1 DM1

m = 2 leading to x =3 ; m = ‒10 leading to x = ‒3 A1

(3, 0), (‒3, 24) A1 Accept 'when x = 3, y = 0; when x = ‒3, y = 24'

If final A0A0 scored, SC B1 for one point
correct WWW

Alternative method for Question 3

dy *M1
= 2x − 4 → 2x − 4 = m
dx

x2 − 4 x + 3 = ( 2 x − 4) x − 6 DM1

x 2 − 4 x + 3 = 2 x 2 − 4 x − 6 → 9 = x 2 → x = ±3 A1

y = 0, 24 or (3, 0), (‒3, 24) A1

Substitute both their x values into their equation in line 1 DM1 Or substitute both their ( x, y ) into y = mx − 6

When x = 3, m = 2; when x = ‒3, m = ‒10 A1 If A0, DM1, A0 scored, SC B1 for one point
correct WWW

© UCLES 2021 Page 7 of 17

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(a) tanx + sinx sinx + sinxcosx M1 Multiply numerator and denominator by cos x ,
[ = k ] leading to [= k ] or divide numerator and denominator by tan x or
tanx − sinx sinx − sinxcosx
1 sin x
+1 tanx + tanxcosx
or cos x [=k] or [=k]
1 tanx − tanxcosx
−1
cos x

1 A1 AG, WWW
sinx (1 + cosx ) cos x + 1 cos x tanx (1 + cosx ) 1 + cosx
or . or leading to [= k ]
sinx (1 − cosx ) 1
− 1 cos x tanx (1 − cosx ) 1 − cosx
cos x

4(b) k − k cos x = 1 + cos x leading to k − 1 = k cos x + cos x M1 Gather like terms on LHS and RHS

k −1 A1 WWW, OE
k − 1 = ( k + 1) cos x leading to cos x =
k +1

4(c) Obtaining cos x from their (b) or (a) M1 3

Expect cos x =
5

±0.927 (only solutions in the given range) A1 AWRT. Accept ±0.295π

© UCLES 2021 Page 8 of 17

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(a) ½ × 42 × angle BAD = 10 M1 Use of sector area formula

Angle BAD = 1.25 A1 OE. Accept 0.398π, 71.6o for SC B1 only

5(b) Arc BD = 4 × their1.25 M1 Use of arc length formula. Expect 5.

BC = 4 tan ( their1.25) M1 Expect 12.0(4). May use ACB=0.321 or 18.4o

4 M1 Expect 12.69 ‒ 4 = 8.69. May use ACB.

42 + ( their BC ) − 4
2
CD = − 4 or
cos ( their1.25 )

Perimeter = 5 + 12.0(4) + 8.69 = 25.7 (cm) A1 AWRT

Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(a) f ( x ) = ( x − 1) + 4
2 B1

g ( x ) = ( x + 2) + 9
2 B1

g ( x ) = f ( x + 3) + 5 B1 B1 B1 for each correct element.

Accept p = 3, q = 5

© UCLES 2021 Page 9 of 17

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(b) Translation or Shift B1

 −3  B1 FT If given as 2 single translations both must be

  or acceptable explanation  −3  0
5 described correctly e.g.   &  
0 5
FT from their f ( x + p ) + q or their
f ( x) → g ( x)
 1   −2 
Do not accept   or  
 4  9 

© UCLES 2021 Page 10 of 17

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(a) ( a − x )6 = a 6 − 6a5 x + 15a 4 x 2 − 20a3 x3 + … B2, 1, 0 Allow extra terms.

Terms may be listed. Allow a 6 x0 .

7(b)  2  M1 Attempting to find 2 terms in x 2

 ax 
(
4 2 3 3
) 2 4
(
 1 +  …15a x − 20a x + … leading to  x  15a − 40a
2
)
15a 4 − 40a 2 = −20 leading to 15a 4 − 40a 2 + 20 [ = 0] A1 Terms on one side of the equation

( 5a 2
)(
− 10 3a 2 − 2 ) [ = 0] M1 OE.
M1 for attempted factorisation or solving for a2
or u (=a2) using e.g. formula or completing the
square

2 B1 B1 OE exact form only

a = ± 2, ±
3 2
If B0B0 scored then SC B1 for 2, WWW
3
or ±1.41,±0,816 WWW

© UCLES 2021 Page 11 of 17

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(a)  fg ( x ) = 1 / ( 2 x + 1) − 1
2 B1 SOI

1 / ( 2 x + 1) − 1 = 3 leading to 4 ( 2 x + 1) = 1
2 2 M1 Setting fg ( x ) = 3 and reaching a stage before
1 2 x + 1 = ±½ or reaching a 3 term quadratic in
or = [ ± ] 2 or 16 x 2 + 16 x + 3 = 0 x
( 2 x + 1)

2 x + 1 = ±½ or 2 x + 1 = −½ or ( 4 x + 1)( 4 x + 3) [ = 0] A1 Or formula or completing square on quadratic

3 A1
x=− only
4

Alternative method for Question 8(a)

x2 − 1 = 3 M1

g ( x ) = −2 A1

1 M1
= −2
( 2 x + 1)
3 A1
x=− only
4

© UCLES 2021 Page 12 of 17

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(b) 1 1 1 *M1 Obtain 2 x + 1 or 2 y + 1 as the subject

( 2 x + 1) leading to 2 x + 1 = [ ± ]
2
y= − 1 leading to =
( 2 x + 1)
2
y +1 y +1

1 1 DM1 Make x ( or y ) the subject

x = [±] −
2 y +1 2

1 1 A1 x +1 1  −x 1 1
− − OE e.g. – – , –  + + 
2 x +1 2 2x + 2 2  4x + 4 4 2 

Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(a) 24 a M1 Form an equation using a numerical form of the

ar = × percentage and correct formula for u2 and S∞
100 1 − r

100r 2 − 100r + 24 [ = 0] A1 OE. All 3 terms on one side of an equation.

2 3 A1 Dependent on factors or formula seen from their

( 20r − 8)( 5r − 3) [ = 0] → r= , quadratic.
5 5

© UCLES 2021 Page 13 of 17

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(b) 3 × {( a + 4 d )} = {( 2 ( a + 1) + 11( d + 1) )} *M1 SOI Attempt to cross multiply with contents of

at least one { } correct

Simplifies to a + d = 13 A1

5 5 *M1 SOI Attempt to cross multiply with contents of

   
{ }
 2  × 3{( 2a + 4d )} =  2  × 2 ( 4 ( a + 1) + 4 ( d + 1) ) at least one { } correct

Simplifies to −a + 2d = 8 A1

Solve 2 linear equations simultaneously DM1 Elimination or substitution expected

d = 7, a = 6 A1 SC B1 for a=6, d=7 without complete working

Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(a) 3 5 M1 Attempting to find required gradients, sides or

Gradient of AB = − , gradient of BC = or lengths of all 3 sides or vectors vectors
5 3

mab mbc = −1 or Pythagoras or AB.BC =0 or cos ABC = 0 from cosine rule A1 WWW

10(b) Centre = mid-point of AC = (2,4) B1

© UCLES 2021 Page 14 of 17

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(c) ( x − their x c )
2
+ ( y − their yc )  = r 2  or ( their xc − x ) + ( their yc − y ) =  r 2 
2 2 2 M1 Use of circle equation with their centre

( x − 2 )2 + ( y − 4 )2 = 17 A1 Accept x 2 − 4 x + y 2 − 8 y + 3 = 0 OE

10(d)  x+3 y+0  −1  M1 Use of mid-point formula, vectors, steps on a

 ,  = ( 2, 4 ) or BE = 2BD = 2  4  diagram
 2 2   
Or Equation of BE is y = −4 ( x − 3) or y − 4 = −4 ( x − 2 ) leading to y = −4 x + 12 May be seen to find x coordinate at E
Substitute equation of BE into circle and form a 3-term quadratic.

 3   −2   1  A1 E = (1, 8)
( x, y ) = (1,8) or OE =   +   =   Accept without working for both marks SC B2
 0  8  8

1 B1 Or gradient of BE = -4
Gradient of BD, m, = ‒4 or gradient AC = = gradient of tangent
4

Equation of tangent is y − 8 = ¼ ( x − 1) OE M1 A1 For M1, equation through their E or (1, 8) (not,

−1
A, B or C) and with gradient
their − 4

© UCLES 2021 Page 15 of 17

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(a) dy 1 −1/2 1 2 −3/2 B1 B1 Allow any correct unsimplified form

= x − k x
dx 2 2

1 −1/2 1 2 −3/2 1 1 M1 OE. Set to zero and one correct algebraic step
x − k x = 0 leading to x −1/2 = k 2 x −3/2 towards the solutions.
2 2 2 2
dy
must only have 2 terms.
dx

(k 2
, 2k ) A1

11(b) dy  1 1  3 B1 OE
When x = 4k2, = − =
dx  4k 16k  16k

 1  5k B1 k
y =  2k + k 2 ×  = OE. Accept 2k +
 2k  2 2

5k 3 5k 3 M1 Use of line equation with their gradient and

Equation of tangent is y − =
2 16k
( )
x − 4k 2 or y = mx + c → =
2 16k
4k 2 + c ( ) ( 4k 2 , their y ) ,

 5k 3k  7k 7k A1 OE
When x = 0, y =  − =  or from y = mx + c, c =
2 4  4 4

© UCLES 2021 Page 16 of 17

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(c) 3 B1 Any unsimplified form

 1 2
− 
1
2x 2 2 2
1
  x + k x  dx =
2 2 + 2k x
  3
 

 16k 3   9k 3  M1 9 2
 + 4k 3  −  + 3k 3  Apply limits k → 4k 2 to an integration of y.
4
 3   4 
M0 if volume attempted.

49k 3 A1 OE. Accept 4.08 k 3

12

© UCLES 2021 Page 17 of 17

Cambridge International AS & A Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/12
Paper 1 Pure Mathematics 1 March 2021
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the March 2021 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 14 printed pages.

© UCLES 2021 [Turn over

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the specific content of the
mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the scope of the
syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the question as
indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may be limited
according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in
mind.

© UCLES 2021 Page 2 of 14

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED

Mathematics Specific Marking Principles

1 Unless a particular method has been specified in the question, full marks may be awarded for any correct method. However, if a calculation is required
then no marks will be awarded for a scale drawing.

2 Unless specified in the question, answers may be given as fractions, decimals or in standard form. Ignore superfluous zeros, provided that the degree of
accuracy is not affected.

3 Allow alternative conventions for notation if used consistently throughout the paper, e.g. commas being used as decimal points.

4 Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored (isw).

5 Where a candidate has misread a number in the question and used that value consistently throughout, provided that number does not alter the difficulty or
the method required, award all marks earned and deduct just 1 mark for the misread.

6 Recovery within working is allowed, e.g. a notation error in the working where the following line of working makes the candidate’s intent clear.

© UCLES 2021 Page 3 of 14

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons
outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea
must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula
without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more ‘method’ steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise;
and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on
an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full
credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are
given for correct work only.

• A or B marks are given for correct work only (not for results obtained from incorrect working) unless follow through is allowed (see abbreviation FT above).
• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if the answer is correct to 3 significant figures or would be correct to 3 significant figures if rounded (1
decimal place for angles in degrees).
• The total number of marks available for each question is shown at the bottom of the Marks column.
• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not result in loss of marks unless the guidance indicates otherwise.
• Square brackets [ ] around text or numbers show extra information not needed for the mark to be awarded.

© UCLES 2021 Page 4 of 14

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
Abbreviations

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no ‘follow through’ from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen Or Implied

SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the
light of a particular circumstance)

WWW Without Wrong Working

AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2021 Page 5 of 14

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1(a) 1 + 5 x + 10 x 2 B1

1(b) 1 − 12 x + 60 x 2 B2, 1, 0 B2 all correct, B1 for two correct components.

1(c) (1 + 5 x + 10 x )(1 − 12 x + 60 x )
2 2
leading to 60 ‒ 60 + 10 M1 3 products required

10 A1 Allow 10x2

Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 u = 2x − 3 leading to u 4 − 3u 2 − 4 [ = 0 ] M1 Or u = ( 2 x − 3)2 leading to u 2 − 3u − 4 = 0

[ ]

(u 2
)(
− 4 u2 + 1 ) [ = 0] M1 Or ( u − 4 )( u + 1) [ = 0]

2 x − 3 = [ ±] 2 A1

1 5 A1
x= , only
2 2

© UCLES 2021 Page 6 of 14

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3 tanθ + 2sinθ = 3tanθ − 6sinθ leading to 2tanθ − 8sinθ [ = 0] M1 OE

2sinθ − 8sinθ cosθ ( = 0 ) leading to [ 2] sinθ (1 − 4cosθ ) [ = 0] M1

1 A1 Ignore sin θ = 0
cos θ =
4

θ = 75.5° only A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

4 x + kx + 6 = 3x + k leading to x 2 + x ( k − 3 ) + ( 6 − k ) [ = 0 ]
2 M1 Eliminate y and form 3-term quadratic.

( k − 3)
2
− 4 ( 6 − k ) [ > 0] M1 OE. Apply b 2 − 4 ac .

k − 2k − 15[ > 0] A1 Form 3-term quadratic.

2

( k + 3)( k − 5) [ > 0] A1 Or k = − 3, 5 from use of formula or completing

square.

k < − 3, k > 5 A1 FT Or any correct alternative notation, do not allow

 , .
FT for their outside regions.

© UCLES 2021 Page 7 of 14

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(a) (Stretch) (factor 3 in y direction or parallel to the y-axis) B1 B1

4 B1 B1 Allow Translation 4 (units) in x direction.

(Translation)   N.B. Transformations can be given in either order.
0

5(b) [y =] 3f(x ‒ 4) B1 B1 B1 for 3 , B1 for (x ‒ 4) with no extra terms.

Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(a) dy B1
At x = 1, =6
dx

dx  dx dy  1 1 M1 A1 Chain rule used correctly.

= × = ×3= Allow alternative and minimal notation.
dt  dy dt  6 2

© UCLES 2021 Page 8 of 14

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(b)  6 ( 3 x − 2 ) −2  B1 B1
[ y = ]   ÷ ( 3 ) [ + c ]
 − 2 

−3 = −1 + c M1 Substitute x = 1, y = − 3. c must be present.

y = − ( 3x − 2 ) − 2
−2 A1 OE. Allow f(x)=

Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(a)  f ( x ) =  ( x + 1) + 2
2
B1 B1 Accept a = 1, b = 2 .

Range [of f is ( y )]  2 B1FT OE. Do not allow x  2 , FT on their b.

7(b) y = ( x + 1) + 2 leading to x = [ ± ] y − 2 − 1
2 M1 Or by using the formula. Allow one sign error.

f −1 ( x ) = − x − 2 − 1 A1

© UCLES 2021 Page 9 of 14

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(c) ( )
2 x 2 + 2 x + 3 + 1 = 13 B1 Or using a correct completed square form of f(x).

2x + 4x − 6[ = 0] leading to ( 2 )( x − 1)( x + 3) [ = 0] B1 Or x = 1, x = − 3 using formula or completing

2

square. Must reach 2 solutions.

x = −3 only B1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(a) Centre of circle is (4, 5) B1 B1

r 2 = ( 7 − 4 ) + (1 − 5 )
2 2 M1 OE. Either using their centre and A or C or using A
and C and dividing by 2.

r =5 A1 FT FT on their (4, 5) if used.

Equation is ( x − 4 ) + ( y − 5 ) = 25
2 2 A1 OE. Allow 52 for 25.

8(b) 9−5 4 B1 FT FT for use of their centre.

Gradient of radius = =
7−4 3

3 B1 − 3 x 57
Equation of tangent is y − 9 = − (x − 7) or y = +
4 4 4

© UCLES 2021 Page 10 of 14

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(a)(i) cos θ 1 B1
=
1 − r cos θ

1 − r = cos 2θ leading to r = 1 − cos 2θ M1 Eliminate fractions

r = sin 2θ leading to 2nd term = cos θ sin 2θ A1 AG

9(a)(ii) M1 Evidence of correct substitution, use of

 π    2  π   Sn formula
12

cos   1 −  sin    
 3    0.5 1 − ( 0.75) 
12
 3    and attempt to evaluate
S12 = =
2  π 1 − 0.75
1 − sin  
3

1.937 A1

9(b) [ d =] cosθ sin 2

θ − cosθ M1 Use of d = u − u
2 1

1 A1
−
8

1 1 M1 Use of a + 84d with a calculated value of d

[85th term =] + 84 × −
2 8

−10 A1

© UCLES 2021 Page 11 of 14

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(a)
Δ ADE =
1
( ka ) sin
2 π M1 Attempt to find the area of ΔADE .
2 6

1 2 2 A1 OE.
k a
4

1 2 π B1
Sector ABC = a
2 6

1 2 2 1 2π M1 OE. For 2 × ΔADE = sectorABC with at least one

2× k a = a
4 2 6 correct area.

 π A1
k =  = 0.7236
 6
5

10(b) 1 1 M1 Condone omission of ‘2’ or ‘1/2’ on LHS for M1

( ka ) sin θ = a 2θ
2
2× only.
2 2

θ A1
k2 =
2 sin θ

1 1 A1 1
k2 > leading to <k < 1 OE. Accept k > or k > 0.707 (AWRT) or
2 2 2
1
0.707(AWRT) < k < 1 or k > OE
2

© UCLES 2021 Page 12 of 14

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(a)  −1 − 
3 −
3

9  x 2 − 4 x 2  = 0 leading to 9 x 2 ( x − 4 ) = 0 M1 OE. Set y to zero and attempt to solve.

 

x = 4 only A1 From use of a correct method.

11(b) dy  1 − 32 − 
5
1 −
3
−
5
= 9  − x + 6x 2  B2, 1, 0 B2; all 3 terms correct: 9, − x 2 and 6x 2
dx  2  2
B1; 2 of the 3 terms correct

 1 + 6 = 9 M1 Using their x = 4 in their differentiated expression

At x = 4 gradient = 9  −  and attempt to find equation of the tangent.
 16 32  8

9 A1 9x 9
Equation is y = (x − 4) or y = − OE
8 8 2

11(c) −
5
 1  M1 dy
Set their to zero and an attempt to solve.
9x  − x + 6 = 0
2
dx
 2 

x = 12 A1 Condone ( ±)12 from use of a correct method.

© UCLES 2021 Page 13 of 14

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme March 2021
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(d)  1 1  B2, 1, 0 1
−
1
−
 −21
− 
3
 x 2
4 x 2  x 2 −4 x 2
,
 
9 x − 4 x 2


dx = 9  1 −
1 
B2; all 3 terms correct: 9,
1
−
1
 −  2 2
 2 2 
B1; 2 of the 3 terms correct

 8  M1 Apply limits their 4 → 9 to an integrated

9  6 +  − ( 4 + 4 )  expression with no consideration of other areas.
 3 

6 A1 Use of π scores A0

© UCLES 2021 Page 14 of 14

Cambridge International AS & A Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/11
Paper 1 Pure Mathematics 1 October/November 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2020 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some
Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 16 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the specific content of the
mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the scope of the
syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the question as
indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may be limited
according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in
mind.

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 16

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Mathematics Specific Marking Principles

1 Unless a particular method has been specified in the question, full marks may be awarded for any correct method. However, if a calculation is required then
no marks will be awarded for a scale drawing.

2 Unless specified in the question, answers may be given as fractions, decimals or in standard form. Ignore superfluous zeros, provided that the degree of
accuracy is not affected.

3 Allow alternative conventions for notation if used consistently throughout the paper, e.g. commas being used as decimal points.

4 Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored (isw).

5 Where a candidate has misread a number in the question and used that value consistently throughout, provided that number does not alter the difficulty or
the method required, award all marks earned and deduct just 1 mark for the misread.

6 Recovery within working is allowed, e.g. a notation error in the working where the following line of working makes the candidate’s intent clear.

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 16

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons
outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea
must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without
the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise;
and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on an
earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full
credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are
given for correct work only.

• A or B marks are given for correct work only (not for results obtained from incorrect working) unless follow through is allowed (see abbreviation FT
above).
• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if the answer is correct to 3 significant figures or would be correct to 3 significant figures if rounded (1
decimal place for angles in degrees).
• The total number of marks available for each question is shown at the bottom of the Marks column.
• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not result in loss of marks unless the guidance indicates otherwise.
• Square brackets [ ] around text or numbers show extra information not needed for the mark to be awarded.

© UCLES 2020 Page 4 of 16

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Abbreviations
AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent
AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)
CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no ‘follow through’ from a previous error is allowed)
CWO Correct Working Only
ISW Ignore Subsequent Working
SOI Seen Or Implied
SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the
light of a particular circumstance)
WWW Without Wrong Working
AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2020 Page 5 of 16

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 2 x 2 + 5 = mx − 3 → 2 x 2 − mx + 8 ( = 0 ) B1 Form 3-term quadratic

m 2 − 64 M1 Find b 2 − 4 ac .

−8 < m < 8 A1 Accept (-8, 8) and equality included

Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 B1 B1
( y = )  − ( x − 3)
−1
 + 1 x2  ( +c )
  2 

M1 Substitute x = 2, y = 7 into an integrated expansion (c present).

7=1+2+c
Expect c = 4

−1 1 A1 OE
y = − ( x − 3) + x 2 +4
2

© UCLES 2020 Page 6 of 16

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3 B1 dr
(Derivative =) 4πr 2 (→ 400π) SOI Award this mark for
dV

50 M1 Can be in terms of r
their derivative

1 A1 AWRT
or 0.0398
8π

Question Answer Marks Guidance

4 B1 B1
( y = ) [3] + [ 2] cos θ 
1
B1
 2 

Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(a)  a 
2
3  a 
3 B1 B1 SOI Can be seen in an expansion
( ) ( )
4
6C 2 ×  2 x 2  ×  , 6C 3 ×  2 x 2  × 
   ( x )     ( x ) 
   

15 × 2 4 × a 2 = 20 × 23 × a 3 M1 SOI Terms must be from a correct series

15 × 24 3 A1 OE
a= 3
=
20 × 2 2

© UCLES 2020 Page 7 of 16

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(b) 0 B1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

6 dy  1 −1/2  B1 B1
=  25 − x 2
dx  2
( )  × [ −2 x ]


−x 4 x2 16 M1 4
= → = Set = and square both sides
( 25 − x ) 2 1/2 3
2
3 25 − x 9

( )
16 25 − x 2 = 9 x 2 → 25 x 2 = 400 → x = ( ± ) 4 A1

When x = ‒ 4, y = 5 → (‒ 4, 5) A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 8 of 16

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(a)  sin θ sin θ  sin θ (1 + sin θ ) − sin θ (1 − sin θ ) *M1

 − = Put over a single common denominator
 − θ
1 sin 1 + θ 
sin 1 − sin 2θ

2sin 2θ DM1
Replace 1 − sin 2 θ by cos 2 θ and simplify numerator
cos 2θ

2tan 2θ A1 AG

7(b) 2 tan 2 θ = 8 → tanθ = ( ± ) 2 B1 SOI

B1 FT on 180 – 1st solution (with justification)

(θ = ) 63.4°, 116.6°
B1 FT

Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(a) a a B1
S= , 2S = SOI at least one correct
1− r 1− R

2a a M1
= SOI
1− r 1− R

2 − 2R = 1 − r → r = 2R − 1 A1 AG

© UCLES 2020 Page 9 of 16

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(b) ar 2 = aR → ( a )( 2 R − 1) = R ( a )
2 *M1

4 R 2 − 5 R + 1 ( = 0 ) → ( 4 R − 1)( R − 1) ( = 0 ) DM1 Allow use of formula or completing square.

1 A1
R= Allow R = 1 in addition
4

2a A1
S=
3

Alternative method for question 8(b)

ar 2 = aR → ( a ) r 2 = ½ ( r + 1)( a ) *M1 Eliminating 1 variable

DM1 Allow use of formula or completing square. Must solve a

2r 2 − r − 1 ( = 0 ) → ( 2r + 1)( r − 1) ( = 0 )
quadratic.

1 A1
r=− Allow r = 1 in addition
2

2a A1
S=
3

© UCLES 2020 Page 10 of 16

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(a) 4−2 1 B1
mAB = =−
−1 − 3 2

B1 FT 1
Equation of tangent is y − 2 = 2 ( x − 3) (3, 2) with their gradient −
mAB

9(b) AB 2 = 42 + 2 2 = 20 or r 2 = 20 or r = 20 or AB = 20 B1

Equation of circle centre B is ( x − 3) + ( y − 2 ) = 20

2 2 M1 A1 FT their 20 for M1

9(c) ( x − 3)2 + ( 2 x − 6 )2 = their 20 M1 Substitute their y − 2 = 2 x − 6 into their circle, centre B

5 x 2 − 30 x + 25 = 0 or 5 ( x − 3) = 20
2 A1

( 5)( x − 5)( x − 1) or x − 3 = ±2  x = 5, 1 A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 11 of 16

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(a)  r  r M1 A1
 sin θ = →  OC =
 OC  sin θ

r A1
CD = r +
sin θ

10(b) 4 B1 SOI
Radius of arc AB = 4 + = 4 + 8 = 12
π
sin
6

2π 1  π M1 Expect 4π, must use their CD, not 4

(Arc AB =) their 12 × or  AB =  their 12 × 
6 2  6

Perimeter = 24 + 4π A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 12 of 16

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(c) 1 π M1
Area FOC = × 4 × their OC × sin
2 3

8 3 A1

1 2π 2 16π B1
Area sector FOE = × ×4 =
2 3 3

16π A1
Shaded area = 16 3 −
3

Alternative method for question 10(c)

M1 48 or 4 3
FC = ( their OC )2 − 42

1 A1
Area FOC = × 4 × 4 3 = 8 3
2

1 π 2 8π B1
Area of half sector FOE = × ×4 =
2 3 3

16π A1
Shaded area = 16 3 −
3

© UCLES 2020 Page 13 of 16

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(a) fg(x) = ( 2 x + 1) + 3
2 B1 OE

11(b) y = ( 2 x + 1) + 3 → 2 x + 1 = ( ± ) y − 3
2 M1 1st two operations. Allow one sign error or x/y interchanged

1 M1 OE 2nd two operations. Allow one sign error or x/y interchanged

x = (±)
2
( y − 3 −1 )
1 A1 B1 Allow (3, ∞)
( fg −1
( x) = )
2
( )
x − 3 −1 for (x) > 3

11(c) (
gf(x) = 2 x 2 + 3 + 1 ) B1 SOI

( 2 x + 1)2 + 3 − 3 = 2 ( x 2 + 3) + 1 → 2 x2 + 4 x − 6 ( = 0) *M1 Express as 3-term quadratic

( 2 )( x + 3)( x − 1) ( = 0 ) DM1 Or quadratic formula or completing the square

x =1 A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 14 of 16

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

12(a) 1 1 *M1
4x 2 − 2x = 3 − x → x − 4x 2 + 3( = 0) 3-term quadratic. Can be expressed as e.g. u 2 − 4u + 3 (=0)

 1  1  DM1
 x 2 − 1 x 2 − 3  ( = 0 ) or ( u − 1)( u − 3)( = 0 ) Or quadratic formula or completing square
 
  

1 A1
x 2 = 1, 3 SOI

x = 1, 9 A1

Alternative method for question 12(a)

 1
2 *M1
1
 4 x 2  = ( 3 + x )
2
Isolate x2
 

16 x = 9 + 6 x + x 2 → x 2 − 10 x + 9 ( = 0 ) A1 3-term quadratic

DM1 Or formula or completing square on a quadratic obtained by a

( x − 1)( x − 9 ) ( = 0 ) correct method

x = 1, 9 A1

12(b) dy *B1
= 2 x1/2 − 2
dx

dy DB1
or 2 x1/2 − 2 = 0 when x =1 hence B is a stationary point
dx

© UCLES 2020 Page 15 of 16

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

12(c) M1 9

1 1 2
Area of correct triangle =
2
(9 ‒ 3) × 6 or  ( 3 − x )( dx ) = 3x − 2 x
3
 → −18


 3  B1 B1
1
 4x 2 2
 (4 x 2 − 2 x) ( dx ) =  −x 
3
 
 2 

M1
( 72 − 81) −  
64
− 16  Apply limits 4 → their 9 to an integrated expression
 3 

−14 13 A1 OE

Shaded region = 18 − 14 13 = 3 23 A1 OE

© UCLES 2020 Page 16 of 16

Cambridge International AS & A Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/12
Paper 1 Pure Mathematics 1 October/November 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2020 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some
Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 19 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the specific content of the
mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the scope of the
syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the question as
indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may be limited
according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in
mind.

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 19

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Mathematics Specific Marking Principles

1 Unless a particular method has been specified in the question, full marks may be awarded for any correct method. However, if a calculation is required then
no marks will be awarded for a scale drawing.

2 Unless specified in the question, answers may be given as fractions, decimals or in standard form. Ignore superfluous zeros, provided that the degree of
accuracy is not affected.

3 Allow alternative conventions for notation if used consistently throughout the paper, e.g. commas being used as decimal points.

4 Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored (isw).

5 Where a candidate has misread a number in the question and used that value consistently throughout, provided that number does not alter the difficulty or
the method required, award all marks earned and deduct just 1 mark for the misread.

6 Recovery within working is allowed, e.g. a notation error in the working where the following line of working makes the candidate’s intent clear.

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 19

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons
outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea
must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without
the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise;
and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on an
earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full
credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are
given for correct work only.

• A or B marks are given for correct work only (not for results obtained from incorrect working) unless follow through is allowed (see abbreviation FT
above).
• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if the answer is correct to 3 significant figures or would be correct to 3 significant figures if rounded (1
decimal place for angles in degrees).
• The total number of marks available for each question is shown at the bottom of the Marks column.
• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not result in loss of marks unless the guidance indicates otherwise.
• Square brackets [ ] around text or numbers show extra information not needed for the mark to be awarded.

© UCLES 2020 Page 4 of 19

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Abbreviations
AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent
AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)
CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no ‘follow through’ from a previous error is allowed)
CWO Correct Working Only
ISW Ignore Subsequent Working
SOI Seen Or Implied
SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the
light of a particular circumstance)
WWW Without Wrong Working
AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2020 Page 5 of 19

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 Coefficient of x³ in (1 − 2 x ) is −80
5 B1 Can be seen in an expansion but must be simplified
correctly.
Coefficient of x² in (1 − 2 x ) is 40
5 B1

Coefficient of x³ in (1 + kx )(1 − 2 x ) is 40k −80 = 20

5 M1 Uses the relevant two terms to form an equation = 20 and
solves to find k. Condone x³ appearing in some terms if
recovered.

5 A1
(k =)
2

© UCLES 2020 Page 6 of 19

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 −2 p p+2 M1 OE. Using “a, b, c then b² = ac” or a =2p+6 , ar = −2p and

(−2p)² = (2p + 6) × (p + 2) or = ar² = p + 2 to form a correct relationship in terms of p only
2 p + 6 −2 p

( 2 p ² − 10 p − 12 = 0 ) p = 6 A1

a = 18 and r = −⅔ A1

(s∞ ) = their a ÷ (1 − their r) M1 Correct formula used with their values for a and r , r < 1
 5 Both a & r from the same value of p.
 = 18 ÷ 
 3

(s∞ = )10.8 A1 OE. A0 if an extra solution given

2p + 6 2p + 6
SC B2 for s∞ = or ignore any
−2 p p+2
1− 1−
2p + 6 −2 p
subsequent algebraic simplification.

© UCLES 2020 Page 7 of 19

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3 2 x 2 + m ( 2 x + 1) − 6 x − 4 ( = 0 ) *M1 y eliminated and all terms on one side with correct

algebraic steps. Condone ± errors

Using b ² − 4ac on 2 x 2 + x ( 2m − 6 ) + m − 4 ( = 0) DM1 Any use of discriminant with their a, b and c identified
correctly.

4m2 − 32m + 68 or 2m2 − 16m + 34 or m2 − 8m + 17 A1

( 2m − 8 )2 + k or ( m − 4 ) + k or minimum point ( 4, k )
2 DM1 OE. Any valid method attempted on their 3-term quadratic
or finds b ² − 4ac ( = −4, −16 , −64 )

( m − 4 )2 + 1 oe + always > 0 → 2 solutions for all values of m A1 Clear and correct reasoning and conclusion without wrong
working.
or
Minimum point (4,1) + (fn) always > 0 → 2 solutions for all values of m
or
b ² − 4ac < 0 + no solutions → 2 solutions for the original equation for all
values of m

© UCLES 2020 Page 8 of 19

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4 S x and S x +1 M1 Using two values of n in the given formula

a = 5, d = 2 A1 A1

a + (n – 1) d > 200 → 5 + 2(k – 1) > 200 M1 Correct formula used with their a and d to form an equation
or inequality with 200, condone use of n

(k =) 99 A1 Condone ⩾ 99

Alternative method for question 4

n d 1  M1 Equating two correct expressions of S n and equating

( 2a + (n – 1) d ) ≡ n2 + 4n →  = 1 , a − d = 4 
2  2 2  coefficients of n and n2

d = 2, a = 5 A1 A1

a + (n – 1) d > 200 → 5 + 2(k – 1) > 200 M1 Correct formula used with their a and d to form an equation
or inequality with 200, condone use of n

(k =) 99 A1 Condone ⩾ 99

Alternative method for question 4

sumk − sumk −1 → k 2 + 4 k − ( k − 1) 2 − 4 ( k − 1) M1 A1 Using given formula with consecutive expressions

subtracted. Allow k+1 and k.

2k + 3 > 200 or = 200 M1 A1 Simplifying to a linear equation or inequality

(k =) 99 A1 Condone ⩾ 99

© UCLES 2020 Page 9 of 19

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(a) 0 B1

5(b) x+2 4− x 4 B1 B1 OE. Sight of correct inverses.

(f−1(x)) = , (g−1(x)) = or −1
4 x x

x² + 6x – 16 (= 0) B1 Equating inverses and simplifying.

( x + 8 ) and ( x − 2 ) M1 Correct attempt at solution of their 3-term quadratic-

factorising, completing the square or use of formula.

(x =) 2 or −8 A1 Do not accept answers obtained with no method shown.

© UCLES 2020 Page 10 of 19

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(a)  1 sinx  1  B1 Uses “tanx = sinx ÷ cosx” throughout

 −  + 1
 cosx cosx  sinx 

 1 − sinx  1 + sinx   1 − sin² x  M1 Correct algebra leading to two or four terms

   or  
 cosx  sinx   cosxsinx 

 cos² x  A1 OE. A correct expression which can be cancelled directly to

 
 cosxsinx  cosx
e.g.
( )
cos x 1 − sin 2 x
sinx ( )
sin x 1 − sin 2 x

 cos² x   cosx  1 A1 AG. Must show cancelling. If x is missing throughout their

  =  = working withhold this mark.
 cosxsinx   sinx  tanx

6(b) 1 1 M1 Reducing to tan³x = k.

Uses (a) → = 2tan² x tan³x =
tanx 2

(x =) 38.4° A1 AWRT.
Ignore extra answers outside the range 0 to 180° but A0 if
within.

© UCLES 2020 Page 11 of 19

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(a)  5 *M1 Substituting 4 into f ' ( x )

f '( 4)  = 
 2

 dy dy dx   dy  5 DM1 Multiplies their f ' ( 4 ) by 0.12

 = ×  →   = × 0.12
 dt dx dt   dt  2

 dy  A1 OE
 =  0.3
 dt 

7(b) 1
−
1 B1 B1 B1 for each unsimplified integral.
6x 2 4x 2
1
−
1
( +c )
−
2 2

Uses (4, 7) leading to c = (-21) M1 Uses (4, 7) to find a c value

1
−
1
8 A1 Need to see y or f(x) = somewhere in their solution and 12
y or f ( x ) = 12 x 2 + 8 x 2 − 21 or 12 x + − 21 and 8
x

© UCLES 2020 Page 12 of 19

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(a) Use of correct formula for the area of triangle ABC M1 Use of 180–2θ scores M0. Condone 2π–2θ

1
r 2 sin ( π − 2θ ) or 1
r 2 sin 2θ or 2 × 12 r × r cos θ × sin θ or A1 OE
2 2
2 × 12 r cos θ × r sin θ

[Shaded area = triangle – sector] = their triangle area − 1

r 2θ B1 FT FT for their triangle area − 1 r 2θ
2 2
(Condone use of 180 degrees for triangle area for B1)

8(b) Arc BD = rθ = 6 cm B1 SOI

AC = 2rcosθ = ( 2×10cos0.6 = 20cos0.6 = 16.506) *M1 1

Finding AC or AC (= 8.25)
r × sin ( π – 2θ )
(
or 2r 2 − 2r 2 cos ( π − 2θ ) or )
sin θ
2

DC = 2rcosθ – r or ( 2r 2
)
− 2r 2 cos ( π − 2θ ) – r ( = 6.506)
DM1 Subtracting r from their AC
or r-rcosθ from their half AC (8.25-1.75)

(Perimeter = 10 + 6 + 6.506 =) 22.5 A1 AWRT

© UCLES 2020 Page 13 of 19

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(a)
r= (6 2
)
+ 32 or r² = 45
B1 Sight of r = 6.7 implies B1

(x − 5)² + (y − 1)² = r² or x 2 − 10 x + y 2 − 2 y = r 2 − 26 M1 Using centre given and their radius or r in correct formula

(x − 5)² + (y − 1)² = 45 or x 2 − 10 x + y 2 − 2 y = 19 A1
( )
2
Do not allow 45 for r 2

9(b) C has coordinates (11, 4) B1

0.5 B1 OE, Gradient of AB, BC or AC.

Grad of CD = −2 M1 Calculation of gradient needs to be shown for this M1.

1 A1 Clear reasoning needed.

( × −2 = −1 ) then states + perpendicular → hence shown or tangent
2

Alternative method for question 9(b)

C has coordinates (11, 4) B1

0.5 B1 OE, Gradient of AB, BC or AC.

Gradient of the perpendicular is −2 M1 Use of m1m2 = −1 with their gradient of AB, BC or AC and
→ Equation of the perpendicular is y − 4 = −2 ( x − 11) correct method for the equation of the perpendicular.
Could use D(5, 16) instead of C(11,4).

Checks D(5, 16) or checks gradient of CD and then states A1 Clear check and reasoning needed. Checks that the other
D lies on the line or CD has gradient −2→ hence shown or tangent point lies on the line or checks gradient.

© UCLES 2020 Page 14 of 19

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(b) Alternative method for question 9(b)

C has coordinates (11, 4) or Gradient of AB, BC or AC = 0.5 B1 Only one of AB, BC or AC needed.

Equation of the perpendicular is y − 4 = −2 ( x − 11) B1 Finding equation of CD.

( x − 5) 2 + ( −2 x + 26 − 1) 2 = 45 → ( x 2 − 22 x + 121 = 0) M1 Solving simultaneously with the equation of the circle.

( x − 11 ) 2 = 0 or b ² − 4ac = 0 → repeated root → hence shown or tangent A1 Must state repeated root.

Alternative method for question 9(b)

C has coordinates (11, 4) B1

Finding CD = 180 and BD = 225 B1 OE. Calculated from the co-ordinates of B, C & D without
using r.

Checking (their BD)2 – (their CD)2 is the same as (their r)2 M1

⸫ Pythagoras valid ⸫ perpendicular → hence shown or tangent A1 Triangle ACD could be used instead.

Alternative method for question 9(b)

C has coordinates (11, 4) B1

   
Finding vectors AC and CD or BC and CD B1 Must be correct pairing.
 6  −6   12   −6 
(=   and   or   and  )
 3  12  6  12 
   
Applying the scalar product to one of these pairs of vectors M1 Accept their AC and CD or their BC and CD

Scalar product = 0 then states ⸫ perpendicular → hence shown or tangent A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 15 of 19

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(c) E (−1, 4) B1 B1 WWW

B1 for each coordinate
Note: Equation of DE which is y = 2 x + 6 may be used to
find E

Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(a) dy  8  B2, 1, 0 B2 for all three elements correct, B1 for two elements
( (
) = [8] ×[ 3 − 2 x) −3  + [ −1]  = −1 correct, B0 for only one or no elements correct.
dx  (3 − 2x) ³ 

 B1 FT FT providing their bracket is to a negative power

d² y 48 
= −3 × 8 × (3 − 2 x) −4 × ( −2 ) = 
dx²  ( 3 − 2x )4 
 

 1 1  B1 B1 B1 Simplification not needed, B1 for each correct element

∫ydx = [(3− 2x)−1 ] [2 ÷ (−1 × −2)] [ − ½x²] (+c) = − x2 + c 
 3 − 2x 2 

© UCLES 2020 Page 16 of 19

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(b) dy M1 Setting their 2-term differential to 0 and attempts to solve

= 0 → (3 – 2x)³ = 8 → 3 – 2x = k → x = as far as x =
dx

1 A1
2

Alternative method for question 10(b)

2 M1 Setting y to 0 and attempts to solve a cubic as far as x =

y = 0→ 2
− x = 0 → ( x − 2 ) (2 x − 1) 2 = 0 → x = (3 factors needed)
(3 − 2 x)

1 A1
2

10(c)  1  M1 Using their integral, their positive x limit from part (b) and
  ² 0 correctly.
1 2  1 
Area under curve = their  −   − − 0
3 − 2×  1  2   3 − 2 × 0 
   
2

1 A1
24

© UCLES 2020 Page 17 of 19

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(a) 5, –1 B1 B1 Sight of each value

11(b) *B1 Needs to be a curve, not straight lines.

One complete cycle starting and finishing at their largest
value.

DB1 One complete cycle starting and finishing at y = 5 and going

down to y = −1 and starting to level off at least one end.

11(c)(i) 0 solution B1

11(c)(ii) 2 solutions B1

11(c)(iii) 1 solution B1

© UCLES 2020 Page 18 of 19

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(d) 1 B1
Stretch by (scale factor) , parallel to x-axis or in x direction (or
2
horizontally)

 0 B1 Accept translation/shift
Translation of   Accept translation 4 units in positive y-direction.
 4

11(e)  π B1 Accept translation/shift

−
Translation of  2  π
Accept translation − units in x-direction.
 
 0  2

Stretch by (scale factor) 2 parallel to y-axis (or vertically). B1

© UCLES 2020 Page 19 of 19

Cambridge International AS & A Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/13
Paper 1 Pure Mathematics 1 October/November 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2020 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some
Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 14 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the specific content of the
mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the scope of the
syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the question as
indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently, e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may be limited
according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in
mind.

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Mathematics Specific Marking Principles

1 Unless a particular method has been specified in the question, full marks may be awarded for any correct method. However, if a calculation is required then
no marks will be awarded for a scale drawing.

2 Unless specified in the question, answers may be given as fractions, decimals or in standard form. Ignore superfluous zeros, provided that the degree of
accuracy is not affected.

3 Allow alternative conventions for notation if used consistently throughout the paper, e.g. commas being used as decimal points.

4 Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored (isw).

5 Where a candidate has misread a number in the question and used that value consistently throughout, provided that number does not alter the difficulty or
the method required, award all marks earned and deduct just 1 mark for the misread.

6 Recovery within working is allowed, e.g. a notation error in the working where the following line of working makes the candidate’s intent clear.

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons
outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea
must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without
the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise;
and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on an
earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full
credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are
given for correct work only.

• A or B marks are given for correct work only (not for results obtained from incorrect working) unless follow through is allowed (see abbreviation FT
above).
• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if the answer is correct to 3 significant figures or would be correct to 3 significant figures if rounded (1
decimal place for angles in degrees).
• The total number of marks available for each question is shown at the bottom of the Marks column.
• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not result in loss of marks unless the guidance indicates otherwise.
• Square brackets [ ] around text or numbers show extra information not needed for the mark to be awarded.

© UCLES 2020 Page 4 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Abbreviations
AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent
AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)
CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no ‘follow through’ from a previous error is allowed)
CWO Correct Working Only
ISW Ignore Subsequent Working
SOI Seen Or Implied
SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the
light of a particular circumstance)
WWW Without Wrong Working
AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2020 Page 5 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1(a) ( x + 3)2  B1 B1
  [ −4]

1(b)  −3  B1  −their a 
[Translation or shift]   B1 FT Accept [translation/shift]  their b 
 −4   
OR translation ‒3 units in x-direction and (translation) ‒4 units in
y-direction.

Question Answer Marks Guidance

2(a) −2 B1 Integrate f(x). Accept −2 ( x + 2 )−1 . Can be unsimplified.

x+2

 2 2 M1 A1 Apply limit(s) to an integrated expansion. CAO for A1

0−−  =
 3 3

2(b) −1 = − 2 + c M1 Substitute x = −1, y = −1 into their integrated expression (c

present)

−2 A1 Accept y = −2 ( x + 2 )−1 + 1 . ‒2 must be resolved.

y= +1
x+2

© UCLES 2020 Page 6 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3 3tan 4θ + tan 2θ − 2 ( = 0 ) M1 SOI 3-term quartic, condone sign errors for this mark only

( 3tan θ − 2 )( tan θ + 1) ( = 0 )
2 2 M1 Attempt to factorise or solve 3-term quadratic in tan 2θ .

2 A1 SOI Implied by final answer = 39.2° after 1st M1 scored

tan θ = ( ± ) or ( ± ) 0.816 or ( ± ) 0.817
3

39.2°, 140.8° A1 FT for 2nd solution =180° ‒ 1st solution

A1 FT

Question Answer Marks Guidance

4 3 x 2 − 4 x + 4 = mx + m − 1 → 3 x 2 − ( 4 + m ) x + ( 5 − m ) ( = 0 ) M1 3-term quadratic

b 2 − 4ac = ( 4 + m ) − 4 × 3 × ( 5 − m )
2 M1 Find b 2 − 4 ac for their quadratic

m 2 + 20m − 44 A1

(m + 22)(m ‒ 2) A1 Or use of formula or completing square. This step must be seen

m > 2 , m < −22 A1 Allow x > 2 , x < −22

© UCLES 2020 Page 7 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5  7C1a 6b ( x )  ,
   ( )
 7C 2 a 5 b 2 x 2  ,
 ( )
[7C 4a 3b 4 x 4 ] B2, 1, 0 SOI, can be seen in an expansion.

( ) = 7C 4 a b ( x )
7C 2 a 5 b 2 x 2 3 4 4

→
21a 5b 2 35a 3b 4
=
M1 A1 M1 for a correct relationship OE (Ft from their 3 terms).
For A1 binomial coefficients must be correct & evaluated.
7C1a b ( x ) 7C 2 a b ( x )
6 5 2 2
7 a 6b 21a 5b 2

a 5 A1 OE
=
b 9

Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(a) 2x *M1 For 1st two operations. Condone a sign error

y= → 3xy − y = 2 x → 3xy − 2 x = y (or − y = 2 x − 3xy )
3x − 1

y −y DM1 For 2nd two operations. Condone a sign error

x (3 y − 2) = y → x = (or x = )
3y − 2 2 − 3y

x A1 −x
(f −1
( x)) =
3x − 2
( )
Allow f −1 ( x ) =
2 − 3x

6(b)  2 ( 3 x − 1) + 2   6x 2x  B1 B1 AG, WWW

  =  =  First B1 is for a correct single unsimplified fraction.
 3 ( 3 x − 1)   3 ( 3 x − 1) 3 x − 1 
An intermediate step needs to be shown. Equivalent methods
accepted.

© UCLES 2020 Page 8 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(c) 2 B1 2 2
(f(x)) > Allow (y) > . Do not allow x >
3 3 3

Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(a) tan 2θ 1 B1 Allow sign error(s). Award only at form (d =)... stage
( d =) − −
cos θ cos 2θ
2

sin 2θ 1 −sec2θ M1 Allow sign error(s). Can imply B1

− − or
cos θ cos 2θ
4
cos 2θ

1 M1
2 2 −
−sin θ − cos θ cos 2θ
or
cos 4θ cos 2θ

1 A1 AG, WWW
−
cos 4θ

7(b) 4 16 B1 1 1
a= , d =− SOI, both required. Allow a = ,d= −
3 9 3 9
4 16

1 12 4  −16  M1 Use of correct formula with their a and their d. The first 2 steps
u13 = − = + 12   could be reversed
cos θ cos 4θ
2
3  9 

‒20 A1 WWW

© UCLES 2020 Page 9 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(a) dy B1 B1
= [ 2]
−2
[− 2 ( 2 x + 1) ]
dx

d2 y −3 B1
2
= 8 ( 2 x + 1)
dx

8(b) dy M1
Set their = 0 and attempt solution
dx

(2x + 1)2 = 1 → 2x + 1 = ( ± ) 1 or 4x2 + 4x = 0 → (4)x(x + 1) = 0 M1 Solving as far as x = ....

x=0 A1 WWW. Ignore other solution.

(0, 2) A1 One solution only. Accept x = 0, y = 2 only.

d2 y 1 B1 d2 y
2
> 0 from a solution x > − hence minimum Ignore other solution. Condone arithmetic slip in value of .
dx 2 dx 2
d2 y −3
Their 2
must be of the form k ( 2 x + 1)
dx

Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(a) 6 82 + 122 − 82 M1 Or other correct method

cos BAO = or
8 2 × 8 × 12

BAO = 0.723 A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 10 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(b) Sector ABC = ½ × 122 × their 0.7227 *M1 Accept 52.1

Triangle AOB = ½ × 8 × 12sin ( their 0.7227 ) or ½×12×√28 *M1 or ½ × 8 × 8sin (π − 2 × their 0.7227 ) . Expect 31.7 or 31.8

Shaded area = their 52.0 − their 31.7 = 20.3 DM1 M1 dependent on both previous M marks
A1

9(c) Arc BC = 12 × their 0.7227 *M1 Expect 8.67

Perimeter = 8 + 4 + their 8.67 = 20.7 DM1

A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(a) dy  x −1/2   x −3/2  B2, 1, 0 ([0]) implies that more than 2 terms counts as an error
= −  + ( [ 0 ])
dx  2k   2 

dy 1 1 M1
Sub = 3 when x = Expect 3 = −4
dx 4 k

1 A1
k= (or 0.143)
7

© UCLES 2020 Page 11 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(b) 1 1  2 x 3/2   x B2, 1, 0 OE

 x1/2 + x −1/2 + 2 =   +  2 x  +  2 
1/2
k k  3k  k 

 2k 2   k2 1 M1 k2
 + 2k + 1 −  + k +  Apply limits → k 2 to an integrated expression.
 3   12 4 4
7 2 3
Expect k +k+
12 4

7 2 3 13 M1 13
k +k + = Equate to and simplify to quadratic.
12 4 12 12
OE, expect 7 k 2 + 12k − 4 ( = 0 )

2 A1 Dependent on ( 7k − 2 )( k + 2 ) ( = 0 ) or formula or completing

k= only (or 0.286)
7 square.

© UCLES 2020 Page 12 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(a) ( −6 − 8)
2
+ ( 6 − 4)
2 M1 OE

= 200 A1

200 > 10, hence outside circle A1 AG (‘Shown’ not sufficient). Accept equivalents of 200 > 10

Alternative method for question 11(a)

Radius = 10 and C = (8, 4) B1

Min(x) on circle = 8 ‒ 10 = ‒2 M1

Hence outside circle A1 AG

11(b)  their 10  M1 Allow decimals for 10√2 at this stage. If cosine used, angle ACT
angle = sin −1   or BCT must be identified, or implied by use of 90°‒ 45°.
 their 10 2 

1 2 10 10 A1 AG Do not allow decimals

angle = sin −1 ( or or or ) = 45º
2 2 10 2 200

Alternative method for question 11(b)

2 M1
(10 2) = 102 + TA2

TA = 10 → 45º A1 AG

© UCLES 2020 Page 13 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(c) 1 B1 OE
Gradient, m, of CT = −
7

Attempt to find mid-point (M) of CT *M1 Expect (1, 5)

Equation of AB is y − 5 = 7 ( x − 1) DM1 1
Through their (1, 5) with gradient −
m

y = 7x − 2 A1

11(d) ( x − 8)
2
+ ( 7 x − 2 − 4 ) = 100 or equivalent in terms of y
2 M1 Substitute their equation of AB into equation of circle.

50 x 2 − 100 x ( = 0 ) A1

x = 0 and 2 A1 WWW

Alternative method for question 11(d)

7 M1
MC =  
 −1

 1   −1   0  1 1  2  A1
 + =  ,  + = 
 5   −7   −2   5   7   12 

x = 0 and 2 A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 14 of 14

Cambridge International AS & A Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/11
Paper 1 Pure Mathematics 1 May/June 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Students did not sit exam papers in the June 2020 series due to the Covid-19 global pandemic.

This mark scheme is published to support teachers and students and should be read together with the
question paper. It shows the requirements of the exam. The answer column of the mark scheme shows the
proposed basis on which Examiners would award marks for this exam. Where appropriate, this column also
provides the most likely acceptable alternative responses expected from students. Examiners usually review
the mark scheme after they have seen student responses and update the mark scheme if appropriate. In the
June series, Examiners were unable to consider the acceptability of alternative responses, as there were no
student responses to consider.

Mark schemes should usually be read together with the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. However,
because students did not sit exam papers, there is no Principal Examiner Report for Teachers for the June
2020 series.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the June 2020 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™ and Cambridge International A & AS Level components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 13 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the specific content of the
mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:
• Marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the scope of the
syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the question as
indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may be limited
according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in
mind.

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 13

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Mathematics-Specific Marking Principles

1 Unless a particular method has been specified in the question, full marks may be awarded for any correct method. However, if a calculation is required then
no marks will be awarded for a scale drawing.

2 Unless specified in the question, answers may be given as fractions, decimals or in standard form. Ignore superfluous zeros, provided that the degree of
accuracy is not affected.

3 Allow alternative conventions for notation if used consistently throughout the paper, e.g. commas being used as decimal points.

4 Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored (isw).

5 Where a candidate has misread a number in the question and used that value consistently throughout, provided that number does not alter the difficulty or
the method required, award all marks earned and deduct just 1 mark for the misread.

6 Recovery within working is allowed, e.g. a notation error in the working where the following line of working makes the candidate’s intent clear.

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 13

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons
outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea
must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula
without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise;
and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on
an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full
credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are
given for correct work only.

© UCLES 2020 Page 4 of 13

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Abbreviations

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen Or Implied

SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the
light of a particular circumstance)

WWW Without Wrong Working

AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2020 Page 5 of 13

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1 9 B1
117 = ( 2 a + 8d )
2

Either 91 = S4 with ‘a’ as a + 4d or 117 + 91 = S13 M1M1

(M1 for overall approach. M1 for Sn)

Simultaneous Equations → a = 7, d = 1.5 A1

Question Answer Marks

2 
5
1  2
8 B1B1
 kx +  +  1 − 
 x  x
5
 1
Coefficient in  kx +  = 10 × k²
 x
(B1 for 10. B1 for k²)

 2
8 B2,1,0
Coefficient in  1 −  = 8 × −2
 x

10k² − 16 = 74 → k = 3 B1

© UCLES 2020 Page 6 of 13

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(a) $36 000 × (1.05)n B1M1

(B1 for r = 1.05. M1 method for rth term)

$53 200 after 8 years. A1

3(b)
S10 = 36000
(1.05
10
−1 ) M1

(1.05 − 1)
$453 000 A1

Question Answer Marks

4(a) −1 ⩽ f(x) ⩽ 2 B1 B1

4(b) k=1 B1

Translation by 1 unit upwards parallel to the y-axis B1

4(c) 3 1 B1
y=− cos2 x −
2 2

© UCLES 2020 Page 7 of 13

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(a) x ( mx + c ) = 16 → mx 2 + cx − 16 = 0 B1

Use of b² − 4ac = c² + 64m M1

−c ² A1
Sets to 0 → m =
64

5(b) x ( −4 x + c ) = 16 M1
Use of b² − 4ac → c² − 256

c > 16 and c < −16 A1 A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 8 of 13

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

6(a) 3( 3x + b ) + b = 9 x + 4b → 10 = 18 + 4b M1

b = −2 A1

Either f(14) = 2 or f−1(x) = 2(x + a) etc. M1

a=5 A1

6(b) 1  M1
gf(x) = 3  x − 5  − 2
2 

3 A1
gf(x) = x − 17
2

© UCLES 2020 Page 9 of 13

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

7(a) (1 + sin θ )2 + cos 2 θ M1

cos θ (1 + sin θ )

2 + 2sin θ 2 M1A1
Use of sin 2 θ + cos 2 θ = 1 → → .
cos θ (1 + sin θ ) cosθ

7(b) 2 3 M1
= → tanθ = 1.5
cosθ sinθ

θ = 0.983 or 4.12 A1
(FT on second value for 1st value + π) A1FT

Question Answer Marks

8 Angle AOB = 15 ÷ 6 = 2.5 radians B1

Angle BOC = π – 2.5 (FT on angle AOB) B1FT

BC = 6(π – 2.5) (BC = 3.850) M1

sin(π – 2.5) = BX ÷6 (BX = 3.59) M1

Either OX = 6cos(π – 2.5) or Pythagoras (OX = 4.807) M1

XC = 6 – OX (XC = 1.193) → P = 8.63 A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 10 of 13

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

9(a) dy B1B1
= 3(3−2x)² × −2 + 24 = −6 ( 3 − 2 x ) + 24
2

dx
(B1 without ×−2. B1 for ×−2)

d² y B1FT
= −12 ( 3 − 2 x ) ×−2 = 24(3 – 2x) B1
dx²
(B1FT from without – 2)

9(b) dy M1
= 0 when 6 ( 3 − 2 x ) = 24 → 3 − 2 x = ±2
2

dx

x = ½, y = 20 or x = 2½, y = 52 A1A1
(A1 for both x values or a correct pair)

9(c) d² y B1FT
If x = ½, = 48 Minimum
dx ²

d² y B1FT
If x = 2½, = −48 Maximum
dx²

© UCLES 2020 Page 11 of 13

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

10(a) Centre is (3, 1) B1

Radius = 5 (Pythagoras) B1

Equation of C is ( x − 3) + ( y − 1) = 25
2 2 M1
A1FT
(FT on their centre)

10(b) Gradient from (3, 1) to (7, 4) = ¾ (this is the normal) B1

4 M1
Gradient of tangent = −
3

4 M1A1
Equation is y − 4 = − ( x − 7 ) or 3 y + 4 x = 40
3

10(c) B is centre of line joining centres → (11, 7) B1

Radius = 5 M1
New equation is ( x − 11) + ( y − 7 ) = 25
2 2 A1FT
(FT on coordinates of B)

© UCLES 2020 Page 12 of 13

9709/11 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

11(a) 8 M1
Simultaneous equations = 4 − ½x
x+2

x = 0 or x = 6 → A (0, 4) and B (6, 1) B1A1

−8 1 B1
At C = − → C (2, 2)
( x + 2) ² 2
M1A1
(B1 for the differentiation. M1 for equating and solving)

11(b)  x³  M1
Volume under line = π  ( − 12 x + 4 ) ²dx = π  − 2 x² + 16 x  = (42π) A2,1
12 
(M1 for volume formula. A2,1 for integration)

 8 
2
 −64  A1
Volume under curve = π    dx = π 
 x+2 
 = (24π)
 x + 2

Subtracts and uses 0 to 6 → 18π M1A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 13 of 13

Cambridge International AS & A Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/12
Paper 1 Pure Mathematics 1 May/June 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Students did not sit exam papers in the June 2020 series due to the Covid-19 global pandemic.

This mark scheme is published to support teachers and students and should be read together with the
question paper. It shows the requirements of the exam. The answer column of the mark scheme shows the
proposed basis on which Examiners would award marks for this exam. Where appropriate, this column also
provides the most likely acceptable alternative responses expected from students. Examiners usually review
the mark scheme after they have seen student responses and update the mark scheme if appropriate. In the
June series, Examiners were unable to consider the acceptability of alternative responses, as there were no
student responses to consider.

Mark schemes should usually be read together with the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. However,
because students did not sit exam papers, there is no Principal Examiner Report for Teachers for the June
2020 series.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the June 2020 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™ and Cambridge International A & AS Level components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 15 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the specific content of the
mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:
• Marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the scope of the
syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the question as
indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may be limited
according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in
mind.

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Mathematics-Specific Marking Principles

1 Unless a particular method has been specified in the question, full marks may be awarded for any correct method. However, if a calculation is required then
no marks will be awarded for a scale drawing.

2 Unless specified in the question, answers may be given as fractions, decimals or in standard form. Ignore superfluous zeros, provided that the degree of
accuracy is not affected.

3 Allow alternative conventions for notation if used consistently throughout the paper, e.g. commas being used as decimal points.

4 Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored (isw).

5 Where a candidate has misread a number in the question and used that value consistently throughout, provided that number does not alter the difficulty or
the method required, award all marks earned and deduct just 1 mark for the misread.

6 Recovery within working is allowed, e.g. a notation error in the working where the following line of working makes the candidate’s intent clear.

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons
outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea
must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula
without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise;
and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on
an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full
credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are
given for correct work only.

© UCLES 2020 Page 4 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Abbreviations

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen Or Implied

SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the
light of a particular circumstance)

WWW Without Wrong Working

AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2020 Page 5 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1(a) B1
( 2 + 3x ) ( x − 2x )
6

2
 −2 
Term in x² in ( x − x)
2 6 4
= 15 x ×  
 x 

Coefficient = 60 B1

1(b)  −2 
3 B2, 1
Constant term in ( x − 2x ) = 20 x 3 ×   (−160)
6

 x 

B1FT
Coefficient of x² in ( 2 + 3x ) ( x − 2x ) = 120 – 480 = −360
6

Question Answer Marks

2(a) 8sin θ M1
3cos θ = 8 tan θ → 3cosθ =
cos θ

3(1 − sin 2 θ ) = 8 sin θ M1

3 sin² θ + 8 sin θ – 3 = 0 A1

2(b) (3 sin θ – 1)( sin θ + 3) = 0 → sin θ = ⅓ M1

θ = 19.5° A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 6 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(a) 4 M1
Volume after 30 s = 18000 πr ³ = 18000
3

r = 16.3 cm A1

3(b) dV B1
= 4πr ²
dr

dr dr dV 600 M1
= × =
dt dV dt 4πr ²

dr A1
= 0.181 cm per second
dt

Question Answer Marks

4 1st term is −6, 2nd term is −4.5 M1

(M1 for using kth terms to find both a and d)

→ a = −6, d = 1.5 A1 A1

Sn = 84 → 3n² − 27n – 336 = 0 M1

Solution n = 16 A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 7 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5(a) ff(x) = a − 2 ( a − 2 x ) M1

ff(x) = 4 x − a A1

a−x M1 A1
f−1(x) =
2

5(b) a−x M1
4x − a = → 9 x = 3a
2

a A1
x=
3

© UCLES 2020 Page 8 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

6(a) 2 x 2 + kx + k − 1 = 2 x + 3 → 2 x 2 + ( k − 2 ) x + k − 4 = 0 M1

Use of b² − 4ac = 0 → (k – 2)² = 8(k – 4) M1

k=6 A1

6(b)  1 1
2x² + 2x + 1 = 2  x +  ² + 1 −
 2 2
1 1 B1 B1
a= ,b=
2 2

 1 1 B1FT
vertex  − , 
 2 2
(FT on a and b values)

© UCLES 2020 Page 9 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

7(a) π M1
BC² = r² + 4r² − 2r.2r × cos   = 5r² − 2r²√3
6

BC = r (5 − 2 3 ) A1

7(b) 2π r M1 A1
Perimeter =
6
+r + r (5 − 2 3 )
2

7(c) Area = sector – triangle

1 π M1
Sector area = 4r ²
2 6

π M1
Triangle area = ½ r. 2r sin
6

π 1 A1
Shaded area = r ²  − 
 3 2

© UCLES 2020 Page 10 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

8(a) 36 *M1
Volume = π ∫ x²dy = π  dy
y²

 −36  A1
= π 
 y 

Uses limits 2 to 6 correctly → (12π) DM1

Vol of cylinder = π.1².4 or  12.dy = [y] from 2 to 6 M1

Vol = 12π − 4π = 8π A1

8(b) dy −6 B1
=
dx x²

−6 M1
= −2 → x = 3
x²

6 A1
y= = 2 3 Lies on y = 2x
3

© UCLES 2020 Page 11 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

9(a) f(x) from −1 to 5 B1B1

g(x) from −10 to 2 B1FT

(FT from part (a))

9(b) B2, 1

9(c) Reflect in x-axis B1

Stretch by factor 2 in the y direction B1

 0  B1
Translation by –π in the x direction OR translation by   .
 −π 

© UCLES 2020 Page 12 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

10(a) dy B2,1
= 54 – 6(2x – 7)²
dx

d² y B2,1 FT
= −24(2x – 7)
dx ²
(FT only for omission of ‘ ×2 ’ from the bracket)

10(b) dy M1
= 0 → ( 2x − 7) = 9
2

dx

x = 5, y = 243 or x = 2, y = 135 A1 A1

10(c) d² y B1FT
x=5 = −72 → Maximum
dx ²
(FT only for omission of ‘ ×2 ’ from the bracket)

d² y B1FT
x =2 = 72 → Minimum
dx ²
(FT only for omission of ‘ ×2 ’ from the bracket)

© UCLES 2020 Page 13 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

11(a) Express as ( x − 4 ) ² + ( y + 2 ) = 16 + 4 + 5
2 M1

Centre C(4, −2) A1

Radius = 25 = 5 A1

11(b) 4 B1FT
P(1,2) to C(4, − 2) has gradient −
3
(FT on coordinates of C)

3 M1
Tangent at P has gradient =
4

3 A1
Equation is y − 2 = ( x − 1) or 4y = 3x + 5
4

11(c) Q has the same coordinate as P y = 2 B1

Q is as far to the right of C as P x = 3 + 3 + 1 = 7 Q (7, 2) B1

© UCLES 2020 Page 14 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

11(d) 3 B1FT
Gradient of tangent at Q = − by symmetry
4
(FT from part (b))

3 M1
Eqn of tangent at Q is y − 2 = − ( x − 7 ) or 4y + 3x = 29
4

17 A1
T (4, )
4

© UCLES 2020 Page 15 of 15

Cambridge International AS & A Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/13
Paper 1 Pure Mathematics 1 May/June 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

Students did not sit exam papers in the June 2020 series due to the Covid-19 global pandemic.

This mark scheme is published to support teachers and students and should be read together with the
question paper. It shows the requirements of the exam. The answer column of the mark scheme shows the
proposed basis on which Examiners would award marks for this exam. Where appropriate, this column also
provides the most likely acceptable alternative responses expected from students. Examiners usually review
the mark scheme after they have seen student responses and update the mark scheme if appropriate. In the
June series, Examiners were unable to consider the acceptability of alternative responses, as there were no
student responses to consider.

Mark schemes should usually be read together with the Principal Examiner Report for Teachers. However,
because students did not sit exam papers, there is no Principal Examiner Report for Teachers for the June
2020 series.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the June 2020 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™ and Cambridge International A & AS Level components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 14 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the specific content of the
mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:
• Marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the scope of the
syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the question as
indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may be limited
according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in
mind.

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Mathematics-Specific Marking Principles

1 Unless a particular method has been specified in the question, full marks may be awarded for any correct method. However, if a calculation is required then
no marks will be awarded for a scale drawing.

2 Unless specified in the question, answers may be given as fractions, decimals or in standard form. Ignore superfluous zeros, provided that the degree of
accuracy is not affected.

3 Allow alternative conventions for notation if used consistently throughout the paper, e.g. commas being used as decimal points.

4 Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored (isw).

5 Where a candidate has misread a number in the question and used that value consistently throughout, provided that number does not alter the difficulty or
the method required, award all marks earned and deduct just 1 mark for the misread.

6 Recovery within working is allowed, e.g. a notation error in the working where the following line of working makes the candidate’s intent clear.

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons
outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea
must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula
without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise;
and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on
an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full
credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are
given for correct work only.

© UCLES 2020 Page 4 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Abbreviations

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen Or Implied

SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the
light of a particular circumstance)

WWW Without Wrong Working

AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2020 Page 5 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

1 3x 2 + 2 x + 4 = mx + 1 → 3 x 2 + x ( 2 − m ) + 3 ( = 0 ) B1

( 2 − m )2 − 36 SOI M1

(m + 4)(m ‒ 8) (>/= 0) or 2 ‒ m >/= 6 and 2 ‒ m </= ‒6 OE A1

m < ‒4, m > 8 WWW A1

Alternative method for question 1

dy M1
= 6x + 2 → m = 6x + 2 → 3x 2 + 2 x + 4 = ( 6 x + 2 ) x + 1
dx

x = ±1 A1

m = ±6 + 2 → m = 8 or − 4 A1

m < ‒4, m > 8 WWW A1

Question Answer Marks

2 3x 2
3
3x 2
1
B1 B1
( y) = 3
− 1
( +c )
2 2

7 = 16 ‒ 12 + c M1
(M1 for subsituting x = 4, y = 7 into their integrated expansion)
3
y = 2x 2 − 6x 2 + 3
1
A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 6 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

3(a) ( y ) = f ( −x) B1

3(b) ( y ) = 2f ( x ) B1

3(c) ( y ) = f ( x + 4) − 3 B1 B1

Question Answer Marks

4(a) 1 + 5a + 10 a 2 + 10 a 3 + ... B1

4(b)
( ) ( ) ( ) M1
2 3
1 + 5 x + x 2 + 10 x + x 2 + 10 x + x 2 + ... SOI

( ) ( ) (
1 + 5 x + x 2 + 10 x 2 + 2 x 3 + ... + 10 x 3 + ... + ... SOI ) A1

1 + 5 x + 15 x 2 + 30 x 3 + ... A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 7 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

5 5 M1 A1
cos POA = → POA = 1.17 ( 6 ) Allow 67.4°
13
12 12
or sin = or tan =
13 5

Reflex AOB = 2π − 2 ×their 1.17 ( 6) OE in degrees M1

or minor arc AB = 5×2×their1.17(6)

Major arc = 5 × their 3.93(1) M1

or 2π × 5 - their 11.7(6)

AP (or BP) = 132 − 52 = 12 B1

Cord length = 43.7 A1

Question Answer Marks

6(a) dy  1 −1/2  B1 B1
=  ( 5x − 1)  × [5]
dx  2 

dy  dy  M1
Use = 2 ×  their when x = 1
dt  dx 

5 A1
2

© UCLES 2020 Page 8 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

6(b) 5 5 M1
2 × their ( 5 x − 1)−1/2 = oe
2 8

( 5 x − 1)1/2 = 8 A1

x = 13 A1

Question Answer Marks

7(a) tan θ tan θ tan θ (1 − cos θ ) + tan θ (1 + cos θ ) M1

+ =
1 + cos θ 1 − cos θ 1 − cos 2θ

2 tan θ M1
=
sin 2θ

2sin θ M1
=
cos θ sin 2θ

2 A1
= AG
sin θ cosθ

© UCLES 2020 Page 9 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

7(b) 2 6cos θ M1
=
sin θ cosθ sin θ

1 A1
cos 2θ = → cos θ = ( ± ) 0.5774
3

54.7º, 125.3º A1
(FT for 180º ‒ 1st solution) A1FT

Question Answer Marks

8(a) r = cos 2θ SOI M1

sin 2θ M1
S∞ =
1 − cos2θ

1 A1

8(b)(i) d = sin 2θ cos 2θ − sin 2θ M1

(
sin 2θ cos 2θ − 1 ) M1

−sin 4θ A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 10 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

8(b)(ii) 16 M1
Use of S16 = [ 2a + 15d ]
2

3 9 A1
With both a = and d = −
4 16

1 A1
S16 = −55
2

Question Answer Marks

9(a) ( x − 2 )2  [ −1] B1 B1
 

9(b) Smallest c = 2 B1FT

(FT on their part (a))

9(c) y = ( x − 2) − 1 → ( x − 2) = y + 1
2 2 *M1

x = 2(±) y +1 DM1

(f −1 ( x )) = 2 + x + 1 for x > 8 A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 11 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

9(d) 1 1 B1
gf ( x ) = = OE
( x − 2) 2
−1 +1 ( x − 2) 2

1 B1 B1
Range of gf is 0 < gf(x) <
9

Question Answer Marks

10(a) Mid-point is (‒1, 7) B1

Gradient, m, of AB is 8/12 OE B1

12 M1
y−7 =− ( x + 1)
8

3 x + 2 y = 11 AG A1

10(b) Solve simultaneously 12 x − 5 y = 70 and their 3 x + 2 y = 11 M1

x = 5, y = −2 A1

Attempt to find distance between their (5, ‒2) and either (‒7,3) or (5, 11) M1

A1
(r ) = 122 + 52 or 132 + 0 = 13

Equation of circle is ( x − 5)2 + ( y + 2 )2 = 169 A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 12 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

11(a) dy B1
= 3x 2 − 4bx + b 2
dx

3x 2 − 4bx + b 2 = 0 → ( 3 x − b )( x − b ) ( = 0 ) M1

b A1
x= or b
3

b A1
a= → b = 3a AG
3

Alternative method for question 11(a)

dy B1
= 3x 2 − 4bx + b 2
dx

dy M1
Sub b = 3a & obtain = 0 when x = a and when x = 3a
dx

d2 y A1
= 6 x − 12 a
dx 2

< 0 Max at x = a and > 0 Min at x = 3a. Hence ܾ = 3ܽ AG A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 13 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks

11(b) ( )
Area under curve =  x 3 − 6ax 2 + 9a 2 x dx M1

x4 9a 2 x 2 B2,1,0
− 2ax 3 +
4 2

a4 9a 4  11a 4  M1
− 2a 4 + = 
4 2  4 
(M1 for applying limits 0 → a)

3 3 3
When x = a, y = a − 6a + 9a = 4a
3 B1

1 M1
Area under line = a × their 4a3
2

11a 4 3 A1
Shaded area = − 2a 4 = a 4
4 4

© UCLES 2020 Page 14 of 14

Cambridge International AS & A Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/12
Paper 1 Pure Mathematics March 2020
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the March 2020 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 14 printed pages.

© UCLES 2020 [Turn over

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme March 2020
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the specific content of the
mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the scope of the
syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the question as
indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may be limited
according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or grade descriptors in
mind.

© UCLES 2020 Page 2 of 14

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme March 2020
PUBLISHED
Mathematics-Specific Marking Principles

1 Unless a particular method has been specified in the question, full marks may be awarded for any correct method. However, if a calculation is required then
no marks will be awarded for a scale drawing.

2 Unless specified in the question, answers may be given as fractions, decimals or in standard form. Ignore superfluous zeros, provided that the degree of
accuracy is not affected.

3 Allow alternative conventions for notation if used consistently throughout the paper, e.g. commas being used as decimal points.

4 Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored (isw).

5 Where a candidate has misread a number in the question and used that value consistently throughout, provided that number does not alter the difficulty or
the method required, award all marks earned and deduct just 1 mark for the misread.

6 Recovery within working is allowed, e.g. a notation error in the working where the following line of working makes the candidate’s intent clear.

© UCLES 2020 Page 3 of 14

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme March 2020
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for specific reasons
outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea
must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula
without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise;
and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on
an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full
credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are
given for correct work only.

© UCLES 2020 Page 4 of 14

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme March 2020
PUBLISHED
Abbreviations

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen Or Implied

SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the
light of a particular circumstance)

WWW Without Wrong Working

AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2020 Page 5 of 14

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme March 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 f ′ ( x ) =  − ( 3 x + 2 )  × [3] + [ 2 x ]
−2 B2, 1, 0
 

< 0 hence decreasing B1 Dependent on at least B1 for f ′ ( x ) and must include < 0 or
‘(always) neg’

Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 [Stretch] [factor 2, x direction (or y-axis invariant)] *B1

DB1

[Translation or Shift] [1 unit in y direction] or B1B1 Accept transformations in either order. Allow (0, 1) for the vector
 0  
[Translation/Shift]   
 1  

© UCLES 2020 Page 6 of 14

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme March 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3 ( π )  ( y − 1) dy *M1 SOI
Attempt to integrate x2 or ( y − 1)

 y2  A1
( π)  − y
2 

 25   1  DM1 Apply limits 1 → 5 to an integrated expression

( π )  − 5  −  − 1 
 2   2 

8π or AWRT 25.1 A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

4 dy B1
= 2x − 2
dx

dy 4 B1 OE, SOI
=
dx 6

4 M1 dy
their ( 2 x − 2 ) = their LHS and RHS must be their expression and value
6 dx

4 A1
x= oe
3

© UCLES 2020 Page 7 of 14

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme March 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5 2 tan θ − 6sin θ + 2 = tan θ + 3sin θ + 2 → tan θ − 9sin θ ( = 0 ) M1 Multiply by denominator and simplify

sin θ − 9sin θ cos θ ( = 0 ) M1 Multiply by cosθ

1 M1 Factorise and attempt to solve at least one of the factors = 0

sin θ (1 − 9cosθ ) ( = 0 ) → sin θ = 0, cosθ =
9

θ = 0 or 83.6° (only answers in the given range) A1A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(a)  a 
2 B1 SOI
3
5C2  2 ( x )   2  Can include correct x's
( )
 x 
 

 x3  1 B1 SOI
10 × 8 × a 2  4  = 720   Can include correct x's
x   x

a = ±3 B1

6(b)  their a 
4 B1 SOI
5C4  ( )   2 
 2 x  Their a can be just one of their values (e.g. just 3).
 x 
 ( ) 
Can gain mark from within an expansion but must use their value
of a

810 identified B1 Allow with x −7

© UCLES 2020 Page 8 of 14

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme March 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7 OC = 6cos0.8 = 4.18(0) M1A1 SOI

1 *M1 OE
Area sector OCD = ( their 4.18)2 × 0.8
2

1 M1 OE
ΔOCA = × 6 × their 4.18 × sin 0.8
2

Required area = their ΔOCA ‒ their sectorOCD DM1 SOI. If not seen their areas of sector and triangle must be seen

2.01 A1 CWO. Allow or better e.g. 2.0064

Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(a) 2% B1

8(b) Bonus = 600 + 23 × 100 = 2900 B1

Salary = 30000 × 1.0323 M1 Allow 30000 × 1.0324 (60984)

= 59207.60 A1 Allow answers of 3significant figure accuracy or better

their 2900 M1 SOI

their 59200

4.9(0)% A1

© UCLES 2020 Page 9 of 14

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme March 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(a)  2 ( x + 3 ) 2  [ −7 ] B1B1 Stating a = 3, b = −7 gets B1B1

 

9(b) y+7 M1 First 2 operations correct.

y = 2 ( x + 3) − 7 → 2 ( x + 3) = y + 7 → ( x + 3 ) =
2 2 2

2 Condone sign error or with x/y interchange

y+7 y+7 x+7 A1FT FT on their a and b. Allow y = ...

x + 3 = (±) → x = (±) − 3 → f −1 ( x ) = − −3
2 2 2

Domain: x ⩾ ‒5 or ⩾ -5 or [–5, ∞) B1 Do not accept y = …, f ( x ) = …, f −1 ( x ) = …

9(c) fg(x) = 8 x 2 − 7 B1FT SOI. FT on their –7 from part (a)

8 x 2 − 7 = 193 → x 2 = 25 → x = −5 only B1

Alternative method for question 9(c)

g(x) = f −1 (193) → 2 x − 3 = − 100 − 3 M1 FT on their f −1 ( x )

x = ‒5 only A1

9(d) 1 B1 1 1
(Largest k is) − Accept − or k ⩽ −
2 2 2

© UCLES 2020 Page 10 of 14

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme March 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(a) 1 M1 SOI.
2 ( a + 3) 2 − a = 0 dy
Set = 0 when x = a. Can be implied by an answer in terms of a
dx

4 ( a + 3) = a 2 → a 2 − 4a − 12 = 0 M1 Take a to RHS and square. Form 3-term quadratic

( a − 6 )( a + 2 ) → a = 6 A1 Must show factors, or formula or completing square. Ignore a = ‒2

SC If a is never used maximum of M1A1 for x = 6 ,with visible
solution

10(b) d2 y −
1
B1
( )
2

2
= x + 3 −1
dx

d2 y 1 2 M1A1 A mark only if completely correct

Sub their a → 2
= − 1 = − (or < 0) → MAX 2
dx 3 3 If the second differential is not − correct conclusion must be
3
drawn to award the M1

10(c) 3
2 ( x + 3) 2 B1B1
1
( y =) 3
− x2 ( +c )
2
2

4 3 M1 Substitute into an integrated expression. c must be present.

Sub x = their a and y = 14 → 14 = ( 9 ) 2 − 18 + c Expect c = ‒4
3

4 3
1 A1 Allow f ( x ) = ….
y= ( x + 3) 2 − x 2 − 4
3 2

© UCLES 2020 Page 11 of 14

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme March 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(a) (tan x − 2)(3tan x + 1) ( = 0 ) . or formula or completing square M1 Allow reversal of signs in the factors. Must see a method

1 A1
tan x = 2 or -
3

x = 63.4° ( only value in range ) or161.6°(only value in range ) B1FT

B1FT

11(b) Apply b 2 − 4ac < 0 M1 SOI. Expect 25 − 4 ( 3)( k ) < 0, tan x must not be in coefficients

25 A1 25
k> Allow b 2 − 4ac = 0 leading to correct k > for M1A1
12 12

11(c) k=0 M1 SOI

5 A1
tan x = 0 or
3

x = 0° or 180° or 59.0° A1 All three required

© UCLES 2020 Page 12 of 14

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme March 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

12(a) Centre = (2, ‒1) B1

2 2 M1 1
r 2 =  2 − ( −3)  + −
 1 − ( −5)  [ 2 − 7] + [ −1 − 3]
2 2
or OE OR ( −3 − 7 )2 + ( −5 − 3)2  OE
2

( x − 2)
2
+ ( y + 1) = 41
2 A1 Must not involve surd form
SCB3 ( x + 3)( x − 7 ) + ( y + 5 )( y − 3) = 0

12(b) 8 B1FT SOI

Centre = their (2, ‒1) +   = (10, 3) FT on their (2, ‒1)
 4

( x − 10)
2
+ ( y − 3) = their 41
2 B1FT FT on their 41 even if in surd form
SCB2 ( x − 5 )( x − 15 ) + ( y + 1)( y − 7 ) = 0

© UCLES 2020 Page 13 of 14

9709/12 Cambridge International AS & A Level – Mark Scheme March 2020
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

12(c) 4 B1
Gradient m of line joining centres = OE
8

Attempt to find mid-point of line. M1 Expect (6, 1)

Equation of RS is y − 1 = −2 ( x − 6 ) M1 −1
Through their (6, 1) with gradient
m

y = −2 x + 13 A1 AG

Alternative method for question 12(c)

( x − 2)
2
+ ( y + 1) − 41 = ( x − 10 ) + ( y − 3) − 41 OE
2 2 2 M1

x 2 − 4 x + 4 + y 2 + 2 y + 1 = x 2 − 20 x + 100 + y 2 − 6 y + 9 OE A1 Condone 1 error or errors caused by 1 error in the first line

16 x + 8 y = 104 A1

y = −2 x + 13 A1 AG

12(d) ( x − 10)
2
+ ( −2 x + 13 − 3) = 41
2 M1 Or eliminate y between C1 and C2

x 2 − 20 x + 100 + 4 x 2 − 40 x + 100 = 41 → 5 x 2 − 60 x + 159 = 0 A1 AG

© UCLES 2020 Page 14 of 14

 Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/11
Paper 1 October/November 2019
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2019 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 13 printed pages.

© UCLES 2019 [Turn over

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond
the scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range
may be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2019 Page 2 of 13

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for
specific reasons outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or
errors in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a
formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the
formula. Correct application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark
can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically
says otherwise; and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M
or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the
candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B
marks are given for correct work only.

© UCLES 2019 Page 3 of 13

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Abbreviations

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen Or Implied

SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

WWW Without Wrong Working

AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2019 Page 4 of 13

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 1 B1 SOI
6C2 × ( 2 x ) ×
4

(4 x 2 ) 2 SC: Condone errors in (4−1 )2 evaluation or interpretation for

B1 only

1 B1 Identified as required term.

15 × 24 ×
42

15 B1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 Attempt to solve f ′ ( x ) = 0 or f ′ ( x ) > 0 or f ′ ( x ). 0 M1 SOI

(x – 2)(x – 4) A1 2 and 4 seen

(Least possible value of n is) 4 A1 Accept n = 4 or n . 4

© UCLES 2019 Page 5 of 13

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3 dy B1
= 6 x 2 − 10 x − 3
dx

dy M1
At x = 2, = 24 − 20 − 3 = 1 → a = 1 A1
dx

6= 2+b → b = 4 B1FT Substitute x = 2, y = 6 in y = ( their a ) x + b

6 = 16 − 20 − 6 + c → c = 16 B1 Substitute x =2, y = 6 into equation of curve

Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(i) Identifies common ratio as 1.1 B1

Use of x (1.1) = 20 M1 SOI

20

  A1 Accept 2.97
20
x=  = 3.0
 (1.1)20 
 

4(ii) (1.1)21 − 1 M1 Correct formula used for M mark.

their 3.0 ×   → 192 A1 Allow 2.97 used from (i)
1.1 − 1 Accept 190 from x = 2.97…

© UCLES 2019 Page 6 of 13

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(i) 1 M1 Multiply by cos x or common denominator of cos x

4 tan x + 3cos x + = 0 → 4sin x + 3cos 2 x + 1 = 0
cos x

( )
4sin x + 3 1 − sin 2 x + 1 = 0 → 3sin 2 x − 4sin x − 4 = 0 M1 Use cos2 x = 1 − sin 2 x and simplify to 3-term quadratic in
sin x

2 A1 AG
sin x = −
3

5(ii) 2x ‒20º = 221.8º, 318.2º M1A1 Attempt to solve sin ( 2 x − 20 ) = −2 / 3 ( M1) .

At least 1 correct (A1)

x = 120.9º, 169.1º A1 FT for 290º ‒ other solution.

A1FT SC A1 both answers in radians

© UCLES 2019 Page 7 of 13

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6 Equation of line is y = mx − 2 B1 OR

x 2 − 2 x + 7 = mx − 2 → x 2 − x ( 2 + m ) + 9 = 0 M1

Apply b 2 − 4ac ( = 0 ) → ( 2 + m ) − 4 × 9 ( = 0 ) *M1

2

m = 4 or −8 A1

m = 4→ x2 ‒ 6x + 9 = 0 → x = 3 DM1
m = ‒8→ x2 + 6x + 9 = 0 → x = ‒3

(3, 10), (‒3, 22) A1A1

Alternative method for question 6

dy B1
= 2x ‒ 2
dx

2x − 2 = m M1

x2 − 2 x + 7 = ( 2 x − 2) x − 2 = 2 x2 − 2 x − 2 M1

x 2 − 9 = 0 → x = ±3 A1

(3, 10), (‒3, 22) A1A1

When x = 3, m = 4; when x = ‒3, m = ‒8 A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 8 of 13

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(i) Range of f is 0 < f(x) < 3 B1B1 OE. Range cannot be defined using x

Range of g is g(x) > 2 B1 OE

7(ii) 3 3x B1B1 Second B mark implies first B mark

( fg ( x ) = ) 2 =
( 1
x
+ 2) + 1 2 + 5x

7(iii) 3x M1 Correct order of operations

y= → 2 y + 5 xy = 3 x → 3 x − 5 xy = 2 y
2 + 5x

2y M1 Correct order of operations

x (3 − 5 y ) = 2 y → x=
3 − 5y

(( fg ) −1
( x )) =
2x
3 − 5x
A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 9 of 13

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(i) 3 M1
OA × π = 6
8

16 A1
OA = = 5.093 ( 0 )
π

8(ii) 3 M1
AB = their 5.0930 × tan π
16

Perimeter = 2 × 3.4030 + 6 = 12.8 A1

8(iii) Area OABC = ( 2 × ½ ) × their 5.0930 × their 3.4030 M1

3 M1
Area sector = ½ × ( their 5.0930 ) × π
2

Shaded area = their17.331 − their15.279 = 2.05 M1A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 10 of 13

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(i) y = [( 5 x − 1) ÷ 32 ÷5 ] [ − 2 x] B1
1/ 2

B1

27 M1 Substitute x = 2, y = 3
3= −4+c
( 2) × 5
3 /

 3
 A1
18 17
c=7− = 
→ y=
2 ( 5 x − 1) 2
− 2x +
17 
5 5  15 5 

 

9(ii) d 2 y / dx 2 = ½ ( 5 x − 1)
−1/2
 [×5] B1
  B1

9(iii) ( 5 x − 1)1/ 2 − 2 = 0 → 5x − 1 = 4 M1A1 dy

Set = 0 and attempt solution (M1)
x =1 dx

16 17 37 A1  37 
y= −2+ = Or 2.47 or  1, 
25 5 15  15 

d2 y 5 1 5 A1 OE
= × = (> 0) hence minimum
dx x 2 2 4

© UCLES 2019 Page 11 of 13

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(i)  2   −1   3   4   2   2 B1B1 Condone reversal of labels

           
AB =  −3  −  3  =  −6  , BC =  −2  −  −3  =  1 
 5   −4   9   5   5   0
           

AB.BC = 6 ‒ 6 → = 0 (hence perpendicular) B1 AG

10(ii)  4 2  2 B1  −2 
       
DC =  −2  −  2  =  −4  Or: CD =  4 
 5   −1  6   −6 
       

AB = kDC M1 OE
3
Expect k =
2
Or: DC.BC = 4 ‒ 4 = 0 hence BC is also perpendicular to DC
Or: AB.DC = 1 or AB.CD = –1, angle between lines is 0 or
180

AB is parallel to DC, hence ABCD is a trapezium A1

10(iii) |AB| = 9 + 36 + 81 = 126 = 11.22 M1 Method for finding at least 2 magnitudes

|DC| = 4 + 16 + 36 = 56 = 7.483
|BC| = 4 + 1 + 0 = 5 = 2.236

Area = 1
2 ( theirAB + theirDC ) × theirBC = 20.92 M1A1 OE

© UCLES 2019 Page 12 of 13

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(i) ( y = ) ( x + 2 )2 − 1 B1 2nd B1 dependent on 2 in bracket

DB1

x + 2 = ( ± )( y + 1) M1
1/ 2

x = −2 + ( y + 1) A1
1/ 2

11(ii) x 2 = 4 + ( y + 1) − / + 4 ( y + 1) 2
1
*M1A1 SOI. Attempt to find x 2 .The last term can be ‒ or + at this
stage

 3 
A2,1,0
 y 2 4 ( y + 1) 2 
( π ) ∫ x ( dy ) = ( π )  5 y + − 3 
2

 2 
 2 

 9 64  1  DM1 Apply y limits

( π ) 15 + − −  −5 +  
 2 3  2 

8π A1
or 8.38
3

© UCLES 2019 Page 13 of 13

 Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/12
Paper 1 October/November 2019
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2019 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 15 printed pages.

© UCLES 2019 [Turn over

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond
the scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range
may be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2019 Page 2 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for
specific reasons outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or
errors in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a
formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the
formula. Correct application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark
can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically
says otherwise; and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M
or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the
candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B
marks are given for correct work only.

© UCLES 2019 Page 3 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Abbreviations

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen Or Implied

SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

WWW Without Wrong Working

AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2019 Page 4 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 6x x2 B1 B1 OE In or from a correct expansion. Can be implied by correct

, 15 × equation.
2 4

× (4 + ax) → 3a + 15 = 3 M1 2 terms in x2 equated to 3 or 3x2. Condone x2 on one side only.

a = −4 A1 CAO

Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 Attempt to find the midpoint M M1

(1, 4) A1

Use a gradient of ±⅔ and their M to find the equation of the line. M1

Equation is y – 4 = −⅔(x – 1) A1 AEF

Alternative method for question 2

Attempt to find the midpoint M M1

(1, 4) A1

Replace 1 in the given equation by c and substitute their M M1

Equation is y – 4 = −⅔(x – 1) A1 AEF

© UCLES 2019 Page 5 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3 1 
− +1  B1 OE
kx 2  k x
(y =) = (+c)
1  1 
− +1
2  2 

Substitutes both points into an integrated expression with a ‘+c’ and M1 Expect to see –1 = 2k + c and 4 = 4k + c
solve as far as a value for one variable.

k = 2½ and c = −6 A1 WWW

y = 5 x −6 A1 OE
From correct values of both k & c and correct integral.

Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(i) Arc length AB = 2rθ B1

AT BT B1   r 2 
Tan θ = or → AT or BT = r tan θ r sin θ
r r Accept or   − r 2  or NOT (90 – θ)
  cosθ   π 
  sin  − θ 
2 

P = 2rθ + 2r tan θ B1FT OE, FT for their arc length + 2 × their AT

© UCLES 2019 Page 6 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(ii) Area ∆AOT = ½ × 5 × 5 tan 1.2 or B1

Area AOBT = 2 × ½ × 5 × 5 tan 1.2

Sector area = ½ × 25 × 2.4 (or 1.2) *M1 Use of ½r2θ with θ = 1.2 or 2.4.

Shaded area = 2 triangles – sector DM1 Subtraction of sector, using 2.4 where appropriate, from
2 triangles

Area = 34.3 (cm2) A1 AWRT

Alternative method for question 4(ii)

Area of ∆ ABT = ½ × (5 × tan 1.2)2 × sin(π – 2.4) (= 55.86) B1

Segment area = ½ × 25 × (2.4 – sin 2.4) (= 21.56) *M1 Use of ½r2 (θ – sin θ) with θ = 1.2 or 2.4

Shaded area = triangle – segment DM1 Subtraction of segment from ∆ ABT, using 2.4 where
appropriate.

Area = 34.3 (cm2) A1 AWRT

Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(i) Use of Pythagoras → r2 = 152 − h2 M1

V = ⅓π(225 − h2) × h → ⅓π(225h – h3) A1 AG

WWW e.g. sight of r = 15 – h gets A0.

© UCLES 2019 Page 7 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(ii)  dv π B1
 =  (225 – 3h2)
 dh 3

dv M1 Differentiates, sets their differential to 0 and attempts to solve

Their =0 at least as far as h2 ≠ 0.
dh

(ℎ =) √75, 5√3 or AWRT 8.66 A1 Ignore − 75 OE and ISW for both A marks

d2h π M1 Differentiates for a second time and considers the sign of the
= (–6h) (→ −ve) second differential or any other valid complete method.
dh 2 3

→ Maximum A1FT Correct conclusion from correct 2nd differential, value for h
not required, or any other valid complete method. FT for their
h, if used, as long as it is positive.

π
SC Omission of π or throughout can score B0M1A1M1A0
3

© UCLES 2019 Page 8 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(a) (2x + 1) = tan−1(⅓) (= 0.322 or 18.4 OR −0.339 rad or 8.7°) *

M1 Correct order of operations. Allow degrees.

Either their 0.322 + π or 2π DM1 Must be in radians

π
Or their −0.339 + or π
2

x = 1.23 or x = 2.80 A1 AWRT for either correct answer, accept 0.39π or 0.89π

A1 For the second answer with no other answers between 0 and 2.8
SC1 For both 1.2 and 2.8

6(b)(i) 5 cos2 x – 2 B1 Allow a = 5, b = −2

6(b)(ii) −2 B1FT FT for sight of their b

3 B1FT FT for sight of their a + b

© UCLES 2019 Page 9 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance
JJJG
7(i)
( PB ) = 5i + 8j – 5k B2,1,0 B2 all correct, B1 for two correct components.

JJJG
( PQ ) = 4i + 8j + 5k B2,1,0 B2 all correct, B1 for two correct components.

Accept column vectors.

SC B1 for each vector if all components multiplied by –1.

7(ii)
(Length of PB =) (5 + 8 + 5 ) = ( 114 ≈ 10.7)
2 2 2 M1 Evaluation of both lengths. Other valid complete comparisons
can be accepted.
(Length of PQ =) ( 4 + 8 + 5 ) = ( 105 ≈ 10.2)
2 2 2

P is nearer to Q. A1 WWW

2
JJJG JJJG JJJG JJJG
7(iii)
( PB.PQ ) = 20 + 64 – 25 M1 Use of x1x2 + y1y2 + z1z2 on their PB and PQ

(Their 114)(their 105) cos BPQ = (their 59) M1 All elements present and in correct places.

BPQ = 57.4(°) or 1.00 (rad) A1 AWRT

Calculating the obtuse angle and then subtracting gets A0.

Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(a)(i) 21st term = 13 + 20 × 1.2 = 37 (km) B1

© UCLES 2019 Page 10 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(a)(ii) S21= ½×21 × (26 + 20 × 1.2) or ½ × 21 × (13 + their 37) M1 A correct sum formula used with correct values for a, d and n.

525 (km) A1

8(b)(i) x−3 x−5 M1 Any valid method to obtain an equation in one variable.
= oe (or use of a, ar and ar2)
x x−3

(a = or x =) 9 A1

8(b)(ii)  x −3  x−5 x−5 M1 Any valid method to find r and the fourth term with their a & r.
r=   or   or = ⅔. Fourth term = 9 × (⅔)3
 x   x −3 x

2⅔ or 2.67 A1 OE, AWRT

8(b)(iii) a 9 M1 Correct formula and using their ‘r’ and ‘a’, with r <1, to
S∞ = =
1 − r 1 − 23 obtain a numerical answer.

27 or 27.0 A1 AWRT

© UCLES 2019 Page 11 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(i) f(x) = g(x) → 2x2 + 6x + 1 + k (= 0) *M1 Forms a quadratic with all terms on same side.

Use of b2 = 4ac DM1 Uses the discriminant = 0.

(k =) 3½ A1 OE, WWW

Alternative method for question 9(i)

4 x + 8 = 2 (→ x = –1½) *M1 Differentiating, equating gradients and solving to give x =

Substitutes their x value into either 2x² + 6x + 1 + k = 0 OR into the DM1 Substituting appropriately for their x and proceeding to find a
 −13  value of k.
curve to find y  =  then both values into the line.
 2 

(k =) 3½ A1 OE, WWW

9(ii) 2x² + 6x – 8 (< 0) M1 Forms a quadratic with all terms on same side

– 4 and 1 A1

−4<x<1 A1 CAO

9(iii) x −1 B1 Needs to be in terms of x.

(g−1(x)) =
2

2 x² + 8x + 1 − 1 M1 Substitutes f into g−1 and attempts to solve it = 0 as far as x =

(g−1f(x)) = = 0 → (2x² + 8x = 0) → x =
2

0, –4 A1 CAO

© UCLES 2019 Page 12 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(iv) 2(x + 2)2 − 7 B1 B1 or a = +2, b = −7

(Least value of f(x) or y =) −7 or ⩾ −7 B1FT FT for their b from a correct form of the expression.

Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(i) dy B2,1,0 OE. Full marks for 3 correct components. Withhold one mark
= [ 0] + (2 x + 1)−3  × [+ 16] for each error or omission.
dx

∫ydx = [ x ] + (2 x + 1)−1  × [ +2] (+c) B2,1,0 OE. Full marks for 3 correct components. Withhold one mark
for each error or omission.

10(ii) At A, x = ½. B1 Ignore extra answer x = −1.5

dy *M1 dy
= 2 → Gradient of normal ( = −½ ) With their positive value of x at A and their , uses
dx dx
m₁m₂ = −1

Equation of normal: DM1 Use of their x at A and their normal gradient.

y − 0 = −½ ( x − ½ ) or y − 0 = −½ (0 – ½) or 0 = −½×½ + c

B (0, ¼) A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 13 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(iii) 1 *M1 ∫ y dx SOI with 0 and their positive x coordinate of A.

2
4
∫1 − ( 2 x + 1) ( dx )
0
2

[½ + 1] – [0 + 2] = (−½) DM1 Substitutes both 0 and their ½ into their ∫ydx and subtracts.

 1 B1
Area of triangle above x-axis = ½ × ½ × ¼  = 
 16 

9 A1 OE (including AWRT 0.563)

Total area of shaded region =
16

Alternative method for question 10(iii)

0
1 1 *M1  −
1

∫ 1
− ( dy ) ∫ x dy SOI. Where x is of the form k 1 − y ) 2 + c  with 0 and
 
2
−3
(1 − y ) 2  
their negative y intercept of curve.

DM1 Substitutes both 0 and their –3 into their ∫xdy and subtracts.
[ −2] −  −4 +
3
= (½)
 2 

 1 B1
Area of triangle above x-axis = ½ × ½ × ¼  = 
 16 

9 A1 OE (including AWRT 0.563)

Total area of shaded region =
16

© UCLES 2019 Page 14 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

Alternative method for question 10(iii)

1 *M1 ∫(their normal curve) with 0 and their positive x coordinate
2
1 1 of A.
∫
0
− x + − y dx
2 4

Curve [½ + 1] – [0 + 2] = (−½) DM1 Substitutes both 0 and their ½ into their ∫ydx and subtracts.
1 B1 Substitutes both 0 and ½ into the correct integral and subtracts.
2
1 1 − x 2 x  −1 1   1
∫ − x + dx = + =  +  – [ 0]  = 
0
2 4 4 4  16 8   16 

9 A1 OE (including AWRT 0.563)

Total area of shaded region =
16

© UCLES 2019 Page 15 of 15

 Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/13
Paper 1 October/November 2019
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2019 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 15 printed pages.

© UCLES 2019 [Turn over

9709/13 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:
• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:
• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond
the scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range
may be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2019 Page 2 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

The following notes are intended to aid interpretation of mark schemes in general, but individual mark schemes may include marks awarded for
specific reasons outside the scope of these notes.

Types of mark

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or
errors in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a
formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the
formula. Correct application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark
can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

DM or DB When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically
says otherwise; and similarly, when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB is used to indicate that a particular M
or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the
candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

FT Implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B
marks are given for correct work only.

© UCLES 2019 Page 3 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Abbreviations

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen Or Implied

SC Special Case (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

WWW Without Wrong Working

AWRT Answer Which Rounds To

© UCLES 2019 Page 4 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1(i) 1 + 6y + 15y2 B1 CAO

1(ii)
( ) ( ) M1
( ) ( )
2 2
1 + 6 px − 2 x 2 + 15 px − 2 x 2 SOI. Allow 6C1 ×15 px − 2 x 2 , 6C2 ×14 px − 2 x 2

(15 p 2
)
− 12 ( x 2 ) = 48 x 2( ) A1 1 term from each bracket and equate to 48

p=2 A1 SC: A1 p = 4 from 15p ‒ 12 = 48

Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 *B1 DB1 dependent on 3 in 1st bracket

( y = ) ( x − 3)2  [ −2] DB1

x − 3 = ( ± ) y + 2 or y − 3 = ( ± ) x + 2 M1 Correct order of operations

(g −1
( x )) = 3 + x+2 A1 Must be in terms of x

Domain (of g −1 ) is (x) > ‒1 B1 Allow (‒1, ∞). Do not allow y > ‒1 or g(x) > ‒1 or
g −1 ( x ) > ‒1

© UCLES 2019 Page 5 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3 dy B1
= 3x2 + 2x ‒ 8
dx

Set to zero (SOI) and solve M1

(Min) a = ‒2, (Max) b = 4/3. – in terms of a and b. A1 Accept a . − 2, b - 4

3
A1
SC: A1 for a > −2, b < 4
3
or for −2 < x < 4
3

Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(i) π B1
Angle CAO =
3

4(ii) 1 2 π M1 SOI
(Sector AOC) = r × their
2 3

1 3 1 M1 π
( r )( 2r ) sin  their  or ( 2r )( r ) or ( r )( r ) 3
1 π For M1M1, their must be of the form kπ where
(∆ ABC) =
2  3 2 2 2 3
0<k<½

1 3 1 A1 All correct
( r )( 2r ) sin   or ( 2r )( r ) or ( r )( r ) 3
1 π
(∆ ABC) =
2 3 2 2 2

 3 1 2π A1
r 2   − r  
 2  2 3

© UCLES 2019 Page 6 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(i) S = 28x2, V = 8x3 B1B1 SOI

2 B1 AG, WWW
7V 3 = 7 × 4 x 2 = S

5(ii)  dS  14V
− 13
14 *M1 Attempt to differentiate
 = = SOI when V = 1000 A1  dS  − 13
 dV  3 30 For M mark   to be of form kV
 dV 

 dV dS dV  dS 1 DM1
 = ×  OE used with dt = 2 and 14
 dt d t dS  their 30

30 A1 OE
or 4.29
7

Alternative method for question 5(ii)

3
S2  dV  3 1 1 30 *M1 Attempt to differentiate
V= → = ×S ×
2
= SOI when S = 700 A1  dV  1
7 7  dS  2 7 7 14 For M mark   to be of form kS
2

 d S 

 dV dS dV  dS 1 DM1
 = ×  OE used with dt = 2 and
 dt d t dS  their 14
30

30 A1 OE
or 4.29
7

© UCLES 2019 Page 7 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(ii) Alternative method for question 5(ii)

dV  dS dV  dx *M1
Attempt to find either or  and  together with either
dx  dx dS  dt
or x

dV  dS dV 3 x  dx 1 A1
= 24x2 or  = 56 x and =  , = or x = 5 (A1)
dx  dx dS 7  dt 140

dV DM1
Correct method for
dt

30 A1 OE
or 4.29
7

© UCLES 2019 Page 8 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(i) 3kx − 2k = x 2 − kx + 2 → x 2 − 4kx + 2k + 2 ( = 0 ) B1 kx terms combined correctly-implied by correct b 2 − 4ac

Attempt to find b 2 − 4ac M1 Form a quadratic equation in k

1 and − 12 A1 SOI

k > 1, k < − 12 A1 Allow x > 1, x < −1/ 2

6(ii) 3 M1 Use of their k values (twice) in y = 3kx − 2k

y = 3x − 2, y = − x +1
2

3 M1 Equate their tangent equations OR substitute y = 0 into both

3x − 2 = − x + 1 OR y + 2 = 2 − 2 y lines
2

2 A1 2
x= , → y = 0 in one or both lines Substitute x = in one or both lines
3 3

© UCLES 2019 Page 9 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(i) ( )
3cos 4θ + 4 1 − cos 2θ − 3 ( = 0 ) M1 Use s 2 = 1 − c 2

3 x 2 + 4 (1 − x ) − 3 ( = 0 ) → 3 x 2 − 4 x + 1( = 0 ) A1 AG

7(ii) Attempt to solve for x M1 Expect x = 1, 1/3

cos θ = ( ± )1, ( ± ) 0.5774 A1  1 

Accept ( ± )   SOI
 3

(θ = ) 0º, 180º, 54.7º, 125.3º A3,2,1,0 A2,1,0 if more than 4 solutions in range

© UCLES 2019 Page 10 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(i) M1 SOI
( 2x − 1) < 2 or 3( 2 x − 1) 2 < 6
1 1
2

2x −1 < 4 A1 SOI

1 5 A1 A1 Allow 2 separate statements

<x<
2 2

8(ii) 3 B1 B1
f(x) = [3 ( 2 x − 1) ÷   ÷ ( 2) ] [ − 6 x]
3/ 2
(+c)
2

Subsitute x = 1, y = ‒3 into an integrated expression. M1 Dependent on c being present (c = 2)

A1
f(x) = ( 2 x − 1) 2 − 6 x + 2
3

© UCLES 2019 Page 11 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(i) 5k − 6 6k − 4 M1 OR any valid relationship

= → ( 5k − 6 )2 = 3k ( 6k − 4 )
3k 5k − 6

25k 2 − 60k + 36 = 18k 2 − 12k → 7 k 2 − 48k + 36 A1 AG

9(ii) 6 B1B1 6
k= ,6 Allow 0.857(1) for
7 7

6 2 B1 Must be exact
When k = ,r= −
7 3

4 B1
When k = 6, r =
3

9(iii) a 2 6 M1 Provided 0 < |their ‒2/3| < 1

Use of S∞ = with r = their − and a = 3 × their
1− r 3 7

18  2  54 A1 FT if 0.857(1) has been used in part (ii).

÷ 1 +  = or 1.54
7  3  35

© UCLES 2019 Page 12 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(i) 6  18   12   −12  B1B1

       
AX =  2  , and one of AB =  6  , XB =  4  , BX =  −4 
 3 9 6  −6 
       

3 B1 WWW
State AB = 3AX ( or XB = 2AX or AB = XB etc) hence straight line A conclusion (i.e. a straight line) is required.
2
OR
AX.AB AX.BX
= 1 (→ θ = 0) or = –1 (→ θ = 180)
AX AB AX BX
hence straight line

10(ii)  −3  B1
 
CX =  6 
 2
 

CX.AX = −18 + 12 + 6 M1

= 0 (hence CX is perpendicular to AX) A1

10(iii) CX = 32 + 62 + 22 , AB = 182 + 62 + 92 M1
Both attempted

1 M1A1 Accept answers which round to 73.5

Area ∆ ABC = × their 21 × their 7 = 73 12
2

© UCLES 2019 Page 13 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(i) dy B1
= −2 ( x − 1)
−3

dx

1 M1 m must come from differentiation

When x = 2, m = ‒2 → gradient of normal = −
m

A1 1
Equation of normal is y − 3 = ½ ( x − 2 ) → y = ½ x + 2 AG Through (2, 3) with gradient − . Simplify to AG
m

© UCLES 2019 Page 14 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(ii) ( π) ∫ y12 ( dx ) , ( π ) ∫ y2 2 ( dx ) *M1 Attempt to integrate y 2 for at least one of the functions

( π ) ∫ ( 12 x + 2 )
2
or ( 1
4
x2 + 2 x + 4 ) A1A1 A1 for
( 12 x + 2 )
2
depends on an attempt to integrate this

( π ) ∫ ( ( x − 1)−4 + 4 ( x − 1)−2 + 4 )
form later

( π )  23 ( 12 x + 2 )
3
or 1
x3 + x 2 + 4 x  A1A1 Must have at least 2 terms correct for each integral
12 
 ( x − 1)−3 4 ( x − 1)−1 
(π)  + + 4x
 −3 −1 

 125 2 1    −1  −1  DM1 Apply limits to at least 1 integrated expansion

(π) 18 − or +4+8− + 1 + 4    − 2 + 12 −  − 4 + 8 
 12 3  12    24  3 

Attempt to add 2 volume integrals (or 1 volume integral + frustum) DM1

{
π 7
12
7
+6
7
24 }
7 111 A1 2 1  −1  −1 
13 π or π or 13.9π or 43.6 + 4+8− +1+ 4 − 2 + 12 −  − 4 + 8 
8 8 3  12  24  3 

© UCLES 2019 Page 15 of 15

 Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/11
Paper 1 May/June 2019
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2019 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and
some Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 16 printed pages.

© UCLES 2019 [Turn over

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2019 Page 2 of 16

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2019 Page 3 of 16

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors
in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula;
the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct
application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says
otherwise; and similarly when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier
marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol FT implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A
or B marks are given for correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the
candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a
correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1
d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect
working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2019 Page 4 of 16

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part question are genuinely misread and the object
and difficulty of the question remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through” marks. MR is not applied
when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2019 Page 5 of 16

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1(i) k
3 B2,1,0 Term must be isolated
Ind term = ( 2 x ) ×   × 6C3
3

x

= 540 → k = 1½ B1

1(ii) k
2 B1 All correct – even if k incorrect.
Term, in x² is ( 2 x ) ×   × 6C2
4

 x

15 × 16 × k² = 540 (or 540 x 2 ) B1 FT For 240k² or 240 k 2 x 2

© UCLES 2019 Page 6 of 16

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

2(i) Eliminates x or y → y ² − 4 y + c − 3 = 0 M1 Eliminates x or y completely to a quadratic

or x² + ( 2c − 16) x + c² − 48 = 0

Uses b ² = 4 ac → 4c – 28 = 0 M1 Uses discriminant = 0. (c the only variable)

Any valid method (may be seen in part (i))

c=7 A1

Alternative method for question 2(i)

dy 1 1 M1
= =
dx 2 ( x + 3) 4

Solving M1

c=7 A1

2(ii) Uses c = 7, y² − 4y + 4 = 0 M1 Ignore (1,–2), c=-9

(1, 2) A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 7 of 16

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3 Uses A = ½r²θ M1 Uses area formula.

2A A1
θ=
r²

P = r + r + rθ B1

2A A1 Correct simplified expression for P.

P = 2r +
r

© UCLES 2019 Page 8 of 16

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(i) Gradient of AB = −½ → Gradient of BC = 2 M1 Use of m1.m2 = −1 for correct lines

3h − 2 M1 Uses normal line equation or gradients for h.

Forms equation in h =2
h

h=2 A1

Alternative method for question 4(i)

Vectors AB.BC=0 M1 Use of vectors AB and BC

Solving M1

h=2 A1

Alternative method for question 4(i)

Use of Pythagoras to find 3 lengths M1

Solving M1

h=2 A1

4(ii) y coordinate of D is 6, (3 × ‘their’ h) B1 FT

6−0
= 2 → x = 7 → D (7, 6)
x−4

Vectors: AD.AB=0 M1 A1 Must use y = 6

Realises the y values of C and D are equal.
Uses gradient or line equation to find x.

© UCLES 2019 Page 9 of 16

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(i) −2 ( x − 3) + 15 (a = − 3, b = 15) B1 B1 Or seen as a = − 3, b = 15 B1 for each value

2

5(ii) (f(x) ⩽) 15 B1 FT for (⩽) their “b” Don’t accept (3,15) alone

5(iii) gf(x) = 2( −2 x ² + 12 x − 3 ) + 5 = −4x² + 24x – 6 + 5 B1

gf(x) + 1 = 0 → −4x² + 24x = 0 M1

x = 0 or 6 A1 Forms and attempts to solve a quadratic

Both answers given.

Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(i) 1 s
LHS =  −  =
(1 − s )(1 − s ) (1 − s )(1 − s )
2 B1 Expresses tan in terms of sin and cos
=
c c c² 1 − s2

B1 correctly 1– s2 as the denominator

(1 − s )(1 − s ) M1 Factors and correct cancelling www

=
(1 − s )(1 + s )
1 − sinx A1
AG
1 + sinx

© UCLES 2019 Page 10 of 16

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(ii) 1 − sin2 x 1 M1 Realises use of 2x and makes sin2x the subject

Uses part (i) to obtain = → sin 2x = ½
1 + sin2 x 3

π A1 Allow decimal (0.262)

x=
12

5π A1 FT for ½π – 1st answer.

(or) x = Allow decimal (1.31)
12
π 5π
and only, and no others in range.
12 12

π 5π
SC sinx=½ → B1
6 6

Question Answer Marks Guidance

JJJJG
7(i) AM = 1.5i + 4j + 5k B3,2,1 Loses 1 mark for each error.
JJJJG
GM = 6.5i – 4j − 5k

3
JJJJG JJJJG
7(ii) AM . GM = 9.75 −16 – 25 = −31.25 M1 Use of x1 x2 + y1 y2 + z1 z2 on AM and GM
JJJJG JJJJG
AM . GM = √(1.5²+4²+5²) × √( 6.5²+4²+5²) cos GMA M1 M1 M1 for product of 2 modulii M1 all correctly connected

Equating → Angle GMA = 121° A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 11 of 16

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(a) ar² = 48, ar³ = 32, r = ⅔ or a = 108 M1 Solution of the 2 eqns to give r (or a). A1 (both)

r = ⅔ and a = 108 A1

108 A1 FT Needs correct formula and r between −1 and 1.

S∞ = = 324
1
3

8(b) Scheme A a = 2.50, d = 0.16 M1 Correct use of either AP Sn formula.

Sn = 12(5 + 23×0.16)

Sn = 104 tonnes. A1

Scheme B a = 2.50, r = 1.06 B1 Correct value of r used in GP.

=
(
2.5 1.0624 − 1) M1 Correct use of either Sn formula.

1.06 − 1

Sn = 127 tonnes. A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(i) −1 ⩽ f(x) ⩽ 5 or [–1, 5] (may use y or f instead of f(x)) B1 B1 –1 < f ( x ) ⩽ 5 or −1 ⩽ x ⩽ 5 or (–1,5) or [5,–1] B1 only

© UCLES 2019 Page 12 of 16

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(ii) *B1 Start and end at –ve y, symmetrical, centre +ve.

g(x) = 2 − 3cosx for 0 ⩽ x ⩽ p DB1 Shape all ok. Curves not lines. One cycle [0,2π]
Flattens at each end.

© UCLES 2019 Page 13 of 16

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(iii) (greatest value of p =) π B1

9(iv) x = 2 − 3cosx → cosx = ⅓(2 – x) M1 Attempt at cosx the subject. Use of cos −1

2− x A1 Must be a function of x,
g−1(x) = cos−1 (may use ‘y =’)
3

Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(i) dy B1
integrating → = x² − 5x (+c)
dx

= 0 when x = 3 M1 Uses the point to find c after ∫ = 0.

c=6 A1

x³ 5x² B1 FT Integration again FT if a numerical constant term is

integrating again → y = − + 6x ( +d ) present.
3 2

use of (3, 6) M1 Uses the point to find d after ∫ = 0.

d = 1½ A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 14 of 16

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(ii) dy B1
= x² − 5x + 6 = 0 → x = 2
dx

10(iii) d²y B1 www

x = 3, =1 and/or +ve Minimum.
dx ²
d²y
x = 2, = −1 and/or −ve Maximum
dx ²

dy B1 www
May use shape of ‘ + x 3 ’ curve or change in sign of
dx SC: x = 3 , minimum, x = 2 , maximum, B1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(i) 3 B1
3 × −½ × (1 + 4x )
−
2

dy 3 B1 Must have ‘× 4’
= 3 × −½ × (1 + 4x ) 2 × 4
−

dx

2 9 M1 Use of m1.m₂ = − 1
If x = 2, m = − , Perpendicular gradient =
9 2

9 M1 Correct use of line eqn (could use y=0 here)

Equation of normal is y − 1 = ( x − 2)
2

16 A1 AG
Put y = 0 or on the line before →
9

© UCLES 2019 Page 15 of 16

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(ii) 2
3 3 1 + 4x B1 B1 Correct without ‘÷4’. For 2nd B1, ÷4’.
Area under the curve = ∫
0
1 + 4x
dx =
1
÷4

Use of limits 0 to 2 → 4½ − 1½ M1 Use of correct limits in an integral.

3 A1

2 1
2
9  M1 Any correct method.
Area of the triangle = ½ × 1 ×
9
=
9
or attempt to find ∫  x − 8  dx
16/9 
2 

1 8 A1
Shaded area = 3 − =2
9 9

© UCLES 2019 Page 16 of 16

 Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/12
Paper 1 May/June 2019
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2019 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and
some Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 20 printed pages.

© UCLES 2019 [Turn over

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2019 Page 2 of 20

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2019 Page 3 of 20

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors
in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula;
the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct
application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says
otherwise; and similarly when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier
marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol FT implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A
or B marks are given for correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the
candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a
correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1
d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect
working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2019 Page 4 of 20

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part question are genuinely misread and the object
and difficulty of the question remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through” marks. MR is not applied
when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2019 Page 5 of 20

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 2 
5
2
2 B2,1 3 elements required. –1 for each error with or
For  − 3x  term in x is 10 or 5C3 or 5C2 ×   × (−3x)³ or without x’s. Can be seen in an expansion.
x   x
5 3 2
 2  5.4.3  3 2  5 5.4  2 
   − x  or ( −3x )  
 x  3!  2  2!  3x 2 

−1080 identified B1 Allow −1080x

Allow if expansion stops at this term.
Allow from expanding brackets.

Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 Midpoint of AB is (5, 1) B1  10 2 
Can be seen in working, accept  ,  .
 2 2

mAB = −½ oe B1

C to (5, 1) has gradient 2 *M1 Use of m1× m2 = −1.

Forming equation of line (y = 2x − 9) DM1 Using their perpendicular gradient and their
midpoint to form the equation.

C (0, −9) or y = −9 A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 6 of 20

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(i) dy dy dx M1 Multiply numerical gradient at x = 2 by ±0.05.

= × = 7 × – 0.05
dt dx dt

−0.35 (units/s) or Decreasing at a rate of (+) 0.35 A1 Ignore notation and omission of units

3(ii) x4 4 B1 Accept unsimplified

( y) = + (+c) oe
4 x

Uses (2, 9) in an integral to find c. M1 The power of at least one term increase by 1.

x4 4 A1 A0 if candidate continues to a final equation that is

c = 3 or ( y = ) + + 3 oe a straight line.
4 x

© UCLES 2019 Page 7 of 20

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(i) a 2 + 2 ab + b 2 , a 2 − 2 ab + b 2 B1 Correct expansions.

sin²x + cos²x = 1 used → ( a + b ) + ( a − b ) = 1 M1 Appropriate use of sin²x + cos²x = 1 with ( a + b )2

2 2

and ( a − b )
2

a² + b² = ½ A1 No evidence of ±2ab, scores 2/3

Alternative method for question 4(i)

2a = (s+c) & 2b = (s−c) or a = ½(s+c) & b = ½(s−c) B1

1 1 M1 Appropriate use of sin²x + cos²x = 1

a²+b² = ( s + c )2 + ( s − c )2 = ½(s²+c²)
4 4

a² + b² = ½ A1 Method using only (sinx − b)2 and (a − cosx)2

scores 0/3.

3 1
SC B1 for assuming θ is acute giving a = +b
5
or 2 5 − b

© UCLES 2019 Page 8 of 20

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(ii) sinx a+b M1 sinx

tanx = → =2 Use of tanx = to form an equation in a and b
cosx a−b cosx
only

a = 3b A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

5 Perimeter of AOC = 2r + rθ B1

Angle COB = π – θ B1 Could be on the diagram. Condone 180 – θ.

Perimeter of BOC = 2r + r(π – θ) B1 FT on angle COB if of form ( kπ − θ ) , k > 0.

(2r +) πr – rθ = 2((2r) + rθ) M1 Sets up equation using r ( kπ − θ ) and ×2 on correct

π −2
(2 + π – θ = 4 + 2θ → θ = ) side. Condone any omissions of OA, OB and/or
3 OC.

θ = 0.38 A1 Equivalent answer in degrees scores A0.

© UCLES 2019 Page 9 of 20

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(i) 3, –3 B1 Accept ± 3

−½ B1

2½ B1

3 Condone misuse of inequality signs.

6(ii) Only mark the curve from 0 → 2π. If the x axis is

not labelled assume that 0 → 2π is the range shown.
Labels on axes are not required.

2 complete oscillations of a cosine curve starting with a maximum at (0,a), a൐0 B1

Fully correct curve which must appear to level off at 0 and/or 2π. B1

Line starting on positive y axis and finishing below the x axis at 2π. Must be B1
straight.

6(iii) 4 B1

© UCLES 2019 Page 10 of 20

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(i) x+2 B1
(f−1(x)) = oe
3

2x + 3 M1 Correct method to obtain x = , (or y = , if

y= → (x – 1)y = 2x + 3 → x ( y − 2) = y + 3 interchanged) but condone + / − sign errors
x −1

x+3  5  A1 Must be in terms of x

(g−1(x) or y) = oe  eg + 1
x−2  x−2 

x ≠ 2 only B1 FT for value of x from their denominator = 0

7(ii) 3 ( 2 x + 3) 7 B1
( fg ( x ) = ) x −1
– 2 (= )
3

18x + 27 = 13x – 13 or 3(4x + 11) = 7(x – 1) M1 7

(5x = – 40) Correct method from their fg= leading to a
3
linear equation and collect like terms. Condone
omission of 2 ( x − 1) .

Alternative method for question 7(ii)

7 13 B1
(f−1( )) =
3 9

2 x + 3 13 M1 13
= → 9(2x + 3)= 13(x – 1) (→ 5x = – 40) Correct method from g ( x ) = their leading to a
x −1 9 9
linear equation and collect like terms.

x = −8 A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 11 of 20

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(i) 6×3+-2×k+-6×-3 = 0 M1 Use of scalar product = 0.

JJJG JJJG JJJG JJJG JJJG JJJG
(18 – 2k + 18 = 0) Could be AO . OB , AO . BO or OA . BO

k = 18 A1

Alternative method for question 8(i)

76 + 18 + k2 = 18 + (k + 2)2 M1 Use of Pythagoras with appropriate lengths.

k = 18 A1

8(ii) 36 + 4 + 36 = 9 +k² + 9 M1 Use of modulus leading to an equation and solve to

k= or k2 =

k = ±√58 or ±7.62 A1 Accept exact or decimal answers.

Allow decimals to greater accuracy.

© UCLES 2019 Page 12 of 20

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance
JJJG JJJG
8(iii)  −3   −2  M1 Complete method using AC = ± ⅔ AB
JJJG   JJJG   JJJG JJJG JJJG JJJG
AB =  6  → AC =  4  then OA + AC And then OA + their AC
 3  2
   

 4 A1
JJJG  
OC =  2 
 −4 
 
JJJG
M1 Divides by modulus of their OC
÷ ( their 4 )2 + ( their 2 )2 + ( their − 4 )2

 4 A1
1  1
=  2  or (4i + 2j – 4k)
6  6
 −4 

Alternative method for question 8(iii)

 p  p − 6  3− p  M1 Correct method. Equates coefficients leading to

JJJG   JJJG   JJJG   values for p, q, r
Let OC =  q  → AC =  q + 2  &CB =  4 − q 
r r+6  −3 − r 
     

p – 6 = 2(3 – p); q+2 = 2(4 – q); r + 6 = 2 (–3 – r) A1

→p=4, q=2 & r= – 4
JJJG
M1 Divides by modulus of their OC
÷ ( their 4 ) + ( their 2 )
2 2
+ ( their − 4 )
2

 4 A1
1  1
=  2  or (4i + 2j – 4k)
6  6
 −4 

© UCLES 2019 Page 13 of 20

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(iii) Alternative method for question 8(iii)

JJJG JJJG JJJG JJJG JJJG JJJG JJJG
(
CB = OB − OC ∴ 2 OB − OC = OC – OA ) M1 Correct method. Gets to a numerical expression for
JJJG JJJG JJJG
k OC from OA & OB .
 12 
JJJG JJJG JJJG JJJG 
→ 2 OB + OA = 3 OC ∴ 3 OC =  6 
 −12 
 

 4 A1
JJJG  
OC =  2 
 −4 
 
JJJG
M1 Divides by modulus of their OC
÷ ( their 4 ) + ( their 2 )
2 2
+ ( their − 4 )
2

 4 A1
1  1
=  2  or (4i + 2j – 4k)
6  6
 −4 

© UCLES 2019 Page 14 of 20

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9 dy B1
For C1: = 2x – 4 → m = 2
dx

y – ‘their 4’ = ‘their m’ (x – 3) or using y = mx + c M1 dy

Use of : and (3, their 4) to find the tangent
dx
equation.

y – 4 = 2( x – 3) or y = 2 x − 2 A1 If using = mx + c , getting c = −2 is enough.

2x – 2= 4 x + k (→ 4 x ² − 12 x + 4 − k = 0 ) *M1 Forms an equation in one variable using tangent &

C2

Use of b² − 4ac = 0 on a 3 term quadratic set to 0. *DM1 Uses ‘discriminant = 0’

144 = 16(4 – k) → k = − 5 A1

4 x² − 12 x + 4 − k = 0 → 4 x² − 12 x + 9 = 0 DM1 Uses k to form a 3 term quadratic in x

3  1 A1 Condone ‘correct’ extra solution.

x= or , y = 1(or – 1).
2  2 

Alternative method for question 9

dy B1
For C1: = 2x – 4 → m = 2
dx

y – ‘their 4’ = ‘their m’ (x – 3) or using y = mx + c M1 dy

Use of : and (3, their 4) to find the tangent
dx
equation.

y – 4 = 2( x – 3) or y = 2 x − 2 A1 If using = mx + c , getting c = −2 is enough.

dy −
1 *M1 dy −
1
For C2: = A(4 x + k ) 2 Finds for C2 in the form A(4 x + k ) 2
dx dx

© UCLES 2019 Page 15 of 20

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9 −
1
1− k *DM1 dy
At P: ‘their 2’ = A(4 x + k ) 2 " →(x= or 4 x + k = 1 ) Equating ‘their 2’ to ‘their ’ and simplify to
4 dx
form a linear equation linking 4x + k and a constant.

( 2x − 2)
2
(
= 4x + k → ( 2 x − 2) = 1 → 4 x2 − 8x + 3 = 0
2
) DM1 Using their y = 2 x − 2 , y2 = 4x + k and their
4 x + k = 1 (but not =0) to form a 3 term quadratic in
x.

3 1 A1 Needs correct values for x and k.

x =  or  and from k = −5 ( or − 1)
2 2

from y2 = 4x + k, y = 1(or – 1). A1 Condone ‘correct’ extra solution.

Alternative method for question 9

dy B1
For C1: = 2x – 4 → m = 2
dx

y – ‘their 4’ = ‘their m’ (x – 3) or using y = mx + c M1 dy

Use of : and (3, their 4) to find the tangent
dx
equation.

y – 4 = 2( x – 3) or y = 2 x − 2 A1 If using = mx + c , getting c = −2 is enough.

dy −
1 *M1 dy −
1
For C2: = A(4 x + k ) 2 Finds for C2 in the form A(4 x + k ) 2
dx dx

−
1
1− k *DM1 dy
At P: ‘their 2’ = A(4 x + k ) 2 " →(x= or 4 x + k = 1 ) Equating ‘their 2’ to ‘their ’ and simplify to
4 dx
form a linear equation linking 4x + k and a constant.

From 4x + k = 1 and y2 = 4x + k → y2 = 1 DM1 Using their 4x + k = 1 (but not =0) and C2 to form
y2 = a constant

© UCLES 2019 Page 16 of 20

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9 3 1 A1 Needs correct values for y and x.

y = 1(or – 1) and x =  or 
2 2

From 4 x + k = 1 , k = –5 ( or – 1) A1 Condone ‘correct’ extra solution

Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(a)(i) S10 = S15 – S10 or S10 = S(11 to 15) M1 Either statement seen or implied.

5(2a + 9d) oe B1

5 A1
7.5(2a + 14d) – 5(2a + 9d) or [ (a + 10d) + (a+14d)] oe
2

a A1 Correct answer from convincing working

d= AG
3

4 a
Condone starting with d = and evaluating both
3
summations as 25a.

10(a)(ii) ( a + 9d ) = 36 + ( a + 3d ) M1 Correct use of a + ( n − 1) d twice and addition of

±36

a = 18 A1

2 Correct answer www scores 2/2

© UCLES 2019 Page 17 of 20

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(b)
S∞ = 9 ×S4;
a
=9
(
a 1− r4 )
or 9(a + ar+ ar2+ar3)
B1 May have 12 in place of a.

1− r 1− r

9(1 – rn) = 1 where n = 3,4 or 5 M1 Correctly deals with a and correctly eliminates
‘1 – r’

8 A1
r4 = oe
9

(5th term =) 10⅔ or 10.7 A1

4 Final answer of 10.6 suggests premature

approximation – award 3/4 www.

© UCLES 2019 Page 18 of 20

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(i) dy  1 − 
1
 9 − 
3 B1B1B1 B1 B1 for each, without × 4. B1 for ×4 twice.
=  ( 4 x + 1) 2  [× 4]  − 2 ( 4 x + 1) 2  [× 4]
dx  2   

  SC If no other marks awarded award B1 for both

 2 18 8 x − 16  powers of (4x +1) correct.
 4x + 1 − or 3 
( )
3


4x + 1 ( 4 x + 1) 2 

 3   1  B1B1B1 B1 B1 for each, without ÷ 4. B1 for ÷4 twice.

 ( 4 x + 1) 2   9 ( 4 x + 1) 2  + C not required.
∫ydx =   [÷ 4] +   [÷ 4] (+C)
3 1
   
 2   2 


( )  SC If no other marks awarded , B1 for both powers
3
4x + 1

 6
+
9
2
( ) 
4 x + 1 ( +C )  of (4x +1) correct.
 
 

11(ii) dy 2 18 M1 dy
=0 → − 3
=0 Sets their to 0 (and attempts to solve
dx 4x + 1 dx
( 4 x + 1) 2

4x + 1 = 9 or (4x + 1)2 = 81 A1 Must be from correct differential.

x = 2, y = 6 or M is (2, 6) only. A1 Both values required.

Must be from correct differential.

© UCLES 2019 Page 19 of 20

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(iii) Realises area is ∫y dx and attempt to use their 2 and sight of 0. *M1 Needs to use their integral and to see ‘their 2’
substituted.

1 DM1 Uses both 0 and ‘their 2’ and subtracts. Condone

Uses limits 0 to 2 correctly → [4.5 + 13.5] – [ + 4.5] ( = 13⅓ ) wrong way round.
6

(Area =) 1⅓ or 1.33 A1 Must be from a correct differential and integral.

3 13⅓ or 1⅓ with little or no working scores

M1DM0A0.

© UCLES 2019 Page 20 of 20

 Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/13
Paper 1 May/June 2019
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2019 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and
some Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 16 printed pages.

© UCLES 2019 [Turn over

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2019 Page 2 of 16

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2019 Page 3 of 16

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors
in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula;
the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct
application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says
otherwise; and similarly when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier
marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol FT implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A
or B marks are given for correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the
candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a
correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1
d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect
working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2019 Page 4 of 16

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part question are genuinely misread and the object
and difficulty of the question remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through” marks. MR is not applied
when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2019 Page 5 of 16

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1(i)  ( x − 2 ) 2  [ +4 ] B1 DB1 2nd B1 dependent on 2 inside bracket

 

1(ii) ( x − 2) M1 Allow e.g. x − 2 < ± 5 , x ‒ 2 = ± 5 and decimal equivalents for √5

2
< 5 → − 5 < x − 2 and/or x − 2 < 5
For M1, ft from their(i). Also allow √13 instead of √5 for clear slip

2− 5 < x<2+ 5 A1A1 A1 for each inequality – allow two separate statements but there must
be 2 inequalities for x. Non-hence methods, if completely correct,
score SC 1/3. Condone -

[3]

Question Answer Marks Guidance

2(i) −5 5 1 5 1 B1B1B1 B1 for each correct term

+ 3− 5
(or −5 x −1 + x −3 − x −5 ) +5 +1
x 8 x 32 x 8 32 SCB1 for both &
x 32 x5

2(ii) 1 × 20 + 4 × their ( −5 ) = 0 M1A1 Must be from exactly 2 terms

SCB1 for 20 + 20 = 40

© UCLES 2019 Page 6 of 16

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(i) 3π B1
Angle EAD = Angle ACD = or 54° or 0.942 soi
10
π
or Angle DAC = or 36° or 0.628 soi
5

3π π M1 Angles used must be correct

AD = 8sin( ) or 8cos( )
10 5

(AD =) 6.47 A1

Alternative method for question 3(i)

 3π  B1 Angles used must be correct

8sin  
8  10  or 11. 01
AB = or AB = ( )
π π 
tan   sin  
5 5

π M1
AD = 11.0 (1) sin oe
5

(AD =) 6.47 A1

3(ii) π π M1 19.7(4)
( theirAD ) × their  − 
1 2
Area sector =
2 2 5

1 π 1  3π   3π  M1 Or e.g. ½ theirAD × 82 − theirAD 2 .

Area ∆ADC = × 8 × theirAD × sin or × 8cos   × 8sin  
2 5 2 10
   10  15.2(2)

(Shaded area =) 35.0 or 34.9 A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 7 of 16

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(i) Max(a) is 8 B1 Allow a = 8 or a - 8

Min(b) is 24 B1 Allow b = 24 or b . 24

2 SCB1 for 8 and 24 seen

4(ii) 96 100 − 4 x B1  48 
gf(x) = − 4 or gf(x) = 2  − 4 is insufficient
x −1 x −1  x −1 
Apply ISW

4(iii) 96 96 96 M1 FT from their(ii) provided (ii) involves algebraic fraction.

y= − 4→ y + 4 = → x −1 = Allow sign errors
x −1 x −1 y+4

96 A1 100 + x
( gf )−1 ( x ) = +1 OR . Must be a function of x. Apply ISW
x+4 x+4

Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(i) x B1 Allow ‒ or + 0.02. Allow n used

 2 + ( x − 1)( − / +0.02 )  or 1.01x − 0.01x 2 or 0.99 x + 0.01x 2 oe
2

© UCLES 2019 Page 8 of 16

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(ii) Equate to 13 then either simplify to a 3-term quadratic equation or M1 Expect n2 ‒ 101n + 1300 (=0) or 0.99 x + 0.01x 2 = 13 . Allow x used
find at least 1 solution (need not be correct) to an unsimplified
quadratic

16 A1 Ignore 85.8 or 86

5(iii) a (1 − r n ) M1
Use of with a = 1, r = 0.92, n = 20 soi
1− r

(=) 10.1 A1

Use of ( S∞ = )
a
with a = 1, r = 0.92
M1 (1) (1 − 0.92n) = 13 → 0.92n = −0.04 oe
OR
1− r 1 − 0.92

S ∞ = 12.5 so never reaches target or < 13 A1 Conclusion required – 'Shown' is insufficient

No solution so never reaches target or < 13

Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(i) MF = ‒4i + 2j + 7k B1

6(ii) FN = 2i ‒ j B1

6(iii) MN = ‒2i + j + 7k B1 FT on their (MF + FN)

© UCLES 2019 Page 9 of 16

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(iv) MF.MN = 8 + 2 + 49 = 59 *M1 MF.MN or FM.NM but allow if one is reversed (implied by ‒59)

|MF| × |MN| = 4 2 + 2 2 + 7 2 × 22 + 12 + 7 2 *DM1 Product of modulus. At least one methodically correct

+ / −59 DM1 All linked correctly. Note 69 × 54 = 9 46

cos FMN =
69 × 54

FMN = 14.9° or 0.259 A1 Do not allow if exactly 1 vector is reversed – even if adjusted finally

Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(i) D = (5, 1) B1

7(ii) ( x − 5) + ( y − 1) = 20 oe B1 FT on their D.
2 2

Apply ISW, oe but not to contain square roots

© UCLES 2019 Page 10 of 16

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(iii) ( x − 1) + ( y − 3) = ( 9 − x ) + ( y + 1) soi M1 Allow 1 sign slip

2 2 2 2

For M1 allow with √ signs round both sides but sides must be
equated

x 2 − 2 x + 1 + y 2 − 6 y + 9 = x 2 − 18 x + 81 + y 2 + 2 y + 1 A1

y = 2 x − 9 www AG A1

Alternative method for question 7(iii)

−1 M1
grad. of AB = ‒½ → grad of perp bisector =
−½

Equation of perp. bisector is y − 1 = 2 ( x − 5 ) A1

y = 2 x − 9 www AG A1

7(iv) Eliminate y (or x) using equations in (ii) and (iii) *M1 To give an (unsimplified) quadratic equation

5x2 ‒50x + 105 (= 0) or 5(x‒5)2 = 20 or 5y2‒10y‒75 (= 0) or DM1 Simplify to one of the forms shown on the right (allow arithmetic
5(y‒1)2 = 80 slips)

x = 3 and 7, or y = ‒3 and 5 A1

(3, ‒3), (7, 5) A1 Both pairs of x & y correct implies A1A1.

SC B2 for no working

© UCLES 2019 Page 11 of 16

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8 f ′ ( −1) = 0 → 3 − a + b = 0 f ′ ( 3) = 0 → 27 + 3a + b = 0 M1 Stationary points at x = ‒1 & x = 3 gives sim. equations in a & b

a = ‒6 A1 Solve simultaneous equation

b = ‒9 A1

Hence f ′ ( x ) = 3 x 2 − 6 x − 9 → f ( x ) = x 3 − 3 x 2 − 9 x ( + c ) B1 FT correct integration for their a,b (numerical a, b)

2 = −1 − 3 + 9 + c M1 Sub x = ‒1, y = 2 into their integrated f(x). c must be present

c = ‒3 A1 FT from their f(x)

f ( 3) = k → k = 27 − 27 − 27 − 3 M1 Sub x = 3, y = k into their integrated f(x) (Allow c omitted)

k = −30 A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(i) q - f ( x) - p + q B1B1 B1 each inequality – allow two separate statements

Accept < , (q, p + q), [q, p + q]
Condone y or x or f in place of f(x)

© UCLES 2019 Page 12 of 16

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(ii) (a) 2 B1 π 3π
Allow ,
4 4

(b) 3 B1 π
Allow 0, ,π
2

(c) 4 B1 π 3π 5π 7π
Allow , , ,
8 8 8 8

9(iii) 2 M1
3sin 2 2 x + 2 = 4 → sin 2 2 x = soi
3

2 2 A1 OR Implied by at least one correct value for x. Allow sin–1 form

Sin2x = (±)0.816(5). Allow sin 2 x = (± ) or 2 x = sin −1 (±)
3 3

(2x =) at least two of 0.955(3), 2.18(6), 4.09(7) , 5.32(8) A1 Can be implied by corresponding values of x below
Allow for at least two of 0.304π, 0.696π, 1.30(4)π, 1.69(6)π
OR at least two of 54.7(4)°, 125.2(6)°, 234.7(4)°, 305.2(6)°

(x =) 0.478, 1.09, 2.05, 2.66. A1A1 Allow 0.152π, 0.348π, 0.652π, 0.848π
SC A1 for 2 or 3 correct.
SC A1 for all of 27.4º, 62.6º, 117.4º, 152.6º
2
Sin2x = ± → x = 0.365,1.21,1.94,2.78 scores SC M1A0A0A1
3

© UCLES 2019 Page 13 of 16

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(i) 1 − 
1 B1 oe
 2 ( 3x + 4 ) 2 
 

dy  1 − 
1 B1 Must have ‘ ×3 ’
=  ( 3x + 4 ) 2  × 3
dx  2 

dy 3 B1
At x = 4, = soi
dx 8

3 M1 If y ≠ 4 is used then clear evidence of substitution of x = 4 is needed

Line through (4, their4) with gradient their
8

3 3 5 A1 oe
Equation of tangent is y − 4 = ( x − 4 ) or y = x +
8 8 2

© UCLES 2019 Page 14 of 16

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(ii) 1 5 B1 4
3 5 3 5 
Area under line =  4 +  × 4 = 13 OR ∫ 8 x + 2 = 16 x
2
+ x = [3 + 10] = 13
2 2
0
2 

1  ( 3x + 4 )3/2  B1B1 Allow if seen as part of the difference of 2 integrals

Area under curve: ∫ ( 3 x + 4 ) 2 =   [ ÷3] First B1 for integral without [ ÷3]
 3 / 2 
Second B1 must have [ ÷3]

128 16 112 4 M1 Apply limits 0 → 4 to an integrated expression

− = = 12
9 9 9 9

4 5 A1
Area = 13 ‒ 12 = (or 0.556)
9 9

Alternative method for question 10(ii)

Area for line = 1/2 × 4 × 3/2 = 3 B1 4

1 1 1
OR ∫ 3 (8 y − 20 ) = 3 4 y
2
− 20  = [ −16 + 25] = 3
5/2
3

 y3   4 y  B1B1
Area for curve = ∫ ⅓( y 2 − 4) =   −  
9  3 

 64 16   8 8  32 M1 Apply limits 2 → 4 to an integrated expression for curve

 − − −  =
 9 3   9 3 9

32 5 A1
Area = − 3 = (or 0.556)
9 9

© UCLES 2019 Page 15 of 16

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(iii) dy 1 B1
=
dx 2

3 1
1 M1 3 1
( 3 x + 4 )− 2 = Allow M1 for ( 3 x + 4 )− 2 = 2 .
2 2 2

1
5 A1
( 3x + 4 ) 2 = 3 → 3x + 4 = 9 → x = oe
3

© UCLES 2019 Page 16 of 16

 Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/12
Paper 1 Pure Mathematics March 2019
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the March 2019 series for most Cambridge
IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.

This document consists of 15 printed pages.

© UCLES 2019 [Turn over

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2019
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2019 Page 2 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2019
PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2019 Page 3 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2019
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors
in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula;
the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct
application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says
otherwise; and similarly when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier
marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol FT implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A
or B marks are given for correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the
candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a
correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1
d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect
working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2019 Page 4 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2019
PUBLISHED
The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part question are genuinely misread and the object
and difficulty of the question remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through” marks. MR is not applied
when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2019 Page 5 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 5C3 ( − )( px )  soi
3 B1 Can be part of expansion. Condone omission of ‒ sign
 

( −1)10 p 3 = −2160 then ÷ and cube root M1 Condone omission of ‒ sign.

p=6 A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 y= 1
3 kx
3
− x 2 ( +c ) M1A1 Attempt integration for M mark

Sub (0, 2) DM1 Dep on c present. Expect c = 2

Sub (3, ‒1) → −1 = 9k − 9 + their c DM1

k = 2/3 A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 6 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3 7  −17  B1 Accept 61.0°, 66° or 122°

Angle CBA = sin −1   = 1.0654 or CBD = cos −1   = 2.13
8
   32 

Sector BCYD = ½ × 82 × 2 × their1.0654 ( rad ) soi M1 Expect 68.1(9). Angle must be in radians (or their
61/360 × 2 × 82)
or sector CBY = ½ × 82 × their1.0654 ( rad ) Or sector DBY

∆BCD = 7 × 82 − 7 2 or ½ × 82 × sin ( 2 × their1.0654 ) soi M1 Expect 27.1(1). Award M1 for ABC or ABD

Semi-circle CXD = ½π × 7 2 = 76.9 ( 7 ) M1 M1M1 for segment area formula used correctly

Total area = their68.19 ‒ their27.11 + their76.97 = 118.0–118.1 M1A1 Cannot gain M1 without attempt to find angle CBA or
CBD

Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(i) dy / dx = −2 ( 2 x − 1) + 2 B2,1,0 Unsimplified form ok (–1 for each error in ‘–2’,

−2

‘ ( 2 x − 1) ’ and ‘2’)
−2

d 2 y / dx 2 = 8 ( 2 x − 1) B1 Unsimplified form ok
−3

© UCLES 2019 Page 7 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(ii) Set dy / dx to zero and attempt to solve – at least one correct step M1

x = 0, 1 A1 Expect ( 2 x − 1)2 = 1

When x = 0, d 2 y / dx 2 = −8 (or < 0) . Hence MAX B1

When x = 1, d 2 y / dx 2 = 8 (or > 0) . Hence MIN B1 Both final marks dependent on correct x and correct
d 2 y / dx 2 and no errors
May use change of sign of dy / dx but not at x = 1 / 2

Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(i) u.v = 8q + 2q − 2 + 6q 2 − 42 B1 May be unsimplified

6q 2 + 10q − 44 = 0 oe M1 Simplify, set to zero and attempt to solve

q = 2, ‒11/3 A1 Both required. Accept ‒3.67

© UCLES 2019 Page 8 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(ii) 0  8  M1 Correct method for scalar product

   
u =  2 v =  −1  u.v = ‒2 ‒ 42
6  −7 
   

|u| × |v| = 22 + 62 × 82 + 12 + 7 2 M1 Prod of mods. At least one methodically correct.

−44 −44 −4 M1 All linked correctly and inverse cos used correctly
cos θ = = =
40 × 114 4 285 √ 11

θ = 130.7° or 2.28(05) rads A1 No other angles between 0° and 180°

Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(i)
Sn =
(
p 2n − 1 ) soi M1

2 −1

( )
p 2n − 1 > 1000 p → 2 n > 1001 AG A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 9 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(ii) p + ( n − 1) p = 336 B1 Expect np = 336

n B1 n
 2 p + ( n − 1) p  = 7224 Expect ( p + np ) = 7224
2 2

Eliminate n or p to an equation in one variable M1 Expect e.g. 168(1 + n) = 7224 or 1 + 336/p =43 etc

n = 42, p = 8 A1A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(a) ( )
3 1 − cos 2 2θ + 8cos 2θ = 0 → 3cos 2 2θ − 8cos 2θ − 3 ( = 0 ) M1 Use s 2 = 1 − c 2 and simplify to 3-term quadratic in 2θ

1 A1 Ignore other solution

cos 2θ = − soi
3

2θ = 109.(47)º or 250.(53)º A1 One solution is sufficient, may be implied by either of

the next solns

θ = 54.7º or 125.3º A1A1ft Ft for 180º ‒ other solution

Use of double angles leads to
3c 4 − 7c 2 + 2 = 0 ⇒ c = ±1 / √ 3 for M1A1A1 then
A1A1 for each angle
Similar marking if 3sin 2 2θ = −8cos2θ is squared
leading to 9sin 4 2θ + 64sin 2 2θ − 64 = 0

© UCLES 2019 Page 10 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(b) √ 3 = a + tan0 → a = √ 3 B1 b = 8 or –4 (or –10, 14 etc) scores M1A0

0 = tan(−bπ / 6) + √ 3 taken as far as tan −1 , angle units consistent ( )

M1 A0 if tan −1 − 3 is not exact; (b=2 no working scores

B2)

b=2 A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(i) ( x − 2 )2  + [3] B1 DB1 2nd B1 dependent on ±2 in 1st bracket

 

8(ii) Largest k is 2 Accept k - 2 B1 Must be in terms of k

8(iii) y = ( x − 2) + 3 ⇒ x − 2 = ( ± ) y − 3 M1
2

⇒ f −1 ( x ) = 2 − x − 3 for x > 4 A1B1

© UCLES 2019 Page 11 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(iv) 2 2 B1 Either form

gf(x) = =
x − 4 x + 7 − 1 ( x − 2 )2 + 2
2

Since f ( x ) > 4 ⇒ gf ( x ) < 2 / 3 (or since x < 1etc ) M1A1 2/3 in answer implies M1 www

range of gf(x) is 0 < gf(x)( < 2/3) B1 Accept 0 < y < 2/3, (0, 2/3) but 0 < x < 2/3 is
SCM1A1B0

Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(i) ( )
V = ( π ) ∫ x 3 + x 2 ( dx ) M1 Attempt ∫ y 2 dx

 x 4 x3 
3 A1
(π )  + 
4 3 0

DM1 May be implied by a correct answer

(π )  ( −0 )
81
+9
4 

117π A1 Accept 91.9

oe If additional areas rotated about x-axis, maximum of
4
M1A0DM1A0

© UCLES 2019 Page 12 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(ii) B2,1,0 Omission of 3 x 2 + 2 x is one error

dy 1 3
( ) ( )
−1/2
= x + x2 × 3x 2 + 2 x
dx 2

(At x = 3,) y = 6 B1

1 1 11 DB1ft Ft on their dy / dx providing differentiation attempted

At x = 3, m = × × 33 = soi
2 6 4

4 DM1 Equation through (3, their 6) and with gradient ‒1/their

Equation of normal is y − 6 = − ( x − 3) m
11

1 A1
When x = 0, y = 7 oe
11

© UCLES 2019 Page 13 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(i) 4 x1/ 2 = x + 3 → M1 Eliminate y from the 2 equations and then:

( x1/ 2 ) 2 − 4 x1/2 + 3 ( = 0 ) OR 16 x = x 2 + 6 x + 9 Either treat as quad in x1/ 2 OR square both sides and
RHS is 3-term

x1/ 2 = 1or 3 x 2 − 10 x + 9 ( = 0 ) A1 If in 1st method x1/ 2 becomes x, allow only M1 unless

subsequently squared

x = 1 or 9 A1

y = 4 or12 A1ft Ft from their x values

If the 2 solutions are found by trial substitution B1 for
the first coordinate and B3 for the second coordinate

AB 2 = ( 9 − 1) + (12 − 4 ) M1
2 2

AB = 128 or 8 2 oe or 11.3 A1

10(ii) dy/dx = 2 x −1/ 2 B1

2 x −1/ 2 = 1 M1 Set their derivative = their gradient of AB and attempt

to solve

(4, 8) A1 Alternative method without calculus:

MAB = 1, tangent is y = mx + c where m = 1 and meets
y = 4x1/2 when 4x1/2 = x + c. This is a quadratic with
b2 = 4ac, so 16 – 4 × 1 × = 0 so c = 4 B1 Solving
4x1/2 = x + 4 gives x = 4 and y = 8 M1A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 14 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2019
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(iii) Equation of normal is y − 8 = −1( x − 4 ) M1 Equation through their T and with gradient ‒1/their
gradient of AB. Expect y = − x + 12 ,

Eliminate y (or x) → − x + 12 = x + 3 or y − 3 = 12 − y M1 May use their equation of AB

(4½, 7½) A1

© UCLES 2019 Page 15 of 15

 Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/11
Paper 1 October/November 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2018 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 14 printed pages.

© UCLES 2018 [Turn over

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2018 Page 2 of 14

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2018 Page 3 of 14

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors
in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula;
the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct
application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says
otherwise; and similarly when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier
marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol FT implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A
or B marks are given for correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the
candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a
correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1
d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect
working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2018 Page 4 of 14

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part question are genuinely misread and the object
and difficulty of the question remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through” marks. MR is not applied
when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2018 Page 5 of 14

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED

Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 (4x ½
)( )
− 3 x½ − 2 oe soi Alt: 4 x + 6 = 11 x ⇒ 16 x 2 − 73 x + 36 M1 Attempt solution for x½ or sub u = x½

x½ = 3 / 4 or 2 A1 Reasonable solutions for x½ implies M1 ( = 2, 3/4,

(16 x − 9 )( x − 4 ) M1A0)

x = 9 / 16 oe or 4 A1 Little or no working shown scores SCB3, spotting one

solution, B0

Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 x 2 + bx + 5 = x + 1 → x 2 + x ( b − 1) + 4 ( = 0 ) M1 Eliminate x or y with all terms on side of an equation

(b 2 − 4ac =) ( b − 1)2 − 16 M1

b associated with ‒3 & +5 or b − 1 associated with ±4 A1 ( x − 2 )2 = 0 or ( x + 2 )2 = 0, x = ±2, b − 1 = ±4

(M1A1)
Association can be an equality or an inequality

b ⩾ 5, b ⩽ –3 A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 6 of 14

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(i) Gradient of AB = ‒3/4 B1 Accept ‒3a/4a

3 B1FT Answer must not include a. Ft on their numerical gradient

y = − x oe
4

3(ii) ( 4a )2 + ( 3a )2 = (10 / 3)2 soi M1 May be unsimplified

25a 2 = 100 / 9 oe A1

a = 2/3 A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(i) 80 80 M1A1 Correct formula (M1). Correct a, d and n (A1) .

S80 = 12 + 79 × ( −4 )  or [6 + l ] , l = −310
2 2

–12 160 A1

4(ii) 6 M1A1 Correct formula with r < 1 for M1

S∞ = =9
1
1−
3

© UCLES 2018 Page 7 of 14

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(i) (cos θ − 4)(5cosθ − 2) − 4sin 2θ M1 Accept numerator only

( = 0)
sin θ (5cos θ − 2)

(
5cos 2θ − 22cos θ + 8 − 4 1 − cos 2θ ) ( = 0)
M1 Simplify numerator and use s 2 = 1 − c 2 . Accept numerator
only
sin θ (5cos θ − 2)

9cos2θ − 22cosθ + 4 = 0 www AG A1

5(ii) Attempt to solve for cosθ , (formula, completing square expected) M1 Expect cosθ = 0.1978 . Allow 2.247 in addition

θ = 78.6°, 281.4° (only, second solution in the range) A1A1FT Ft for (360º ‒ 1st solution)

© UCLES 2018 Page 8 of 14

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(i) 0 = 9a + 3a 2 M1 dy
Sub = 0 and x = 3
dx

a = −3 only A1

6(ii) dy 9x2 M1A1FT Attempt integration. 3

+ ½ a 2 x 2 scores M1. Ft on
3 ax
1
= −3x 2 + 9 x → y = − x3 + ( +c )
dx 2 their a.

9½ = −27 + 40½ + c DM1 Sub x = 3, y = 9½ . Dependent on c present

c = −4 A1 9 x2
Expect y = − x3 + −4
2

6(iii) d2 y M1 2ax + a 2 scores M1

= −6 x + 9
dx 2

d2 y A1 Requires at least one of ‒9 or < 0. Other methods possible.

At x = 3, = −9 < 0 MAX www
dx 2

© UCLES 2018 Page 9 of 14

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(i) 2 = k(8 ‒ 28 + 24) → k = 1/2 B1

7(ii) When x = 5, y = [½](125 ‒ 175 + 60) = 5 ( )

M1 Or solve [½ ] x 3 − 7 x 2 + 12 x = x ⇒ x = 5 [ x = 0, 2]

Which lies on y = x, oe A1

7(iii) 1 M1 1 7
∫[ 2 (x
3
− 7 x 2 + 12 x) − x]dx . Expect ∫ x3 − x 2 + 5 x
2 2

1 4 7 3 5 2 B2,1,0FT Ft on their k
x − x + x
8 6 2

2 ‒ 28/3 +10 DM1 Apply limits 0 → 2

8/3 A1

1 4 7 3 B2,1,0FT Integrate to find area under curve, Ft on their k

OR x − x + 3x 2
8 6

2 ‒ 28/3 +12 M1 Apply limits 0 → 2. Dep on integration attempted

2 M1
∫
Area ∆ = ½ × 2 × 2 or xdx = ½ x 2  = 2
0

8/3 A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 10 of 14

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance
JJJG
8(i) DF = −6i + 2k B1

1
JJJG
8(ii) EF = −6i − 3j + 2k B1

JJJG JJJG
M1 Must use their EF
| EF |= ( −6 ) + ( −3) + 22
2 2

1 A1
Unit vector = ( −6i − 3j + 2k )
7

3
JJJG JJJG
8(iii) DF .EF = (‒6i + 2k).(‒6i ‒ 3j + 2k) = 36 + 4 = 40 M1
JJJG JJJG
| DF | = √40, | EF | =7 M1

40 M1
cosEFD = oe
7 40

EFD = 25.4º A1 Special case: use of cosine rule M1(must evaluate lengths
using correct method) A1 only

© UCLES 2018 Page 11 of 14

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9 Angle OAB = π / 2 − π / 5 = 3π / 10 soi B1 Allow 54° or 0.9425 rads

1  3π  2 M1 Expect 11.78
Sector CAB = ×  their ×5
2  10 

5 M1A1 May be implied by OC = 3.507

OA = = 8.507
π
sin
5

1 π M1 Expect 3.86
Sector COD = × ( their 3.507 ) ² ×
2 5

1 3π M1 1 5
∆OAB = × 5 × ( their 8.507 ) sin Or ×5×
π
or 2.5 × ( their8.507 )2 − 25
2 10 2 tan
5

= 17.20 or 17.21 A1

Shaded area 17.20 ( or 17.21) − 11.78 − 3.86 = 1.56 or 1.57 A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 12 of 14

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(i)(a) dy  B1B1 Can gain this in part (b)(ii)

= −½ ( 4 x − 3)  × [ 4]
−2

dx  

When x = 1, m = −2 B1FT dy
Ft from their
dx

Normal is y − ½ = ½ ( x − 1) M1 Line with gradient ‒1/m and through A

y = ½ x soi A1 Can score in part (b)

10(i)(b) M1A1 x/2 seen on RHS of equation can score previous A1

1 x
(
= → 2 x ( 4 x − 3) = 2 → ( 2 ) 4 x 2 − 3 x − 1
2 ( 4 x − 3) 2
) ( = 0)
x = −1 / 4 A1 Ignore x = 1 seen in addition

10(ii) dy M1A1 Allow +0.3 or ‒0.3 for M1

Use of chain rule: = ( their − 2 ) × ( ± ) 0.3 = 0.6
dt

© UCLES 2018 Page 13 of 14

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(a)(i) [Greatest value of a is] 3 B1 Must be in terms of a. Allow a < 3 . Allow a ⩽ 3

11(a)(ii) Range is y > −1 B1 Ft on their a. Accept any equivalent notation

y = ( x − 3) − 1→ ( x − 3) = 1 + y → x = 3 ( ± ) 1 + y M1 Order of operations correct. Allow sign errors

2 2

f −1 ( x ) = 3 − 1 + x cao A1

11(b)(i) 2 B1
gg(2x) = ( 2 x − 3) − 3
2
 

( 2 x − 3 )4 − 6 ( 2 x − 3)2 + 9 B1

11(b)(ii)  4 3 2
  (
2
) 
16 x − 96 x + 216 x − 216 x + 81 +  −24 x + 72 x − 54 + 9 
B4,3,2,1,0

16 x 4 − 96 x3 + 192 x 2 − 144 x + 36

© UCLES 2018 Page 14 of 14

 Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/12
Paper 1 October/November 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2018 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 18 printed pages.

© UCLES 2018 [Turn over

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2018 Page 2 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2018 Page 3 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors
in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula;
the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct
application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says
otherwise; and similarly when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier
marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol FT implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A
or B marks are given for correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the
candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a
correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1
d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect
working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2018 Page 4 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part question are genuinely misread and the object
and difficulty of the question remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through” marks. MR is not applied
when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2018 Page 5 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 1 B1 Components of coefficient added together 0/4

For a correctly selected term in : (3x)4 or 34 B1 expect 81
x2

 2  B1 B1 expect 8/27
×  2  ³ or (2/3)3
 3x 

× 7C3 or 7C4 B1 B1 expect 35

840 B1 All of the first three marks can be scored if the correct term is
→ 840 or seen in an expansion and it is selected but then wrongly
x2
simplified.

SC: A completely correct unsimplified term seen in an

expansion but not correctly selected can be awarded B2.

© UCLES 2018 Page 6 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 3 1 B1 B1 B1 for each term correct – allow unsimplified. C not

x2 x2 required.
Integrate → +2 (+C)
3 1
2 2

 3 1 
4 M1 Evidence of 4 and 1 used correctly in their integrand ie at
 x2 x2  40 14 least one power increased by 1.
 3 +2 1  → −
  3 3
 2 2 1

26 A1 Allow 8.67 awrt. No integrand implies use of integration

= oe function on calculator 0/4. Beware a correct answer from
3
wrong working.

Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(i) P is (t, 5t) Q is (t, t(9 – t²)) → 4t – t³ B1 B1 B1 for both y coordinates which can be implied by
subsequent working. B1 for PQ allow 4t – t ³ or t ³ – 4t .
Note: 4x – x3 from equating line and curve 0/2 even if x then
replaced by t.

[2]

© UCLES 2018 Page 7 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(ii) d ( PQ ) B1FT B1FT for differentiation of their PQ, which MUST be a cubic
= 4 – 3t² d
dt expression, but can be f ( x ) from (i) but not the equation
dx
of the curve.

2 M1 Setting their differential of PQ to 0 and attempt to solve for t

=0→t=+ or x.
√3

16 16 3 A1 Allow 3.08 awrt. If answer comes from wrong method in (i)

→ Maximum PQ = or award A0.
3√ 3 9
Correct answer from correct expression by T&I scores 3/3.

Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(i) 1 B1 Correct fg
fg(x) = 2 – 3cos( x )
2

1 1 1 1   1 M1 M1 for correct order of operations to solve their fg(x) = 1 as

2 – 3cos( x ) = 1 → cos( x ) = →  x  = cos −1  their  far as using inverse cos expect 1.23, ( or 70.5◦ ) condone x =.
2 2 3  2   3

4.7 π A1 One solution only in the given range, ignore answers outside
x = 2.46 awrt or ( 0.784πawrt ) the range.
6
Answer in degrees A0.

Alternative:
1
Solve f(y) = 1 → y = 1.23→ x = 1.23 B1M1
2
→ x = 2.46 A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 8 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(ii) B1 One cycle of ± cos curve, evidence of turning at the ends not
required at this stage. Can be a poor curve but not an inverted
“V”. If horizontal axis is not labelled mark everything to the
right of the vertical axis. If axis is clearly labelled mark 0 →
2π.

B1 Start and finish at roughly the same negative y value.

Significantly more above the x axis than below or correct
range implied by labels .

B1 Fully correct. Curves not lines.

Must be a reasonable curve clearly turning at both ends.
Labels not required but must be appropriate if present.

© UCLES 2018 Page 9 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(i) From the AP: x − 4 = y − x B1 y+4

Or equivalent statement e.g. y = 2x – 4 or x = .
2

y 18 B1 y2
From the GP: = Or equivalent statement e.g. y2 = 18x or x = .
x y 18

Simultaneous equations: y ² − 9 y − 36 = 0 or 2 x ² − 17 x + 8 = 0 M1 Elimination of either x or y to give a three term quadratic

(= 0)

OR

4 + 2d B1
4+d =x, 4+2d=y → = r oe
4+d
2
4 + 2d  M1 Uses ar2 = 18 to give a three term quadratic (= 0)
( 4 + d )  2
 = 18 → 2d − d − 28 = 0
 4+d 

d=4 B1 −7
Condone inclusion of d = oe
2

© UCLES 2018 Page 10 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(i) OR

y 18 B1
From the GP =
x y

y2 y2 y2 B1
→x= → 4+ d = →d = –4
18 18 18

 y2  M1
4 + 2  − 4  = y → y ² − 9 y − 36 = 0
 18 

x = 8, y = 12. A1 1 
Needs both x and y. Condone  , −3  included in final
2 
answer.
Fully correct answer www 4/4.

5(ii) AP 4th term = 16 B1 −13

Condone inclusion of oe
2

 12 
3 M1 A valid method using their x and y from (i).
GP 4th term = 8 ×  
8

= 27 A1 Condone inclusion of –108

Note: Answers from fortuitous x = 8, y = 12 in (i) can only

score M1.
Unidentified correct answer(s) with no working seen after
valid x = 8, y = 12 to be credited with appropriate marks.

© UCLES 2018 Page 11 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(i) 9 9 B1 Both marks can be gained for correct equated expressions.

In ∆ ABD, tanθ = → BD = or 9tan(90 – θ) or 9 cotθ
BD tanθ
9sin ( 90 − θ )
or ( 20 tanθ ) − 92  (Pythag) or
2
(Sine rule)
  sinθ

BD B1
In ∆ DBC, sinθ= → BD = 20sinθ
20

9 M1 Equates their expressions for BD and uses sinθ/cosθ = tanθ

20sinθ =
tanθ or cosθ/sinθ = cot θ if necessary.

→ 20sin²θ = 9cosθ AG A1 Correct manipulation of their expression to arrive at given

answer.

SC:
BD
In ∆ DBC, sinθ = → BD = 20sinθ B1
20
9 BD
In ∆ ABD, BA = and cosθ =
sinθ BA
20sinθ 20sin ²θ
cosθ = → cosθ = M1
9 / sinθ 9
→ 20sin²θ = 9cosθ A1 Scores 3/4

6(ii) Uses s² + c² = 1 → 20cos²θ + 9cosθ – 20 (= 0) M1 Uses s² + c² = 1 to form a three term quadratic in cosθ

→ cosθ = 0.8 A1 www

→ θ = 36.9º awrt A1 www. Allow 0.644c awrt. Ignore 323.1º or 2.50c.

Note: correct answer without working scores 0/3.

© UCLES 2018 Page 12 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance
JJJG
7 PN = 8i – 8k B1
JJJJG
PM = 4i + 4j – 6k B2,1,0 Loses 1 mark for each component incorrect
JJJG JJJJG
SC: PN = – 8i + 8k and PM = – 4i – 4j +6k scores 2/3.
JJJG JJJJG
PN .PM = 32 + 0 + 48 = 80 M1 Evaluates x1x2 +y1y2+z1z2 for correct vectors or one or both
reversed.

PN × PM = √128 × √68 (= 16 34 ) M1 Product of their moduli – may be seen in cosine rule

√128 × √68 cos M P̂ N = 80 M1 All linked correctly.

Angle M P̂ N = 31.0◦ awrt A1 Answer must come directly from +ve cosine ratio.
Cosine rule not accepted as a complete method. Allow 0.540c
awrt.
Note: Correct answer from incorrect vectors scores A0 (XP)

© UCLES 2018 Page 13 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(i) −1  7 M1 Correct method for A B̂ C, expect 1.696cawrt

A B̂ C using cosine rule giving cos-1( ) or 2sin−1(¾) or 2 cos −1 
8  2 
 
7 7 Or for B Â C, expect 0.723cawrt
or B Â C = cos-1(¾) or B Â C = sin-1 or B Â C = tan −1
4 3

C B̂ Y = π – A B̂ C or 2×C Â B M1 For attempt at C B̂ Y = π – A B̂ C or C B̂ Y = 2 × C Â B

OR

Find CY from ∆ ACY using Pythagoras or similar ∆s M1 Expect 4 7

 82 + 82 − ( their CY )2  M1 Correct use of cosine rule

C B̂ Y = cos −1  
 2×8×8 
 

C B̂ Y = 1.445c AG A1 Numerical values for angles in radians, if given, need to be

correct to 3 decimal places. Method marks can be awarded
for working in degrees.
Need 82.8° awrt converted to radians for A1.
Identification of angles must be consistent for A1.

8(ii) Arc CY = 8 × 1.445 B1 Use of s=8θ for arc CY, Expect 11.56
*
B Â C = ½(π – A B̂ C) or cos−1(¾) M1 For a valid attempt at B Â C, may be from (i). Expect 0.7227c

Arc XC = 12 × (their B Â C) DM1 Expect 8.673

Perimeter = 11.56 + 8.673 + 4 = 24.2 cm awrt www A1 Omission of ‘+4’ only penalised here.

© UCLES 2018 Page 14 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(i) 2x² − 12x + 7 = 2 ( x − 3) − 11

2 B1 B1 Mark full expression if present: B1 for 2(x – 3)2 and B1
for – 11.
If no clear expression award a = – 3 and b = – 11.

9(ii) Range (of f or y) ⩾ ‘their – 11’ B1FT FT for their ‘b’ or start again. Condone >.
Do NOT accept x > or ⩾

9(iii) (k =) –“their a” also allow x or k ⩽ 3 B1FT dy

FT for their “a” or start again using = 0.
dx
Do NOT accept x = 3.

1
*
9(iv) y = 2 ( x − 3) − 11 → y + 11 = 2(x – 3)² M1 Isolating their (x – 3)², condone – 11.
2

y + 11
= ( x − 3) ²
2

 y + 11   y + 11  DM1 Other operations in correct order, allow ± at this stage.

x = 3+   or 3 −   Condone – 3.
 2   2 

 x + 11  A1 needs ‘–’. x and y could be interchanged at the start.

(g−1(x) or y) = 3 −  
 2 

© UCLES 2018 Page 15 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance
*
10(i) 12 12 M1 Attempt to eliminate y (or x) to form a 3 term quadratic.
2x + = k − x or y = 2 ( k − y ) + → 3 term quadratic. Expect 3x² − kx + 12 or 3y2 – 5ky + (2k2 + 12) (= 0)
x k−y

Use of b² − 4ac → k² − 144 < 0 DM1 Using the discriminant, allow ⩽ , = 0; expect 12 and −12

− 12 < k < 12 A1 Do NOT accept ⩽ . Separate statements OK.

10(ii) Using k = 15 in their 3 term quadratic M1 From (i) or restart. Expect 3x² − 15x + 12 or 3y2 – 75y + 462
(= 0)

x = 1,4 or y = 11, 14 A1 Either pair of x or y values correct..

(1, 14) and (4, 11) A1 Both pairs of coordinates

10(iii) Gradient of AB = −1 → Perpendicular gradient = +1 B1FT Use of m1m2=−1 to give +1 or ft from their A and B.

Finding their midpoint using their (1, 14) and (4, 11) M1 Expect (2½, 12½)

Equation: y – 12½ = (x – 2½) [y = x + 10] A1 Accept correct unsimplified and isw

© UCLES 2018 Page 16 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(i) dy 3 1
  6  B2,1,0 Looking for 3 components
=  × ( 4 x + 1) 2  [×4] [− 2] 
−
− 2
dx  2   4x + 1 

 3
3 2 x² B1 B1 B1 33
2 x2
∫ ydx = 3 ( 4 x + 1) 2 ÷  [ ÷ 4 ] [ − ] (+ C) B1 for 3 ( 4 x + 1) 2 ÷
B1 for ‘÷4’. B1 for ‘− ’.
 2 2 2 2
 3
 Ignore omission of + C. If included isw any attempt at
 = ( 4 x + 1) 2 − x 2  evaluating.
 2 
 
 

11(ii) dy 6 M1 dy
At M, =0→ =2 Sets their 2 term to 0 and attempts to solve
dx 4x + 1 dx
(as far as x = k)

x = 2, y = 5 A1 A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 17 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(iii) 1 3

2 M1 Uses their integral and their ‘2’ and 0 correctly
Area under the curve =  ( 4 x + 1) 2 − x ² 
2 0

(13.5 – 4) – 0.5 or 9.5 – 0.5 = 9 A1 No working implies use of integration function on calculator
M0A0.

Area under the chord = trapezium = ½ × 2 × (3 + 5) = 8 M1 Either using the area of a trapezium with their 2, 3 and 5 or
 x2 
2 ∫ ( their x + 3) dx using their ‘2’ and 0 correctly.
Or  + 3 x  = 8
2 0

(Shaded area = 9 – 8) = 1 A1 Dependent on both method marks,

OR Area between the chord and the curve is:

2 M1 Subtracts their line from given curve and uses their ‘2’ and 0
∫ 3 4 x + 1 − 2 x − ( x + 3) dx correctly.
0
2

∫
= 3 4 x + 1 − 3 x − 3dx
0

1 
2 A1 All integration correct and limits 2 and 0.
3
x2
= 3  ( 4 x + 1) 2 − − x
6 2 0

 27   1  M1 Evidence of substituting their ‘2’ and 0 into their integral.

= 3  − 2 − 2  −  
 6   6 

1 1  1  A1 No working implies use of a calculator M0A0.

= 3 −  = 3  = 1
 2 6  3

[4]

© UCLES 2018 Page 18 of 18

 Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/13
Paper 1 October/November 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2018 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

This document consists of 15 printed pages.

© UCLES 2018 [Turn over

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2018 Page 2 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2018 Page 3 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors
in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula;
the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct
application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says
otherwise; and similarly when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier
marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol FT implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A
or B marks are given for correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the
candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a
correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1
d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect
working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2018 Page 4 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part question are genuinely misread and the object
and difficulty of the question remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through” marks. MR is not applied
when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2018 Page 5 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 7C5 x 2 (−2 / x)5 soi B1 Can appear in an expansion. Allow 7C2

21 × −32 soi B1 Identified. Allow (21x2) × (‒32 x‒5). Implied by correct answer

‒672 B1 −672
Allow . If 0/3 scored, 672 scores SCB1
x3

© UCLES 2018 Page 6 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 f ′ ( x ) = 3x 2 + 4 x − 4 B1

Factors or crit. values or sub any 2 values ( x ≠ −2) into f ′ ( x ) soi M1 Expect ( x + 2 )( 3x − 2 ) or ‒2, ⅔ or any 2 subs
(excluding x = ‒2).

For −2 < x < 2 3 , f ′ ( x ) < 0; for x > 2 3 , f ′ ( x ) >0 soi Allow - , . M1 Or at least 1 specific value (≠ −2) in each interval giving opp
signs
Or f′( 2 3 )=0 and f′′( 2 3 ) ≠ 0 (i.e. gradient changes sign at x = 2 3 )

Neither www A1 Must have ‘Neither’

ALT 1 At least 3 values of f(x) M1 e.g. f(0) = 7, f(1) = 6, f(2) = 15

At least 3 correct values of f(x) A1

At least 3 correct values of f(x) spanning x = ⅔ A1

Shows a decreasing and then increasing pattern. Neither www A1 Or similar wording. Must have ‘Neither’

ALT 2 f ′ ( x ) = 3 x 2 + 4 x − 4 = 3 ( x + 2 3 ) − 16 B1B1 Do not condone sign errors

2
3

16 M1
f ′( x) . −
3

f ′ ( x ) < 0 for some values and > 0 for other values. Neither www A1 Or similar wording. Must have ‘Neither’

© UCLES 2018 Page 7 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(i) 0.8 oe B1

3(ii) BD = 5 sin their 0.8 M1 Expect 3.58(7). Methods using degrees are acceptable

DC = 5 ‒ 5cos their 0.8 M1 Expect 1.51(6)

Sector = ½ × 52 × their0.8 M1 Expect 10 for sector.

OR Seg = ½ × 52 × [their 0.8 ‒ sintheir 0.8] Expect 1.03(3) for segment

Trap = ½(5 + theirDC) × theirBD oe M1 OR (for last 2 marks) if X is on AB and XC is parallel to BD:
OR ∆BDC = ½theirBD × theirCD

Shaded area = 11.69 ‒ 10 OR 2.71(9) ‒ 1.03(3) = 1.69 cao A1 BDCX ‒(sector ‒ ∆AXC ) = 5.43(8) ‒ [10 ‒ 6.24(9)] = 1.69 cao
M1A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(i) Gradient, m, of AB = 3/4 B1

−4 M1A1 −1
Equation of BC is y − 4 = ( x − 3) Line through (3, 4) with gradient (M1). (Expect
3 m
−4
y= x +8)
3

x=6 A1 Ignore any y coordinate given.

© UCLES 2018 Page 8 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(ii) ( AC ) M1A1
2
= 7 2 + 12 → AC = 7.071 M mark for ( their 6 + / −1)2 + 1 .
2

Question Answer Marks Guidance

5 a + ( n − 1) 3 = 94 B1

n n B1
 2a + ( n − 1) 3 = 1420 OR [ a + 94] = 1420
2 2

Attempt elimination of a or n M1

3n 2 − 191n + 2840 ( = 0 ) OR a 2 − 3a − 598 ( = 0) A1 3-term quadratic (not necessarily all on the same side)

n = 40 (only) A1

a = ‒23 (only) A1 Award 5/6 if a 2nd pair of solutions (71/3, 26) is given in
addition or if given as the only answer.

© UCLES 2018 Page 9 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6 ( BO ) = −8i − 6 j B1 OR (OB) = 8i + 6j

( BF ) = −6 j − 8i + 7k + 4i + 2 j = −4i − 4 j + 7k B1 OR (FB) = 4i + 4j ‒ 7k

( BF.BO ) = ( −4 )( −8) + ( −4 )( −6 ) M1 OR (FB.OB) Expect 56. Accept one reversed but award final A0

BF × BO = 42 + 42 + 7 2 × 82 + 62 M1 Expect 90. At least one magnitude methodically correct

 their 56  −1  56  −1  28 
DM1A1 Or equivalent ‘integer’ fractions. All M marks dependent on use
Angle OBF = cos −1   = cos   or cos   of (±)BO and (±)BF. 3rd M mark dep on both preceding M
 their 90   90   45 
marks

Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(i) (tan θ + 1)(1 − cosθ ) + (tan θ − 1)(1 + cosθ ) M1

soi
(1 + cosθ )(1 − cosθ )
tan θ − tan θ cos θ + 1 − cosθ + tan θ − 1 + tan θ cosθ − cosθ A1
www
1 − cos 2θ

2(tan θ − cosθ ) A1
www AG
sin 2θ

© UCLES 2018 Page 10 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(ii) sin θ M1 Equate numerator to zero and replace tan θ by sin θ / cosθ
( 2 ) (tan θ − cosθ ) ( = 0 ) → ( 2 )  
− cos θ  ( = 0 ) soi
 cos θ 

( 2 ) ( sin θ − (1 − sin 2θ ) ) ( = 0 ) DM1 Multiply by cosθ and replace cos 2θ by1 − sin 2θ

sin θ = 0.618 ( 0 ) soi A1 Allow (√5–1)/2

θ = 38.2° A1 Apply penalty ‒1 for extra solutions in range

Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(i) y = ⅓ ax 3 + ½ bx 2 − 4 x ( +c ) B1

11 = 0 + 0 + 0 + c M1 Sub x = 0, y = 11 into an integrated expression. c must be present

y= 1
3 ax
3
+ 1 2 bx 2 − 4 x + 11 A1

8(ii) 4a + 2b − 4 = 0 M1 Sub x = 2, dy / dx = 0

1
3 (8a ) + 2b − 8 + 11 = 3 M1 Sub x = 2, y = 3 into an integrated expression. Allow if 11
missing

Solve simultaneous equations DM1 Dep. on both M marks

a = 3, b = −4 A1A1 Allow if no working seen for simultaneous equations

© UCLES 2018 Page 11 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(i) For their 3-term quad a recognisable application of b 2 − 4ac M1 Expect 2 x 2 − x ( 3 + k ) + 1 − k 2 ( = 0) oe for the 3-term quad.

(b 2
− 4ac = ) (3 + k ) 2
( )
− 4 ( 2 ) 1 − k 2 oe A1 Must be correct. Ignore any RHS

9k 2 + 6k + 1 A1 Ignore any RHS

( 3k + 1) A1
2 2
. 0 Do not allow > 0. Hence curve and line meet. AG  1
Allow (9)  k +  . 0 . Conclusion required.
 3

ALT Attempt solution of 3-term quadratic M1

Solutions x = k + 1, ½ (1 − k ) A1A1

Which exist for all values of k. Hence curve and line meet. AG A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 12 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(ii) k = −1 / 3 B1 ALT dy / dx = 4 x − 3 ⇒ 4 x − 3 = k

8 8 M1 Sub k = 4 x − 3 into line 1 → 2 x 2 − x ( 4 x ) + 1 − ( 4 x − 3)2 ( = 0 )

Sub (one of) their k = − 1 3 into either line 1 → 2 x 2 − x + ( = 0 )
3 9

Or into the derivative of line 1 → 4x − ( 3 + k )( = 0 )

2 1 1 A1 x = 2/3, y = ‒1/9 (both required) [from −18 x 2 + 24 x − 8 (=0)

x = 2/3 Do not allow unsubstantiated  , −  following k = −
3 9 3 oe]

2 1 1 A1 k = −1 / 3
y = ‒1/9 Do not allow unsubstantiated  , −  following k = −
3 9 3

Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(i)  ( 3 x − 1)1/3  M1A1A1 Recognisable integration of y2 (M1) Independent A1, A1

V = 4 (π ) ∫ ( 3 x − 1) dx = 4 ( π )   [ ÷3]
−2/3
for [ ] [ ]
 1 / 3 

4 (π ) [ 2 − 1] DM1 Expect 4 (π )( 3x − 1) 13

4 π or 12.6 A1 Apply limits ⅔ → 3. Some working must be shown.

© UCLES 2018 Page 13 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(ii) dy / dx = (−2 / 3) ( 3x − 1) B1 Expect −2 ( 3x − 1)−4/3

−4/3
×3

When x = 2 / 3, y = 2 soi dy / dx = −2 B1B1 2nd B1 dep. on correct expression for dy//dx

Equation of normal is y − 2 = ½ ( x − 2 3 ) M1 Line through (⅔, their 2) and with grad ‒1/m. Dep on m from
diffn

1 5 A1
y= x+
2 3

Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(i) B1B1B1
[ 2] ( x − 3)2  [ −7]

11(ii) Largest value of k is 3. Allow (k = ) 3. B1 Allow k - 3 but not x - 3 as final answer.

© UCLES 2018 Page 14 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(iii) y = 2 ( x − 3) − 7 → ( x − 3) = ½ ( y + 7 ) or with x/y transposed M1 Ft their a, b, c. Order of operations correct. Allow sign errors
2 2

x = 3 ± ½ ( y + 7 ) Allow 3 + √ or 3 ‒√ or with x/y transposed DM1 Ft their a, b, c. Order of operations correct. Allow sign errors

f −1 ( x ) = 3 − ½ ( x + 7 ) A1

(Domain is x) . their − 7 B1FT Allow other forms for interval but if variable appears must be x

11(iv) x + 3 - 1 . Allow x + 3 = 1 M1 Allow x + 3 - k

largest p is − 2 . Allow (p =) ‒2 A1 Allow p - − 2 but not x - − 2 as final answer.

fg ( x ) = f ( x + 3) = 2 x 2 − 7 cao B1

© UCLES 2018 Page 15 of 15

 Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/11
Paper 1 May/June 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2018 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and
some Cambridge O Level components.

IGCSE™ is a registered trademark.

This document consists of 15 printed pages.

© UCLES 2018 [Turn over

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2018 Page 2 of 15

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2018 Page 3 of 15

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors
in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula;
the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct
application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more ‘method’ steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says
otherwise; and similarly when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier
marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol FT implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise,
A or B marks are given for correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously ‘correct’ answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the
candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a
correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded
(1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect
working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2018 Page 4 of 15

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no ‘follow through’ from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part question are genuinely misread and the object
and difficulty of the question remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become ‘follow through’ marks. MR is not applied
when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2018 Page 5 of 15

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1(i) (1 − 2x )5 = 1 −10x + 40x² (no penalty for extra terms) B2,1 Loses a mark for each incorrect term.
Treat −32 x 5 + 80 x 4 − 80 x 3 as MR –1

1(ii) → (1 + ax + 2 x² ) ( 1 −10x +40x²)

3 terms in x² → 40 – 10a + 2 M1 A1FT Selects 3 terms in x 2 . FT from (i)

Equate with 12 → a = 3 A1 CAO

Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 5 dy 5 M1 A1 Reasonable attempt at differentiation CAO (−3)

y = 2x + → =2− = −3 (may be implied) when x = 1.
x dx x²

dy dy dx M1 A1 dy
= × → −0.06 Ignore notation, but needs to multiply by 0.02.
dt dx dt dx

© UCLES 2018 Page 6 of 15

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3 dy 12 −12 B1 B1 Correct without “ ÷ 2”. For “ ÷ 2”. Ignore “c”.

= → y= ÷ 2 ( + c)
dx ( 2 x + 1)2 2x + 1

−6 M1 A1 Finding “c” following integration. CAO

Uses (1, 1) → c = 3 ( → y = + 3)
2x + 1

1 1 DM1 A1 1
Sets y to 0 and attempts to solve for x → x = → (( , 0)) Sets y to 0. x = is sufficient for A1.
2 2 2

Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(i) (sinθ + cos θ)(1 – sinθcosθ) ≡ sin³θ + cos³θ. Accept abbreviations s and c

LHS = sinθ + cosθ – sin²θcosθ –sinθcos²θ M1 Expansion

= sinθ(1 – cos²θ) + cosθ(1 – sin²θ) or (s + c – c(1 – c2) – s(1 – s2)) M1A1 Uses identity twice. Everything correct. AG

Uses sin²θ + cos²θ = 1 → sin³θ + cos³θ (RHS) or from RHS: M1 for use of trig ID twice

Or

(
LHS = ( sin θ + cos θ ) sin 2θ + cos 2θ − sin θ cos θ ) M1 M1 for factorisation

= sin 3θ + sinθcos 2θ − sin 2θ cos θ + cos θ sin 2θ + cos3θ − sin θ cos 2θ = sin 3θ + cos 3θ M1A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 7 of 15

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(ii) (sinθ + cos θ)(1 – sinθcosθ) = 3cos³θ → sin³θ = 2cos³θ M1

→ tan³θ = 2 → θ = 51.6º or 231.6º (only) A1A1FT Uses tan3 = sin3 ÷ cos3. A1 CAO. A1FT, 180 + their
acute angle. tan 3θ = 0 gets M0

Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(i) 1 M1A1 Uses gradient and a given point for equa. CAO
Eqn of AC y = − x + 4 (gradient must be ∆y / ∆x )
2

Gradient of OB = 2 → y = 2x (If y missing only penalise once) M1 A1 Use of m1m2 = − 1 , answers only ok.

© UCLES 2018 Page 8 of 15

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(ii) Simultaneous equations → ((1.6, 3.2)) M1 Equate and solve for M1 and reach ⩾1 solution

This is mid-point of OB. → B (3.2, 6.4) M1 A1 Uses mid-point. CAO

or

Let coordinates of B (h, k) M1 for both equations, M1 for solving with y = 2 x

OA = AB → h² = 8k − k²
OC =BC → k² = 16h – h² → (3.2, 6.4)

or

k −4 k M1 for gradient product as –1, M1 solving with

gradients ( × = −1 ) y = 2x
h h −8

or

Pythagoras: h 2 + ( k − 4 ) + ( h − 8 ) + k 2 = 42 + 82
2 2 M1 for complete equation, M1 solving with y = 2 x

Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(i) AT r B1 CAO
(tanθ = ) → AT = r tanθ or OT = SOI
r cosθ

1 1 B1 B1 1 1
→ A= r²tanθ − r²θ B1 for r²tanθ. B1 for “− r²θ”
2 2 2 2
If Pythagoras used may see area of triangle as
1 1  r 
r r 2 + r 2tan 2θ or r   sinθ
2 2  cosθ 

© UCLES 2018 Page 9 of 15

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(ii) AT M1 Correct use of trigonometry and radians in rt angle

tanθ = → AT = 7.716 triangle
3

Arc length = rθ = 3.6 B1 Accept 3 × 1.2

3 M1 Correct method for OT

OT by Pythagoras or cos1.2 = ( = 8.279)
OT

Perimeter = AT + arc + OT – radius = 16.6 A1 CAO, www

Question Answer Marks Guidance

7 1  −1   3
JJJG   JJJG   JJJG  
OA =  −3  , OB =  3  and OC =  1 
2 5  −2 
     
JJJG
7(i)  2 B1 B1 for AC .
JJJG  
AC =  4 
 −4 
 

© UCLES 2018 Page 10 of 15

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance
JJJJG JJJG JJJJG
7(ii) 2 1  3 M1 M1 for their OM = OA + AM oe
JJJJG JJJG JJJJG   1    
OM = OA + AM =  −1 or [  −3  +  1  ]
0 2  2   −2 
     

JJJJG 1 JJJJG JJJJG

M1 A1 M1 for dividing their OM by their modulus
Unit vector in direction of OM = ( OM )
√5

7(iii)  −2  B1
JJJG  
AB =  6  , Allow ±
 3
 

 −2   2  M1 M1 Product of both moduli, Scalar product of ± their AB

JJJG JJJG
| AB |=7, | AC |=6  6  .  4  = −4 + 24 – 12 = 8 and AC
 3   −4 
   

7 × 6 cos θ = 8 → θ = 79.(0)º A1 1.38 radians ok

© UCLES 2018 Page 11 of 15

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(a) a B1 B1 CAO, OE CAO, OE

ar = 12 and = 54
1− r

Eliminates a or r → 9r ² − 9r + 2 = 0 or a ² − 54 a + 648 = 0 M1 Elimination leading to a 3-term quadratic in a or r

2 1 A1 Needs both values.

→ r= or hence to a → a = 18 or 36
3 3

8(b) nth term of a progression is p + qn

8(b)(i) first term = p + q. Difference = q or last term = p + qn B1 Need first term and, last term or common difference

n n M1A1 Use of Sn formula with their a and d.

Sn =
2
( 2 ( p + q ) + ( n − 1) q ) or ( 2 p + q + nq )
2 ok unsimplified for A1.

8(b)(ii) Hence 2 ( 2 p + q + 4q ) = 40 and 3 ( 2 p + q + 6q ) = 72 DM1 Uses their Sn formula from (i)

Solution → p = 5 and q = 2 A1 Note: answers 7, 2 instead of 5, 2 gets M1A0 – must

[Could use Sn with a and d → a = 7, d = 2 → p = 5, q = 2.] attempt to solve for M1

© UCLES 2018 Page 12 of 15

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9 x x2
f:x↦ − 2, g:x↦4+x–
2 2

9(i) x2 x M1 Equates and forms 3 term quadratic

4+x– = − 2 → x ² − x − 12 = 0
2 2

→ (4, 0) and (−3, −3.5) A1 A1 A1 For both x values or a correct pair. A1 all.
Trial and improvement, B3 all correct or B0

9(ii) f(x) > g(x) for x > 4, x < −3 B1, B1 B1 for each part. Loses a mark for ⩽ or ⩾.

9(iii) x x2 x x2 B1 CAO, any correct form

fg(x) = 2 + − – 2 (= − )
2 4 2 4

1 dy 1 2 x M1 A1 Completes the square or uses calculus. First A1 is for

i.e. − ((x − 1)² − 1) or = − =0 → x=1 x = 1 or completed square form
4 dx 2 4

1 1 A1 1 1
→y= → Range of fg ⩽ , CAO, OE e.g. y - , [–∞, ) etc.
4 4 4 4

9(iv) Calculus or completing square on ‘h’ → x = 1 M1 b

May use a sketch or −
2a

k = 1 (accept k . 1 ) A1 Complete method. CAO

© UCLES 2018 Page 13 of 15

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10 y = x³ − 2x² + 5x

10(i) dy B1 CAO
= 3x² − 4x + 5
dx

Using b ² − 4 ac → 16 – 60 → negative → some explanation M1 A1 Uses discriminant on equation (set to 0).

or completed square and explanation CAO

10(ii) m = 3x² − 4x + 5 B1FT FT providing differentiation is equivalent

dm dm
= 6x – 4 (= 0) (must identify as )
dx dx

2 11 dy 11 M1 A1 Sets to 0 and solves. A1 for correct m.

→ x = , m= or =
3 3 dx 3
2
 2  11 11 Alt1: B1 for completing square, M1A1 for ans
Alt1: m = 3  x −  + , m =
 3  3 3
11
Alt2: 3 x 2 − 4 x + 5 − m = 0, b 2 − 4ac = 0, m = Alt2: B1 for coefficients, M1A1 for ans
3

d²m M1 A1 M1 correct method. A1 (no errors anywhere)

= 6 +ve → Minimum value or refer to sketch of curve or
dx ²
2
check values of m either side of x = ,
3

© UCLES 2018 Page 14 of 15

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(iii) x4 2 x³ 5x² B2,1 Loses a mark for each incorrect term

Integrate → − +
4 3 2

Uses limits 0 to 6 → 270 (may not see use of lower limit) M1 A1 Use of limits on an integral. CAO
Answer only 0/4

© UCLES 2018 Page 15 of 15

 Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/12
Paper 1 May/June 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2018 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and
some Cambridge O Level components.

IGCSE™ is a registered trademark.

This document consists of 18 printed pages.

© UCLES 2018 [Turn over

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2018 Page 2 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2018 Page 3 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors
in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula;
the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct
application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more ‘method’ steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says
otherwise; and similarly when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier
marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol FT implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A
or B marks are given for correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously ‘correct’ answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the
candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a
correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1
d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect
working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2018 Page 4 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no ‘follow through’ from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part question are genuinely misread and the object
and difficulty of the question remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become ‘follow through’ marks. MR is not applied
when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2018 Page 5 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1  x
6 B2,1,0 3 things wanted –1 each incorrect component, must be multiplied
Coefficient of x² in  2 +  is 6C2×24×(½)2 (x2) (= 60)  6
 2 together. Allow 6C4 ,   and factorial equivalents. Marks can be
 4
awarded for correct term in an expansion.

Coefficient of x² in ( a + x ) is 5C2×a³ (x2) (= 10a3) B1 Marks can be awarded for correct term in an expansion.
5

→ 60 + 10a³ = 330 M1 Forms an equation ‘their 60’ + ‘their 10a3’ = 330, OK with x2 in all
three terms initially. This can be recovered by a correct answer.

a=3 A1 Condone ±3 as long as +3 is selected.

Question Answer Marks Guidance

2(i) A complete method as far as finding a set of values for k by:

Either (x – 3)² + k – 9 >0, k – 9 >0 Either completing the square and using ‘their k – 9’ > or ⩾ 0 OR

or 2x – 6 = 0 → (3, k ─ 9), k – 9 >0 M1 Differentiating and setting to 0, using ‘their x=3’ to find y and
using ‘their k – 9’ > or ⩾0 OR

or b² < 4ac oe → 36 < 4k Use of discriminant < or ⩽ 0. Beware use of > and incorrect
algebra.

→ k > 9 Note: not ⩾ A1 T&I leading to (or no working) correct answer 2/2 otherwise 0/2.

© UCLES 2018 Page 6 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

2(ii) EITHER
*
x 2 – 6 x + k = 7 – 2x → x 2 – 4 x + k –7 (= 0) M1 Equates and collects terms.

Use of b² – 4ac = 0 (16 – 4(k – 7) = 0) DM1 Correct use of discriminant = 0, involving k from a 3 term
quadratic.

OR
*
2x – 6 = – 2 → x = 2 (y = 3) M1 dy
Equates their to ± 2, finds a value for x.
dx

(their 3) or 7– 2(their 2) = (their 2)2 – 6(their 2) + k DM1 Substitutes their value(s) into the appropriate equation.

→ k = 11 A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(i) 102 B1 Can be awarded here for use in Sn formula.

r = 1.02 or used in a GP in some way.
100

Amount in 12th week = 8000 (their r)11 M1 8000

8000 Use of arn – 1 with a = 8000 & n = 12 or with a = and n = 13.
or (their a from ) ( their r )12 1.02
their r.

= 9950 (kg) awrt A1 Note: Final answer of either 9943 or 9940 implies M1.
Full marks can be awarded for a correct answer from a list of terms.

© UCLES 2018 Page 7 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(ii)
In 12 weeks, total is
(
8000 ( their r ) − 1
12
) M1 Use of Sn with a = 8000 and n = 12 or addition of 12 terms.

( ( their r ) − 1)
= 107000 (kg) awrt A1 Correct answer but no working 2/2

Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(i) a + ½b = 5 B1 Alternatively these marks can be awarded when ½ and –1 appear

after a or b has been eliminated.
a – b = 11 B1

→ a = 7 and b = – 4 B1

[3]

4(ii) a + b or their a + their b (3) B1 Not enough to be seen in a table of values – must be selected.
Graph from their values can get both marks.
a – b or their a – their b (11). B1 Note: Use of b2 – 4ac scores 0/3

→ k < 3 , k > 11 B1 Both inequalities correct. Allow combined statement as long as

correct inequalities if taken separately.
Both answers correct from T & I or guesswork 3/3 otherwise 0/3

© UCLES 2018 Page 8 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance
JJJG
5(i) DA = 6i –4k B1
JJJG
CA = 6i –5 j –4k B1

2
JJJG JJJG JJJG JJJG
5(ii) Method marks awarded only for their vectors ± CA & ± DA Full marks can be obtained using AC & AD
JJJG JJJG
CA . DA = 36 + 16 ( = 52) M1 Using x1x2+y1y2+z1z2
JJJG JJJG
DA = 52 , CA = 77 M1 Uses modulus twice

ˆ oe
52 = √77√52cos CAD M1 All linked correctly

ˆ = 0.82178..→ CAD
Cos CAD ˆ = 34.7º or 0.606ᶜ awrt A1 Answer must come from +ve cosine ratio

Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(i) r B1 May be seen on diagram.

AT or BT = rtanθ or OT =
cosϑ

r M1 Both formulae, (½r²θ, ½bh or ½absinθ), seen with 2θ used when

½r²2θ, & ½×r×(rtanθ or AT) or ½×r×( or OT) sinθ needed.
cosϑ

½r²2θ = 2×½×r×rtanθ – ½r²2θ oe → 2θ = tanθ AG A1 Fully correct working from a correct statement.
Note: ½r²2θ = ½ r²tanθ is a valid statement.

© UCLES 2018 Page 9 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(ii) θ = 1.2 or sector area = 76.8 B1

Area of kite = 165 awrt B1

164.6 – 76.8 = 87.8 awrt B1 awrt 87.8 with little or no working can be awarded 3/3. SC Final
answers that round to 88 with little or no working can be awarded
2/3.

Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(i) 25 – 2(x + 3)² B1 B1 Mark expression if present: B1 for 25 and B1 for – 2(x + 3)².
If no expression award a = 25 B1 and b = 3 B1.

7(ii) (–3, 25) B1FT FT from answers to (i) or by calculus

7(iii) (k) = –3 also allow x or k ⩾ – 3 B1FT FT from answer to (i) or (ii) NOT x = –3

© UCLES 2018 Page 10 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(iv) EITHER
*
y = 25 – 2(x + 3)² → 2(x + 3)² = 25 – y M1 Makes their squared term containing x the subject or equivalent
with x/y interchanged first. Condone errors with +/- signs.

x + 3 = ( ± ) ½ ( 25 – y ) DM1 Divide by ±2 and then square root allow ±.

OR

y = 7 – 2x2 – 12x → 2x2 + 12x + y – 7 (= 0) *

M1 Rearranging equation of the curve.

−12 ± 122 − 8 ( y − 7 ) DM1 Correct use of their ‘a, b and c’ in quadratic formula.
x= Allow just + in place of ±.
4

 25 − x  A1 ± gets A0. Must now be a function of x. Allow y =

g─1(x) =   – 3 oe
 2 
isw if substituting x = – 3

© UCLES 2018 Page 11 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8 EITHER

3 B1
Gradient of bisector = –
2
*
5h − h M1 y − step
gradient AB = Attempt at
4h + 6 − h x − step

*
5h − h 2 4h + 6 − h 3 M1 Using m1m2 = – 1 appropriately to form an equation.
Either = or – = –
4h + 6 − h 3 5h − h 2

OR

3 B1
Gradient of bisector = –
2
*
2 h M1 Obtain equation of AB using gradient from m1m2 = – 1 and a point.
Using gradient of AB and A, B or midpoint → x+ = y oe
3 3
*
Substitute co-ordinates of one of the other points M1 Arrive at an equation in h.

h=2 A1

 5h + 6  B1FT Algebraic expression or FT for numerical answer from ‘their h’

Midpoint is  , 3h  or (8, 6)
 2 

Uses midpoint and ‘their h’ with 3x + 2y = k DM1 3

Substitutes ‘their midpoint’ into 3x + 2y = k. If y = − x + c is used
2
(expect c = 18) the method mark should be withheld until they ×2.

→ k = 36 soi A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 12 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(i)  3
 B1 B1 B1 without ÷ 4. B1 for ÷ 4 oe. Unsimplified OK
2 3
 ( 4 x + 1) 2 
y= ( 4 x + 1) 2 ÷ 4 (+ C)  = 
3  6 
 

Uses x = 2, y = 5 M1 Uses (2, 5) in an integral (indicated by an increase in power by 1).

→ c = ½ oe isw A1 No isw if candidate now goes on to produce a straight line equation

9(ii) dy dy dx
= ÷
dx dt dt

dx M1 Ignore notation. Must be 0.06÷3 for M1.

= 0.06 ÷ 3
dt

= 0.02 oe A1 Correct answer with no working scores 2/2

9(iii) d2 y B1
= ½ ( 4 x + 1) × 4
−½
2
dx

d 2 y dy 2 B1FT Must either show the algebraic product and state that it results in a
× = × 4 x + 1 (= 2) constant or evaluate it as ‘= 2’. Must not evaluate at x =2.
dx 2 dx 4x + 1
d2 y
ft to apply only if 2 is of the form k ( 4 x + 1)
−½

dx

© UCLES 2018 Page 13 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(i) 2cosx = –3sinx → tanx = – ⅔ M1 Use of tan=sin/cos to get tan =, or other valid method to find sin or
cos =.
3
M0 for tanx = +/ –
2

→ x = 146.3º or 326.3ºawrt A1 A1FT FT for 180 added to an incorrect first answer in the given range.
The second A1 is withheld if any further values in the range
0°⩽ x⩽ 360° are given. Answers in radians score A0, A0.

© UCLES 2018 Page 14 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(ii) No labels required on either axis. Assume that the diagram is 0º

to 360º unless labelled otherwise. Ignore any part of the diagram
outside this range.

B1 Sketch of y = 2cosx.
One complete cycle; start and finish at top of curve at roughly the
same positive y value and go below the x axis by roughly the same
distance. (Can be a poor curve but not straight lines.)

B1 Sketch of y= –3sinx
One complete cycle; start and finish on the x axis, must be inverted
and go below and then above the x axis by roughly the same
distance. (Can be a poor curve but not straight lines.)

B1 Fully correct answer including the sine curve with clearly larger
amplitude than cosine curve. Must now be reasonable curves.

Note: Separate diagrams can score 2/3

10(iii) x < 146.3º, x > 326.3º B1FT B1FT Does not need to include 0º, 360º. √ from their answers in (i)
Allow combined statement as long as correct inequalities if taken
separately. SC For two correct values including ft but with ⩽ and ⩾
B1

© UCLES 2018 Page 15 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(i) x 6 B1 B1 Inspection or guesswork OK

y= + = 4 → x = 2 or 6
2 x

dy 1 6 B1 Unsimplified OK
= −
dx 2 x 2
*
When x = 2, m = ─1 → x + y = 6 M1 Correct method for either tangent
1 1
When x = 6, m = → y = x + 2
3 3

Attempt to solve simultaneous equations DM1 Could solve BOTH equations separately with y = x and get x = 3
both times.

(3,3) A1 Statement about y = x not required.

© UCLES 2018 Page 16 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance
*
11(ii)  x² 36  M1 Integrate using π ∫ y ²dx (doesn’t need π or dx). Allow incorrect
V = (π) ∫  + 6 +  (dx)
 4 x²    x 6 
2

squaring. Not awarded for π ∫ 4 −  +   dx.

  2 x 
Integration indicated by increase in any power by 1.

x³ 36 A2,1 3 things wanted —1 each error, allow + C. (Doesn’t need π)

Integration → + 6 x─
12 x

1 160 DM1 Evidence of their values 6 and 2 from (i) substituted into their
Using limits ‘their 2’ to ‘their 6’ (53 π, π , 168 awrt)
3 3  16 
integrand and then subtracted. 48 ─  −  is enough.
 3

Vol for line: integration or cylinder (→ 64π) M1   x 6 

2
2
Use of πr²h or integration of 4 (could be from 4 −  +   )
  2 x 

2  32  A1
Subtracts → 10 π oe  e.g. π , 33.5 awrt 
3  3 

© UCLES 2018 Page 17 of 18

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(ii) OR

 x 6
2 M1 *M1 Integrate using π ∫ y ²dx (doesn’t need π or dx)
2
V = (π) ∫ 4 −  +  (dx)
2 x Integration indicated by increase in any power by 1.

 x² 36 
= (π) ∫ 16 −  + 6 +  (dx)
 4 x² 

  x3 36   A2,1  x3 36 
= (π) 16 x −  + 6 x −   (dx) Or 10 x − + 
  12 x    12 x 

= (π) ( 48 - 37⅓) DM1 Evidence of their values 6 and 2 from (i) substituted

2  32  A1
= 10 π oe  eg π , 33.5 awrt 
3  3 

© UCLES 2018 Page 18 of 18

 Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/13
Paper 1 May/June 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2018 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE™, Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and
some Cambridge O Level components.

IGCSE™ is a registered trademark.

This document consists of 17 printed pages.

© UCLES 2018 [Turn over

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2018 Page 2 of 17

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2018 Page 3 of 17

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors
in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula;
the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct
application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more ‘method’ steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says
otherwise; and similarly when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier
marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol FT implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise,
A or B marks are given for correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the
candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a
correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded
(1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect
working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2018 Page 4 of 17

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no ‘follow through’ from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part question are genuinely misread and the object
and difficulty of the question remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become ‘follow through’ marks. MR is not applied
when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2018 Page 5 of 17

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 [3] ( x − 2 )  [‒5]
2 B1B1B1 OR a = 3, b = ‒2, c = ‒5. 1st mark is dependent on the form ( x + a )2
 
following 3

Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 3 B2,1,0 ‒80 www scores B3. Accept 5C2.

2  −2 
5C3 x   SOI
 x 

−80 B1 +80 without clear working scores SCB1

‒80 Accept
x

© UCLES 2018 Page 6 of 17

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3
(
 a 1− rn

)  [÷]  a 
M1M1 Correct formulae used with/without r = 0.99 or n = 100.

 1− r  1 − r 
 
 

DM1 Sn
Allow numerical a (M1M1). 3rd M1 is for division (or ratio)
S∞
SOI

63 ( a ) A1 Could be shown multiplied by 100(%). Dep. on DM1

1 − 0.99100 SOI OR SOI
100 ( a )

63(%) Allow 63.4 or 0.63 but not 2 infringements (e.g. 0.634, 0.63%) A1 n = 99 used scores Max M3. Condone a = 0.99 throughout
S n = S∞ ( without division shown ) scores 2 / 5

© UCLES 2018 Page 7 of 17

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4  2  B1B1
 ( 3 x − 1) 3 
f ( x) = 
2  [ ÷3] ( +c )
 
 3 

2 M1 Sub y = 1, x = 3 Dep. on attempt to integrate and c present

83
1 = +c
2

1 2 A1
c = ‒1 → y = ( 3x − 1) 3 − 1 SOI
2

1 2
1 DM1A1 Dep. on previous M1
When x = 0, y = ( −1) 3 − 1 =−
2 2

© UCLES 2018 Page 8 of 17

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5 6 M1 5
Angle AOC = or 1.2 Allow 68.8º. Allow
5 6

AB = 5 × tan(their 1.2) OR by e.g. Sine Rule Expect 12.86 DM1 5

OR OB = . Expect 13.80
cos their1.2

1 DM1 1
Area ∆OAB = × 5 × their 12.86 Expect 32.15 OR × 5 × their OB × sin their 1.2
2 2

1 2 DM1 All DM marks are dependent on the first M1

Area sector × 5 × their 1.2 Expect 15
2

Shaded region = 32.15 ‒ 15 = 17.2 A1 Allow degrees used appropriately throughout. 17.25 scores A0

© UCLES 2018 Page 9 of 17

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(i) 3k + 5 − ( k + 3)  2k + 2  1 M1A1 Condone omission of brackets for M mark

Gradient, m, of AB = OE  =  =
k + 3 − ( −3k − 1)  4k + 4  2

6(ii) 1 1 B1B1 −2k + 2 4k + 8

Mid-pt = [ (‒3k ‒ 1 + k + 3), (3k + 5 + k + 3)] = B1 for , B1 for (ISW) or better, i.e. ( − k + 1, 2k + 4 )
2 2 2 2
 −2k + 2 4k + 8 
 ,  SOI
 2 2 

−1 M1 Could appear in subsequent equation and/or could be in terms of k

Gradient of perpendicular bisector is SOI Expect ‒2
their m

Equation: y − ( 2k + 4 ) = −2  x − ( −k + 1)  OE DM1
Through their mid-point and with their
−1
(now numerical)
m

y + 2x = 6 A1 Use of numerical k in (ii) throughout scores SC2/5 for correct answer

© UCLES 2018 Page 10 of 17

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(a)(i) sin θ 2 M1
−1
tan θ − 1
2
cos θ 2
=
tan 2θ + 1 sin θ 2
+1
cos θ 2

sin θ 2 − cos θ 2 A1 multiplying by cosθ 2

=
sin θ 2 + cosθ 2 Intermediate stage can be omitted by multiplying directly by cosθ 2

( )
= sin θ 2 − cos θ 2 = sin θ 2 − 1 − sin θ 2 = 2sin 2θ − 1 A1 Using sin θ 2 + cos θ 2 = 1 twice. Accept a = 2, b = −1

sec 2θ − 2 M1 tan 2θ − 1
ALT 1 ALT 2
sec2θ sec 2θ

2 A1 (tan 2θ − 1)cos 2θ
1− = 1 − 2cos 2θ
sec θ
2

( )
1 − 2 1 − sin 2θ = 2sin 2θ − 1 A1 ( )
sin 2θ − cos 2θ = sin 2θ − 1 − sin 2θ = 2sin 2θ − 1

7(a)(ii) 1 5 M1 t2 −1 1 5
2sin 2θ − 1 = → sin θ = ( ± ) or ( ± ) 0.7906 OR 2
= → 3t 2 = 5 → t = ( ± ) or t = ( ± )1.2910
4 8 t +1 4 3

θ = −52.2 A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 11 of 17

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(b)(i) sin x = 2cos x → tan x = 2 M1 4 1

Or sinx = or cosx =
5 5

x = 1.11 with no additional solutions A1 Accept 0.352π or 0.353π. Accept in co-ord form ignoring y co-ord

7(b)(ii) Negative answer in range −1 < y < −0.8 B1

−0.894 or −0.895 or − 0.896 B1

© UCLES 2018 Page 12 of 17

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(i) dy M1A1 Attempt to differentiate. All correct for A mark

= 3 x 2 − 18 x + 24
dx

3 x 2 − 18 x + 24 = −3 M1 dy
Equate their to ‒3
dx

x=3 A1

y=6 A1

y − 6 = −3 ( x − 3) A1FT FT on their A. Expect y = −3x + 15

8(ii) ( 3)( x − 2 )( x − 4 ) SOI or x = 2, 4 Allow ( 3)( x + 2 )( x + 4 ) M1 Attempt to factorise or solve. Ignore a RHS, e.g. = 0 or > 0, etc.

Smallest value of k is 4 A1 Allow k . 4 . Allow k = 4. Must be in terms of k

© UCLES 2018 Page 13 of 17

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(i) 2 M1A1 Evidence of OB = 10 or other valid method (e.g. trigonometry) is

OE = (8i + 6j) = 1.6i + 1.2j AG required
10

9(ii) OD = 1.6i + 1.2j + 7k B1 Allow reversal of one or both of OD, BD.

BD = ‒8i ‒ 6j + 1.6i + 1.2j + 7k OE = ‒6.4i ‒4.8j + 7k M1A1 For M mark allow sign errors. Also if 2 out of 3 components correct

Correct method for ±OD.±BD (using their answers) M1 825

Expect 1.6 × ‒6.4 + 1.2 × ‒4.8 + 49 = 33 or 825 / 25.
25

Correct method for |OD| or |BD| (using their answers) M1 Expect 1.6 2 + 1.2 2 + 7 2 or 6.42 + 4.82 + 7 2 = √53 or √113

OD.BD DM1 33
Cos BDO = their Expect . Dep. on all previous M marks and either B1 or A1
OD × BD 77.4

64.8º Allow 1.13(rad) A1 Can’t score A1 if 1 vector only is reversed unless explained well

© UCLES 2018 Page 14 of 17

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(i) Smallest value of c is 2. Accept 2, c = 2 , c . 2 . Not in terms of x B1 d2 y

Ignore superfluous working, e.g. =2
dx 2

10(ii) y = ( x − 2) + 2 → x − 2 = ( ± ) y − 2 → x = ( ± ) y − 2 + 2 M1 Order of operations correct. Allow sign errors

2

f −1 ( x ) = x − 2 + 2 A1 Accept y = x−2 +2

Domain of f −1 is x . 6 . Allow . 6. B1 Not f −1 ( x ) . 6 . Not f ( x ) . 6 . Not y . 6

10(iii) 2
( x − 2 )2 + 2 − 2  + 2 = 51 SOI Allow 1 term missing for M mark M1A1 ALT. f ( x ) = f −1 ( 51) ( M1) = 51 − 2 + 2 (A1)
 
( ) ( )
2
Or x 2 − 4 x + 6 − 4 x 2 − 4 x + 6 + 6 = 51

( x − 2) A1 ( x − 2)
4 2
= 49 or ( x 2 − 4 x + 4) 2 = 49 + 2 = 49 + 2 OR f(x) = 9
4 3 2
OR x − 8 x + 24 x − 32 x − 33 = 0 often implied by next line

( x − 2) = ( ± ) 7 OR x 2 − 4 x − 3 = 0 . Ignore x 2 − 4 x + 11 = 0 A1 ( x − 2) = 7 OR x = f −1 ( 9 )
2 2

x = 2 + √ 7 only CAO x = 2 + 4 49 scores 3/5 A1 x =2+ 7

© UCLES 2018 Page 15 of 17

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(i) dy B1
= 2 ( x + 1) − ( x + 1)
−2

dx

Set = 0 and obtain 2 ( x + 1) = 1 convincingly www B1

3
AG

d2 y B1
= 2 + 2 ( x + 1) www
−3
2
dx

1 M1 Requires exact method – otherwise scores M0

 1 3
Sub, e.g., ( x + 1)
−3
= 2 OE or x =   − 1
2

d2 y A1 and exact answer – otherwise scores A0

=6 CAO www
dx 2

© UCLES 2018 Page 16 of 17

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(ii) y 2 = ( x + 1) + ( x + 1) + 2 ( x + 1) SOI B1 OR y 2 = ( x 4 + 4 x3 + 6 x 2 + 4 x + 1) + ( 2 x + 2 ) + ( x + 1)−2

4 −2

 ( x + 1)5   ( x + 1)−1   2 ( x + 1)2  B1B1B1 Attempt to integrate y 2 . Last term might appear as ( x 2 + 2 x)
(π ) ∫ y 2 dx = (π )  + + 
 5   −1   2 
 x5   1 
OR (π )  + x 4 + 2 x 3 + 2 x 2 + x  +  x 2 + 2 x  +  − 
5   x + 1

 32 1 1  M1 Substitute limits 0 →1 into an attempted integration of y 2 .

(π )  − + 4 −  − 1 + 1 
5 2 5  Do not condone omission of value when x = 0

9.7π or 30.5 A1 Note: omission of 2 ( x + 1) in first line → 6.7π scores 3/6

Ignore initially an extra volume, e.g. (π) ∫ ( 4½ ) . Only take into

2

account for the final answer

© UCLES 2018 Page 17 of 17

 Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/12
Paper 1 Pure Mathematics March 2018
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the March 2018 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

® IGCSE is a registered trademark.

This document consists of 13 printed pages.

© UCLES 2018 [Turn over

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2018
PUBLISHED
Generic Marking Principles

These general marking principles must be applied by all examiners when marking candidate answers. They should be applied alongside the
specific content of the mark scheme or generic level descriptors for a question. Each question paper and mark scheme will also comply with these
marking principles.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 1:

Marks must be awarded in line with:

• the specific content of the mark scheme or the generic level descriptors for the question
• the specific skills defined in the mark scheme or in the generic level descriptors for the question
• the standard of response required by a candidate as exemplified by the standardisation scripts.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 2:

Marks awarded are always whole marks (not half marks, or other fractions).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 3:

Marks must be awarded positively:

• marks are awarded for correct/valid answers, as defined in the mark scheme. However, credit is given for valid answers which go beyond the
scope of the syllabus and mark scheme, referring to your Team Leader as appropriate
• marks are awarded when candidates clearly demonstrate what they know and can do
• marks are not deducted for errors
• marks are not deducted for omissions
• answers should only be judged on the quality of spelling, punctuation and grammar when these features are specifically assessed by the
question as indicated by the mark scheme. The meaning, however, should be unambiguous.

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 4:

Rules must be applied consistently e.g. in situations where candidates have not followed instructions or in the application of generic level
descriptors.

© UCLES 2018 Page 2 of 13

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2018
PUBLISHED
GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 5:

Marks should be awarded using the full range of marks defined in the mark scheme for the question (however; the use of the full mark range may
be limited according to the quality of the candidate responses seen).

GENERIC MARKING PRINCIPLE 6:

Marks awarded are based solely on the requirements as defined in the mark scheme. Marks should not be awarded with grade thresholds or
grade descriptors in mind.

© UCLES 2018 Page 3 of 13

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2018
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors
in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula;
the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct
application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says
otherwise; and similarly when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier
marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol FT implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A
or B marks are given for correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the
candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a
correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1
d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect
working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2018 Page 4 of 13

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2018
PUBLISHED
The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part question are genuinely misread and the object
and difficulty of the question remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through” marks. MR is not applied
when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2018 Page 5 of 13

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 x½ B1B1
( y) = − 3x ( +c )
½

Sub (4, ‒6) −6 = 4 − 12 + c → c=2 M1A1 Expect ( y ) = 2 x½ − 3 x + 2

Question Answer Marks Guidance

2(i) C2 ( + / −2x ) or 7C3 ( −2x ) M1 SOI, Allow for either term correct. Allow + or ‒ inside first bracket.
7 2 3

84 ( x 2 ) , −280 x3 ( ) A1A1

2(ii) 2 × ( their − 280 ) + 5 × ( their 84 ) only M1

‒140 A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(i) 40 + 60 × 1.2 = 112 M1A1 Allow 1.12 m. Allow M1 for 40 + 59 × 1.2 OE

© UCLES 2018 Page 6 of 13

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(ii) Find rate of growth e.g. 41.2/40 or 1.2/40 *M1 SOI, Also implied by 3% , 0.03 or 1.03 seen

40 × (1 + their 0.03) DM1

60 or 59

236 A1 Allow 2.36 m

Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(i) 1 2 −1 M1 +1 π π
= or y − 2 = x OE, Allow y − 2 = x . Attempt to express tan or tan exactly
3 x 3 3 6 3
is required or the use of 1 / √ 3 or √ 3

( x =) 2 3 A1 OE

4(ii) Mid-point (a, b) = (½ their (i), 1) B1FT Expect (√3, 1)

Gradient of AB leading to gradient of bisector, m M1 Expect −1 / √ 3 leading to m = √ 3

Equation is y − their b = m ( x − their a ) OE DM1 Expect y − 1 = 3 x − 3

( )
y = 3 x − 2 OE A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 7 of 13

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(a) 2 tan x + 5 = 2tan 2 x + 5 tan x + 3 → 2tan 2 x + 3tan x − 2 ( = 0 ) M1A1 Multiply by denom., collect like terms to produce 3-term quad. in
tanx

0.464 (accept 0.148π), 2.03 (accept 0.648π) A1A1 SCA1 for both in degrees 26.6º, 116.6º only

5(b) α = 30° k =4 B1B1 Accept α = π / 6

Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(i) PQ M1 Correct use of sin/cos rule

= 10 × sin1.1
2

(PQ =) 17.8 (17.82…implies M1, A1) AG A1 10sin 2.2 10sin 2.2

OR PQ = or or 200 − 200cos 2.2 = 17.8
π  sin 0.4708
sin  − 1.1
2 

6(ii) Angle OPQ = (π/2 ‒ 1.1) [accept 27° ] B1 OE Expect 0.4708 or 0.471. Can be scored in part (i)

Arc QR =17.8 × their (π/2 ‒ 1.1) M1 Expect 8.39. (or 8.38).

Perimeter = 17.8 − 10 + 10 + their arc QR M1

26.2 A1 For both parts allow correct methods in degrees

© UCLES 2018 Page 8 of 13

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance
JJJG
7(i) CE = ‒4i ‒ j + 8k B1

JJJG M1A1 Could use Pythagoras’ theorem on triangle CDE

(( their − 4 ) + ( their − 1) + ( their 8 ) = 9
2 2 2
| CE | =

3
JJJG JJJG
7(ii) CA = 3i ‒ 3j or AC = –3i + 3j B1
JJJG JJJG JJJG JJJG
CE . CA = (‒4i ‒ j + 8k).(3i ‒ 3j) = ‒12 + 3 (Both vectors reversed M1 Scalar product of their CE , CA . One vector reversed ok for all M
ok) marks
JJJG JJJG JJJG JJJG
| CE |×| CA | = 16 + 1 + 64 × 9 + 9 M1 Product of moduli of their CE , CA

 −12 + 3  −1  −1 
A1A1 A1 for any correct expression, A1 for required form
cos −1   = cos   Equivalent answers must be in required form m/√n (m, n integers)
 9 18   18 
 −1  −3  −1  −9  
or e.g. cos   , cos    etc.
  162   1458  

Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(i) dy / dx = x − 6 x ½ + 8 B2,1,0

Set to zero and attempt to solve a quadratic for x½ M1 Could use a substitution for x½ or rearrange and square correctly*

x½ = 4 or x½ = 2 [ x = 2 and x = 4 gets M1 A0] A1 Implies M1. ‘Correct’ roots for their dy / dx also implies M1

x = 16 or 4 A1FT Squares of their solutions *Then A1,A1 for each answer

© UCLES 2018 Page 9 of 13

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(ii) d 2 y / d x 2 = 1 − 3 x −½ B1FT FT on their dy/dx, providing a fractional power of x is present

8(iii) (When x = 16) d 2 y / dx 2 = 1/4 > 0 hence MIN M1 Checking both of their values in their d 2 y / dx 2

(When x = 4) d 2 y / dx 2 = ‒1/2 < 0 hence MAX A1 All correct

Alternative methods ok but must be explicit about values of x being
considered

Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(i) 1 + cx = cx 2 − 3 x → cx 2 − x ( c + 3) − 1 ( = 0 ) M1 Multiply throughout by x and rearrange terms on one side of

equality

Use b 2 − 4ac  = ( c + 3) + 4c = c 2 + 10c + 9 or

2
( c + 5 )2 − 16  M1 Select their correct coefficients which must contain ‘c’ twice
 Ignore = 0, < 0, >0 etc. at this stage

(Critical values) ‒1, ‒9 A1 SOI

c - − 9, c . − 1 A1

© UCLES 2018 Page 10 of 13

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(ii) Sub their c to obtain a quadratic  c = −1→ − x 2 − 2 x − 1( = 0 )  M1

x = −1 A1

(
Sub their c to obtain a quadratic [c = −9 → −9 x 2 + 6 x − 1( = 0 )  M1

x =1/ 3 A1 1
[Alt 1: dy / dx = −1 / x 2 = c , when c = −1, x = ±1, c = −9, x = ±
3
Give M1 for equating the gradients, A1 for all four answers and
M1A1 for checking and eliminating]
[Alt 2: dy / dx = −1 / x 2 = c leading to
1 / x − 1 / x 2 = ( −1 / x 2 ) ( x ) − 3
Give M1 A1 at this stage and M1A1 for solving]

Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(i)(a) f(x) > 2 B1 Accept y > 2, (2, ∞), (2, ∞], range > 2

10(i)(b) g(x) > 6 B1 Accept y > 6, (6, ∞), (6, ∞], range > 6

10(i)(c) 2 < fg(x) < 4 B1 Accept 2 < y <4, (2, 4), 2 < range < 4

© UCLES 2018 Page 11 of 13

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(ii) The range of f is (partly) outside the domain of g B1

10(iii) −8 B1 SOI
f ′( x) =
( x − 2) 2

8 8 8 M1 Order of operations correct. Accept sign errors

y= +2 → y−2= → x−2=
x−2 x−2 y−2

8 A1 SOI
f −1 ( x ) = +2
x−2

−48 16 M1 Formation of 3-term quadratic in x, ( x − 2 ) or 1 / ( x − 2 )

+ + 4 − 5 ( < 0) → x 2 − 20 x + 84 (< 0)
( x − 2) 2
x−2

( x − 6 )( x − 14 ) or 6, 14 A1 SOI

2 < x < 6 , x > 14 A1 CAO

Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(i) dy / dx = [ −2] − 3 (1 − 2 x )  ×[ −2] (= 4 − 24 x + 24 x 2 )

2 B2,1,0 Award for the accuracy within each set of square brackets
 

At x = ½ dy / dx = ‒2 B1

Gradient of line y = 1 − 2 x is ‒2 (hence AB is a tangent) AG B1

© UCLES 2018 Page 12 of 13

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2018
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(ii) ½ ½ M1 Note: If area triangle OAB – area under the curve is used the first
∫ (1 − 2 x ) − ∫[1 − 2 x − (1 − 2 x ) ] oe
3
Shaded region = part of the integral for the area under the curve must be evaluated
0 0

½ A1
∫ (1 − 2 x ) dx
3
= AG
0

11(iii)  (1 − 2 x )4  *B1B1
Area =   [ ÷ − 2]
 4 

0 ‒ (‒1/8) = 1/8 DB1 OR ∫ 1 − 6 x + 12 x 2 − 8 x3 = x − 3x 2 + 4 x3 − 2 x 4 (B2,1,0)

Applying limits 0 → ½

© UCLES 2018 Page 13 of 13

 Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/11
Paper 1 October/November 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2017 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

® IGCSE is a registered trademark.

This document consists of 14 printed pages.

© UCLES 2017 [Turn over

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors
in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula;
the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct
application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says
otherwise; and similarly when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier
marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol FT implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A
or B marks are given for correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the
candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a
correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1
d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect
working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2017 Page 2 of 14

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part question are genuinely misread and the object
and difficulty of the question remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through” marks. MR is not applied
when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2017 Page 3 of 14

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 dy B2,1,0
= 3 x1/ 2 − 3 − 2 x −1/ 2
dx

dy M1
at x = 4, =6‒3‒1=2
dx

Equation of tangent is y = 2 ( x − 4 ) OE A1FT Equation through (4, 0) with their gradient

Question Answer Marks Guidance

2 f′(x) = 3 x 2 − 2 x − 8 M1 Attempt differentiation

4 A1
− , 2 SOI
3

4 M1 Accept x > 2 in addition. FT their solutions

f′(x) > 0 ⇒ x < − SOI
3

4 A1 4 4
Largest value of a is − Statement in terms of a. Accept a ⩽ − or a < − . Penalise extra solutions
3 3 3

© UCLES 2017 Page 4 of 14

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(i) 3a a M1 Attempt to equate 2 sums to infinity. At least one correct

=
1 − r 1 + 2r

3 + 6r = 1 − r DM1 Elimination of 1 variable (a) at any stage and multiplication

2 A1
r=−
7

3(ii) ½ n  2 × 15 + ( n − 1) 4 ]= ½ n[ 2 × 420 + ( n − 1)( −5 )  M1A1 Attempt to equate 2 sum to n terms, at least one correct (M1). Both correct
(A1)

n = 91 A1

© UCLES 2017 Page 5 of 14

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(i) 1 1 B1 AG
V = π r 2 (18 − r ) = 6π r 2 − π r 3
3 3

4(ii) dV M1 Differentiate and set = 0

= 12π r − π r 2 = 0
dr

π r (12 − r ) = 0 → r = 12 A1

d 2V M1
= 12π − 2π r
dr 2

Sub r = 12 → 12π − 24π = −12π → MAX A1 AG

4(iii) Sub r = 12, h = 6 → Max V = 288π or 905 B1

© UCLES 2017 Page 6 of 14

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(i) cos A = 8 / 10 → A = 0.6435 B1 AG Allow other valid methods e.g. sin A = 6 / 10

5(ii) EITHER: (M1A1

Area ∆ABC = ½ × 16 × 6 or ½ × 10 × 16sin 0.6435 = 48

Area 1 sector ½ × 10 2 × 0.6435 M1

Shaded area = 2 × their sector − their ∆ABC M1)

OR: (B1 B1
∆BDE = 12, ∆BDC = 30

Sector = 32.18 M1

2×segment + ∆BDE M1)

=16.4 A1

© UCLES 2017 Page 7 of 14

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(i) Mid-point of AB = (3, 5) B1 Answers may be derived from simultaneous equations

Gradient of AB = 2 B1

Eqn of perp. bisector is y − 5 = −½ ( x − 3) → 2 y = 13 − x M1A1 AG For M1 FT from mid-point and gradient of AB

6(ii)
( )
−3x + 39 = 5 x 2 − 18 x + 19 → ( 5) x 2 − 3x − 4 ( = 0 ) M1 Equate equations and form 3-term quadratic

x = 4 or −1 A1

y = 4½ or 7 A1

125 M1A1 Or equivalent integer fractions ISW

CD 2 = 52 + 2½ 2 → CD =
4

© UCLES 2017 Page 8 of 14

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(a) a = −2, b=3 B1B1

7(b)(i) s + s 2 − sc + 2c + 2 sc − 2c 2 = s + sc → s 2 − 2c 2 + 2c = 0 B1 Expansion of brackets must be correct

1 − cos 2θ − 2cos 2θ + 2 cos θ = 0 M1 Uses s 2 = 1 − c 2

3cos 2θ − 2cos θ − 1 = 0 A1 AG

7(b)(ii) 1 B1
cosθ = 1 or −
3

θ = 0° or 109.5° or −109.5° B1B1B1 FT for ‒ their 109.5°

FT

© UCLES 2017 Page 9 of 14

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(a) EITHER: (B1

JJJG JJJG
PR = 2 PQ = 2 ( q − p )
JJJG
OR =p+2q‒2p = 2q‒p M1A1)

OR: (B1
JJJG JJJG
QR = PQ = q ‒ p
JJJG JJJG JJJG
OR = OQ + QR =q+q‒p=2q‒p M1A1) Or other valid method

8(b) 62 + a 2 + b 2 = 212 SOI B1

18 + 2a + 2b = 0 B1

a 2 + ( − a − 9 ) = 405 M1 Correct method for elimination of a variable. (Or same equation in b)

2

( 2) ( a 2 + 9a − 162) ( = 0 ) A1 Or same equation in b

a = 9 or −18 A1

b = −18 or 9 A1

© UCLES 2017 Page 10 of 14

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(i) gg(x) = g(2x ‒ 3) = 2(2x ‒ 3) ‒ 3 = 4x ‒ 9 M1A1

9(ii) 1 1 M1 Invert; add 9 to both sides or with x/y interchanged

y= 2
→ x 2 = + 9 OE
x −9 y

1 A1
f −1 ( x ) = +9
x

1 M1
Attempt soln of + 9 > 3 or attempt to find range of f.
x
( y > 0)

Domain is x > 0 CAO A1 May simply be stated for B2

© UCLES 2017 Page 11 of 14

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(iii) EITHER: (M1

1 1
=
( 2 x − 3)2 −9 7

( 2 x − 3)2 = 16 or 4 x 2 − 12 x − 7 = 0 A1

x = 7/2 or ‒1/2 A1

x = 7/2 only A1)

OR: (M1
1
g(x) = f −1  
7

g(x) = 4 A1

2x ‒ 3 = 4 A1

x = 7/2 A1)

© UCLES 2017 Page 12 of 14

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(i)  x5  *B1
( )
Area = ∫ ½ x 4 − 1 dx = ½  − x 
5 

1  2 DM1A1 Apply limits 0→1

½  − 1 −0 = (−)
5  5

10(ii) Vol = π ∫ y 2 dx = ( )
¼ (π ) ∫ x8 − 2 x 4 + 1 dx M1 (If middle term missed out can only gain the M marks)

 x9 2 x5  *A1
¼ (π )  − + x
9 5 

1 2  DM1
¼ (π ) [ − + 1  − 0
9 5 

8π A1
or 0.559
45

© UCLES 2017 Page 13 of 14

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(iii) Vol = π ∫ x 2 dy = (π ) ∫ ( 2 y + 1) M1 Condone use of x if integral is correct

1/ 2
dy

 ( 2 y + 1)3/2  *A1A1  ( 2 y + 1)3/2 

(π )   [ ÷2] Expect (π )  
 3 / 2   3 

DM1
(π ) 
1 
− 0
3 

π A1 1
or 1.05 Apply − → 0
3 2

© UCLES 2017 Page 14 of 14

 Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/12
Paper 1 October/November 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2017 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

® IGCSE is a registered trademark.

This document consists of 15 printed pages.

© UCLES 2017 [Turn over

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors
in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula;
the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct
application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says
otherwise; and similarly when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier
marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol FT implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A
or B marks are given for correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the
candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a
correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1
d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect
working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2017 Page 2 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part question are genuinely misread and the object
and difficulty of the question remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through” marks. MR is not applied
when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2017 Page 3 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 EITHER: (B1, B1, B1) OE

Term is 9C3 × 26 × (−¼)3

OR1:
9
 8 x 3 − 1   1 9  1 
9

( ) ( )
3 9 3 9
 2 
=  2 8 x − 1 or −  2  1 − 8x
 4 x   4 x   4 x 

1 9 (B1, B1, B1) OE

Term is − 9
× C3 × 86
4

OR2:
9

( 2 x ) 1 − 3 
9 1
 8x 

 1
3 (B1, B1, B1) OE
Term is 29 × 9C3 ×  − 
 8

Selected term, which must be independent of x = − 84 B1

© UCLES 2017 Page 4 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

2(i) 4− x B1 OE
5

Equate a valid attempt at f-1 with f, or with x, or f with x M1, A1 Equating and an attempt to solve as far x =.
2 2 Both coordinates.
→  ,  or (0.667, 0.667)
3 3

2(ii) B1 Line y = 4 – 5x – must be straight, through approximately (0,4)

and intersecting the positive x axis near (1,0) as shown.

B1 4− x
Line y = – must be straight and through approximately
5
(0, 0.8). No need to see intersection with x axis.

B1 A line through (0,0) and the point of intersection of a pair of

straight lines with negative gradients. This line must be at 45°
unless scales are different in which case the line must be labelled
y=x.

Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(a) Uses r = (1.05 or 105%)9, 10 or 11 B1 Used to multiply repeatedly or in any GP formula.

New value = 10000 × 1.0510 = ($)16 300 B1

© UCLES 2017 Page 5 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(b) EITHER: (B1 Uses n = 1 to find a

n=1→5 a=5

n = 2 → 13 B1 Correct Sn for any other value of n (e.g. n = 2)

a + (a + d) = 13 →d=3 M1 A1) Correct method leading to d =

OR: n
n n   maybe be ignored
  ( 2a + ( n − 1) d ) =   ( 3n + 7 )
2
2 2

(*M1A1 Method mark awarded for equating terms in n from correct Sn

∴ dn + 2a − d = 3n + 7 → dn = 3n →d = 3
formula.

2a − ( their 3) = 7, a=5 DM1 A1)

© UCLES 2017 Page 6 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(i) Pythagoras → r = 72 OE M1 Correct method leading to r =

6 6
or cos 45 = → r = =6 2
r cos 45

3 2 M1 A1 Use of s=rθ with their r (NOT 6) and ¼π

Arc DC = 72 × ¼π = π , 2.12π, 6.66
2

4(ii) Area of sector BDC is ½ × 72 × ¼π (= 9π or 28.274…) *M1 Use of ½r²θ with their r (NOT 6) and ¼π

Area Q = 9π – 18 (10.274…) DM1 Subtracts their ½ × 6 × 6 from their ½r²θ

Area P is (¼π6² – area Q) = 18 M1 Uses {¼ π6² – (their area Q using 72 )}

18  18  A1
Ratio is   → 1.75
9π − 18  10.274 

© UCLES 2017 Page 7 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(i) EITHER: (M1 sin 2 2 x sin 2

2 Replaces tan²2x by not 2x
sin 2 x cos 2 2x cos 2
Uses tan 2 2 x =
cos 2 2 x

Uses sin²2x = (1 – cos²2x) M1 Replaces sin²2x by (1 – cos²2x)

→ 2cos²2x + 3cos2x +1 = 0 A1) AG. All correct

OR: (M1 Replaces tan²2x by sec2 2 x − 1

tan 2 2 x = sec2 2 x − 1

1 M1 1
sec 2 2 x = Replaces sec22x by
cos²2 x cos²2x
Multiply through by cos²2x and rearrange

→ 2cos²2x + 3cos2x +1 = 0 A1) AG. All correct

5(ii) cos 2x = −½ , −1 M1 Uses (i) to get values for cos 2x. Allow incorrect sign(s).

2x = 120°, 240° or 2x = 180°1 A1 A1 FT A1 for 60° or 120° FT for 180−1st answer

x = 60° or 120°

or x = 90º A1 Any extra answer(s) in given range only penalise fourth mark so
max 3/4.

© UCLES 2017 Page 8 of 15

970
09/12 Ca
ambridge Interna
ational AS/A Lev
vel – Mark Scheme October/Novem
mber
PUBLISHED 2017
Qu
uestion Answer Marrks Guidance

66(a)(i) 4 = a + ½b M1 Forming simultaneous equ

uations and elimin
nating one of the
3=a+b π π
variables – probably a. Maay still include sinn and / or sin
2 6

→ a = 5, b = −2 A1
A A1

6((a)(ii) ff(x) = a + bsin(a + bsin

nx) M1 Valid meethod for ff. Could
d be f(0) = N follo
owed by f(N) = M.
M

ff(0) = 5 – 2sin5 = 6.92

2 A1

6(b) EITHEER: (M1 Either paair of equations staated.

10 = c + d and −4 = c – d
10 = c – d and −4 = c + d

c = 3, d = 7, -7 or ±7 A1 A1) Either paair solved ISW

Alternately c=3 B1, range = 14 M1→ d = 7, –7 or ±7 A1

OR: (M1 A1 A1) Either off these diagrams caan be awarded M1.Correct values of
o c
and/or d can
c be awarded th he A1, A1

© UCLES 2017 Page 9 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(i) dy Can use completing the square.

= 2x − 4 = 0
dx

→ x = 2, y = 3 B1 B1

Midpoint of AB is (3, 5) B1 FT FT on (their 2, their 3) with (4,7)

7 B1
→ m= (or 2.33)
3

7(ii) Simultaneous equations → x 2 − 4 x − mx + 9 ( = 0 ) *M1 Equates and sets to 0 must contain m

Use of b²−4ac → (m + 4)² − 36 DM1 Any use of b²−4ac on equation set to 0 must contain m

Solves = 0 → −10 or 2 A1 Correct end-points.

−10 < m < 2 A1 Don’t condone ⩽ at either or both end(s). Accept −10 < m, m < 2.

Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(i) dy M1 dy
=0 Sets to 0 and attempts to solve leading to two values for x.
dx dx

x = 1, x = 4 A1 Both values needed

© UCLES 2017 Page 10 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(ii) d² y B1
= −2 x + 5
dx ²

d² y M1 Evidence of any valid method for both points.

Using both of their x values in their
dx ²

x = 1 → (3) → Minimum, x = 4 →(-3) → Maximum A1

8(iii) x3 5 x 2 B2, 1, 0 +c not needed. –1 each error or omission.

y=− + − 4 x (+c)
3 2

Uses x =6, y = 2 in an integrand to find c → c = 8 M1 A1 Statement of the final equation not required.

© UCLES 2017 Page 11 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(i)  4  −4  M1 Use of b – a or a – b
JJJG   JJJG  
AB =  3  or BA =  −3 
 2  −2 
   
JJJG JJJG JJJJG JJJG
JJJG JJJG M1 A1 Use of dot product with either AO or OA & either AB or BA .
ˆ = 90° AG
e.g. AO . AB =− 8 + 6 + 2 = 0 → OAB
Must see 3 component products

OR
JJJG JJJG JJJG
OA = 3, OB = 38 , AB = 29 OR Correct use of Pythagoras.
ˆ = 90° AG In both methods must state angle or Ө = 90° or similar for A1
OA2 + AB2 = OB2 → OAB

9(ii)  −6  B1 Must correctly identify the vector.

JJJG  
6
JJJG  
CB =  −6  or BC =  6 
 −3   3
   
JJJG
0 M1 A1 Correct link leading to OC
JJJG JJJG JJJG JJJG  
OC = OB + BC (or −CB ) = 7
 4
 

© UCLES 2017 Page 12 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance
JJJG JJJG JJJG
9(iii) OA = 3, BC = 9, AB = 29 (5.39 ) B1 For any one of these

Area = ½(3 + 9) 29 or 3 29 + 3 29 M1 Correct formula(e) used for trapezium or (rectangle + triangle) or

two triangles using their lengths.

= 6 29 A1 Exact answer in correct form.

( 1 1044,2 261 or 3 116)

Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(i) dy 1 1
5 B1 B1 B1 Without × 5 B1 × 5 of an attempt at differentiation
= × ( 5 x − 1) 2 × 5
−
(= )
dx 2 6

6 M1 Uses m1m2 = −1 with their numeric value from their dy/dx

m of normal = −
5

6 A1 Unsimplified. Can use y = mx + c to get c = 5.4 ISW

Equation of normal y − 3 = − ( x − 2 ) OE
5
−6 27
or 5y + 6x = 27 or y = x+
5 5

© UCLES 2017 Page 13 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(ii) EITHER: (B1 Correct expression without ÷5

3
( 5 x − 1)
()
2
For the curve ∫ 5 x − 1dx = ÷5 B1 For dividing an attempt at integration of y by 5
3
2

M1 A1
Limits from
1
5
to 2 used → 3.6 or
18
5
OE Using
1
5
(
and 2 to evaluate an integrand may be ∫ y 2 )
Normal crosses x-axis when y = 0, → x= (4½) M1 Uses their equation of normal, NOT tangent

15 A1 This can be obtained by integration

Area of triangle = 3.75 or OE
4

147 A1)
Total area=3.6 + 3.75 = 7.35, OE
20

OR: (B2, 1, 0 –1 each error or omission.

For the curve:
1  y3 
( ∫ ) 15 ( y 2
)
+ 1 dy =  + y 
5 3 

12 M1 A1 Using 0 and 3 to evaluate an integrand

Limits from 0 to 3 used → 2.4 or OE
5

Uses their equation of normal, NOT tangent. M1 Either to find side length for trapezium or attempt at integrating
between 0 and 3

1 39 3 A1 This can be obtained by integration

Area of trapezium = ( 2 + 4½ ) × 3 = or 9
2 4 4

39 12 147 A1)
Shaded area = − = 7.35, OE
4 5 20

© UCLES 2017 Page 14 of 15

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

© UCLES 2017 Page 15 of 15

 Cambridge Assessment International Education
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/13
Paper 1 October/November 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge International will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge International is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2017 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

® IGCSE is a registered trademark.

This document consists of 15 printed pages.

© UCLES 2017 [Turn over

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors
in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula;
the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct
application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says
otherwise; and similarly when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier
marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol FT implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A
or B marks are given for correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the
candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a
correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1
d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect
working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2017 Page 2 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part question are genuinely misread and the object
and difficulty of the question remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through” marks. MR is not applied
when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2017 Page 3 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017

Question Answer Marks Guidance

 24 + ( n − 1) 6 ~ 3000
1 ½ n − M1 Use correct formula with RHS ≈ 3000 (e.g. 3010).
Note: ~ denotes any inequality or equality

( 3) ( n 2 − 5n − 1000 ) ( ~ 0 ) A1 Rearrange into a 3-term quadratic.

n ~34.2 ( & − 29.2) A1

35. Allow n . 35 A1

2 2 *M1 Rearrange into a 3-term quadratic.

ax + 3a = − → ax 2 + 3ax + 2 ( = 0 )
x

Apply b 2 − 4 ac > 0 SOI DM1 Allow ⩾. If no inequalities seen, M1 is implied by 2 correct final
answers in a or x.

8 A1 A1 8
a < 0, a > (or 0.889) OE For final answers accept 0 > a > but not ⩽, ⩾.
9 9

© UCLES 2017 Page 4 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(i) 2
3 M1 Both x's can be missing.
6C3   ( −3x ) SOI also allowed if seen in an expansion
3

 x

−4320 Identified as answer A1 Cannot be earned retrospectively in (ii).

3(ii) 2
4 M1 Both x’s and minus sign can be missing.
6C2   ( − ) 3x 
2
SOI clearly identified as critical term
x

15a ×16 × 9 − their 4320 ( = 0) A1 FT FT on their 4320.

a=2 A1

Question Answer Marks Guidance

4  3   B2, 1, 0 Deduct 1 mark for each [...] incorrect.

f ' ( x ) =   (2 x − 1)1/ 2  × [ 2] − [ 6]
 2  

f ' ( x ) < 0 or - 0 or = 0 SOI M1

( 2 x − 1) A1 Allow with k used instead of x

1/2
< 2 or - 2 or = 2 OE

5 A1 5 5
Largest value of k is Allow k - or k = Answer must be in terms of k (not x)
2 2 2

© UCLES 2017 Page 5 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(i) cos θ + 4 + 5sin 2θ + 5sin θ − 5sin θ − 5 ( = 0 ) M1 Multiply throughout by sin θ + 1 . Accept if 5sin θ − 5sin θ is not
seen

( )
5 1 − cos 2θ + cos θ − 1 ( = 0 ) M1 Use s 2 = 1 − c 2

5cos 2θ − cos θ − 4 = 0 AG A1 Rearrange to AG

5(ii) cosθ = 1 and −0.8 B1 Both required

θ = [ 0°, 360°] , [143.1°] , [ 216.9°] B1 B1 B1 Both solutions required for 1st mark. For 3rd mark FT for
FT ( 360° − their 143.1°)
Extra solution(s) in range (e.g. 180º) among 4 correct solutions
3
scores
4

Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(i) 2 2 M1
y= 2
⇒ x2 = +1 OE
x −1 y

2 A1 With or without x/y interchanged.

x = (±) +1 OE
y

2 A1 Minus sign obligatory. Must be a function of x.

f −1 ( x ) = − +1 OE
x

© UCLES 2017 Page 6 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(ii)  2 
2 B1
 2  +1 = 5
 x −1

2 B1 Condone x 2 = 0 as an additional solution

2
= (±)2 OE OR x4 − 2x2 = 0 OE
x −1
x 2 − 1 = ( ± )1 ⇒ x 2 = 2 ( or 0 )
x=− 2 or −1.41 only

Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(i) 3 M1 3 π

sin −1   = 0.6435 AG OR ( PBC = ) cos −1   = 0.9273 ⇒ ( ABP = ) − 0.9273 = 0.6435
5 5 2
Or other valid method. Check working and diagram for evidence of
incorrect method

7(ii) Use (once) of sector area = ½ r 2θ M1

Area sector BAP = ½ × 52 × 0.6435 = 8.04 A1

9π A1
Area sector DAQ = ½ × ½π × 32 = 7.07 , Allow
4

© UCLES 2017 Page 7 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(iii) EITHER: (M1 Use of correct strategy

Region = sect + sect ‒ (rect ‒ ∆) or sect ‒ [rect ‒ (sect + ∆)]

(Area ∆ BPC =) ½ × 3 × 4 = 6 Seen A1

8.04 + 7.07 ‒ (15 ‒ 6) = 6.11 A1)

OR1: (M1 Use of correct strategy

Region = sector ADQ ‒ (trap ABPD ‒ sector ABP).

(Area trap ABPD = ) ½ (5 + 1) × 3 = 9 Seen A1

7.07 ‒ (9 ‒ 8.04) = 7.07 ‒ 0.96 = 6.11 A1)

OR2: (M1 Use of correct strategy

Area segment AP= 2.5686 Area segment AQ = 0.5438
Region = segment AP + segment AQ + ∆APQ.

(Area ∆APQ =) ½ × 2 × 3 = 3 Seen A1

2.57 + 0.54 + 3 = 6.11 A1)

© UCLES 2017 Page 8 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(i) EITHER: (M1 Form 3-term quad & attempt to solve for √x.
4 ‒ 3√x = 3 ‒ 2x → 2x ‒ 3√x + 1 (=0) or e.g. 2k2‒3k + 1 (=0)

x = ½, 1 A1 Or k = ½ or 1 (where k = √x).

x = ¼, 1 A1)

OR1: (M1
2
(3 x) = (1 + 2 x )
2

4 x2 − 5x + 1 ( =0) A1

x = ¼, 1 A1)

OR2: (M1 Eliminate x

2
3− y  4− y 
2
=
 3 
2
(
 → 2 y − 7 y + 5( = 0) )
5 A1
y= ,1
2

x = ¼, 1 A1)

© UCLES 2017 Page 9 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(ii) EITHER: (B1

Area under line = ∫ ( 3 − 2 x ) dx = 3 x − x 2

  3 1  M1 Apply their limits (e.g. ¼ → 1) after integn.

= ( 3 − 1) −  −  
  4 16  

( )
Area under curve = ∫ 4 − 3 x1/ 2 dx = 4 x − 2 x3/ 2 B1

( 4 − 2 ) − (1 − ¼ )  M1 Apply their limits (e.g. ¼ → 1) after integration.

21 5 1 A1)
Required area = ‒ = (or 0.0625)
16 4 16

OR: (*M1 Subtract functions and then attempt integration

 1
 1
+/‒ ∫ ( 3 − 2 x ) 
− 4 − 3x 2  = + / − ∫ (−1 − 2 x + 3x 2 )

 

 3x 3/2  A2, 1, 0 FT FT on their subtraction. Deduct 1 mark for each term incorrect
+/‒  − x − x 2 + 
 3/ 2 

  1 1 1  1 DM1 A1) Apply their limits ¼ → 1

+/‒  −1 − 1 + 2 −  − + +   = (or 0.0625)
  4 16 8   16

© UCLES 2017 Page 10 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(i)  −18   12  B1 B1 Allow i, j, k form throughout.

JJJG   JJJG  
AB = + / −  9  , BC = + / −  −6  ,
 −18   12 
   
JJJG JJJG JJJG JJJG
AB = 27, BC = 18 B1 FT FT on their AB , their OD .
B1 FT

JJJG  18   18 
2 B1
CD =   × 18 OR   × 27 = 12
 27   27 

9(ii) JJJG 18 JJJG M1 8

CD = ( ± ) their × their BC SOI  
27 Expect ( ± )  −4  .
8
 

2  12   10   −6  M1 A1 A1 JJJG JJJG 5 JJJG JJJG 1 JJJG

JJJG   18       Other methods possible for OD , e.g. OB + CD , OB + CD
OD =  −3  ( ± ) their  −6  =  −7  ,  1  2 2
 −1  27    7   −9  JJJG 5 JJJ
G JJJ
G 1 G
JJJ
   12      (One soln M2A1, 2nd soln A1) OR OB + BC , OB + BC
3 3
(One soln M2A1, 2nd soln A1)

© UCLES 2017 Page 11 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(i) −b B1
ax 2 + bx = 0 → x ( ax + b ) = 0 → x =
a

−b M1
Find f″ ( x ) and attempt sub their into their f″ ( x )
a

−b  −b  A1
When x = , f ″ ( x ) = 2a   + b = −b MAX
a  a 

10(ii) Sub f ' ( −2 ) = 0 M1

Sub f ' (1) = 9 M1

a =3 b=6 *A1 Solve simultaneously to give both results.

f ' ( x ) = 3x 2 + 6 x → f ( x ) = x3 + 3x 2 ( +c ) *M1 Sub their a, b into f ' ( x ) and integrate ‘correctly’. Allow
ax3 bx 2
+ ( +c )
3 2

−3 = −8 + 12 + c DM1 Sub x = −2, y = −3 . Dependent on c present. Dependent also on a,

b substituted.

f ( x ) = x3 + 3x 2 − 7 A1

© UCLES 2017 Page 12 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(i) 1 B1
Gradient of AB =
2

1 1 B1
Equation of AB is y = x–
2 2

11(ii) dy 1 B1
= ½ ( x − 1) 2
−

dx

1
dy *M1
½ ( x − 1)
−
2 = ½ . Equate their to their ½
dx

x = 2, y = 1 A1

y ‒ 1 = ½(x ‒ 2) (thro' their(2,1) & their ½) → y = ½ x DM1 A1

© UCLES 2017 Page 13 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(iii) EITHER: (M1 Where θ is angle between AB and the x-axis

d
sin θ = → d = sin θ
1

gradient of AB = ½ ⇒ tan θ = ½ ⇒ θ = 26.5 ( 7 ) ° B1

1 A1)
d = sin 26.5 ( 7 ) ° = 0.45 (or )
5

OR1: (M1
Perpendicular through O has equation y = −2 x

 1 −2  A1
Intersection with AB: −2 x = ½ x − ½ →  , 
5 5 

2 2 A1)
1 2 1
d =   +   = 0.45 (or )
5  5 5

OR2: (M1
Perpendicular through (2, 1) has equation y = −2 x + 5

 11 3  A1
Intersection with AB: −2 x + 5 = ½ x − ½ →  , 
 5 5

2 2 A1)
1 2
d =   +  = 0.45 (or 1/√5)
5  5

© UCLES 2017 Page 14 of 15

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme October/November
PUBLISHED 2017
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(iii) OR3: (B1

1 1
∆OAC has area [where C = (0, − )]
4 2

1 5 1 1 M1 A1)
× ×d= →d=
2 2 4 5

© UCLES 2017 Page 15 of 15

 Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/11
Paper 1 May/June 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2017 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®,
Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.

® IGCSE is a registered trademark.

This document consists of 12 printed pages.

© UCLES 2017 [Turn over

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors
in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula;
the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct
application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says
otherwise; and similarly when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier
marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol FT implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A
or B marks are given for correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the
candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a
correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1
d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect
working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2017 Page 2 of 12

9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part question are genuinely misread and the object
and difficulty of the question remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through” marks. MR is not applied
when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2017 Page 3 of 12

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 (3–2x)6

Coeff of x² = 34 × (−2)² × 6C2 = a B3,2,1 Mark unsimplified forms. –1 each independent error but powers

Coeff of x³ = 3³ × (−2)³ × 6C3 = b must be correct. Ignore any ‘x’ present.

a 9 B1 OE. Negative sign must appear before or in the numerator

=−
b 8

Total: 4

2  3  2
uuur   uuur  
OA =  −6  and OB =  −6 
 p  −7 
   

2(i) Angle AOB = 90° → 6 + 36 −7p = 0 M1 Use of x1x2 + y1y2 + z1z2 = 0 or Pythagoras

→p=6 A1

Total: 2

© UCLES 2017 Page 4 of 12

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

2(ii)  3  2 B1 FT CAO FT on their value of p

uuur 2    
OC =  −6  =  −4 
3   
 p  4

0 M1 M1 Use of c – b. Allow magnitude of b + c or b – c

uuur
BC = c – b =  2  ; magnitude = √125
Allow first M1 in terms of p
 11
 

0 A1 OE Allow ± and decimal equivalent

1  
Unit vector = 2
125  
 11

3(i) 1 + cosθ sinθ 2

+ ≡ .
sinθ 1 + cosθ sinθ

(1 + c ) + s ² M1 Correct use of fractions

2
1 + 2c + c ² + s ²
=
s (1 + c ) s (1 + c )

2 + 2c 2 (1 + c ) 2 M1 A1 Use of trig identity, A1 needs evidence of cancelling

= = →
s (1 + c ) s (1 + c ) s

Total: 3

3(ii) 2 3 2 M1 Use part (i) and t = s ÷ c, may restart from given equation
= →t=
s c 3

→ θ = 33.7° or 213.7° A1 A1FT FT for 180° + 1st answer. 2nd A1 lost for extra solns in range

Total: 3

© UCLES 2017 Page 5 of 12

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(a) a = 32, a + 4d = 22, → d = −2.5 B1

a + (n – 1)d = −28 → n = 25 B1

25 M1 A1 M1 for correct formula with n = 24 or n = 25

S25 = ( 64 − 2.5 × 24 ) = 50
2

Total: 4

4(b) a = 2000, r = 1.025 B1 r = 1 + 2.5% ok if used correctly in Sn formula

1.02510 − 1 M1 A1 M1 for correct formula with n = 9 or n = 10 and their a and r

S10 = 2000( ) = 22400 or a value which rounds to this
1.025 − 1

SR: correct answer only for n = 10 B3, for n = 9, B1 (£19 900)

Total: 3

© UCLES 2017 Page 6 of 12

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5 y = 2cosx

5(i) B1 One whole cycle – starts and finishes at –ve value

DB1 Smooth curve, flattens at ends and middle. Shows (0, 2).

Total: 2

5(ii) π
P( , 1) Q(π, −2)
3
2 M1 A1 Pythagoras (on their coordinates) must be correct, OE.
 2π 
→ PQ² =   + 3² → PQ = 3.7
 3 

Total: 2

© UCLES 2017 Page 7 of 12

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(iii) 9  π M1 Correct form of line equation or sim equations from their P & Q
Eqn of PQ y − 1 = − x− 
2π  3

5π A1 5π
If y = 0 → h = AG, condone x =
9 9

5 A1 SR: non-exact solutions A1 for both

If x = 0 → k = ,
2

Total: 3

6(i) 1 3 8000 M1 Use of (area of triangle, with attempt at ht) × h =2000, h = f ( x )
Volume =   x ² h = 2000 → h =
2 2 √ 3x ²

1 3 M1 Uses 3 rectangles and at least one triangle

A = 3 xh + ( 2 ) ×   × x 2 ×
2 2

√ 3 2 24 000 −1 A1 AG
Sub for h → A = x + x
2 3

Total: 3

6(ii) dA 3 24000 −2 B1 CAO, allow decimal equivalent

= 2x − x
dx 2 3

= 0 when x³ = 8000 → x = 20 M1 A1 dA
Sets their to 0 and attempt to solve for x
dx

Total: 3

© UCLES 2017 Page 8 of 12

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(iii) d² A 3 48000 −3 M1 d² A
= 2+ x >0 Any valid method, ignore value of providing it is positive
dx ² 2 3 dx ²

→ Minimum A1 FT FT on their x providing it is positive

Total: 2

7 dy
= 7 − x² − 6 x
dx

7(i) x³ 6 x² B1 CAO
y = 7x − − (+ c)
3 2

Uses (3, − 10) → c = 5 M1 A1 Uses the given point to find c

Total: 3

7(ii) 7 − x ² − 6 x = 16 − ( x + 3) ² B1 B1 B1 a = 16, B1 b = 3.

Total: 2

7(iii) 16 − ( x + 3) ² > 0 → (x + 3)² < 16, and solve M1 or factors (x + 7)(x – 1)

End-points x = 1 or −7 A1

→ −7 < x < 1 A1 needs <, not ⩽. (SR x < 1 only, or x > −7 only B1 i.e. 1/3)

Total: 3

© UCLES 2017 Page 9 of 12

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(i) Letting M be midpoint of AB

OM = 8 (Pythagoras) → XM = 2 B1 (could find √40 and use sin−1or cos−1)

6 M1 A1 AG Needs × 2 and correct trig for M1

tan AXM = AXB = 2tan−13 = 2.498
2

6 (Alternative 1: Use of isosceles triangles, B1 for AOM, M1,A1 for

(Alternative 1: sin AOM = , AOM = 0.6435, AXB = π − 0.6435 ) completion)
10
(Alternative 2: Use of circle theorem, B1 for AOB, M1,A1for
completion)

Total: 3

8(ii) AX = √(6² + 2²) = √40 B1 CAO, could be gained in part (i) or part (iii)

Arc AYB = rθ = √40 × 2.498 M1 Allow for incorrect √40 (not r = 6 or 12 or 10 )

Perimeter = 12 + arc = 27.8 cm A1

Total: 3

8(iii) area of sector AXBY = ½ × (√40)² × 2.498 M1 Use of ½r²θ with their r , (not r = 6 or r = 10 )

Area of triangle AXB = ½ × 12 × 2, Subtract these → 38.0 cm² M1 A1 Use of ½bh and subtraction. Could gain M1 with r = 10 .

Total: 3

© UCLES 2017 Page 10 of 12

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9 2
f:x⟼ g : x ⟼ 4x + a,
3 − 2x

9(i) 2 2 M1 Correct first 2 steps

y= → y (3 − 2x ) = 2 → 3 − 2x =
3 − 2x y

2 3 1 M1 A1 Correct order of operations, any correct form with f ( x ) or y =

→ 2x = 3 − → f−1(x) = −
y 2 x

Total: 3

9(ii) 2 M1 Correct first step

gf(−1) = 3 f(−1) =
5

8 7 M1 A1 Forms an equation in a and finds a , OE

+a =3 → a =
5 5

8
(or + a = 3 , M1 Sub and solves M1, A1)
3 − 2x

Total: 3

9(iii) x − a −1 M1 Finding g −1 ( x ) and equating to their f −1 ( x ) even if a = 7 / 5

g−1(x) = = f (x)
4

→ x2 − x ( a + 6) + 4 ( = 0) M1 Use of b² − 4ac on a quadratic with a in a coefficient

Solving ( a + 6 ) = 16 or a 2 + 12a + 20 ( = 0 ) M1 Solution of a 3 term quadratic

2

→ a = −2 or −10 A1

Total: 4

© UCLES 2017 Page 11 of 12

 9709/11 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(i) dy −4 B1 B1 B1 without ×(−3) B1 For ×(−3)

= × (−3)
dx ( 5 − 3x ) ²

Gradient of tangent = 3, Gradient of normal – ⅓ *M1 Use of m1m2 = −1 after calculus

1 DM1 Correct form of equation, with (1, their y), not (1,0)
→ eqn: y − 2 = − ( x − 1)
3

1 7 A1 This mark needs to have come from y = 2, y must be subject

→ y=− x+
3 3

Total: 5

10(ii) 1
16 M1 Use of V = π ∫ y ²dx with an attempt at integration
Vol = π ∫0 ( 5 − 3x ) ² dx

 −16  A1 A1 A1 without( ÷ −3), A1 for (÷ −3)

π ÷ − 3
 ( 5 − 3x ) 

 16 16  8π M1 A1 Use of both correct limits M1

= ( π −  )= (if limits switched must show – to +)
 6 15  5

Total: 5

© UCLES 2017 Page 12 of 12

 Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/12
Paper 1 May/June 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2017 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®,
Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.

® IGCSE is a registered trademark.

This document consists of 11 printed pages.

© UCLES 2017 [Turn over

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors
in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula;
the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct
application of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the
associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally independent unless the scheme specifically says
otherwise; and similarly when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier
marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol FT implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A
or B marks are given for correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the
candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a
correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1
d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect
working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2017 Page 2 of 11

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be
varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part question are genuinely misread and the object
and difficulty of the question remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through” marks. MR is not applied
when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2017 Page 3 of 11

 9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1(i) Coefficient of x = 80(x) B2 Correct value must be selected for both marks.
SR +80 seen in an expansion gets B1 or −80 gets B1 if selected.

Total: 2

1(ii) 1 1 B2 Correct value soi in (ii), if powers unsimplified only allow if selected. SR
Coefficient of = −40   +40 soi in (ii) gets B1.
x  x

Coefficient of x = (1 × their 80) + (3 ×their − 40) = −40(x) M1 A1 Links the appropriate 2 terms only for M1.

Total: 4

2(i) Gradient = 1.5 Gradient of perpendicular = −⅔ B1

Equation of AB is y − 6 = −⅔( x + 2 ) M1 A1 Correct use of straight line equation with a changed gradient and (− 2, 6), the
Or 3 y + 2 x = 14 oe (− (− 2)) must be resolved for the A1 ISW.

Using y = mx + c gets A1 as soon as c is evaluated.

Total: 3

2(ii) Simultaneous equations → Midpoint (1, 4) M1 Attempt at solution of simultaneous equations as far as x =, or y =.

Use of midpoint or vectors → B (4, 2) M1A1 Any valid method leading to x, or to y.

Total: 3

© UCLES 2017 Page 4 of 11

 9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(i) 1 s
2 M1 sin
LHS =  −  Eliminates tan by replacing with leading to a function of sin and/or cos
c c cos
only.

=
(1 − s )2 M1 Uses s² + c² = 1 leading to a function of sin only.
1 − s²

(1 − s )(1 − s ) 1 − sin θ A1 AG. Must show use of factors for A1.

= =
(1 − s )(1 + s ) 1 + sin θ

Total: 3

3(ii) Uses part (i) → 2 – 2s = 1 + s

→s=⅓ M1 Uses part (i) to obtain s = k

θ = 19.5º or 160.5° A1A1 FT FT from error in 19.5°

Allow 0.340ᶜ (0.3398ᶜ) & 2.80(2) or 0.108πᶜ & 0.892πᶜ for A1 only.
Extra answers in the range lose the second A1 if gained for 160.5°.

Total: 3

4(i) rsin2θ B1 2θ
(AB) = 2rsinθ (or r 2 − 2cos 2θ or ) Allow unsimplifed throughout eg r + r, etc
π  2
sin  −θ 
2 

(Arc AB) = 2rθ B1

rsin2θ B1
(P =) 2r + 2rθ + 2rsinθ (or r 2 − 2cos 2θ or )
π 
sin  −θ 
2 

Total: 3

© UCLES 2017 Page 5 of 11

 9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(ii) 25π B1 Use of segment formula gives 2.26 B1B1

Area sector AOB = ( ½ r² 2θ) or13.1
6

Area triangle AOB = (½×2rsinθ×rcosθ or ½ × r2 sin2θ) B1

25 3
or10.8
4

Area rectangle ABCD = (r × 2rsinθ) 25 B1

(Area =) Either 25 – (25π/6 – 25√3/4) or 22.7 B1 Correct final answer gets B4.

Total: 4

5(i) Crosses x-axis at (6, 0) B1 x = 6 is sufficient.

dy B2,1,0 −1 for each incorrect term of the three or addition of + C.

= (0 +) −12 (2 – x)−2 × (−1)
dx

Tangent y = ¾ ( x − 6 ) or 4 y = 3x − 18 M1 A1 Must use dy/dx, x= their 6 but not x = 0 (which gives m = 3), and correct
form of line equation.

Using y = mx + c gets A1 as soon as c is evaluated.

Total: 5

5(ii) If x = 4, dy/dx = 3

dy M1 A1FT dy
= 3 × 0.04 = 0.12 M1 for (“their m” from and x = 4) × 0.04.
dt dx
Be aware: use of x = 0 gives the correct answer but gets M0.

Total: 2

© UCLES 2017 Page 6 of 11

 9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6 16 M1* Use of volume formula at least once, condone omission of π and limits and
∫ ( 5 − x ) dx − π ∫
2
Vol = π dx dx .
x²

DM1 Subtracting volumes somewhere must be after squaring.

(5 – x) ³ B1 B1 B1 Without ÷ (−1). B1 for ÷( −1)

∫ ( 5 − x ) ²dx = ÷ −1
3

(or 25x – 10x²/2 +⅓x³) (B2,1,0) −1 for each incorrect term

16 16 B1
∫ dx = −
x² x

Use of limits 1 and 4 in an integrated expression and subtracted. DM1 Must have used“y²” at least once. Need to see values substituted.

→ 9π or 28.3 A1

Total: 7

7(a) n M1 M1 correct formula used with d from 16 + d = 24

(Sn =) 32 + ( n − 1) 8 and 20000
2

A1 A1 for correct expression linked to 20000.

→ n² + 3n – 5000 (<,=,> 0) DM1 Simplification to a three term quadratic.

→ (n = 69.2) → 70 terms needed. A1 Condone use of 20001 throughout.

Correct answer from trial and improvement gets 4/4.

Total: 4

© UCLES 2017 Page 7 of 11

 9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(b) a M1A1 Correct S∞ formula used to find r.

a = 6, = 18 → r = ⅔
1− r

4 M1 Obtain new values for a and r by any valid method.

New progression a = 36, r = oe
9

36 324 A1 (Be aware that r =−⅔ leads to 64.8 but can only score M marks)
New S∞ = → 64.8 or oe
4 5
1−
9

Total: 4
uuur uuur uuur uuur
8(i) Uses scalar product correctly: M1 Use of dot product with OA or AO & OB or BO only.
3 × 6 + 2 × 6 + (−4) × 3 = 18
uuuur uuuur uuur uuur uuur uuur
OA = 29 , OB = 9 M1 Correct method for any one of OA , AO , OB or BO .

29 × 9 × cos AOB = 18 M1 All linked correctly.

→ AOB = 68.2° or 1.19ᶜ A1 Multiples of π are acceptable (e.g. 0.379πᶜ)

Total: 4
uuur uuur uuur
8(ii) AB = 3i + 4j +(3+2p)k *M1 For use of OB − OA , allow with p = 2
uuur
Comparing “j” DM1 For comparing, OC must contain p & q.
uuur uuur
Can be implied by AB = 2 OC .
uuur
→ p = 2½ and q = 4 A1 A1 Accuracy marks only available if AB is correct.

Total: 4

© UCLES 2017 Page 8 of 11

 9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(i) dy B1 Accept unsimplified.

= 4 x −½ − 2
dx

= 0 when x =2

x = 4, y = 8 B1B1

Total: 3

9(ii) d² y −
3 B1FT FT providing –ve power of x
= −2 x 2
dx ²

 d² y 1 B1 d² y
 = −  → Maximum Correct and x=4 in (i) are required.
 dx ² 4 dx ²
d² y
Followed by“< 0 or negative” is sufficient” but must be correct if
dx ²
evaluated.

Total: 2

9(iii) EITHER: (M1 Eg x =u → 2u ² − 8u + 6 = 0

Recognises a quadratic in x

1 and 3 as solutions to this equation A1

→ x = 9, x = 1. A1)

© UCLES 2017 Page 9 of 11

 9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

OR: (M1 x needs to be isolated before squaring both sides.

Rearranges then squares

→ x 2 − 10 x + 9 = 0 oe A1

→ x = 9, x = 1. A1) Both correct by trial and improvement gets 3/3

Total: 3

9(iv) k>8 B1

Total: 1

10(i) 1  1  M1 1  1 
3tan  x  = −2 → tan  x  = −⅔ Attempt to obtain tan  x  = k from 3tan  x  + 2 = 0
2  2  2  2 

½x = −0.6 (‒ 0.588) → x = ‒1.2 M1 A1 tan −1 k . Seeing ½x = ‒ 33.69° or x= ‒ 67.4° implies M1M1.

Extra answers between −1.57 &1.57 lose the A1.

Multiples of π are acceptable ( eg – 0.374π)

Total: 3

10(ii) y+2 1  M1 Attempt at isolating tan(½x)

= tan  x 
3 2 

 x+2 M1 A1 Inverse tan followed by × 2. Must be function of x for A1.

→ f−1(x) = 2tan −1  
 3 

−5,1 B1 B1 Values stated B1 for -5, B1 for 1.

Total: 5

© UCLES 2017 Page 10 of 11

 9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(iii) B1 B1 B1 A tan graph through the first, third and fourth quadrants. (B1)

An invtan graph through the first, second and third quadrants.(B1)

Two curves clearly symmetrical about y = x either by sight or by exact end

points. Line not required.
Approximately in correct domain and range. (Not intersecting.) (B1)

Labels on axes not required.

Total: 3

© UCLES 2017 Page 11 of 11

 Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/13
Paper 1 May/June 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2017 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®,
Cambridge International A and AS Level and Cambridge Pre-U components, and some Cambridge O Level
components.

® IGCSE is a registered trademark.

This document consists of 14 printed pages.

© UCLES 2017 [Turn over

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost
for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a
candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the
formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the
relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without the formula being
quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are several
B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more
steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol FT implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on
from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only. A and
B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a
candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise
indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct
form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme
specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or
which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A
or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For
Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to
9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2017 Page 2 of 14

9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the
detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is
allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case
where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a particular
circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part

question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question remain
unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through” marks. MR is not
applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in
accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular cases if agreed at the
coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1

penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2017 Page 3 of 14

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 7C1 ×26 × a ( x ) , 7C2 ×25 ×  a ( x ) 

2 B1 B1 SOI Can be part of expansion. Condone ax2 only if followed by a2.

ALT 27 [1 + ax / 2] → 7C1  a ( x ) / 2  = 7C 2  a ( x ) / 2 
7 2

7 × 26 2 B1 Ignore extra soln a = 0. Allow a = 0.667. Do not allow an extra x in the

a= = answer
21 × 25 3

Total: 3

Question Answer Marks Guidance

2(i) r 2 − 3r + 2 M1
S=
1− r

S=
( r − 1)( r − 2 ) = − (1 − r )( r − 2 ) = 2 − r OR A1 AG Factors must be shown. Expressions requiring minus sign taken out must
1− r 1− r be shown
(1 − r )( 2 − r ) = 2 − r OE
1− r

Total: 2

2(ii) Single range 1 < S < 3 or (1, 3) B2 Accept 1 < 2 − r < 3 .

Correct range but with S = 2 omitted scores SR B1
1 - S - 3 scores SR B1.
[S > 1 and S < 3] scores SR B1.

Total: 2

© UCLES 2017 Page 4 of 14

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3 EITHER
Elim y to form 3-term quad eqn in x1/3 (or u or y or even x) (M1 Expect x 2/3 − x1/3 − 2 ( = 0 ) or u 2 − u − 2 ( = 0 ) etc.

x1/3 (or u or y or x) = 2, −1 *A1 Both required. But x = 2,‒1 and not then cubed or cube rooted scores A0

Cube solution(s) DM1 Expect x = 8, ‒ 1. Both required

(8, 3), (‒1,0) A1)

OR
(M1 Expect y + 1 = ( y − 1)
2
Elim x to form quadratic equation in y

y2 − 3y = 0 *A1

Attempt solution DM1 Expect y = 3, 0

(8, 3), (‒1,0) A1)

Total: 4

© UCLES 2017 Page 5 of 14

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(i)  5   5  0  B1
uuur uuur uuur      
( )
OB − OA = AB =  4  −  1  =  3 
 −3   3   −6 
     
uuur
 5  0   5 M1 A1 If OP not scored in (i) can score SR B1 if seen correct in (ii). Other
uuur   1    
OP =  1  +  3  =  2  equivalent methods possible
 3  3  −6   1 
     

Total: 3
uuur
4(ii) Distance OP = 52 + 22 + 12 = 30 or 5.48 B1 FT FT on their OP from (i)

Total: 1
uuur uuur uuur uuur uuur uuur uuur uuur
4(iii) Attempt AB.OP. Can score as part of AB.OP = ( AB )( OP ) cosθ M1 Allow any combination of AB. PO etc. and also if AP or PB used instead of
uuur 2 uuur 2 uuur 2 uuur
Rare ALT: Pythagoras OP + AP = 5 + 30 = OA AB giving 2‒2 = 0 & 4‒4 = 0 respectively. Allow notation × instead of . .

A1 FT If result not zero then 'Not perpendicular' can score A1FT if value is 'correct'
(0 + 6 ‒ 6) = 0 hence perpendicular. (Accept 90º) uuur uuur
for their values of AB, OP etc. from (i).

Total: 2

© UCLES 2017 Page 6 of 14

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(i) 2sin θ + cosθ 2sin θ M1 Replace tan θ by sin θ / cos θ

=
sin θ + cosθ cosθ

2sin θ cos θ + cos 2θ = 2sin 2θ + 2sin θ cos θ ⇒ c 2 = 2 s 2 M1 A1 Mult by c(s + c) or making this a common denom.. For A1 simplification to
AG without error or omission must be seen.

Total: 3

5(ii) tan 2θ = 1 / 2 or cos 2θ = 2 / 3 or sin 2θ = 1 / 3 B1 Use tan θ = s / c or c 2 + s 2 = 1 and simplify to one of these results

θ = 35.3° or 144.7° B1 B1 FT FT for 180 ‒ other solution. SR B1 for radians 0.615, 2.53 (0.196π, 0.804π)
Extra solutions in range amongst solutions of which 2 are correct gets B1B0

Total: 3

© UCLES 2017 Page 7 of 14

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6 Gradient of normal is – 1/3 → gradient of tangent is 3 SOI B1 B1 FT FT from their gradient of normal.

dy/dx = 2x – 5 = 3 M1 Differentiate and set = their 3 (numerical).

x=4 *A1

Sub x = 4 into line → y = 7 & sub their (4, 7) into curve DM1 OR sub x = 4 into curve → y = k ‒ 4 and sub their(4, k ‒ 4) into line
OR other valid methods deriving a linear equation in k (e.g. equating curve
with either normal or tangent and sub x = 4).

k = 11 A1

Total: 6

© UCLES 2017 Page 8 of 14

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(i) sin ABC = 8 / 10 → ABC = 0.927 ( 3) B1 Or cos = 6/10 or tan = 8/6. Accept 0.295π.

Total: 1

7(ii) AB = 6 ( Pythagoras ) → ∆BCD = 8 × 6 = 48.0 M1A1 OR 8×10sin0.6435 or ½×10×10sin((2)×0.927)=48. 24or 40or80 gets M1A0

Area sector BCD = ½ × 102 × ( 2 ) × their 0.9273 *M1 Expect 92.7(3). 46.4 gets M1

Area segment = 92.7(3) – 48 *A1 Expect 44.7(3). Might not appear until final calculation.

Area semi-circle ‒ segment = ½ × π × 82 − their ( 92.7 − 48 ) (

DM1 Dep. on previous M1A1 OR π × 82 − ½ × π × 82 + their 44.7 . )
Shaded area = 55.8 – 56.0 A1

Total: 6

© UCLES 2017 Page 9 of 14

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(i) ( b − 1) / ( a + 1) = 2 M1 OR Equation of AP is y − 1 = 2 ( x + 1) → y = 2 x + 3

b = 2a + 3 CAO A1 Sub x = a , y = b → b = 2a + 3

Total: 2

8(ii) AB 2 = 112 + 2 2 = 125 oe B1 Accept AB = √125

( a + 1) + ( b − 1) = 125 B1 FT FT on their 125.

2 2

( a + 1) + ( 2a + 2 ) = 125 M1 Sub from part (i) → quadratic eqn in a (or possibly in b → b 2 − 2b − 99 = 0 )

2 2

( 5 ) ( a 2 + 2a − 24 ) = 0 → eg ( a − 4 )( a + 6 ) = 0 M1 Simplify and attempt to solve

a = 4 or −6 A1

b = 11 or −9 A1 OR (4, 11), (‒6, ‒9)

If A0A0, SR1 for either (4, 11) or (‒6, ‒9)

Total: 6

© UCLES 2017 Page 10 of 14

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(i) ( 3x − 1) B1B1B1 First 2 marks dependent on correct ( ax + b )2 form. OR a = 3, b = −1, c = 5

2
+5
e.g. from equating coefs

Total: 3

9(ii) Smallest value of p is 1/3 seen. (Independent of (i)) B1 Allow p . 1 / 3 or p = 1 / 3 or 1/3 seen. But not in terms of x.

Total: 1

9(iii) y = ( 3x − 1) + 5 ⇒ 3x − 1 = ( ± ) y − 5 B1 FT
2 2 2
 1  1
OR y = 9  x −  + 5 ⇒ ( y − 5 ) / 9 =  x −  (Fresh start)
 3  3

x = ( ± ) ⅓ y − 5 + ⅓ OE B1 FT Both starts require 2 operations for each mark. FT for their values from part
(i)

f −1 ( x ) = ⅓ x − 5 + ⅓ OE domain is x ≥ their 5 B1B1 FT Must be a function of x and ± removed. Domain must be in terms of x.
Note: y − 5 expressed as y − 5 scores Max B0B0B0B1
[See below for general instructions for different starts]

Total: 4

9(iv) q < 5 CAO B1

Total: 1

Alt 9(iii) For start ( − ) + or ( − ) + (a≠ 0) ft for their a, b, c

For start ( − ) + ft but award only B1 for 3 correct operations
For start ( − ) + ft but award B1 for first2 operations correct and B1 for the next 3 operations correct

© UCLES 2017 Page 11 of 14

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(a)(i) Attempt to integrate V = (π ) ∫ ( y + 1) dy M1 Use of h in integral e.g. ∫ ( h + 1) = ½ h 2 + h is M0. Use of ∫ y 2 dx is M0

 y2  A1
= (π )  + y 
2 

 h2  A1 AG. Must be from clear use of limits 0→ h somewhere.

= π  + h
2 

Total: 3

10(ii) ∫ ( y + 1)
1/2
dy ALT ( )
6 ‒ ∫ x 2 − 1 dx M1 Correct variable and attempt to integrate

⅔ ( y + 1) *A1 Result of integration must be shown

3/2
oe ALT 6 ‒ ( ⅓ x3 − x ) CAO

8  1  DM1 Calculation seen with limits 0→3 for y. For ALT, limits are 1→2 and
⅔ [8 − 1] ALT 6 − [ − 1 −  − 1 ]
rectangle.
3  3 

14/3 ALT 6 ‒ 4/3 = 14/3 A1 16/3 from ⅔ × 8 gets DM1A0 provided work is correct up to applying
limits.

Total: 4

© UCLES 2017 Page 12 of 14

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(b) Clear attempt to differentiate wrt h M1 dV

Expect = π ( h + 1) . Allow h + 1. Allow h.
dh

Derivative = 4π SOI *A1

2 DM1
. Can be in terms of h
their derivative

2 1 A1
or or 0.159
4π 2π

Total: 4

© UCLES 2017 Page 13 of 14

 9709/13 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme May/June 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

11(i) f ' ( x ) = [( 4 x + 1) ÷ ½ ] [ ÷ 4] ( +c ) B1 B1 Expect ½ ( 4 x + 1)1/2 ( +c )

1/2

3 3 B1 FT 3
f '( 2) = 0 ⇒ Expect ½ ( 4 x + 1) . FT on their f ′ ( x ) = k ( 4 x + 1) + c . (i.e. c = −3k )
1/2 1/2
+ c = 0 ⇒ c = − (Sufficient) −
2 2 2

Total: 3

11(ii) f ″ ( 0 ) = 1 SOI B1

f ' ( 0 ) = 1 / 2 − 1½ = −1 SOI B1 FT Substitute x = 0 into their f ′(x) but must not involve c otherwise B0B0

f(0) = – 3 B1 FT FT for 3 terms in AP. FT for 3rd B1 dep on 1st B1. Award marks for the AP
method only.

Total: 3

11(iii) f ( x ) = ½ ( 4 x + 1)
3/ 2
÷ 3 / 2 ÷ 4 ]−[1½ x  ( + k ) B1 FT Expect (1/12) ( 4 x + 1)3/2 − 1½ x ( + k ) . FT from their f ′(x) but c numerical.
  B1 FT

−3 = 1 / 12 − 0 + k ⇒ k = −37 / 12 CAO M1A1 Sub x = 0, y = their f ( 0 ) into their f(x). Dep on cx & k present (c numerical)

27 37 23 A1
Minimum value = f(2) = −3− =− or − 3.83
12 12 6

Total: 5

© UCLES 2017 Page 14 of 14

 Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/12
Paper 1 Pure Mathematics March 2017
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the March 2017 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®,
Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is a registered trademark.

This document consists of 13 printed pages.

© UCLES 2017 [Turn over

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2017
PUBLISHED

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost
for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a
candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the
formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the
relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without the formula being
quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are several
B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more
steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on
from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only. A and
B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a
candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise
indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct
form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme
specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or
which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A
or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For
Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to
9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2017 Page 2 of 13

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2017
PUBLISHED

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the
detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is
allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case
where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a particular
circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part

question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question remain
unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through ” marks. MR is
not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in
accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular cases if agreed at the
coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1

penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2017 Page 3 of 13

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

1 (3k ) 2 − 4 × 2 × k M1 Attempt b 2 − 4 ac

9 k 2 − 8k > 0 soi Allow 9k 2 − 8k . 0 A1 Must involve correct inequality. Can be implied by correct answers

0, 8/9 soi A1

k < 0, k > 8/9 (or 0.889) A1 Allow (‒∞, 0) , (8/9, ∞)

Total: 4

Question Answer Marks Guidance

2  1 
3 B1 Seen or implied. Can be part of an expansion.
( )
2
5C2   2ax 2 soi
 ax 

1 M1A1 M1 for identifying relevant term and equating to 5, all correct. Ignore
10 × × 4a 2 = 5 soi extra x
a3

a = 8 cao A1

Total: 4

© UCLES 2017 Page 4 of 13

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

3(i) 1 3 B1
V= h oe
12

Total: 1

3(ii) dV 1 2 dh M1A1 Attempt differentiation. Allow incorrect notation for M. For A mark
= 4 (12v )
−2/3
= h or accept their letter for volume - but otherwise correct notation. Allow
dh 4 dV
V′

dh dh dV 4 DM1 d (V )
= × = × 20 soi Use chain rule correctly with = 20. Any equivalent formulation.
dt dV dt h2 dt
Accept non-explicit chain rule (or nothing at all)

 dh  4 A1
  = 2 × 20 = 0.8 or equivalent fraction
 dt  10

Total: 4

© UCLES 2017 Page 5 of 13

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

4(i) ABC = π / 2 − π / 7 = 5π / 14. CBD = π − 5π / 14 = 9π / 14 B1 AG Or other valid exact method.

Total: 1

4(ii) π ½ BC BC 8 M1
sin = or = or
7 8 2 π 5π
sin sin
7 14
2π
BC 2 = 82 + 82 − 2 ( 8)( 8) cos
7

BC = 6.94(2) A1

arc CD = their 6.94 ×9π / 14 M1 Expect 14.02(0)

arc CB = 8 × 2π / 7 M1 Expect 7.18(1)

perimeter = 6.94 + 14.02 + 7.18 = 28.1 A1

Total: 5

© UCLES 2017 Page 6 of 13

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

5(i) tan x = cos x → sin x = cos 2 x M1 Use tan = sin/cos and multiply by cos

sin x = 1 − sin 2 x M1 Use cos 2 x = 1 − sin 2 x

sin x = 0.6180 . Allow (‒1 + √5)/2 M1 Attempt soln of quadratic in sin x . Ignore solution ‒1.618. Allow x =
0.618

x-coord of A = sin −1 0.618 = 0.666 cao A1 Must be radians. Accept 0.212π

Total: 4

5(ii) EITHER (M1

x-coord of B is π − their 0.666 Expect 2.475(3). Must be radians throughout

y-coord of B is tan(their 2.475) or cos(their 2.475) M1

x = 2.48, y = ‒0.786 or ‒0.787 cao A1) Accept x = 0.788π

OR (M1
y-coord of B is – (cos or tan (their 0.666))

x-coord of B is cos −1 (their y) or π + tan −1 (their y) M1

x = 2.48, y = ‒0.786 or ‒0.787 A1) Accept x = 0.788π

Total: 3

© UCLES 2017 Page 7 of 13

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

6(i) BA = OA ‒ OB = ‒5i ‒ j + 2k B1 Allow vector reversed. Ignore label BA or AB

OA.BA = ‒10 ‒ 3 + 10 = ‒3 M1 soi by ±3

|OA|×|BA| = 22 + 32 + 52 × 52 + 12 + 22 M1 Prod. of mods for at least 1 correct vector or reverse.

+ / −3 M1
cos OAB =
38 × 30

OAB = 95.1º (or 1.66c ) A1

Total: 5

6(ii) 1 M1 Allow their moduli product from (i)

∆ OAB = 38 × 30 sin 95.1 . Allow ½ 38 × 74 sin 39.4
2

= 16.8 A1 cao but NOT from sin 84.9 (1.482c)

Total: 2

© UCLES 2017 Page 8 of 13

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

7(i) 3 1/2  B1B1 Expect 6 ( 4 x + 1)1/2 but can be unsimplified.

f ′(x) =  ( 4 x + 1)  [ 4]
 2 

f ″(x) = 6 × 1 / 2 × ( 4 x + 1) Expect 12 ( 4 x + 1)
−1/2 B1 −1/2
×4 but can be unsimplified. Ft from their f ′(x).

Total: 3

7(ii) f(2), f ′(2), kf ″(2) = 27, 18, 4k OR 12 B1B1 B1 Ft dependent on attempt at differentiation

27/18 = 18/4k oe OR kf ″(2) = 12 ⇒ k = 3 M1A1

Total: 5

© UCLES 2017 Page 9 of 13

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(i) ( )
gf(x) = 3 2 x 2 + 3 + 2 = 6 x 2 + 11 B1 AG

fg(x) = 2 ( 3x + 2 ) + 3 Allow 18 x 2 + 24 x + 11 B1 ISW if simplified incorrectly. Not retrospectively from (ii)

2

Total: 2

8(ii) y = 2 ( 3x + 2 ) + 3 ⇒ 3x + 2 = ( ± ) ( y − 3) / 2 M1
2
oe y −3
Subtract 3;divide by 2;square root. Or x/y interchanged. Allow
2
for 1st M

1 2 M1 Subtract 2; divide by 3; Indep. of 1st M1. Or x/y interchanged.

⇒ x = (±) ( y − 3) / 2 − oe
3 3

1 2 A1 Must be a function of x. Allow alt. method g −1f −1 ( x )

⇒ (fg)−1 ( x ) = ( x − 3) / 2 − oe
3 3 2
 2 x−3 2
OR 18  x +  + 3 ⇒ (fg) −1 ( x ) = −
 3 18 3

Solve their ( fg )
−1
( x) . 0 or attempt range of fg M1 Allow range . 3 for M only. Can be implied by correct answer or x >
11

Domain is x . 11 A1

Total: 5

© UCLES 2017 Page 10 of 13

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

8(iii) 6 ( 2 x ) + 11 = 2 ( 3x + 2 ) + 3 M1 Replace x with 2x in gf and equate to their fg(x) from (i). Allow
2 2

12 x 2 + 11 =

6 x 2 − 24 x = 0 oe A1 Collect terms to obtain correct quadratic expression.

x=0 , 4 A1 Both required

Total: 3

Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(i) dy B1B1 Numerical m

= 2 x − 2 . At x = 2, m = 2
dx

Equation of tangent is y − 2 = 2 ( x − 2 ) B1 Expect y = 2x ‒ 2

Total: 3

9(ii) Equation of normal y − 2 = −½ ( x − 2 ) M1 Through (2, 2) with gradient = ‒1/m . Expect y = −½ x + 3

x 2 − 2 x + 2 = −½ x + 3 → 2 x 2 − 3 x − 2 = 0 M1 Equate and simplify to 3-term quadratic

x = −½, y = 3¼ A1A1 Ignore answer of (2, 2)

Total: 4

© UCLES 2017 Page 11 of 13

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

9(iii) At x = −½, grad = 2 ( −½ ) − 2 = −3 B1 Ft their ‒½.

Equation of tangent is y − 3¼ = −3 ( x + ½ ) *M1 Through their B with grad their ‒3 (not m1 or m2). Expect
y = −3x + 7 / 4

2 x − 2 = −3 x + 7 / 4 DM1 Equate their tangents or attempt to solve simultaneous equations

x = 3 / 4, y = −½ A1 Both required.

Total: 4

Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(i) 2 x − 2 / x3 = 0 M1 Set = 0.

x 4 = 1 ⇒ x = 1 at A cao A1 Allow 'spotted' x = 1

Total: 2

10(ii) f ( x ) = x 2 + 1 / x 2 ( + c ) cao B1

189 M1 189
= 16 + 1 / 16 + c Sub (4, ). c must be present. Dep. on integration
16 16

c = ‒17/4 A1

Total: 3

© UCLES 2017 Page 12 of 13

9709/12 Cambridge International AS/A Level – Mark Scheme March 2017
PUBLISHED
Question Answer Marks Guidance

10(iii) x 2 + 1 / x 2 − 17 / 4 = 0 ⇒ 4 x 4 − 17 x 2 + 4 ( = 0 ) M1 Multiply by 4x 2 (or similar) to transform into 3-term quartic.

(4x 2
)(
− 1 x2 − 4 ) ( = 0) M1 Treat as quadratic in x 2 and attempt solution or factorisation.

x =½ , 2 A1A1 Not necessary to distinguish. Ignore negative values. No working

scores 0/4

Total: 4

10(iv) x 3 1 17 x B2,1,0 Mark final integral

∫ ( x 2 + x −2 − 17 / 4)dx = − −
3 x 4

(8 / 3 − 1 / 2 − 17 / 2 ) − (1 / 24 − 2 − 17 / 8) M1 Apply their limits from (iii) (Seen). Dep. on integration of at least 1

term of y

Area = 9 / 4 A1 Mark final answer. ∫ y 2 scores 0/4

Total: 4

© UCLES 2017 Page 13 of 13

 Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/11
Paper 1 October/November 2016
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2016 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

This document consists of 6 printed pages.

© UCLES 2016 [Turn over

 Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2016 9709 11

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost
for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a
candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the
formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the
relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without the formula being
quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are several
B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more
steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on
from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only. A and
B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a
candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise
indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct
form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme
specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or
which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A
or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For
Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to
9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2016
 Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2016 9709 11

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the
detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is
allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case
where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a particular
circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part

question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question remain
unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through ” marks. MR is
not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in
accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular cases if agreed at the
coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1

penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2016
 Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2016 9709 11

1 (i) ( x + 3)
2
−7 B1B1 For a = 3, b = −7
[2]

(ii) 1, −7 seen B1 x > 1 or x < −7

x > 1, x < −7 oe B1 Allow x - − 7, x . 1 oe
[2]
2
6 1 
2 8C6 ( 2 x )  3  soi B1 May be seen within a number of
 2x  terms
1
28 × 64 × oe (powers and factorials evaluated) B2,1,0 May be seen within a number of
4 terms
448 B1 Identified as answer
[4]

3 (i) 2rα + rα + 2r = 4.4r M1 At least 3 of the 4 terms required

α = 0.8 A1
[2]

½ ( 2r ) 0.8 − ½(r 2 )0.8 = 30

2
(ii) M1A1 Ft through on their α
2
(3 / 2)r × 0.8 = 30 → r = 5 A1
[3]

4 (i) C = (4, −2) B1

m AB = −1 / 2 → mCD = 2 M1 Use of m1m2 = −1 on their m AB
Equation of CD is y + 2 = 2 ( x − 4 ) oe M1 Use of their C and mCD in a line
equation
y = 2 x − 10 A1
[4]

AD 2 = (14 − 0 ) + ( −7 − ( −10 ) )
2 2
(ii) M1 Use their D in a correct method
AD = 14.3 or √205 A1
[2]

5 a (1 + r ) = 50 or
(
a 1− r2 ) = 50 B1
1− r

ar (1 + r ) = 30 or
(
a 1 − r3 ) = 30 + a B1 Or otherwise attempt to solve
1− r for r
Eliminating a or r M1 Any correct method
r =3/5 A1
a = 125 / 4 oe A1
S = 625 / 8 oe A1 Ft through on their r and a
[6] (−1 < r < 1)

© UCLES 2016
 Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2016 9709 11

( )
2
6 (i) cos 4 x = 1 − sin 2 x = 1 − 2sin 2 x + sin 4 x AG B1 Could be LHS to RHS or vice
[1] versa

(ii) (
8sin 4 x + 1 − 2sin 2 x + sin 4 x = 2 1 − sin 2 x ) M1 Substitute for cos 4 x and cos 2 x or
9sin 4 x = 1 A1 OR sub for sin 4 x → 3cos 2 x = 2
x = 35.3o (or any correct solution) A1 → cosx = ( ± ) 2 / 3
Any correct second solution from 144.7˚, 215.3˚, Allow the first 2 A1 marks for
324.7˚ A1 radians
The remaining 2 solutions A1 (0.616, 2.53, 3.76, 5.67)
[5]

7 (i) A = (½, 0) B1 Accept x = 0 at y = 0

[1]

1  (1 − 2 x )3/2 
(ii) ∫ (1 − 2 x ) 2 dx =   ( −2 ) 
 ÷ B1B1 May be seen in a single
 3 / 2  expression
 ( 2 x − 1)3  1
∫ ( 2 x − 1) dx =   [ ÷2 ]
2

 3 
B1B1 ∫
May use x dy , may expand
a

[0 − (−1 / 3)] − [0 − (−1 / 6)] M1 ( 2 x − 1)

2

1/6 A1 Correct use of their limits

[6]

8 (i) fg(x) = 5x M1A1 only

Range of fg is y . 0 oe B1 Accept y > 0
[3]

(ii) y = 4 / (5x + 2) ⇒ x = ( 4 − 2 y ) / 5 y oe M1 Must be a function of x

g −1 ( x ) = ( 4 − 2 x ) / 5 x oe A1
0, 2 with no incorrect inequality B1,B1
0 < x - 2 oe, c.a.o. B1
[5]

9 (i) XP = −4i + (p – 5)j + 2k B1 Or PX

[−4i + (p – 5)j + 2k].(pj + 2k) = 0 M1 Attempt scalar prod with OP/PO
and set = 0
p2 − 5 p + 4 = 0 A1 ( = 0 could be implied)
p = 1 or 4 A1
[4]

(ii) XP = −4i + 4j + 2k → │XP│ = 16 + 16 + 4 M1 Expect 6

Unit vector = 1 / 6 (−4i + 4j + 2k) oe A1
[2]

(iii) AG = −4i + 15j + 2k B1

XQ = λ AG soi M1
8 4
λ = 2/3 → XQ = − i + 10j + k A1
3 3 [3]

© UCLES 2016
 Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2016 9709 11

2
10 (i) 3z − = −1 ⇒ 3z 2 + z − 2 = 0 M1 Express as 3-term quad. Accept
z
x1/ 2 for z
x1/2 ( or z ) = 2 / 3 or − 1 A1 (OR
x = 4 / 9 only A1 3x − 1 = − x , 9 x 2 − 13x + 4 = 0
[3] M1, A1,A1 x = 4 / 9 )

3x3/2 2 x1/2
(ii) f ( x) = − ( +c ) B1B1
3 / 2 1/ 2
Sub x = 4, y = 10 10 = 16 − 8 + c ⇒ c=2 M1A1 c must be present
3/ 2 1/ 2
4 4 4
When x = , y = 2   − 4  +2 M1 Substituting x value from part
9 9 9 (i)
−2 / 27 A1
[6]

dy
= − ( x − 1) + 9 ( x − 5)
−2 −2
11 (i) M1A1 May be seen in part (ii)
dx
1 9
mtangent = − + = 2 B1
4 4
Equation of normal is y − 5 = −½ ( x − 3) M1 Through (3, 5) and with
m = −1 / mtangent
x = 13 A1
[5]

(ii) dy
( x − 5) = 9 ( x − 1)
2 2
B1 Set = 0 and simplify
dx
x − 5 = ( ± ) 3 ( x − 1) or (8) ( x 2 − x − 2 ) = 0 M1 Simplify further and attempt
solution
x = −1 or 2 A1
d2 y
= 2 ( x − 1) − 18 ( x − 5 )
−3 −3
2 B1 If change of sign used, x values
dx close to the roots must be used
and all must be correct
d2 y 1
When x = −1, 2
=− <0 MAX B1
dx 6
d2 y 8
When x = 2, 2 = >0 MIN B1
dx 3 [6]

© UCLES 2016
 Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/12
Paper 1 October/November 2016
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2016 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

This document consists of 8 printed pages.

© UCLES 2016 [Turn over

 Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2016 9709 12

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost
for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a
candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the
formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the
relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without the formula being
quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are several
B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more
steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on
from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only. A and
B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a
candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise
indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct
form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme
specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or
which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A
or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For
Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to
9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2016
 Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2016 9709 12

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the
detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is
allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case
where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a particular
circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part

question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question remain
unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through ” marks. MR is
not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error
in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular cases if agreed at the
coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1

penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2016
 Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2016 9709 12

1 1 B1 Correct integrand (unsimplified) without ÷4

( y ) = 8 ( 4 x + 1) 2 ÷ ½ ÷ 4 (+c) ÷4. Ignore c.
B1

Uses x = 2 and y = 5 M1 Substitution of correct values into an integrand

to find c.
c = −7 A1 y = 4 4x + 1 − 7
[4]

2 (i) 2sin2x = 6cos2x

tan2x = k M1 Expand and collect as far as tan2x = a constant
from sin ÷ cos soi
→ tan2x = 3 or k =3 A1 cwo
[2]

(ii) x = (tan −1 ( their k )) ÷ 2 M1 Inverse then ÷2. soi.

(71.6º or −108.4º) ÷2
x = 35.8º, −54.2º A1 A1 on 1st answer +/ − 90° if in given range but no
[3] extra solutions in the given range.
x = 0.624c, – 0.946c
x = 0.198πc, – 0.301πc Both SR A1A0

3 (i) 2 x 2 − 6 x + 5 > 13
2 x 2 − 6 x − 8(> 0) M1 Sets to 0 + attempts to solve
(x =) −1 and 4. A1 Both values required
x>4, x<−1 A1 Allow all recognisable notation.

[3]

(ii) 2x2 − 6 x + 5 = 2 x + k
→ 2 x2 − 8x + 5 − k ( = 0) M1* Equates and sets to 0.
Use of b ² − 4ac DM1 Use of discriminant
→ −3 A1
[3]
OR
dy
= 4x − 6
dx
dy
4x − 6 = 2 M1* Sets (their )=2
x=2 dx
x = 2→ y =1
Using their (2,1) in y = 2 x + k DM1 Uses their x = 2 and their y = 1
2
or y = 2 x − 6 x + 5
→ k = −3 A1
[3]

© UCLES 2016
 Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2016 9709 12

nx
4 Term in x =
2 B1 Could be implied by use of a numerical n.
nx 3n
(3 – 2x)(1 + + …) → 7 = −2
2 2 M1 (Their 2 terms in x) = 7
→ n=6
n ( n − 1)  x  2 A1
Term in x² =  
2 2 B1 May be implied by (their n) × (their n-1) ÷ 8.
3n ( n − 1) 2n
Coefficient of x 2 = −
8 2 M1 Considers 2 terms in x2.
21
=
4 A1 aef
[6]

5 A(a, 0) and B (0, b) B1 soi

a 2 + b 2 = 100 M1* Uses Pythagoras with their A & B.
a b
M has coordinates  ,  B1 on their A and B.
 2 2
M lies on 2 x + y = 10
b
→ a + = 10 M1* Subs into given line, using their M, to link a and
2
b.
Sub → a 2 + ( 20 − 2a ) = 100
2
DM1 Forms quadratic in a or in b.
2
 b
or  10 −  + b 2 = 100
 2
→ a = 6, b = 8. A1 cao
[6]

© UCLES 2016
 Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2016 9709 12

r r
6 (i) = sin 0.6 or = cos 0.97 M1 Or other valid alternative.
10 10
or BD = 200 − 200cos1.2 ( = 11.3)

r = 10 × 0.5646, r = 10 × sin 0.6,

r = 10 × cos 0.971 or r = ½ BD A1
→ r = 5.646 AG [2]

(ii) Major arc = 10(θ) (= 50.832) M1 θ = 2π – 1.2 or π – 1.2

θ = 2π – 1.2 (= 5.083) B1 Implied by 5.1
or C = 2π × 10, Minor arc = 1.2 × 10
Semicircle = 5.646π (= 17.737)
Major arc + semicircle
= 68.6 A1
[3]

(iii) Area of major sector

= ½102 (θ ) (= 254.159) M1 θ = 2π – 1.2 or π – 1.2
Area of triangle OBD
= ½10²sin1.2 (= 46.602) M1 Use of ½absinC or other complete method
Area = semicircle + sector + triangle
(= 50.1 + 254.2 + 46.6)
= 351 A1
[3]

dy −3
7 (i) = ×2 B1 B1for a single correct term (unsimplified)
dx ( 2 x − 1)2 without ×2.
B1
[2]

dy
(ii) e.g. Solve for = 0 is impossible. B1 Satisfactory explanation.
dx [1]

dy −6
(iii) If x = 2, = and y = 3 M1* Attempt at both needed.
dx 9
9
Perpendicular has m = M1* Use of m1m2 = −1 numerically.
6
3
→ y − 3 = ( x − 2) DM1 Line equation using (2, their 3) and their m.
2
Shows when x=0 then y=0 AG A1
[4]

dx
(iv) = −0.06
dt
dy dy dx 2
= × → − × −0.06 = 0.04 M1 A1
dt dx dt 3 [2]

© UCLES 2016
 Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2016 9709 12

8 (a) (i) 200 + (15 − 1)( + / −5 ) M1 Use of nth term with a = 200, n = 14 or 15and
d = +/– 5.
= 130 A1
[2]

n
(ii)  400 + ( n − 1)( + / −5 )  = (3050) M1 Use of Sn a=200 and d = +/– 5.
2
→ 5n 2 − 405n + 6100 (= 0) A1
→ 20 A1
[3]

(b) (i) ar² , ar5 → r=½ M1 A1 Both terms correct.

=
(
63 a 1 − ½
6
) → a = 16 M1 A1 Use of Sn = 31.5 with a numeric r.
2 ½ [4]

16
(ii) Sum to infinity = = 32 B1 for their a and r with │r│< 1.
½ [1]
JJJG JJJG
9 (i) −4 – 6 – 6 = −16 M1 Use of x1x2 + y1y2 + z1z2 on their OA & OB
JJJG JJJG
x12 + y12 + z12 or x22 + y22 + z22 M1 Modulus once on either their OA or OB
JJJG JJJG
3 × 7 × cos θ = − 16 M1 All linked using their OA & OB
→ θ = 139.6º or 2.44c or 0.776π A1
[4]

0
JJJG  
(ii) AC = c – a =  8  B1
6
 
Magnitude = 10
0  0 
15    
Scaling → ×  8  =  12  M1 For 15 × their unit vector.
their10     A1
6  9 
[3]

2 + 2p
 
(iii) 6 − 2p B1 Single vector soi by scalar product.
 5− p 
  JJJG JJJG JJJG
→ –2(2 +2p) + 3(6 – 2p) +6(5 – p)= 0 M1 Dot product of (p OA + OC ) and OB = 0.
→ p =2¾ A1
[3]

© UCLES 2016
 Page 8 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2016 9709 12

10 (i) 3 ⩽ f(x) ⩽ 7 B1 Identifying both 3 and 7 or correctly stating one

inequality.
B1 Completely correct statement.
[2] NB 3 ⩽ x ⩽ 7 scores B1B0

(ii)
B1* One complete oscillation of a sinusoidal curve
between 0 and π.
DB1 All correct, initially going downwards, all above
[2] f(x)=0

(iii) 5-2sin2x = 6 → sin2x = −½ M1 Make sin2x the subject.

7π 11π
→ 2x = or
6 6
7π 11π 3π
→ x= or for − 1st answer from sin2x = −½ only, if
12 12 2
0.583π or 0.917π in given range
π + 0.524 2π − 0.524
or A1 A1
2 2 [3]
c c
1.83 or 2.88 SR A1A0 for both.

π
(iv) k= B1
4 [1]

(v) 2sin2x = 5 – y → sin2x = ½(5 – y) M1 Makes ±sin2x the subject soi by final answer.
M1 Correct order of operations including correctly
dealing with “ – “.

(g−1(x)) = ½ sin−1
(5 − x )
A1 Must be a function of x
2 [3]

© UCLES 2016
 Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/13
Paper 1 October/November 2016
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2016 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level
components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

This document consists of 7 printed pages.

© UCLES 2016 [Turn over

 Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2016 9709 13

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost
for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a
candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the
formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the
relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without the formula being
quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a
correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are several
B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more
steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on
from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only. A and
B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from incorrect
working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a
candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise
indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct
form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme
specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or
which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A
or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For
Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to
9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© UCLES 2016
 Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2016 9709 13

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF/OE Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable) / Or Equivalent

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the
detailed working leading to the result is valid)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error is
allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

SOI Seen or implied

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case
where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a particular
circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part

question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question remain
unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through ” marks. MR is
not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in
accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular cases if agreed at the
coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA –1

penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© UCLES 2016
 Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2016 9709 13

1 kx 2 − 3 x = x − k ⇒ kx 2 − 4 x + k ( = 0 ) M1 Eliminate y and rearrange into 3-

term quad
( −4 ) − 4 ( k )( k ) soi
2
M1 b 2 − 4 ac .

k > 2 , k < −2 cao Allow (2, ∞) etc. Allow 2<k<‒k A1

[3]

2 ( + / − ) 20 × 33 ( x3 ) , ( )
10a 3 x 3 soi B1B1 Each term can include x3
−540 + 10a 3 = 100 oe M1 Must have 3 terms and include
a 3 and 100
a=4 A1
[4]

3
6
4sin 2 x = 6cos 2 x ⇒ tan 2 x =
4
(
or 4sin 2 x = 6 1 − sin 2 x ) M1 ( )
Or 4 1 − cos 2 x = 6cos 2 x
[tan x = (±)1.225 or sin x = (±)0.7746 or cos x = (±)0.6325]
x= 50.8 (Allow 0.886 (rad)) A1 Or any other angle correct
Another angle correct A1 Ft from 1st angle (Allow radians)
All 4 angles correct in degrees
x = 50.8°, 129.2°, 230.8°, 309.2° A1
[ 0.886, 2.25/6, 4.03, 5.40 (rad) ] [4]

4 f ′ ( x ) = 3 x 2 − 6 x − 9 soi B1
Attempt to solve f ′ ( x ) = 0 or f ' ( x ) > 0 or f ' ( x ) . 0 soi M1
( 3)( x − 3)( x + 1) or 3,−1 seen or 3 only seen A1 With or without
equality/inequality signs
Least possible value of n is 3. Accept n = 3. Accept n . 3 A1 Must be in terms of n
[4]

π 
5 (i) cos 0.9 = OE / 6 or = sin  − 0.9  oe M1 Other methods possible
 2 
OE = 6 cos 0.9 = 3.73 oe AG A1
[2]

(ii) Use of (2π − 1.8 ) or equivalent method M1 Expect 4.48

Area of large sector = ½ × 6 × ( 2π − 1.8 ) oe
2
M1 Or π 62 − ½6 21.8 . Expect 80.70
Expect 12.52
Area of small sector ½ × 3.732 × 1.8 M1 Other methods possible
Total area = 80.7(0) + 12.5(2) = 93.2 A1
[4]

2+ x
6 (i) = n ⇒ x = 2n − 2 B1 No MR for (½(2+n),
2 ½(m – 6))
m+ y
= −6 ⇒ y = −12 − m B1 Expect ( 2n − 2, −12 − m)
2 [2]

© UCLES 2016
 Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2016 9709 13

(ii) Sub their x, y into y = x + 1 → −12 − m = 2n − 2 + 1 M1* Expect m + 2n = −11

m+6
= −1 oe Not nested in an equation B1 Expect m − n = −8
2−n
Eliminate a variable DM1
m = −9, n = −1 A1A1 Note: other methods possible
[5]

7 (i) AB.AC = 3 − 2 − 1 = 0 hence perpendicular or 90˚ B1 3 ‒ 2 ‒ 1 or sum of prods etc

must be seen
AB.AD = 3 + 4 − 7 = 0 hence perpendicular or 90˚ B1 Or single statement: mutually
AC.AD = 1 − 8 + 7 = 0 hence perpendicular or 90˚ AG B1 perpendicular or 90˚ seen at least
[3] once .

Area ABC = (½ ) 32 + 12 + 12 × 12 + ( −2 ) + ( −1)

2 2
(ii) M1
= ½ 11 × 6 A1 Expect ½ 66
Vol. = ⅓× their ∆ABC × 12 + 4 2 + ( −7 )
2
M1
1
= 66 × 66 = 11 A1 Not 11.0
6 [4]

( 2 x + 3)
2
8 (i) +1 Cannot score retrospectively in (iii) B1B1B1 For a = 2, b = 3, c = 1
[3]

(ii) g ( x ) = 2 x + 3 cao B1 In (ii),(iii) Allow if from

[1]  3
2
4  x +  +1
 2

y = ( 2 x + 3) + 1 ⇒ 2 x + 3 = ( ± ) y − 1 or ft from (i)
2
(iii) M1 Or with x/y transposed.
1 3
x = (±) y − 1 − or ft from (i) M1 Or with x/y transposed Allow
2 2 sign errors.
1 3
( fg )−1 ( x ) = x − 1 − cao Note alt. method g−1f −1 A1 Must be a function of x. Allow y
2 2 = ....
Domain is ( x ) > 10 B1 Allow (10, ∞), 10 < x < ∞ etc.
[4] but not with y or f or g involved.
Not ⩾10
ALT. method for first 3 marks:
Trying to obtain g −1  f −1 ( x )  *M1
g −1 = ½ ( x − 3 ) , f −1 = x − 1 DM1 Both required
1 3
A1 for x −1 − A1
2 2

© UCLES 2016
 Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2016 9709 13

6 12
9 (a) = M1
1− r 1+ r
1
r= A1
3
S =9 A1
[3]

13
(b)  2cos θ + 12sin 2θ  = 52 M1* Use of correct formula for sum of
2 
AP
2cos θ + 12(1 − cos ²θ ) = 8 → 6cos 2θ − cos θ − 2 ( = 0 ) DM1 Use s 2 = 1 − c 2 & simplify to 3-
term quad
cos θ = 2 / 3 or −1 / 2 soi A1
Accept 0.268π, 2π/3. SRA1 for
θ = 0.841 , 2.09 Dep on previous A1 A1A1 48.2˚, 120˚ Extra solutions in
[5] range –1

dy 2 1  3  2 1
10 (i) at x = a 2 , = 2 + 2 or 2a −2 + a −2  = 2 or 3a −2  B1 2
+ 2 or 2a −2 + a −2 seen
dx a a  a  a a
anywhere in (i)
y −3=
3
a 2 ( ) a
3
a
3
x − a 2 or y = 2 x + c → 3 = 2 a 2 + c M1 Through ( a 2 ,3) & with their
grad as f(a)
3
y= 2
x or 3a −2 x cao A1
a [3]

2 x½ ax −½
(ii) ( y) = + (+ c) B1B1
a ½ −½
sub x = a 2 , y = 3 into ∫ dy / dx M1 c must be present. Expect
½ 3=4‒2+c
4x
c=1 (y= − 2ax −½ + 1 ) A1
a [4]

4 1
(iii) sub x = 16, y = 8 → 8 = × 4 − 2a × + 1 *M1 Sub into their y
a 4
a 2 + 14a − 32 ( = 0 ) A1
a=2 A1 Allow ‒16 in addition
A = (4, 3), B = (16, 8) AB 2 = 122 + 52 → AB = 13 DM1A1
[5]

© UCLES 2016
 Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2016 9709 13

dy
= −k ( kx − 3) + k = 0 Must contain ( kx − 3) + other
−2 −2
11 (i) Attempt diffn. and equate to 0 *M1
dx
term(s)
( kx − 3) = 1 or k 3 x 2 − 6k 2 x + 8k ( = 0 )
2
DM1 Simplify to a quadratic
2 4
x= or *A1*A1 Legitimately obtained
k k
d2 y
= 2k 2 ( kx − 3)
−3
B1 Ft must contain Ak 2 ( kx − 3)
−3
dx 2
2 d2 y where A>0
When x = ,
k dx 2
(
= −2 k 2 < 0 ) MAX All previous DB1 Convincing alt. methods (values
either side) must show which
4 d2 y
When x = ,
k dx 2
( )
= 2k 2 > 0 MIN working correct
DB1
values used & cannot use
x =3/ k

[7]

2
V = (π ) ∫ ( x − 3) + ( x − 3)  dx
−1
(ii) *M1 Attempt to expand y² and then
 
integrate
= (π ) ∫[( x − 3) + ( x − 3) + 2 ]dx
−2 2
A1
 ( x − 3 )3 
= (π ) − ( x − 3) + ( +2 x ) Condone missing 2x
−1
A1 Or
 3   x3 
 − ( x − 3 ) −1
+ − 3x 2 + 9 x + 2 x 
 3 
 1 1 
= (π ) 1 − + 4 −  − 9 + 0   DM1 Apply limits 0→2
 3 3 
= 40π / 3 oe or 41.9 A1 2 missing → 28π / 3 scores
[5] M1A0A1M1A0

© UCLES 2016
 Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/11
Paper 1 May/June 2016
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2016 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®,
Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

This document consists of 7 printed pages.

© UCLES 2016 [Turn over

 Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2016 9709 11

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are not lost for
numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually sufficient for a
candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to quote a formula; the
formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant
quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without the formula being quoted
obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained. Accuracy
marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more ‘method’ steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are several
B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a particular M or B
mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more
steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on
from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only. A and
B marks are not given for fortuitously ‘correct’ answers or results obtained from incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2 / 1 / 0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

• The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether a
candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless otherwise
indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working following a correct
form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the scheme
specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f., or
which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated above, an A
or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For
Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to
9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

 Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2016 9709 11

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that the detailed
working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no ‘follow through’ from a previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a case where
some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR–1 A penalty of MR–1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or part
question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question remain unaltered.
In this case all A and B marks then become ‘follow through ’ marks. MR is not applied when
the candidate misreads his own figures – this is regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR–2
penalty may be applied in particular cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA–1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The PA–1
penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

 Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2016 9709 11

6
 3 
1 x− 
 2x 
 −3 
Term is 6C3 × x³ ×   ³ B1 B1 B1 for Bin coeff. B1 for rest.
 2x 
→ −67.5 oe B1
[3]

2 3sin²θ = 4cosθ – 1
Uses s² + c² = 1
→ 3c² + 4c – 4 (= 0) M1 A1 Equation in cosθ only. All terms on
2 one side of (=)
(→ c = or – 2)
3
→ θ = 48.2° or 311.8° A1 A1 For 360° − 1st answer.
0.841, 5.44 rads, A1 only
(0.268π, 1.73π) [4]

12
3 x= − 2.
y²
Vol = (π) × ∫ x² dy
 −144 48  M1 Ignore omission of π at this stage
→ + 4y + 
 3y³ y 3 × A1 Attempt at integration
Un-simplified

Limits 1 to 2 used A1 only from correct integration

→ 22π
[5]

dy −½
4 (i) = 2 − 8 ( 3x + 4 )
dx
dy
(x = 0, → = −2 )
dx
dy dy dx dy
= × → −0.6 M1A1 Ignore notation. Must be × 0.3
dt dx dt [2] dx

 
 8 3x + 4 
(ii) y = {2 x} − ÷ 3 ( +c ) B1 B1 No need for +c.
 1 
 2 
4
x = 0, y = → c = 12. M1 A1 Uses x, y values after ∫ with c
3 [4]

5 (i) A = 2 y × 4 x ( = 8 xy ) B1
10 y + 12 x = 480 B1
B1 answer given
→ A = 384x – 9.6x² [3]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

 Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2016 9709 11

dA
(ii) = 384 − 19.2x B1
dx
= 0 when x = 20 M1 Sets to 0 and attempt to solve oe
Might see completion of square

→ x = 20, y = 24. A1 Needs both x and y

[3] Trial and improvement B3.

b −384
Uses x = − = = 20 , M1, A1
2a −19.2
y = 24 , A1
From graph: B1 for x = 20, M1, A1 for
y = 24

6 (a) y = 2x² − 4x + 8 M1
Equates with y = mx and selects a, b, c M1 Equate + solution or use of dy/dx
Uses b ² = 4ac A1 Use of discriminant
→ m = 4 or −12. [3] for both.

(b) (i) f(x) = x² + ax + b M1 Any valid method allow

Eqn of form ( x − 1)( x − 9 ) ( x + 1)( x + 9 ) for M1
→ a = −10, b = 9 A1 must be stated
(or using 2 sim eqns M1 A1) [2]

(ii) 1
Calculus or x = (1 + 9) by symmetry M1 Any valid method
2
→ (5, −16) A1
[2]

7 (i) CD = rcosθ, BD = r – rsinθ oe B1 B1

1 allow degrees but not for last B1
Arc CB = r ( π – θ) oe B1
2
1
→ P = rcosθ + r – rsinθ + r ( π – θ) oe B1 sum – assuming trig used
2
[4]

1 1 1
(ii) Sector = .5².( π – 0.6) (12.135) M1 Uses r²θ
2 2 2
1 1
Triangle = .5cos0.6.5sin0.6 (5.825) M1 Uses bh with some use of trig.
2 2
→ Area = 6.31 A1
1
(or circle − triangle – sector) [3]
4

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

 Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2016 9709 11

4
8 y = 3x −
x
dy 4
= 3+ B1
dx x²
m of AB = 4 B1
Equate → x = ±2
→ C (2, 4) and D (−2, −4) M1 A1 Equating + solution.

→ M (0, 0) or stating M is the origin B1 on their C and D

m of CD = 2
1
Perpendicular gradient (= − ) M1 Use of m1m2 = −1, must use mCD
2 A1 (not m = 4)
1
→y=− x [7]
2

9 (a) a = 50, ar² = 32 B1 seen or implied

4 4
→r= (allow – for M mark) M1 Finding r and use of correct S∞
5 5 formula
→ S∞ = 250 A1 Only if |r| < 1
[3]

(b) (i) 2sinx, 3cosx, (sinx + 2cosx).

3c – 2s = (s + 2c) – 3c M1 Links terms up with AP, needs one
(or uses a, a + d, a + 2d) expression for d.
4
→ 4c = 3s → t = M1 A1 Arrives at t = k. ag
3 [3]
4
SC uses t = to show
3
8 9 10
u1 = , u2 = , u3 = , B1 only
5 5 5

3 4
(ii) →c= ,s= or calculator x = 53.1º M1
5 5
→ a = 1.6, d = 0.2 M1 Correct method for both a and d.

→ S20 = 70 A1 (Uses Sn formula)

[3]

 2 5 2



  


  


  
10 (i) OA =  1  , OB =  −1 , OC =  6 
 −2  k   −3 
     

1
10 – 1 – 2k = 0 → k = 4 M1 A1 Use of scalar product = 0.
2 [2]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

 Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2016 9709 11

 3 



  
(ii) AB =  −2  , B1
 k + 2
 




OC = 7 (seen or implied) B1
Correct method. Both correct.
3² + (−2)² + (k + 2)² = 49 M1 A1



→ k = 4 or −8 [4] Condone sign error in AB


(iii) OA = 3
 6






  



OD = 3 OA =  3  and OE = 2 M1 A1 Scaling from magnitudes / unit vector
 −6  – oe.
 
 4



  
OC =  12 
 −6 
 
 −2 









  
DE = OE − OD =  9  , M1 Correct vector subtraction.
 0
 
→ Magnitude of √85. A1
[4]

π π
11 (i) f : x → 4sinx – 1 for − ⩽x⩽ B1 –5 and 3
2 2
Range −5 ⩽ f(x) ⩽ 3 B1 Correct range
[2]

1
(ii) 4s – 1 = 0 → s = → x = 0.253 M1 A1 Makes sinx subject. Degrees M1 A0,
4 (14.5o)
x = 0 → y = −1 B1
[3]

(iii) B1 Shape from their range in (i)

B1 Flattens, curve.
[2]

1 1
(iv) range − π ⩽ f−1(x) ⩽ π B1
2 2
domain −5 ⩽ x ⩽ 3 B1 on part (i) (only for 2 numerical
values)
 x +1
Inverse f−1(x) = sin−1   M1 A1 Correct order of operations
 4  [4]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

 Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/12
Paper 1 May/June 2016
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2016 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®,
Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

This document consists of 8 printed pages.

© UCLES 2016 [Turn over

 Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2016 9709 12

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more "method" steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only.
A and B marks are not given for fortuitously "correct" answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

 Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2016 9709 12

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no "follow through" from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only - often written by a ‘fortuitous' answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

part question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question
remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become "follow through √"
marks. MR is not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is
regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR–2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

 Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2016 9709 12

10
1 f : x ⟼10 – 3x, g : x ⟼ ,
3 − 2x

ff(x) = 10 − 3 (10 − 3x ) B1 Correct unsimplified expression

10
gf(2) = (= −2) B1 Correct unsimplified expression
3 − 2 (10 − 3 ( 2 ) ) with 2 in for x

x=2 B1
[3]

8
2 f ′( x) =
( 5 − 2 x )2
−1
8(5 − 2x )
f(x) = ÷ −2 (+c) B1 Correct without (÷ by −2)
−1 B1 An attempt at integration (÷ by−2)

Uses x = 2, y = 7, M1 Substitution of correct values into

an integral to find c
c=3 A1
[4]







3 OA = 2i – 5j – 2k and OB = 4i – 4j + 2k.







AB = 2i + j +4k or AC = 4i + 2j + 8k B1













OC = OA + AC = 6i −3j + 6k M1 correct method for OC

OR

 2  x − 4  B1
   
1 =  y + 4 ,
 4  z − 2 
   
 x  6  M1



    
OC =  y  =  −3 
z  6 
   
OR













OB − OA = OC − OB









 B1
∴ OC = 2OB − OA
8  2 6
      M1
=  −8  −  −5  =  −3 
 4   −2   6 
     










 M1 Divides by their mod of their OC
Unit vector = (Their OC ) ÷ (Mod their OC )
A1 Correct unsimplified expression
= (6i −3j + 6k) ÷ 9 [4]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

 Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2016 9709 12

6
 2
4 (i) x− 
 x
Term is 6C3 × (−2)3 = (−)160 B1 ±160 seen anywhere
−160 B1
[2]
6
 3  2
(ii)  2 + 2  x − 
 x  x
Term in x = 6C2(−2)² x2
2
B1 ±60 seen anywhere
= 60 (x2) B1

Term independent of x:
= 2 × (their−160) + 3 × (their 60) M1 Using 2 products correctly
−140 A1
[4]

5 (i) π  AC  π  π  2x
tan   = or cos   = sin  = B1 Either trig ratio
3 2x  3  6  AB
→ AC = 2√3x or AB = 4x

AM = 13 x 2 , 13 x,3.61x M1A1 Complete method.

[3]

ˆ )= x
(ii) tan ( MAC M1 “Their AC” must be f(x),
Their AC
( )
ˆ ≠θ .
MAC

1 1 π
θ= π – tan−1 AG A1 Justifies and links MAC & θ
6 2√ 3 [2] 6

6 (i) PT = r tanα B1
r
QT = OT – OQ = −r
cosα
or r ² + r ²tan²α − r B1

Perimeter = sum of the 3 parts including rα B1

[3]

(ii) π
Area of triangle = ½ × 10 × 10 tan M1 Correct formula used, 50 3,86.6
3
50π
Area of sector = ½ × 10² × ⅓π M1 Correct formula used, , 52.36
3
Shaded region has area 34 (2sf) A1
[3]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

 Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2016 9709 12

7 (i) 1 + cosθ 1 − cosθ 4

− ≡
1 − cosθ 1 + cosθ sinθ tanθ

LHS =
( )
1 + 2 c + c ² − 1 − 2c + c 2
M1 Attempt at combining fractions.
(1 − c )(1 + c )
4c
= A1 A1 A1 for numerator. A1 denominator
1 − c2
4c
= Essential step for award of A1
s²
4
= AG A1
ts [4]

(ii)  1 + cosθ 1 − cosθ 

sinθ  −  =3. Uses part (i) to eliminate “s”
 1 − cosθ 1 + cosθ  correctly.
4 4 M1
→s× = 3 (→ t = )
ts 3
θ = 53.1° and 233.1° A1 A1 for 180° + 1st answer.
[3]

8 A (0, 7), B (8, 3) and C (3k, k)

(i) m of AB is −½ oe. B1 Using A,B or C to get an equation

Eqn of AB is y = −½x + 7 M1 Using C or A,B in the equation
Let x = 3k, y = k M1
k = 2.8 oe A1

OR

7−k 3− k
= M1A1 Using A,B & C to equate gradients
0 − 3k 8 − 3k

→ 20k = 56 → k = 2.8 DM1A1 Simplifies to a linear or 3 term

quadratic = 0.
OR

7−k 7−3
= M1A1 Using A,B and C to equate
0 − 3k 0 − 8
gradients
→ 20k = 56 → k = 2.8 DM1A1 Simplifies to a linear or 3 term
[4] quadratic = 0.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

 Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2016 9709 12

(ii) M(4, 5) B1 anywhere in (ii)

Perpendicular gradient = 2. M1 Use of m1m2=−1 soi
Perp bisector has eqn y − 5 = 2 ( x − 4 ) M1 Forming eqn using their M and
their “perpendicular m”
Let x = 3k, y = k
3
k = oe A1
5
OR

(0 – 3k)2 + (7 – k)2 = (8 – 3k)2 + (3 – k)2 M1A1 Use of Pythagoras.

–14k +49 = 73 – 54k → 40k = 24 → k = 0.6 DM1A1 Simplifies to a linear or 3 term

[4] quadratic = 0.

9 (i) (a) a + ( n − 1) d = 10 + 29×2 M1 Use of nth term of an AP with

a=±10, d=±2, n=30 or 29
= 68 A1 Condone – 68 → 68
[2]

(b) ½n(20 + 2(n−1)) = 2000 or 0 M1 Use of Sn formula for an AP with

a=±10, d=±2 and equated to either
0 or 2000.
→ 2n² + 18n – 4000 = 0 oe A1 Correct 3 term quadratic = 0.
(n=) 41 A1
[3]

11
(ii) r = 1.1, oe B1 e.g. , 110%
10

Uses S30 =
(
10 1.130 − 1 ) (= 1645) M1 Use of Sn formula for a GP, a=±10,
1.1 − 1 n=30.
2000 − 1645
Percentage lost = × 100 DM1 Fully correct method for % left
2000 with “their 1645”
= 17.75 A1 allow 17.7 or 17.8.
[4]

8
10 y= + 2 x.
x

dy
(i) = −8x−2 + 2 B1 unsimplified ok
dx

d²y
= 16x−3 B1 unsimplified ok
dx ²
4 x³
∫y²dx = –64x −1 oe+ 32x oe + oe (+c) 3 × B1 B1 for each term – unsimplified ok
3 [5]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

 Page 8 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2016 9709 12

dy
(ii) sets to 0 → x = ±2 M1 Sets to 0 and attempts to solve
dx
→M(2, 8) A1 Any pair of correct values A1
Other turning point is (−2, −8) A1 Second pair of values A1

d²y d²y
If x = −2, <0 M1 Using their if kx−3 and x< 0
dx ² dx ²

∴Maximum A1
[5]
(iii) Vol = π × [ part (i) ] from 1 to 2 M1 Evidence of using limits 1&2 in
their integral of y² (ignore π)
220π
,73.3π, 230 A1
3 [2]
11 f : x ⟼ 6x – x² − 5
(i) 6x – x² − 5 ⩽ 3
→ x² − 6x + 8 ⩾ 0 M1 ( )
± 6 x − x 2 − 8 =,
,  0 and
attempts to solve
→ x = 2, x = 4 A1 Needs both values whether =2, <2,
>2
x ⩽ 2, x ⩾ 4 A1 Accept all recognisable notation.
condone < and/or > [3]
(ii) Equate mx + c and 6x – x² − 5 M1 Equates, sets to 0.
Use of “ b ² − 4ac " DM1 Use of discriminant with values of
a.b.c independent of x.
4c = m ² − 12m + 16. AG A1 = (0) must appear before last line.

OR

dy 6−m dy
= 6 − 2x = m → x =   M1 Equates to m and rearrange
dx  2  dx

2
6−m 6−m 6−m
m  + c = 6 −  −5 M1 Equates mx + c and 6x – x² − 5
 2   2   2  and substitutes for x

4c = m ² − 12m + 16. AG A1
[3]
(iii) 6x – x² − 5 = 4 − (x – 3)² B1 B1 4 B1 – (x – 3)2 B1
[2]
(iv) k = 3. B1 for “ b”.
[1]
(v) g−1(x) = 4− x + 3 M1 A1 Correct order of operations.
[2] ± 4 − x + 3 M1A0
x − 4 + 3 M1A0
4 − y + 3 M1A0

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

 Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MATHEMATICS 9709/13
Paper 1 May/June 2016
MARK SCHEME
Maximum Mark: 75

Published

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of the
examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not indicate the
details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began, which would have
considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner Report for
Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2016 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®,
Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

This document consists of 7 printed pages.

© UCLES 2016 [Turn over

 Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2016 9709 13

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on
from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only. A
and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

 Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2016 9709 13

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

part question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question
remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through ”
marks. MR is not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is
regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

 Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2016 9709 13

3
1
( )
2
1 5C2   3x 2 B1 Can be seen in expansion
 x
10 (×1) × 32 B1 Identified as leading to answer
90 (x) B1
[3]

2 (π ) ∫ ( x3 + 1) dx M1 Attempt to resolve y 2 and attempt

to integrate
 x4 
(π )  + x A1
4 
6π or 18.8 DM1A1 Applying limits 0 and 2.
[4] (Limits reversed: Allow M mark
and allow A mark if final answer is
6π)

3 (i) 6 + k = 2 → k = −4 B1
[1]

6 x3 4 −2 k −2
(ii) ( y) = − x (+c) B1B1 x
ft on their k. Accept +
3 −2 −2
9=2+2+c c must be present M1 Sub (1,9) with numerical k. Dep on
attempt ∫
( y ) = 2 x3 + 2 x −2 + 5 A1 Equation needs to be seen
[4] Sub (2, 3) →c = –13½ scores M1A0

3 + 2d 3 + 12d 3 + 12d
4 r= or or r 2 = B1 1 correct equation in r and d only is
3 3 + 2d 3 sufficient

( 3 + 2d )2 = 3 ( 3 + 12d ) oe M1 Eliminate r or d using valid method

OR
sub 2d = 3r – 3

( 4) d ( d − 6) = 0 DM1 Attempt to simplify and solve

OR quadratic
3r 2 = 18r − 15 → ( r − 1)( r − 5 )

d =6 A1 Ignore d = 0 or r = 1
A1 Do not allow −5 or ±5
r =5
[5]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

 Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2016 9709 13

dy −2
5 = [8] + [−2] [ ( 2 x − 1) ] B2,1,0
dx
2
= 0 → 4 ( 2 x − 1) = 1 oe eg 16 x 2 − 16 x + 3 = 0 M1 Set to zero, simplify and attempt to
solve soi
1 3
x= and A1 Needs both x values. Ignore
4 4 y values
d2 y −3
ft to k ( 2 x − 1)
−3
2
= 8 ( 2 x − 1) B1 * where k > 0
dx
1 d2 y
When x = , ( = −64 ) and/or < 0 MAX DB1 Alt. methods for last 3 marks
4 dx 2 (values either side of 1/4 & 3/4)
3 d2y must indicate which x-values and
When x = , ( = 64 ) and/or > 0 MIN DB1
cannot use x = 1/2. (M1A1A1)
4 dx 2 [7]

6 BAC = sin −1 (3 / 5) or cos −1 (4 / 5) or tan −1 (3 / 4) B1 Accept 36.8(7)º

−1 −1 −1
ABC = sin (4 / 5) or cos (3 / 5) or tan (4 / 3) B1 Accept 53.1(3)º

ACB = π / 2 (Allow 90º) B1

Shaded area = ∆ABC – sectors (AEF + BEG +
CFG) M1
1 B1
∆ABC = × 4 × 3 oe
2
1
Sum sectors = 32 0.6435 +
2
)
2 2
2 0.9273 + 1 1.5708] M1
π
OR 3236.8 ( 7 ) + 2253.1( 3) + 1290 
360  
6 – 5.536 = 0.464 A1
[7]

dy
7 = 2 x − 5 x1/ 2 + 5 B1
dx
dy
= 2 B1
dx
2 x − 5 x1/2 + 5 = 2 M1 Equate their dy/dx to their 2 or ½.
2 x − 5 x1/ 2 + 3 ( = 0 ) or equivalent 3-term
quadratic A1
Attempt to solve for x1/2 e.g.
( 2x 1/ 2
)( )
− 3 x1/2 − 1 = 0 DM1 Dep. on 3-term quadratic
x1/2 = 3 / 2 and 1 A1 ALT
x = 9 / 4 and 1 A1 5 x½ = 2 x + 3 → 25 x = ( 2 x + 3)
2

[7]
4 x 2 − 13 x + 9 ( = 0 )
x = 9 / 4 and 1

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

 Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2016 9709 13

8 (i) 3sin 2 x − cos 2 x + cos x = 0 M1 Multiply by cos x

Use s 2 = 1 − c 2 and simplify to 3-term quad M1 Expect 4c 2 − c − 3 = 0
cos x = −3 / 4 and 1 A1

x = 2.42 (allow 0.77 π ) or 0 (extra in range A1A1 SC1 for 0.723 (or 0.23π), π
max 1) [5] following 4c 2 + c − 3 = 0

(ii) 2x = 2π −their 2.42 or 360 – 138.6 B1 Expect 2x = 3.86

x = 1.21 (0.385π), 1.93 (0.614/5π), 0, π (3.14) B1B1 Any 2 correct B1. Remaining 2
(extra max 1) [3] correct B1. SCB1for all 69.3,
110.7, 0, 180 (degrees)
SCB1 for .361, π/2, 2.78 after
4c 2 + c − 3 = 0

 −1 
 
9 (i) AB = OB – OA =  2  B1 Ignore labels. Allow BA or BC
 p + 4
 
 − 4 
 
CB = OB – OC =  5  B1
 p − 2
 
2 2
1 + 4 + ( p + 4 ) = 16 + 25 + ( p − 2 ) M1
p=2 A1
[4]

(ii) AB.CB = 4+10−5 = 9 M1 Use of x1 x2 + y1 y2 + z1 z2

│AB│= 1 + 4 + 25 = √30, │CB│ = 16 + 25 + 1
=√42 M1 Product of moduli
9 9
cos ABC = or M1 Allow one of AB, CB reversed - but
30 42 6 35 award A0
ABC = 75.3˚ or 1.31rads (ignore reflex angle
285˚) A1
[4]

10 (i) ( )
2 ax 2 + b + 3 = 6 x 2 − 21 M1
a = 3, b = −12 A1A1
[3]

(ii) 3x 2 − 12
0 or 6 x 2 − 21
3 M1 Allow = or ⩽ or > or <. Ft from

their a, b
x
− 2 i.e. (max) q = −2 A1 Must be in terms of q (eg q
− 2 )
[2]

(iii) y
6( −3) 2 − 21⇒ range is ( y )
33 B1 Do not allow y > 33.Accept all other
[1] notations
e.g. [33, ∞) or [33, ∞]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

 Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2016 9709 13

y + 21
(iv) y = 6 x 2 − 21 ⇒ x = ( ± ) M1
6
x + 21
( fg )−1 ( x ) = − A1 Allow y =..... . Must be a function
6 of x
Domain is x
33 B1 ft from their part (iii) but x
[3] essential

11 (i) AB 2 = 62 + 72 = 85, BC 2 = 22 + 92 = 85
(→ isosceles) B1B1 Or AB = BC = 85 etc

AC 2 = 82 + 22 = 68 B1
2 2 2
M = (2, −2) or BM = ( 85) − (½ 68) B1 Where M is mid-point of AC
BM = 22 + 82 = 68 or 85 − 17 = 68 B1
1
Area ∆ABC = 68 68 = 34 B1
2 [6]

(ii) Gradient of AB = 7 / 6 B1
7 7
Equation of AB is y + 1 = ( x + 2) M1 Or y − 6 = ( x − 4)
6 6
Gradient of CD = −6 / 7 M1
−6
Equation of CD is y + 3 = ( x − 6) M1
7
−6 36 7 14
Sim Eqns 2 = x+ − x− M1
7 7 6 6
34 2
x= = oe A1
85 5 [6]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the March 2016 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/12 Paper 1 (Pure Mathematics), maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the March 2016 series for most Cambridge IGCSE®
and Cambridge International A and AS Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

 Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – March 2016 9709 12

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more "method" steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only.
A and B marks are not given for fortuitously "correct" answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

 Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – March 2016 9709 12

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no "follow through" from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only − often written by a ‘fortuitous' answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR−1 A penalty of MR−1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or
part question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question
remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become "follow through "
marks. MR is not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures − this is
regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR−2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA−1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The
PA−1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

 Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – March 2016 9709 12

1 (i) 80( x 4 ) , −32( x5 ) B1B1 Fully simplified

[2]

(ii) ( −32 + 80 p ) ( x5 ) = 0 M1 Attempt to mult. relevant terms & put = 0

p = 2 / 5 or 32/80 oe A1
[2]

3 x 3 2 x −2
2 y= − (+c) B1B1
3 −2
3 = −1 + 1 + c M1 Sub x = −1, y = 3 . c must be present
y = x 3 + x −2 + 3 A1 Accept c = 3 www
[4]

3 a + 11d = 17 B1
31
( 2a + 30d ) = 1023 B1
2
Solve simultaneous equations M1
d = 4, a = −27 A1 At least one correct
31st term = 93 A1
[5]

4 (a) 3x = − 3 / 2 M1 Accept −0.866 at this stage

− 3 −3 −1
x= oe A1 Or or
6 [2] 6 3 2 3

(b) (2cos θ − 1)(sin θ − 1) = 0 M1 Reasonable attempt to factorise and solve

cos θ = 1 / 2 or sin θ = 1 A1 Award B1B1 www
θ = π / 3 or π / 2 A1A1 Allow 1.05, 1.57. SCA1for both 60°, 90°
[4]

5 (i) Mid-point of AB = (7, 3) soi B1

Grad. of AB = −2 →grad of perp. bisector = 1/2 M1 Use of m1m2 = –1
soi
1
Eqn of perp. bisector is y − 3 = ( x − 7 ) A1
2 [3]

(ii) Eqn of CX is y − 2 = −2 ( x − 1) M1 Using their original gradient and (1,2)

1 1
x − = −2x + 4 DM1 Solve simultaneously dependent on both
2 2 previous M’s
x = 9/5, y = 2/5 A1
BX 2 = 7.2 2 + 1.42 soi M1
BX = 7.33 A1
[5]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

 Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – March 2016 9709 12

6 (i) A = 2π r 2 + 2π rh B1
1000
π r 2 h = 1000 → h = M1
π r2
2000
Sub for h into A → A = 2π r 2 + AG A1
r [3]

dA 2000
(ii) = 0 ⇒ 4π r − 2 = 0 M1A1 Attempt differentiation & set = 0
dr r
r = = 5.4 DM1 A1 Reasonable attempt to solve to r 3 =
d2 A 4000
2
= 4π + 3
dr r
> 0 hence MIN hence MOST EFFICIENT AG B1 Or convincing alternative method
[5]

3
7 (i) CP = CA soi M1
5
3
CP = (4i – 3k) = 2.4i – 1.8k AG A1
5 [2]

(ii) OP = 2.4i + 1.2k B1

BP = 2.4i −2.4j + 1.2k B1
[2]

(iii) BP.CP = 5.76 – 2.16 = 3.6 M1 Use of x1 x2 + y1 y2 + z1 z2

2 2 2 2 2
│BP││CP│= 2.4 + 2.4 + 1.2 2.4 + 1.8 M1 Product of moduli
3.6  1
cos BPC = =  M1 All linked correctly
12.96 9  3 
Angle BPC = 70.5° (or 1.23 rads) cao A1
[4]

8 (i) 2a + 4b = 8 M1 Substitute in –2 and –3

2a 2 + 3a + 4b = 14 A1
2a 2 + 3a + ( 8 − 2a ) = 14 → ( a + 2 )( 2a − 3) = 0 M1 Sub linear into quadratic & attempt
solution
a = −2 or 3 / 2 A1 If A0A0 scored allow SCA1 for either
b = 3 or 5 / 4 A1 ( −2, 3) or (3/2, 5/4)
[5]
2
(ii)  1  13 M1A1 Allow with x/y transposed
y =x−  − Attempt completing of square
 2 4
1 13 DM1 Allow with x/y transposed
x − = (±) y + oe
2 4
1 13 A1 Allow y =..... Must be a function of x
f −1 ( x ) = − x + oe
2 4  13 
Domain of f −1 is ( x )
− 13 / 4 B1 Allow > , −13 / 4
x
∞ ,  − , ∞  etc
[5]  4 

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

 Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – March 2016 9709 12

π
9 (a) (i) BAO = OBA = −α Allow use of 90º or 180º
2
π  π 
AOB = π −  − α  −  − α  = 2α AG M1A1 Or other valid reasoning
2  2  [2]

1 2 1
(ii) r ( 2α ) − r 2 sin 2α oe B2,1,0 SCB1 for reversed subtraction
2 2 [2]

π
(b) Use of α = , r=4 B1B1
6
1 π  1 π
1 segment S =   42   −   42 sin
2  3  2 3
 8π 
= − 4 3 M1 Ft their (ii), α , r
 3 
1 π T π
Area ABC T =   42 sin
2 3
=4 3 ( ) B1 OR AXB =
3
= 4 tan
6
or

1 4 2 2π  4 3 
1 π ( ) sin = 
T − 3S =   42 sin – 3 2 3 3  3 
2 3
 1  2  π   1  2 π T   4 3  8π 
 2  4  3  −  2  4 sin 3  M1 OR 3  − S  = 3  − − 4 3 
       3   3  3 
16√3 −8π cao A1
[6]

10 (i) x =1/ 3 B1
[1]

dy  2 
(ii) =  ( 3x − 1)  [3] B1B1
dx 16 
dy
When x = 3 = 3 soi M1
dx
Equation of QR is y − 4 = 3 ( x − 3) M1
When y = 0 x = 5 / 3 A1
[5]

 1 1
(iii) Area under curve =  ( 3x − 1)3  ×  B1B1
16 × 3   3
1 32 1
83 − 0  = M1A1 Apply limits: their and 3
16 × 9   9 3
Area of ∆ = 8 / 3 B1
32 8 8
Shaded area = − = (or 0.889) A1
9 3 9 [6]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2016

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2015 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/11 Paper 1, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2015 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

 Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2015 9709 11

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not
usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or
just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in
hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application
of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work
only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

 Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2015 9709 11

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

part question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question
remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through ”
marks. MR is not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is
regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

 Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2015 9709 11

1 (a + x) 5 = a 5 + 5C1 a 4 x + 5C 2 a 3 x 2 + ... soi M1 Ignore subsequent terms

 2 4 3  2
 − × (their 5a ) + (their 10a ) ( x ) M1
 a 
0 A1 AG
[3]

2 f ( x) = x 3 − 7 x (+c) B1
5 = 27 − 21 + c M1 Sub x = 3, y = 5. Dep. on c present
c = −1 → f ( x) = x 3 − 7 x − 1 A1
[3]

3 4 x 2 + x 2 = 1 / 2 soi B1
Solve as quadratic in x 2 M1 E.g. (4 x 2 − 1)(2 x 2 + 1) or ‫ ݔ‬ଶ ൌ formula
x2 =1 4 A1 Ignore other solution
x = ±1 2 A1
[4]

sin θ
4 (i) 4 cos 2 θ + 15 sin θ = 0 M1 Replace tan θ by and multiply by
cos θ
sin θ or equivalent
4(1 − s 2 ) + 15s = 0 → 4 sin 2 θ − 15 sin θ − 4 = 0 M1A1 Use c 2 = 1 − s 2 and rearrange to AG
[3] (www)

(ii) sin θ = −1 / 4 B1
θ = 194 .5 or 345 .5 B1B1 Ignore other solution
[3] Ft from 1st solution, SC B1 both angles
in rads (3.39 and 6.03)

dy 8
5 (i) = − 2 + 2 cao B1B1
dx x
d 2 y 16
= cao B1
dx 2 x 3
[3]
8
(ii) − 2
+ 2 = 0 → 2x 2 − 8 = 0 M1 Set = 0 and rearrange to quadratic form
x
x = ±2 A1
y = ±8 A1 If A0A0 scored, SCA1 for just (2, 8)

d2 y Ft for " correct" conclusion if 

> 0 when x = 2 hence MINIMUM B1  2 
dx 2 d y 
 2 incorrect or 
d2 y B1  dx 
< 0 when x = −2 hence MAXIMUM
dx 2 any valid method inc. a good sketch
[5]  

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

 Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2015 9709 11

6 (i) x 2 − x + 3 = 3x + a → x 2 − 4 x + (3 − a) = 0 B1 AG
[1]

(ii) 5 + (3 − a ) = 0 → a = 8 B1 Sub x = −1 into (i)

2
x − 4x − 5 = 0 → x = 5 B1 OR B2 for x = 5 www
[2]

(iii) 16 − 4(3 − a ) = 0 (applying b 2 − 4ac = 0 ) M1 OR dy dx = 2 x − 1 → 2 x − 1 = 3

a = −1 A1 x=2
( x − 2) 2 = 0 → x = 2 A1 y = 22 − 2 + 3 → y = 5
y =5 A1 5 = 6 + a → a = −1
[4]

7 (i) BC 2 = r 2 + r 2 = 2r 2 → BC = r 2 B1 AG
[1]
1 1 2
(ii) Area sector BCFD = π (r 2 ) 2 soi M1 Expect πr
4 2
1 M1
Area ∆ BCAD = (2r )r Expect r 2 (could be embedded)
2
1
Area segment CFDA = πr 2 − r 2 .oe A1
2
1
Area semi-circle CADE = πr 2 B1
2
1 2 1 2 
Shaded area πr −  πr − r 2 
2 2 
1 1 
or πr 2 −  πr 2 +  πr 2 − r 2   DM1 Depends on the area ∆ BCD
2 2 
= r2 A1
[6]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

 Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2015 9709 11

8 (i) x 2 − 4 x = 12 M1 4 x − x 2 = 12 scores M1A0

x = −2 or 6 A1
3rd term = (−2) 2 + 12 = 16 or 6 2 + 12 = 48 A1A1 SC1 for 16, 48 after x = 2, − 6
[4]
x2  x 
(ii) r2 =  =  soi M1
4x  4 
4x
=8 M1 Accept use of unsimplified
x
1− x2 4x 4
4 or 2 or
4x x x
4 1 A1
x = or r =
3 3
16 A1
3rd term = (or 0.593)
27 [4]

ALT
4x 1 4x
= 8 → r = 1 − x or = 8 → x = 2(1 − r ) M1
1− r 2 1− r
 1  2(1 − r )
x 2 = 4 x1 − x  r= M1
 2  4
4 1 A1
x= r=
3 3

9 (i) − (1)( x − 3) 2 + 4 B1B1B1

[3]
(ii) Smallest (m) is 3 B1 Accept m ⩾ 3, m = 3. Not x ⩾ 3.
[1] Ft their b

(iii) ( x − 3) 2 = 4 − y M1 Or x y transposed. Ft their a, b, c

Correct order of operations M1
-1
f ( x) = 3 + 4 − x cao A1 Accept y = if clear
Domain is x ⩽ 0 B1
[4]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

 Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2015 9709 11

10 (i) PM = 2i – 10k + 1 (6j + 8k) oe M1 Any valid method

2
PM = 2i + 3j – 6k A1
÷ 4 + 9 + 36 M1
1
Unit vector = (2i + 3j – 6k) A1
7 [4]
(ii) AT = 6j + 8k, PT = ai + 6j – 2k soi B1 Allow 1 vector reversed at this stage.
(or TA and TP) (AM or MT could be used for AT)
(6 j + 8k ).(ai + 6 j − 2k )
(cos ATP ) = M1
36 + 64 a 2 + 36 + 4
36 − 16
=
36 + 64 a 2 + 36 + 4
20 A1 Ft from their AT and PT
10 a 2 + 40
2 2
= oe and attempt to solve M1
a + 40 7
2

a=3 A1 Withheld if only 1 vector reversed

[5]
ALT
Alt (Cosine Rule) Vectors (AT, PT etc.) B1
a 2 + 36 + 4 + 36 + 64 − (100 + a 2 )
cos ATP = M1A1
2 (a 2 + 40) 100
then as above

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

 Page 8 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2015 9709 11

dy  1 
11 (i) = (1 + 4 x) −1 2  × [4] B1B1
dx  2 
dy 2
At x = 6, = B1
dx 5
1
Gradient of normal at P = − B1 OR eqn of norm
2
5
y − 5 = their − ( x − 6)
5 2
Gradient of PQ = − hence PQ is a normal, When y = 0, x = 8 hence result
2
or m1 m 2 = −1 B1
[5]
(ii) ∫
Vol for curve = (π ) (1 + 4 x) and attempt to M1
integrate ‫ ݕ‬ଶ
[ ]
= (π ) x + 2 x 2 ignore ‘+ c’ A1
= (π )[6 + 72 − 0] DM1 Apply limits 0 → 6 (allow reversed if
= 78(π ) A1 corrected later)
8
 5  
3
1 M1  − x + 20  
Vol for line = × (π ) × 5 2 × 2 2
3 OR (π )    
 5 
50 A1  3× − 
= (π ) 2
3   6
2 A1
Total Vol = 78π + 50π 3 = 94 π (or 284π 3 )
3 [7]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2015 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/12 Paper 1, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2015 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

 Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2015 9709 12

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more "method" steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only.
A and B marks are not given for fortuitously "correct" answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

 Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2015 9709 12

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no "follow through" from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only − often written by a ‘fortuitous' answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR−1 A penalty of MR−1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or
part question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question
remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become "follow through "
marks. MR is not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures − this is
regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR−2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA−1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The
PA−1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

 Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2015 9709 12

1 f : x ⟼3x + 2, g : x ⟼4x – 12 B1
x−2
f−1(x) = B1
3
gf(x) = 4(3x + 2) – 12 M1 Equates, collects terms, +soln
2
Equate → x = A1
7 [4]

2 (x + 2k)7
Term in x5 = 21 × 4k² = 84k² B1
Term in x4 = 35 × 8k³ = 280k³ B1
3
Equate and solve → k = 0.3 or M1 A1 Correct method to obtain k.
10 [4]

x
3 (i) tan 60 = → x = h tan60 B1 Any correct unsimplified length
h
A=h×x M1 Correct method for area
V = 40 (3h ) 2 A1 ag
[3]

dV
(ii) = 80 (3h) B1
dh
B1
dh 1
If h = 5, = or 0.289 M1A1 M1 (must be ÷, not ×).
dt 2 (3) [3]

2 2
 1 1  1 c
4 (i)  −  = −  M1 Use of tan = sin/cos
 sin x tan x   s s 
(1 − c) 2 (1 − c) 2
= M1 Use of s² = 1 – c²
s2 1 − c2
(1 − c)(1 − c) (1 − c) 2
= or A1
(1 − c)(1 + c) (1 − c)(1 + c)
1 − cos x
≡ A1 [4] ag
1 + cos x
2
 1 1  2
(ii)  −  =
 sin x tan x  5

1 − cos x 2 3
= → cos x M1 Making cosx the subject
1 + cos x 5 7

→ x = 1.13 or 5.16 A1 A1 2π – 1st answer.

[3]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

 Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2015 9709 12

6
5 (i) Length of OB = = 7.270 M1 ag Any valid method
cos 0.6 [1]

(ii) AB = 6tan0.6 or 4.1 B1 Sight of in (ii)

Arc length = 7.27 × (½π – 0.6) = (7.06) M1 Use of s= rθ with sector angle
Perimeter = 6 + 7.27 + 7.06 + 6tan0.6 = 24.4 A1 [3]

(iii) Area of AOB = ½ × 6 × 7.27 × sin0.6 M1 Use of any correct area method
Area of OBC = ½ × 7.27² × (½π – 0.6) M1 Use of ½r²θ.
→ area = 12.31 + 25.65 = 38.0 A1 [3]

6 A(−3, 7), B(5, 1) and C(−1, k)

(i) AB = 10 B1
6² + (k – 1)² = 10² M1 Use of Pythagoras
k = −7 and 9 A1 [3]

4
(ii) m of AB = −¾ m perp = B1 M1 B1 M1 Use of m1m2 = −1
3
M = (1, 4)
4
Eqn y − 4 = ( x − 1) B1
3
Set y to 0, → x = –2 M1 A1 Complete method leading to D.
[5]

 0   2  3
     
7 OA =  2  , OB =  5  , OC =  p  .
 − 3  − 2 q
     

 2  3   1 
     
(i) AB =  3  AC  p − 2  BC  p − 5  B1B1 Any 2 of 3 relevant vectors
1  q + 3  q + 2
     
→ p = 6½ and q = −1½ B1 B1
[4]

(ii) 6 + 3p – 6 + q + 3 = 0 M1 Use of x1x2 + y1y2 + z1z2 = 0

→ q = −3p − 3 A1
[2]

(iii) AB² = 4 + 9 + 1 AC² = 9 + 1 + (q + 3)² M1 For attempt at either

→ (q + 3)² = 4
→ q = −1 or −5 A1 A1
[3]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

 Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2015 9709 12

8 f : x → x 2 + ax + b ,

(i) B1 for (x + 3)². B1 for – 17

2 2
x + 6 x − 8 = ( x + 3) − 17 B1 B1 or B1 for x = − 3, B1 y = − 17
or 2x + 6 = 0 → x = −3 → y = −17
→ Range f(x) ⩾ − 17 B1 Following through visible method.
[3]

(ii) (x – k)(x + 2k) = 0 M1 Realises the link between roots and

≡ x 2 + 5x + b = 0 the equation
→ k=5 A1 comparing coefficients of x
→ b = −2k² = − 50 A1
[3]

(iii) ( x + a) 2 + a( x + a) + b = a M1 Replaces “x” by “x + a” in 2 terms

Uses b² − 4ac → 9a² − 4(2a² + b − a) DM1 Any use of discriminant
→ a² < 4(b – a) A1
[3]

12
9 f ʹʹ(x) =
x3

6
(i) f ʹ(x) = − ( + c) B1 Correct integration
x2
3
= 0 when x = 2 → c = M1 A1 Uses x = 2, f ʹ(x = 0)
2
6 3x
f(x) = + (+A) B1 B1 For each integral
x 2
= 10 when x = 2 → A = 4 A1
[6]

6 3
(ii) − + =0 → x=±2 M1 Sets their 2 term f ʹ(x) to 0.
x2 2
Other point is (−2, −2) A1
[2]

(iii) At x = 2, f ʹʹ(x) = 1.5 Min B1

At x = −2, f ʹʹ(x) = −1.5 Max B1
[2]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

 Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2015 9709 12

10 y = (9 − 2 x 2 ) P (2, 1)

dy 1 B1 Without “ × −4x”
(i) = × −4 x B1 Allow even if B0 above.
dx 2 (9 − 2 x 2 )
At P , x = 2, m = −4 Normal grad = ¼ M1 For m1m2 = −1 calculus needed
Eqn AP y − 1 = 1 4 ( x − 2) M1 Normal, not tangent
→ A (−2, 0) or B (0, ½) A1
Midpoint AP also (0, ½) A1 Full justification.
[6]

 9 y2 
(ii) ∫ ∫
x 2 dy =  − dy
2 2 
M1 Attempt to integrate x²

9 y y3
= − A1 Correct integration
2 6
Upper limit = 3 B1 Evaluates upper limit
Uses limits 1 to 3 DM1 Uses both limits correctly
→ volume = 4⅔ π A1
[5]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2015 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/13 Paper 1, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2015 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

 Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2015 9709 13

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more "method" steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only.
A and B marks are not given for fortuitously "correct" answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

 Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2015 9709 13

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no "follow through" from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous' answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

part question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question
remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become "follow through "
marks. MR is not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is
regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR–2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

 Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2015 9709 13

1 x 2 − 4 x + c = 2 x − 7 → x 2 − 6 x + c + 7 ( = 0) M1 All terms on one side

36 − 4(c + 7) < 0 DM1 Apply
ଶ  4  0. Allow ⩽.
c>2 A1
[3]

 x  5   9  2 
2 [7C2] ×    ×  2   soi B2,1,0 Seen
 3    x  

3
1
( )  1 
21 × 5 x 5 × 81 4  soi B1 Identified as required term
x 
7 B1 Accept 7x
[4]

3 (i) [3] [( x − 1) 2 ] [− 1] B1B1B1

[3]
(ii) f ' ( x) = 3x 2 − 6 x + 7 B1 Ft their (i) + 5
= 3( x − 1) 2 + 4 B1
> 0 hence increasing DB1 Dep B1√ unless other valid reason
[3]

1
4 (i) Sector OCD = ( 2r ) 2 θ ( = 2r 2θ ) B1 2r 2θ seen somewhere
2
1
Sector(s) OAB/OEF = ( 2) r 2 (π − θ ) B1 Accept with/without factor (2)
2
2
AG www
Total = r (π + θ ) B1
[3]
(ii) Arc CD = 2rθ B1 Accept with/without factor (2)
Arc(s) AB/EF (2)r (π − θ ) B1
Straight edges = 4r B1 Must be simplified
Total 2πr + 4r (which is independent of θ ) B1
[4]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

 Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2015 9709 13

5 (i) − 2 p 2 + 16 p − 24 + 2 p 2 − 6 p + 2 M1 Good attempt at scalar product

Set scalar product = 0 and attempt solution DM1
p = 2.2 A1
[3]
(ii) 4 − 2 p = 2( p − 6) or p = 2(2 p − 6) M1
 − 2  − 4
   
p = 4 → OA =  2  OB =  4  A1 At least one of OA and OB correct
 1   2 
   
2
O A = ( −2 ) 2 + 2 2 + 1 = 3 M1A1 For M1 accept a numerical p
[4]

ALT 1
Compare AB with OA → 10 − 3 p = p − 6 or
6 − p = 2 p − 6 . Similarly cf AB with OB M1

ALT 2
(OA.OB)/(|OA|×|OB|) = 1 or –1 →
10 p − 22 = 5 p 2 − 36 p +
M1
2
73 5 p − 16 p + 20

→ 125 p 4 − 260 p 3 + 941 p 2 − 1448 p +

. Similarly
976 = 0 → p = 4
with OA.AB or OB.AB.

ALT 3
OA & OB have equal unit vectors. (Similarly
with OA & AB or OB & AB.)
Hence
 p−6 
1  
 2 p − 6
5 p 2 − 36 p + 73  1 
 
4 − 2p
1  
=  p 
5 p 2 − 16 p + 20  2 
  M1
1 2
→ =
5 p 2 − 36 p + 73 5 p 2 − 16 p + 20

→ 15 p 2 − 128 p + 272 = 0
→ ( p − 4)(15 p − 68) = 0
→ p = 4(or 68 / 15)

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

 Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2015 9709 13

6 (i) (a) 1.92 + 1.84 + 1.76 + ... oe B1 OR a=0.96, d= –.04 & ans
20
[2 × 1.92 + 19 × (−0.08)] oe M1 doubled/adjusted
2
23.2 cao A1 Corr formula used with corr d & their
[3] a, n
a = 1, n = 21 → 12.6 (25.2),
a = 0.96, n = 21 → 11.76 (23.52)
(b) 1.92 + 1.92(.96) + 1.92(.96) 2 + ... B1
20
1.92(1 − .96
M1 OR a=.96, r =.96 & ans
1 − .96
/doubled/adjusted
26.8 cao A1 Corr formula used with r =.96 & their
[3] a, n
a = .96, n = 21 → 13.82 (27.63)
a = 1, n = 21 →14.39 (28.78)
1.92 0.96
(ii) = 48 or = 24 & then M1A1 a = 1→25 (50) but must be doubled
1 − .96 1 − 0.96
[2] for M1
Double AG (1 − 0.96 n )
1.92 < 48 → 0.96 n > 0
1 − 0.96
(www)
'which is true' scores SCB1

7 (a) 1 + 3 sin 2 θ + 4 cosθ = 0 M1 Attempt to multiply by cos 

1 + 3(1 − cos 2 θ ) + 4 cosθ + 0 M1 Use c 2 + s 2 = 1
3 cos 2 θ − 4 cosθ − 4 = 0 AG A1
cosθ = −2 / 3 B1 Ignore other solution
θ = 131.8 or 228.2 B1B1 Ft for 360 – 1st soln. –1 extra solns in
[6] range
(b) c = b / a cao B1 Radians 2.30 & 3.98 scores SCB1
d =a−b B1
[2] Allow D = (0, a – b)

8 (i) 3x + 1 ⩽–1 (Accept 3 x + 1 = −1,3a + 1 = −1) M1 Do not allow gf in (i) to score in (iii)
x⩽ − 2 / 3 ⇒ largest value of a is – 2/3 ( in terms A1 Accept a⩽ − 2 / 3 and a = −2 / 3
of a ) [2]

(ii) fg(x) = 3(−1 − x 2 ) + 1 B1 No marks in this part for gf used

fg(x) + 14 = 0 ⇒ 3x 2 = 12 oe (2 terms) B1
x = –2 only B1
[3]
(iii) gf(x) = −1 − (3 x + 1) 2 oe B1 No marks in this part for fg used
gf(x) ⩽ − 50 ⇒ (3 x + 1) 2 ⩾49 (Allow ⩽ or = M1 OR attempt soln of 9 x 2 + 6 x − 48 + /
3x + 1 ⩾7 or 3x + 1 ≤ −7 (one sufficient) www A1 ⩽/⩾ 0
x⩽ − 8 / 3 only www A1 OR x − 2 ⩾ or 3x + 8 ⩽ 0(one suffic)
[4]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

 Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2015 9709 13

dy
9 (i) At x = 4, =2 B1
dx
dy dy dx
= × = 2×3= 6 M1A1 Use of Chain rule
dt dx dt [3]
1
(ii) ( y ) = x + 4 x 2 (+c) B1
1
Sub x = 4, y = 6 → 6 = 4 + (4 × 42 ) +c M1 Must include c
1
c = −6 → ( y = x + 4x 2 −6 A1
[3]
(iii) Eqn of tangent is y − 6 = 2( x − 4) or M1 Correct eqn thru (4, 6) & with m =
(6 − 0) /( 4 − x) = 2 A1 their 2
B = (1, 0) (Allow
 1) M1 [Expect eqn of normal:   ½

Gradient of normal = −1/2 A1 8]
C = (16, 0) (Allow
 16) A1
1 [5] Or AB = 45 , AC = 180 →
Area of triangle = × 15 × 6 = 45
2 Area = 45.0

10 (i) f ' ( x) = 2 − 2( x + 1) −3 B1
−4
f" ( x) = 6( x + 1) B1
f'0 = 0 hence stationary at x = 0 B1 AG
f" 0 = 6 > 0 hence minimum B1 www. Dependent on correct f ″(x)
−4
[4] except − 6( x + 1) → < 0 MAX
(ii) AB 2 = (3 / 2) 2 + (3 / 4) 2 M1 scores SC1
AB = 1.68 or 45 / 4 oe A1
[2]
2 −1
Area under curve = ∫ f ( x ) = x − ( x + 1) B1 Ignore +c even if evaluated
(iii)
 1 1  Do not penalise reversed limits
= 1 −  −  − 2  = 9 / 4
 2 4 
(Apply limits − 1 2 → 1) M1A1 Allow reversed subtn if final ans
1 9 3 positive
Area trap. = (3 + ) ×
2 4 2 M1
= 63 / 16 or 3.94 A1
Shaded area 63 / 16 − 9 / 4 + 27 / 16 or 1.69 A1
[6]
ALT eqn AB is y = − 1 2 x + 11/ 4 B1
Area = ∫ − 1 2 x + 11 / 4 − ∫ 2 x + ( x + 1) −2 M1 Attempt integration of at least one

= −
1 2 11 
4 4 
[
x + x  − x 2 − ( x + 1) −1 ] A1A1 Ignore +c even if evaluated

Dep. on integration having taken
place
Apply limits − 1 2 → 1 to both integrals M1 Allow reversed subtn if final ans
27/16 or 1.69
A1 positive

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2015 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/11 Paper 1, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2015 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

 Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2015 9709 11

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only.
A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

 Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2015 9709 11

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only - often written by a “fortuitous” answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR–1 A penalty of MR–1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or
part question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question
remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through “
marks. MR is not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is
regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR–2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA–1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The
PA–1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2015 9709 11

1 θ is obtuse , sin θ = k

(i) cos θ = −√(1 – k²) B1 cao

[1]

sin θ
(ii) tan θ = used M1 Used, attempt at cosine seen in (i)
cos θ
k
→ tan θ = − aef A1 Ft for their cosine as a function of k
(1 − k 2 ) [2] only, from part (i)

(iii) sin (θ + π) = −k B1 cao

[1]

2 y = 2x² , X(−2, 0) and P(p, 0)

(i) 1 M1 A1 Attempt at base and height in terms

A= × (2 + p) × 2p² (= 2p² + p³) [2] bh
2 of p and use of
2

dA
(ii) = 4p + 3p² B1 cao
dp
dA d A dp
= × = 0.02 × 20 = 0.4 M1 A1 any correct method, cao
dt dp d t
dA dp dp
or = 4p + 3 p2
dt dt dt [3]

3 (1 − x) 2 (1 + 2 x) 6 .

(i) (a) (1 − x) 6 = 1 – 6x + 15x² B2,1 −1 each error

[2]

(b) (1 + 2 x) 6 = 1 + 12x + 60x² B2,1 −1 each error

[2] SC B1 only, in each part, for all 3
correct descending powers
SC only one penalty for omission
of the ‘1’ in each expansion

(ii) Product of (a) and (b) with >1 term M1 Must be 2 or more products
→ 60 – 72 + 15 = 3 DM1A1 M1 exactly 3 products. cao,
[3] condone 3x2

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2015 9709 11

 3 6  k 
uuur   uuur    
4 OA =  0  , OB =  −3  , OC =  − 2k 
 −4  2  2k − 3 
     

(i) OA∙ OB = 18 – 8 = 10 M1 Use of x1x2 + y1y2 + z1z2

Modulus of OA = 5, of OB = 7
 10 
Angle AOB = cos−1   aef M1 All linked with modulus
 35  cao, (if angle given, no penalty),
10 2 correct angle implies correct cosine
→ or A1
35 7 [3]

 3 
 
(ii) AB = b – a =  − 3  B1 allow for a – b
 6 
 
k² + 4k² + (2k – 3)² = 9 + 9 + 36 M1 Correct use of moduli using their
AB
→ 9k² −12k −45( = 0) DM1 obtains 3 term quadratic.
5 cao
→ k= 3 or k = − A1
3 [4]

5 (i) 24 = r + r + rθ (May not use ߠ)

24 − 2r
→ θ= M1 Attempt at s = rθ linked with 24
r and r
1 24r
A= r²θ = − r 2 = 12r – r². aef, ag M1A1 Uses A formula with θ as f(r). cao
2 2 [3]

(ii) ( A =)36 − (r − 6) 2 B1 B1 cao

[2]

(iii) Greatest value of A = 36 B1 Ft on (ii).

(r = 6) → θ = 2 B1 cao, may use calculus or the

discriminant on 12r − r 2
[2]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2015 9709 11

6 (i) y − 2t = −2( x − 3t )( y + 2 x = 8t ) M1 Unsimplified or equivalent forms

Set x to 0 → B(0, 8t)
Set y to 0 → A(4t, 0) M1 Attempt at both A and B, then using
→ Area = 16t² A1 cao
[3]

(ii) 1 cao
m= B1 Unsimplified or equivalent forms
2
1 co
→ y − 2t = ( x − 3t )(2 y = x + t ) M1
2
A1 correctly shown.
Set y to 0 → C (−t, 0)
Midpoint of CP is (t, t)
This lies on the line y = x. A1
[4]

1 2
7 (a) ar² = , ar³ =
3 9
2
→ r= aef M1 Any valid method, seen or implied.
3 Could be answers only.
3
Substituting → a = A1 Both a and r
4
3
→ S∞ = 4
1
= 2 14 aef M1 A1 Correct formula with r < 1 , cao
3 [4]

(b) 4a = a + 4d → 3a = 4d B1 May be implied in

360 = 5 / 2(a + 4a)
5
360 = S5 = (2a + 4d ) or 12.5a M1 Correct Sn formula or sum of 5
2 terms
→ a = 28.8º aef A1 cao, may be implied
Largest = a + 4d or 4a = 115.2º aef B1 (may use degrees or radians)
[4]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2015 9709 11

8 1 
f : x⟼5 + 3cos  x  for 0 ø x ø 2π.
2 

(i) 1 
5 + 3cos  x  = 7
2 
1  2
1  2 Makes cos  x  =
cos  x  = B1 2  3
2  3
1
x = 0.84 x = 1.68 only, aef M1A1 Looks up cos−1 first, then ×2
2 [3]
(in given range)

(ii) B1 y always +ve, m always –ve.

B1 from (0, 8) to (2π, 2) (may be
[2] implied)

(iii) No turning point on graph or 1:1 B1 cao, independent of graph in (ii)

[1]

(iv) 1 
y = 5 + 3cos  x  M1 Tries to make x subject.
2 
Order; −5, ÷3, cos−1, ×2 M1 Correct order of operations
 x −5 A1 cao
x = 2cos−1  3  [3]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Page 8 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2015 9709 11

9 y = x 3 + px 2

dy
(i) = 3x² + 2px B1 cao
dx
2p
Sets to 0 → x = 0 or − M1 Sets differential to 0
3
 2 p 4 p3 
→ (0, 0) or  − ,  A1 A1 cao cao, first A1 for any correct
 3 27  [4] turning point or any correct pair of
x values. 2nd A1 for 2 complete
TPs

d2 y
(ii) = 6x + 2p M1 Other methods include; clear
dx 2 demonstration of sign change of
gradient, clear reference to the
shape of the curve

At (0, 0) → 2p +ve Minimum A1 www

 2p 4p 3

At  − ,  → −2p –ve Maximum A1
 3 27  [3]

(iii) y = x 3 + px 2 + px → 3x² + 2px + p (= 0) B1

2
Uses b − 4 ac M1 Any correct use of discriminant
→ 4p² − 12p< 0
→ 0 <p< 3 aef A1 cao (condone ø)
[3]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

Page 9 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2015 9709 11

8
10 y=
3x + 4

dy −4
(i) = 3
× 3 aef B1 Without the “×3”
dx (3 x + 4) 2 B1 For “×3” even if 1st B mark lost.

3 2
→ m(x=0) = − Perpendicular m(x=0) = M1 Use of m1m2 = −1 after attempting
2 3
dy
to find (x=0)
dx
2
Eqn of normal y − 4 = ( x − 0) M1 Unsimplified line equation
3
 20  cao
Meets x = 4 at B  4,  A1
 3  [5]

8 8 (3 x + 4))
(ii) ∫ (3 x + 4)
dx =
1
÷3 B1 B1 Without “÷3”. For “÷3”

2
32
Limits from 0 to 4 → Area P = M1 A1 Correct use of correct limits. cao
3
Area Q = Trapezium – P
Area of Trapezium =
M1 Correct method for area of
1 20  64
4 + × 4 = trapezium
2 3  3

32 A1 All correct.
→ Areas of P and Q are both [6]
3

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2015 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/12 Paper 1, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2015 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

 Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2015 9709 12

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more "method" steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only.
A and B marks are not given for fortuitously "correct" answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

 Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2015 9709 12

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no "follow through" from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only - often written by a ‘fortuitous' answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR -1 A penalty of MR -1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

part question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question
remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become "follow through √"
marks. MR is not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures - this is
regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR-2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA -1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA -1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

 Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2015 9709 12

1 f ′( x) = 5 − 2 x 2 and (3, 5)
3
f(x) = 5x − 23x (+c) B1 For integral
Uses (3, 5) M1 Uses the point in an integral
→c=8 A1 co
[3]

2 Radius of semicircle = 1
2 AB = rsinθ B1 aef
B1 1
Area of semicircle = 12 πr²sin²θ = A1 Uses 2 πr² with r = f(θ)
Shaded area = semicircle – segment B1B1 B1 ( –sector ), B1 for + (triangle)
= A1 − 12 r²2θ + 12 r²sin2θ [4]

3 (i) (2 − x)6
Coeff of x² is 240 B1 co
Coeff of x³ is − 20 × 8 = −160 B2,1 B1 for +160
[3]

(ii) (3 x + 1)(2 − x)6

Product needs exactly 2 terms M1 3 × their 240 + their -160
→ 720 – 160 = 560 A1 for candidate’s answers.
[2]

4 u = 2 x( y − x) and x + 3 y = 12 ,
 12 − x 
u = 2 x − x M1 A1 Expresses u in terms of x
 3 
2
= 8 x − 83x
du 16 x M1 Differentiate candidate’s quadratic,
= 8−
dx 3 sets to 0 + attempt to find x, or
A1 other valid method
= 0 when x = 1 12
→ ( y = 3 12 ) A1 Complete method that leads to u
→u=6 [5] Co

sin θ − cosθ
5 (i) .
sin θ + cosθ
Divides top and bottom by cos θ B1 Answer given.
→ t −1 [1]
t +1

sin θ − cosθ 1
(ii) = tan θ
sin θ + cosθ 6
→ t −1 = t B1 Using the identity.
t +1 6
M1 Forms a 3 term quadratic with
→ t 2 − 5t + 6 = 0
terms all on same side.
→ t = 2 or t = 3
A1 A1 co co
→ θ = 63.4º or 71.6º
[4]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

 Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2015 9709 12

6 h = 60(1 − cos kt )

(i) Max h when cos = −1 → 120 B1 Co

[1]

(ii) h = 0 and t = 30, or h =120 and t = 15 M1 Substituting a correct pair of values

→ cos30k = 1 or cos15k = –1 into the equation.
→ 30k = 2π or 15k = π
2π π
→ k = = A1 co ag
30 15 [2]

(iii) 90 = 60(1 – cos kt)

→ coskt = −6030 = −0.5 B1 co – but there must be evidence of
correct subtraction.
→ kt = 2π or → kt = 4π
3 3
B1
→ Either t = 10 or 20 or both B1
→ t = 10 minutes [3]

7 A(4, 6), B (10, 2).

(i) M = (7, 4) B1 co
m of AB = − 23 B1 co
3
m of perpendicular = 2

→ y − 4 = 32 ( x − 7) M1 A1 Use of m1m2 = −1 & their midpoint

[4] in the equation of a line. co

(ii) Eqn of line parallel to AB through (3, 11)

→ y − 11 = − 23 ( x − 3) M1 Needs to use m of AB
Sim eqns → C (9, 7) DM1A1 Must be using their correct lines.
[3] Co

8 (a) 1st, 2nd, nth are 56, 53 and −22

a = 56, d = −3
−22 = 56 + (n – 1)(−3) M1 Uses correct un formula.
→ n = 27 A1 co
S27 = 272 (112 + 26(− 3)) M1 Needs positive integer n
→ 459 A1 Co
[4]

(b) 1st, 2nd, 3rd are 2k + 6, 2k and k + 2.

(i) Either 2k2k+6 = k2+k2

or uses a, r and eliminates M1 Correct method for equation in k.
→ 2k 2 − 10k − 12 = 0 DM1 Forms quad. or cubic equation with
no brackets or fractions.
→k=6 A1 Co
[3]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

 Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2015 9709 12

(ii) 2k or k + 2 (= 2 )
S∞ = 1−ar with r = 2k+ 6 2k 3 M1 Needs attempt at a and r and S∞
→ 54 A1 Co
[2]

9 OA = 2i + 4j + 4k and OB =3i + j + 4k

(i) OA . OB = 6 + 4 +16 = 26 M1 Must be numerical at some stage

OA = 36 , OB = 26 M1 Product of 2 moduli

Cos AOB = 26 M1 All linked correctly

6 26
A1 co
→ 31.8º
[4]

 1 
 
(ii) AB = b – a =  − 3  B1
 0 
 
 2  3
   
OC =  4  + 2 AB or  1  + AB M1 Correct link
 4  4
   

 4 
 
OC =  − 2 
 4 
 
 4
Unit vector ÷ modulus → 1  −2  M1 A1 ÷ by modulus. co
6 
 4 [4]
 

(iii) OC = 6, OA = 6 B1 co
[1]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

 Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2015 9709 12

10 y= 4 . B1 Correct without the ÷2

2 x−1

(i) 16 −16
∫ (2 x−1)2 dx = 2 x − 1 ÷2 B1 For the ÷2 even if first B1 is lost
M1 Use of limits in a changed
−8 
Vol = π  with limits 1 and 2 expression.
 2 x −1  A1 co
16π [4]
→
3

(ii) m= 1
2 m of tangent = −2
M1 Use of m1m2 = −1
dy −4
= ×2
dx (2 x −1)2 B1 Correct without the ×2
B1 For the ×2 even if first B1 is lost
dy
Equating their dx to −2
DM1
→ x = 32 or − 12
A1 co
(y = 2 or – 2)
→ c = 52 or − 72
A1 co

[6]

11 f : x a 2x2 − 6x + 5

(i) 2 x 2 − 6 x + 5 − p = 0 has no real roots M1 Sets to 0 with p on LHS.

2
Uses b − 4ac → 36 − 8(5 − p ) DM1 Uses discriminant.
1 A1 co – must be “<”, not “<”.
Sets to 0 → p < 2
[3]

(ii) 2 x 2 − 6 x + 5 = 2(x − 2
)
3 2
+ 1
2
3 × B1 co
[3]

(iii) Range of g 1
2 < g(x) < 13
B1 B1 on (ii) co from sub of x = 4
[2]
h : x a 2 x 2 − 6 x + 5 for k < x < 4

3
(iv) Smallest k = 2
B1 on (ii)
[1]

h(x) = 2(x − 32 ) + 12
2
(v) M1 Using comp square form to try and
get x as subject or y if transposed.
3
Order of operations ± 12 , ÷2, √, ± 2
DM1 Order must be correct
→ Inverse = 3
2 + ( 2x − 14 ) A1 co (without ±)
[3]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2015 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/13 Paper 1 (Paper 1), maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2015 series for most
Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

 Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2015 9709 13

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on
from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only. A
and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

 Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2015 9709 13

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

part question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question
remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through ”
marks. MR is not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is
regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

 Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2015 9709 13

1 2( x − 3) 2 − 11 2
B1B1B1 For 2, ( x − 3) , −11. Or a=2, b= 3,
[3] c= 11

 3

 (2 x + 1) 2 
2   [÷2] (+c) B1B1
3
 2 
7=9+c M1 Attempt subst x = 4, y = 7. c must be there.
3 Dep. on attempt at integration.
(2 x + 1) 2
y= −2 or unsimplified A1 c = –2 sufficient
3 [4]

3 (i) a 5 − 5a 4 x + 10a 3 x 2 − 10a 2 x 3 + .... B2,1,0 Ok full expansion (ignore extra terms)
[2] Descending: Ok if full expansion but max
B1 for 4 terms

(ii) (1 − ax )(..10a 3 x 2 − 10a 2 x 3 ..) = ( x 3 )(−10a 4 − 10a 2 ) M1 Attempt to find coeff. of x 3 from 2 terms
− 10a 4 − 10a 2 = −200 A1 Ft from their 10a 3 ,−10a 2 from part (i)
a2 = 4 ignore a 2 = −5 M1 Attempt soln. for a 2 from 3-term quad. in
a2
a = ±2 cao A1 Ignore any imaginary solutions
[4]

4 (i) tan θ = 1 / 3 M1
θ = 18.4° only A1 Ignore solns. outside range 0→180
[2]

(ii) tan 2 x = ( ± )1 / 3 Must be sq. root soi M1 sin 2 x = ( ± ) 1 / 2 or cos 2 x = ( ± ) 3/2

1
using c 2 + s 2 = 1. Not tan x = (± ) etc.
3

( x) = 15 A1 ft for (90 േ their 15) or (180 – their 15)

(x) = any correct second value (75, 105, 165) A1 All four correct. Extra solns in range 1
(x) = cao A1
[4]

 5   3  2
     
5 (i) AB =  − 1  −  2  =  − 3  B1 Or BA, CB. Allow any combination. Ignore
 − 2   − 3  1 labels.
     
 6   5  1 
     
BC =  1  −  − 1  =  2  B1
 2  − 2  4
     
AB. BC = 2 − 6 + 4 oe must be seen = 0 M1 Could be part of calculation for angle ABC
hence ABC = 90º A1 AG Alt methods Pythag, Cosine Rule
[4]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

 Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2015 9709 13

(ii) AB = 14 , BC = 21 oe B1 At least one correct

1
Area = 14 21 M1 Reasonable attempt at vectors and their
2 magnitudes
8.6 oe A1 7 6
[3] Allow
2

6 (i) Attempt to find (f −1 ) −1 M1

1 5
2 xy = 1 − 5 x or = y+ Allow 1 sign error A1 Or with x/y transposed.
2x 2
1
1
x= oe Allow 1 sign error (total) A1 Or with x/y transposed. Allow x = 2 .
2y + 5 y+ 5
2
1
1 9
(f ( x)) = for x [ − A1 B1 Allow 2 . Condone x > − 9 , ( − 9 , ∞ )
2x + 5 4 x+ 5 4 4
9 2
(Allow − Y x Y ∞ ) [5] (etc.)
4

1− 5
(ii)
f −1
()
1 =
x 2
x M1 Reasonable attempt to find f -1  1  .
 x
x
x−5 1 5 A1
or x−
2 2 2 [2]

7 (i) (9 − p ) 2 + (3 p ) 2 = 169 M1 Or = 13
10 p 2 − 18 p − 88 ( = 0) oe A1 3-term quad
p = 4 or − 11 / 5 oe A1
[3]

2
(ii) Gradient of given line = − B1
3
3
Hence gradient of AB = M1 Attempt using m1m2 = −1
2
3 3p  − 2   3p  9 − p  3
= oe eg     = 1 M1 Or vectors   .  
2 9− p  3 9− p  3 p   − 2
(includes previous M1)
p=3 A1
[4]

8 (i) − ( x + 1) −2 − 2( x + 1) −3 M1A1 M1 for recognisable attempt at differentn.

A1 2
− x − 4 x − 3 from Q rule. (A2,1,0)
[3] Allow 4
( x + 1)

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

 Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2015 9709 13

(ii) f ' ( x) < 0 hence decreasing B1 Dep. on their (i) < 0 for x > 1
[1]

(iii) 2 dy
−1
2
− 2
3
= 0 or − x − 4 x4 − 3 = 0 M1* Set to 0
( x + 1) dx
( x + 1) ( x + 1)
− ( x + 1) − 2 M1 OR mult by ( x + 1)3 or ( x + 1)5 (i.e.×mult)
3
= 0 → − x − 1 − 2 = 0 or
( x + 1) Dep* × multn → −( x + 1)3 − 2( x + 1) 2 = 0
2
− x − 4x − 3 = 0

x = −3, y = −1 / 4 A1A1 (−3, −1/4) www scores 4/4

[4]

9 (a) 2222/17 (=131 or 130.7) M1 Ignore signs. Allow 2239/17→131.7 or 132

131 × 17 (=2227) M1 Ignore signs. Use 131.
−2222 + 2227 = 5 A1 5 www gets 3/3
[3]

(b) r = 2 cos θ soi oe B1

3
( −1 < ) 2 cos θ < 1 or (0 <) 2 cos θ < 1 soi M1 Ft on their r. Ignore a 2nd inequality on
3 3 LHS

π / 6, 5π / 6 soi (but dep. on M1) A1A1 Allow 30º, 150º.

π / 6 < θ < 5π / 6 cao A1 Accept Y
[5]

10 (i) dy
= 6 − 6x B1
dx
At x = 2 , gradient = −6 soi B1
y − 9 = −6( x − 2) oe Expect y = −6 x + 21 M1 Line through (2, 9) and with gradient their
−6
When y = 0, x = 3 12 cao A1
[4]

(ii) Area under curve: ∫ 9 + 6 x − 3x 2 dx = 9 x + 3x 2 − x 3 B2,1,0 Allow unsimplified terms

(27 + 27 − 27) − (18 + 12 − 8) M1 Apply limits 2,3. Expect 5
Area under tangent: 1 × 3 × 9 ( = 27 ) OR ∫ 2 2 (−6 x + 21) dx (→ 27 ). Ft on their
7

2 2 4 B1
4
− 6 x + 21 and/or their 7/2.
Area required 27 − 5 = 7 A1
4 4
[5]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

 Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – May/June 2015 9709 13

11 (i) OC = r cos α or AC = r sin α or oe soi M1

(Area ∆OAC =) 12 r 2 sin α cos α A1
1
2
r 2 sin α cos α = 12 × 12 r 2α oe M1 Or e.g.
1 r 2α − 1 r 2 cos α sin α = 1 r 2α
2 2 4
2
1
2r α − 1 2 r 2 cos α sin α = 1 2 r 2 cos α sin α

sin α cos α = 12 α A1 AG
[4]

(ii) Perimeter ∆OAC = r + r sin α + r cos α = 2.4(0)r M1A1 Allow with r a number. 2.0164 gets M1A0
Perim.
ACB = rα + r sin α + r − r cos α = 2.18r or 2.17r M1A1 Allow with r a number. 0.9644 gets M1A0
Allow 2.2 www.
2.4( 0 )
Ratio = : 1 = 1.1 : 1 A1 Use of cos = 0.6, sin = 0.8, α = 0.9 is PA 1
2.18 or 2.17
[5]

(iii) 54.3º cao B1

[1]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2015

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2014 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/11 Paper 1, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2014 series for
most Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

 Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2014 9709 11

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not
usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or
just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in
hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application
of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work
only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

 Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2014 9709 11

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

part question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question
remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through ”
marks. MR is not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is
regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

 Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2014 9709 11

1 7
C1 × 26 × a (=) 7C2 × 25 × a2 soi B2, 1, 0 Treat the same error in each expression as a
 7 × 26  2 single error
a =  =
5 
oe B1
 21 × 2  3 [3]

2 tan–1(3) = 1.249 or 71.565º M1 Attempt at tan–13 or right angle triangle

with attempt at hypotenuse = √10
sin 1.25 or sin71.6 or 0.949 soi M1 Attempt at sin tan–13
(x =) 1.95 cao, accept 1 + 3 oe A1
10 [3] Answer only B3

3 13 sin 2 θ + 2 cos θ + cos 2 θ = 4 + 2 cos θ M1 Attempt to multiply by 2 + cos θ

13 sin 2 θ + 1 − sin 2 θ = 4 → sin 2 θ = 14 M1 Use of s2 + c2 appropriately
or 13 − 13 cos 2 θ + cos 2 θ = 4 → cos 2 θ = 3
4
A1A1 SC both answers correct in radians, A1
30º, 150º [4] only
Ft on 180 – their first value of ߠ

4 (i) 32 − 4k = 20 ⇒ k = 3 M1A1 Sub (8, −4) [alt: (2b + 4 ) / (b − 8 ) = −4 / k

4b + 3 × 2b = 20 M1 Sub (b, 2b), 4b + 2bk = 20
b=2 A1 M1 both M1 solving A1,
[4] A1 ]

(ii) Mid-point = (5, 0) B1 Ft on their b

[1]

5 x 2 + x(k − 2) + (k − 2)(= 0) M1 Equate and move terms to one side of equ.

Apply b 2 − 4 ac (>0). Allow [ at this
(k − 2) 2 − 4(k − 2)(> 0) soi M1 stage.
(k − 2)(k − 6)(> 0) DM1
k < 2 or k > 6 (condone Y, [) A2 Attempt to factorise or solve or find 2
Allow {–∞, 2}U{6, ∞} etc. [5] solns. SCA1 for 2, 6 seen with wrong
inequalities

6 (i) AB or BA = ±[(7i − 3j + k) – (3i + 2j – k)]= M1A1 May be seen in part (ii)

±(4i − 5j + 2k)
(AO.AB) = ±(12 – 10 – 2) [allow as column if total DM1 OR AB2 = 45, AO2 = 14, OB2 = 59
given]
=0 hence OAB = 90° A1 Hence AB 2 + AO 2 = OB 2
[4] Hence OAB = 90º

(ii) OA = 9 + 4 + 1 = 14 ,
AB = 16 + 25 + 4 = 45 B1 At least one magnitude correct in (i) or (ii)
 
3 70 

 
Accept 12.6, oe
2
Area ∆ = 1
2
14 ( 45 ) = 12.5 M1A1
[3]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

 Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2014 9709 11

7 (i) S = a , 3S = a B1 At least 3 S = a
1−r 1−2 r 1−2 r
1 – r = 3 – 6r M1 Eliminate S
r = 52 A1
[3]

(ii) 7 + (n − 1)d = 84 and/or 7 + (3n − 1)d = 245 B1 At least one of these equations seen
[ (n − 1)d = 77 , (3n − 1)d = 238 , 2nd = 161 ] B1 Two different seen – unsimplified ok
n −1 = 77 (must be from the correct un formula) M1 Or other attempt to elim d. E.g. sub d = 161
3 n −1 238 2n
(if n is eliminated d must be found)
n = 23 (d = 77 = 3.5) A1
22 [4]

8 (i) Arc AB = 4α B1
Arc DC = ( 4 cos α )α B1
AC (or DB ) = 4 − 4 cos α B1
Perimeter = 4α cos α + 4α + 8 − 8 cos α B1
[4]

OD = 4 cos π  = 2 3 
 
(ii) B1
6 

( )
2
Shaded area =  1
× 42 × π6   − 12 2 3 × π6  B1B1
 
2

π B1 Or k = 13
3 [4]

9 (i) f ′(2) = 4 − 12 = 72 → gradient of normal = − 72 B1M1

2
y − 6 = − ( x − 2) AEF
7 A1 Ft from their f ′(2 )
[3]

(ii) f ( x ) = x 2 + 2x ( + c ) B1B1
6 = 4 +1+ c ⇒ c = 1 M1A1 Sub (2, 6) – dependent on c being present
[4]

(iii) 2 x − 22 = 0 ⇒ 2 x 3 − 2 = 0 M1 Put f ′(x ) = 0 and attempt to solve

x
x =1 A1 Not necessary for last A mark as
x > 0 given
f ′′ ( x ) = 2 + 43 or any valid method M1
x
f ′′(1) = 6 OR > 0 hence minimum A1 Dependent on everything correct
[4]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

 Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2014 9709 11

10 (i) ( x − 1) 2 − 16 B1B1
[2]

(ii) –16 B1 Ft from (i)

[1]

(iii) 9 Y (x – 1)2 – 16 Y=65 OR x 2 − 2 x − 15 = 9 → 6,−4 M1 OR x2 – 2x – 24 [ 0, x2 – 2x – 80 Y 0,

25 Y=(x – 1)2 Y=81 x 2 − 2 x − 15 = 65 → 10,−8 M1 (x – 6)(x + 4) [=0 (x – 10)(x + 8) Y 0
5 Y=x – 1 Y=9 p=6 A1 x[6
6 Y=x Y=10 q = 10 A1 x Y 10
[4] SC B2, B2 for trial/improvement

(iv) x = ( y − 1) 2 − 16 [interchange x/y] M1 OR ( x − 1) 2 = y + 16

y − 1 = (±) x + 16 M1 x = 1 + ( ± ) y + 16
−1
f ( x) = 1 + x + 16 A1 f −1 ( x) = 1 + x + 16
[3]

1 
(i) For y = (4 x + 1) 2 , dy =  1 ( 4 x + 1) 2  × [ 4 ]
1 −
11 B1B1
dx  2 
 
2
When x = 2, gradient m1 = 3
B1 Ft from their derivative above
dy
For y = 12 x 2 + 1 , = x → gradient m 2 = 2 B1
dx
α = tan −1 m2 − tan −1 m1 M1
α = 63.43 − 33.69 = 29.7 cao A1
[6]

 3 
1  
(ii) ( 4 x +1) 2
∫ ( 4 x + 1) 2 dx =  
 ÷ [ 4] B1B1
 2/3 
 
 

∫ ( x + 1) dx =
2
1
2
1
6
x3 + x B1

∫( ) [ ]
2 1 2
∫ (4 x + 1) dx =
0
2 1
6
[27 − 1] , 1
0 2
x 2 + 1 dx = 8
6
+2 M1 Apply limits 0 → 2 to at least the 1st
integral
13 − 10
M1 Subtract the integrals (at some stage)
3 3
1 A1
[6]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2014 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/12 Paper 1, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2014 series for
most Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

 Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2012 9709 12

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more "method" steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only.
A and B marks are not given for fortuitously "correct" answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

 Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2012 9709 12

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no "follow through" from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only − often written by a ‘fortuitous' answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR−1 A penalty of MR−1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or
part question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question
remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become "follow through "
marks. MR is not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures − this is
regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR−2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA−1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The
PA−1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

 Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2014 9709 12

1 Vol = ( π) ∫x²dy = (π) ∫ (y − 1) dy M1 Use of ∫x ² – not ∫y² – ignore π

A1 co
1 ( y − 1) 2
Integral is y 2 − y or B1 Sight of an integral sign with 1 and 5
2 2
Limits for y are 1 to 5

→ 8π or 25.1(AWRT) A1 co
[4] (no π max 3/4)

5
2 (i) tanθ = M1 Any valid trig method ag
12
→ ( θ = 0.3948 ) [1]

ଵ
(ii) Other angle in triangle = − π – 0.3948 B1 Unsimplified OK
ଶ
ଵ
Area of triangle AOB = ×12×5 (= 30) B1 co
ଶ
ଵ
Use of r²θ once M1 With θ in radians and r = 5 or 12
ଶ
Shaded area = sector + sector – triangle
ଵ ଵ
= ×12²×0.3948 + 5²θ – 30 DM1 Sum of 2 sectors – triangle or any other
ଶ ଶ
valid method using the given angle and a
different one.
= 28.43 + 14.70 – 30 = 13.1 A1 co
[5]

3 (i) (1 + x )5 = 1 + 5x + 10x² B2,1 Loses 1 for each error

[2]
(ii) (1 + px + x 2 )5
(1+) 5(px + x²) + 10(px + x²)2 M1 Replace x by (px + x²) in their expansion

Coeff of x² = 5 + 10p² DM1 Considers 2 terms

= 95 → p = 3 A1 co – no penalty for ±3
[3]

12
4 y=
3 − 2x

(i) Differential = −12(3 – 2x)−2 × −2 B1 B1 co co (even if 1st B mark lost)

[2]

dy dy dx
(ii) = ÷ = 0.4 ÷ 0.15 M1 Chain rule used correctly (AEF)
dx dt dt
24 8 dy 8 3
→ = M1 Equates their with their or
2 3
(3 − 2 x ) dx 3 8

→ x = 0 or 3 A1 A1 co co
[4]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

 Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2014 9709 12

5 1 + sinxtanx = 5cosx

(i) Replaces t by s/c M1 Correct formula

2
s
1+ = 5c
c
Replace s² by 1 − c² M1 Correct formula used in appropriate place

→ 6c² − c − 1 (= 0) A1 AG
[3]

(ii) Soln of quadratic → (c = −⅓ or ½) M1 Correct method

→ x = 60° or 109.5° A1 A1 co co
[3]

6 y = x3 + ax2 + bx

dy
(i) = 3x² + 2ax + b B1 co
dx
dy
(ii) b² − 4ac = 4a² − 12b (I 0) M1 Use of discriminant on their quadratic
dx
or other valid method
→ a² I= 3b A1 co – answer given
[3]

(iii) y = x³ − 6x² + 9x
dy
= 3x² − 12x + 9 I 0 M1 Attempt at differentiation
dx
= 0 when x = 1 and 3 A1 co
→ 1IxI3 A1 condone <
[3]

7 (i) AM = −6i + 2j + 5k B2,1 co −1 each error

AC = −8i + 8j B1 co
[3]

(ii) AM.AC = 48 + 16 = 64 M1 Use of x1y1 + etc. with suitable vectors

64 = √128√65cosθ M1 M1 Product of moduli. Correct link.

→ θ = 45.4° A1 co
[4]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

 Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2014 9709 12

8 (a) Sn = 32n − n².

Set n to 1, a or S1 = 31 B1 co
Set n to 2 or other value S2 = 60
→ 2nd term = 29 → d = − 2 M1 A1 Correct method.
(or equates formulae – compares co
coeffs n², n) [3]
[M1 comparing, A1 d A1 a] [M1 only when coeffs compared]

a a(1 − r ) 2
(b) = 20 , , or a + ar = 12.8 B1 B1 co co
1− r 1− r

a
Elimination of or a or r M1 ‘Correct’ elimination to form equation in a
1− r or r
→ (r = 0.6) → a = 8 DM1 A1 Complete method leading to a =
[5] Condone a = 8 and 32

−9
9 (i) mAB = −3 or B1 oe
3
1
mAD = M1 use of m1m2 = −1 with grad AB
3
1
Eqn AD y – 6 = (x – 2) or 3y = x + 16 A1 co – OK unsimplified
3
[3]
(ii) Eqn CD y – 3 = −3(x – 8) or y = −3x + 27 B1 OK unsimplified. on m of AB.
Sim Eqns M1 Reasonable algebra leading to x = or
y = with AD and CD
→ D (6½, 7½) A1
[3]
(iii) Use of vectors or mid-point
→ E (5, 12) or mid-point (5,4.5) B1 May be implied
Length of BE = 15 B1 co
[2]

d 2 y 24
10 = −4
dx 2 x 3
(i) (If x = 2) it’s negative → Max B1 www
[1]

 dy 
(ii)  =  −12x−2 – 4x + (A) B2,1,0 oe one per term
 dx 
= 0 when x = 2 M1 Attempt at the constant A after ∫n
→ A = 11 A1 co
[4]
(iii) (y =) 12x−1 − 2x² + Ax + (c) B2,1,0 oe Doesn’t need +c, but does need a term A
to give “Ax”.
y = 13 when x = 1 → c = −8 M1 Attempt at c after ∫n
(If x = 2) y = 12 A1 co
[4]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

 Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2014 9709 12

1 
11 f : x ↦ 6 – 4cos  x 
2 
1  1  1 
(i) 6 – 4cos  x  = 4 → 4cos  x  = 2 M1 Makes cos  x  the subject.
 2  2  2 
1 1 2 1
x= π x= π M1 Looks up " x ” before ×2
2 3 3 2

A1 co (120° gets A0 − decimals A0)

[3]

(ii) Range is 2 < f(x) < 10 B1 B1 condone <

[2]

(iii) B1 Point of inflexion at ߨ

B1 Fully correct
[2]
1  1 1 
(iv) cos x  = (6 − y ) M1 Makes cos  x  the subject
2  4 2 
1 1 
x = cos −1  (6 − y ) M1 Order of operations correct
2 4  (M marks allowed if + for −)
6− x
f–1(x) = 2cos–1   A1 oe – needs to be a function of x not y
 4 
[3]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
Cambridge International Advanced Subsidiary and Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2014 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/13 Paper 1, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2014 series for
most Cambridge IGCSE®, Cambridge International A and AS Level components and some
Cambridge O Level components.

® IGCSE is the registered trademark of Cambridge International Examinations.

 Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2014 9709 13

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more "method" steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only.
A and B marks are not given for fortuitously "correct" answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

 Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2014 9709 13

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no "follow through" from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous' answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

part question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question
remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become "follow through "
marks. MR is not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is
regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR–2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2014 9709 13

1 (15 or 16
) 2
(
C 2 × 2 4 × (ax ) , 20 or 6C 3 × 2 3 × (ax ) ) 3 B1B1
15 × 2 4 3
a= = M1A1 240 a = 160 a is M0
20 × 2 3 2 [4]

3 π
2 (i) CB or AB = or 3 tan B1 Allow throughout for e.g. 3 3 ,
π 3
tan
( 3) , 9
3
6 B1 27, 33 ,
3
 2π π
Arc or AC = 3 ×  or  (= 2π or π ) B1 After B0B0 SCB1 for 16.7
 3 3
[3]
Perimeter = 6 3 + 2π oe B1 Their AB in form k√3

1
(ii) Area OABC (2) × × 3 × their AB
2
9 3 B1
(=9√3 or )
2
1  2π π   3π 
Area OADC × 3 2 ×  or   = 3π or  B1 After B0B0 SCB1 for 6.16 or 6.17.
2  2 3  2 
Shaded area 9 3 − 3π oe
Allow ( 3) 5
− 3π
[3]

3 (i) (3x − 2)2 + 1 B1B1B1 For either of 1st 2 marks bracket

must be in the form (ax + b )2
except for
2
 2
SCB2 for 9 x −  + 1
 3
[3]

(ii) f ′( x ) = 9 x 2 − 12 x + 5 B1
= their (3 x − 2 ) + 1
2
M1 Ft from (i). Some
> 0 (or > 1) hence an increasing function A1 reference/recognition
[3] Allow > 1. Allow their 1 provided
positive.
Allow a complete alt method (2/2
or 0/2)

2 3
4 (i) SP = , SP = M1 At least one correct
1 1
1− 1−
2 3
9 A1
S P = 4, S Q = At least one correct
2
SR = 5 cao A1
[3]
4
(ii) = their S R M1
1− r
1
r= A1
5

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2014 9709 13

4 4 24
R=4+ + = 4 or 4.96 cao A1
5 25 25
[3]

5 (i) (s 2
− c 2 )( s 2 + c 2 ) OR s 2 (1 − c 2 ) − c 2 (1 − s 2 ) M1 OR sin4θ – (1 – sin2θ)2
sin2θ – cos2θ A1 sin4θ – (1 – 2sin2θ + sin4θ)
2sin2θ – 1 www AG A1 = 2sin2θ – 1 AG
[3]
1 3 1
(ii) 2sin2θ – 1 = ⇒ sinθ = (± ) or (± )0.866 B1 OR cos 2θ = − → 2θ = 120, 240
2 2 2
etc.

θ = 60° B1 Ft for 180 – their 60

θ = 120° B1 Ft for 180 + their 60, 360 – their
60
π 2π
B1 Allow , etc. Extra sols in
θ = 240°, 300° 3 3
[4]
range −1

3a + 9 − (2a − 1) a + 10 − a − 10
6 (i) m= = oe e.g. M1A1 cao Allow omission of brackets
2a + 4 − a a+4 −a−4 for M1
− (a + 4)
Gradient of perpendicular = oe but A1 Do not ISW. Max penalty for
a + 10 erroneous cancellation 1 mark
−1
not
 a + 10 
 
 a+4  [3]

(ii) (√)[(a + 4)2 + (a + 10)2] = (√)260 M1 Allow their (a + 4), (a +10) from
(i). Allow (–a – 4)2 etc. Allow
omission of brackets
(√)[(a + 4)2 + (a + 10)2] cao A1
(
(2) a 2 + 14a − 72 (= 0) ) A1
a = 4 or − 18 cao A1
[4]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2014 9709 13

7 (i) OA.OB = − 7 + 3 − 3 p + p 2 M1 Correct method for scalar product

( p + 1)( p − 4 ) = 0 DM1 Equate to zero & attempt to
factorise/solve
p = −1 or 4 A1 ‘= 0’ implied by answers
[3]
(ii) ( ) (
49 + 1 − p 2 + p 2 = 2 1 + 9 + p 2 ) M1 Scalar result required
p = 15 A1
[2]
(iii) AB = −8i + 6j B1 p = 15 used – treat as MR
Divide AB by│AB│ = (− 8) 2
+ 6 2 = 10 soi M1 1 
 −8 

1 →  − 17 
Unit vector = (− 8i + 6 j) oe cao A1 353  
10 [3]  0 

8 (i) Minimum since f ″(3) (= 4/3) > 0 www B1

[1]
(ii) f ′(x ) = −18 x −2 (+ c ) B1
0 = −2 + c M1 Sub f ᇱ 3  0. (dep c present)
(
c = 2 → f ′(x ) = −18 x −2 + 2 ) A1 c = 2 sufficient at this stage
f (x ) = 18 x + 2 x (+ k )
−1
B1 B1 Allow cx at this stage
7=6+6+k M1 Sub f(3) = 3 (k present & numeric
k = −5 → ( f ( x ) = 18 x −1 + 2 x − 5 ) cao A1
(or no) c)
[7]

9 (i) x − 3 x + 2 or k 2 − 3k + 2 or 3 x ( ) 2
= (x + 2 )
2
M1 OR attempt to eliminate x eg sub
y2
x=
9
x = 1 or 2 or k = 1 or 2 or x 2 − 5 x + 4 (= 0 )
2
A1 y − 9 y + 18 = 0
x = 1 or 4 A1 y = 3 or 6
A1 x = 1 or 4
y = 3 or 6
[4]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
Cambridge International AS/A Level – October/November 2014 9709 13

1
 ∫ ( x + 2 ) dx or attempt at trapezium 
∫
(ii) 3 x dx –   M1DM1 Attempt to integrate. Subtract at
2 some stage
3  1 2  1 
2x −  x + 2 x  or ( y 2 + y1 )(x 2 − x1 ) A1A1 Where (x1 , y1 ), ( x 2 , y 2 ) is their
2  2  2  (1, 3), (4, 6)

 1  1 
(16 − 2) –  (8 + 8) −  + 2  or their × 9 × 3 DM1 Apply their 1→4 limits correctly
 2  2  to curve
1 A1 For A mark allow reverse subtn→
2 1 1
− → but not reversed limits
[6] 2 2
OR
2
 ( y − 2 ) dy or attempt at trap  − y dy
∫  ∫ 9 M1DM1
3
1 2 1  y
2 y − 2 y or ( x1 + x 2 )( y 2 − y1 ) −
 27 A1A1
 2 
  1  1 
(18 − 12) −  4 2 − 6  or 2 × 5 × 3 − [8 − 1] DM1 Apply their 3→6 limits correctly
    to curve
1 A1
2
1 2
10 (a) (i) ( a + b ) 3 = 2, ( 9a + b ) 3 = 16 B1B1 Ignore 2nd soln (–9, 17) throughout
a + b = 8, 9a + b = 64 M1 Cube etc. & attempt to solve
a = 7, b = 1 A1 Correct answers without any
working 0/4
[4]
1
(ii) x = (7 y + 1) 3 (x/y interchange as first or last B1 ft on from their a, b or in terms of
step) a, b
x 3 = 7 y + 1 or y 3 = 7 x + 1 B1 ft on from their a, b or in terms of
a, b
1 3
f −1 (x ) =
7
(
x − 1 cao ) B1 A function of x required

Domain of f −1 is x > 1 cao B1 Accept >. Must be x

[4]
2
dy  1 
=  ( 7 x 2 + 1)  × [14 x ]
−
(b) 3 B1B1
dx  3 
dy 1 2
 7
= × (64) 3 × 42
−
When x = 3 , =  M1
dx 3  8
dy dy dx 7 DM1
= × = ×8 Use chain rule
dt dx dt 8
7 A1
[5]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2014 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/11 Paper 1, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2014 series for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level components.
 Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 11

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only.
A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

 Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 11

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only - often written by a “fortuitous” answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR–1 A penalty of MR–1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or
part question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question
remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through “
marks. MR is not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is
regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR–2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA–1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The
PA–1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

 Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 11

1 a = 1, b=2 B1B1 Or 1 + 2 sin x

[2]

B1B1
(2 x − 3) 2 − 9
For −3 and −9
2 (i)
[2]
M1 At least one of these statements
(ii) 2x − 3 > 4 2 x − 3 < −4
1 1 1 1
x > 3 (or) x < − cao A1 Allow ‘and’ 3 , − soi scores first M1
2 2 2 2
1 1
Allow − > x > 3
2 2

OR 4x2 – 12x – 7 → (2x – 7)(2x + 1) M1 Attempt to solve 3-term quadratic

1 1 1 1
x>3 (or) < − cao A1 Allow ‘and’ 3 , − soi scores first M1
2 2 2 2
[2]
1 1
Allow − > x > 3
2 2

8 2 6 1  B1B1B1 Seen in expansion ok. Allow 8C2

3 [ C 6 or 28] × [16 or 4 ]( x ) ×  6 6 
 (64or 2 )( x ) 
7 B1 Identified as answer
[4]

4
dy
dx
[ ]
= − 2 × 4(3 x + 1)−3 × [3] B1B1 [–2 × 4u–3] × [3] is B0B1 unless resolved
dy
When x = −1, =3 B1
dx
When x = −1, y = 1 soi B1
1
y – 1 = 3(x + 1) (→ y = 3x + 4) B1 Ft on their ‘3’ only (not − ). Dep on diffn
[5] 3

5 (i) 200/2(2a + 199d) = 4 × 100/2(2a + 99d) M1A1 Correct formula used (once) M1, correct
eqn A1
d = 2a cao A1
[3]
(ii) a + 99d = a + 99 × 2a M1 Sub. their part(i) into correct formula
199a cao A1
[2]

1 B1
6 (i) area ∆ = × 4 × 4tanα oe soi 4 tan α = 16 / cos 2 α − 16 . (Can also score in
2
1 B1 answer) Accept θ throughout
Area sector = × 2 2 α oe soi
2
Shaded area = 8tanα − 2α cao B1 Little/no working – accept terms in answer
[3]

4 B1
(ii) DC = − 2 oe soi
cos α 4
B1 = 16 + 16 tan 2 α . Can score in answer
Arc DE = 2α soi anywhere provided clear cos α
4
Perimeter = + 4 tan α + 2α cao
cos α B1 Little/no working – accept terms in answer
[3]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

 Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 11

7 (a − 3)2 + (2 − b)2 = 125 oe B1

2−b
=2 oe B1
a −3
(a − 3)2 + (2a − 6)2 = 125
(sub for a or b) M1 Or 1/4(2 – b)2 + (2 – b)2 = 125
(5)(a + 2)(a – 8) (= 0) Attempt factorise/solve M1 Or (5)(b – 12)(b + 8) (= 0)
a = –2 or 8, b = 12 or –8 A1A1 Answers (no working) after 2 correct eqns
[6] score SCB1B1 for each correct pair (a, b)

8 (i) OA.OB = –3p2 – 4 + p4 soi M1

(p2 + 1)(p2 – 4) = 0 oe e.g. with substitution M1 Put = 0 (soi) and attempt to solve
p = ±2 and no other real solutions A1
[3]
 9   − 3  12 
     
(ii) BA =  4  −  − 1  =  5  M1 Reversed subtraction can score M1M1A0
9  9   0 
     

BA = 12 2 + 5 2 = 13 and division by their 13 M1

12 
1 
Unit vector = 5 cao A1
13  
0 [3]

sin 2 θ − (1 − cosθ )
9 (i) LHS ≡ cao B1 Put over common denominator
(1 − cosθ )sin θ
1 − cos 2 θ − 1 + cosθ
LHS ≡ M1 Use
ଶ  1   ଶ oe
(1 − cosθ )sin θ
cosθ (1 − cosθ )
LHS ≡ M1 Correct factorisation from line 2
(1 − cosθ )sin θ
1
LHS ≡ A1 AG
tan θ
[4]
1
(ii) tan θ = (± ) M1
2
26.6°, 153.4° A1A1 Ft for 180 – 1st answer
[3]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

 Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 11

10 (i) –5 Y f(x) Y 4 For f(x) allow x or y; B1 Allow less explicit answers (eg 5 → 4
allow <, [–5, 4], (–5,4) [1]

(ii) f–1(x) approximately correct (independent of f) B1

Closed region between (1, 1) and (4, 4); line
reaches x-axis DB1 Ignore line 
[2]
1 B1 Allow y = ..... but must be a function of x
(iii) LINE: f–1(x) = (x + 2)
3
for –5 Y x Y 1 B1B1 cao but allow <

4 4
CURVE: 5 − y = OR x = 5− M1
x y
4
f −1 (x ) = 5 − oe A1 cao
x
for 1 < x Y 4 B1 cao but allow < or <
[6]

11 (i) x2 + 4x + c – 8 (= 0) M1 Attempt to simplify to 3-term quadratic

16 – 4(c – 8) = 0 M1 Apply b2 – 4ac = 0. ‘= 0’ soi
c =12 A1
OR
–2 – 2x = 2 → x = (–2) M1 Equate derivs of curve and line. Expect x=−2
–4 + c = 8 + 4 – 4 M1 Sub their x = −2 into line and curve, and
equate
c = 12 A1
[3]
2
(ii) x + 4x + 3 → (x + 1)(x + 3) (= 0) → B1
x = –1 or –3

( 2
)
∫ 8 − 2 x − x − [∫ (2 x + 11) or area of trapezium] M1M1 Attempt to integrate. At some stage subtract

[ ]
 3  3
x x 1
8 x − x −  − x + 11x or 8 x − x −  − (5 + 9) × 2
2 2 2
A1B1 A1 for curve, B1 for line
 3   3  2  2 x3 
OR − 3 x − 2 x −  A2,1,0
 3 
Apply their limits to at least integral for curve
1 M1 For M marks allow reversed limits and/or
1 oe
3 A1 subtraction of areas but then final A0
[7]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

 Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 11

2 32
x − 2 x 2 + (c )
1
12 (i) y= oe B1B1 Attempt to integrate
3
2 16 M1  2
= −4+c Sub  4, . Dependent on c present
3 3  3
2
c=− A1
3 [4]
1 − 12 1 − 32
(ii) x + x oe B1B1
2 2 [2]
1 − 12 x −1
(iii) x2 − x =0→ =0 M1 Equate to zero and attempt to solve
x
x=1 A1
2 2
When x = 1, y = − 2 − = −2 M1A1 Sub. their ‘1’ into their ‘y’
3 3
d2 y
When x = 1, (= 1) > 0 Hence minimum B1 Everything correct on final line. Also dep on
dx 2 [5] correct (ii). Accept other valid methods

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2014 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/12 Paper 1, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2014 series for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level components.
 Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2012 9709 12

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more "method" steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only.
A and B marks are not given for fortuitously "correct" answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2012

 Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2012 9709 12

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no "follow through" from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only - often written by a ‘fortuitous' answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR -1 A penalty of MR -1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

part question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question
remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become "follow through √"
marks. MR is not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures - this is
regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR-2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA -1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA -1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2012

 Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 12

1 (2, 7) to (10, 3)
Mid-point (6, 5) B1 co
Gradient = −½ B1 co
Perp gradient = 2 B1 co
Eqn y − 5 = 2(x − 6 ) M1 Must be correct form of Perp
Sets y to 0, → (3½, 0) A1 co x = 3½ only is ok.
[5]

2 (1 + x )(
2 x
2 − x)
4 6
.
1
Term in x² = 15 × 16 × (−4)² = 15 B1 B1 B1 unsimplified. B1 15.
1
Constant term = 20 × × (−4)³ = −160 8 B1 B1 B1 unsimplified. B1 −160
Coefficient of x² = −145 B1 Uses 2 terms. on previous answers
[5]

3 reflex angle θ is such that cosθ = k,

(i) (a) sin θ = − √(1 − k²) B1 B1 (−) B1 rest B1

[2]
− 1− k2
(b) Uses t=s/c → B1 for (i) ÷ k.
k [1]
(ii) θ is in 4th quadrant.
2θ lies between 540° and 720° B1 co
sin2θ is negative in both these quadrants. B1 co
[2]

4 (i)
2
1 θ = 1 2 r 2θ − 1 2 r 2 sin θ
2r B1 Correct equation.
→ 2sin θ = θ → p = 2. B1 All ok – answer given.
[2]
(ii) Chord length = 8sin1.2 × 2 (14.9) M1 Needs ×2. Any method ok.
(or from cosine rule)
Arc length = 2.4 × 8 (19.2) B1
Perimeter = sum of these = 34.1 A1 co
[3]

1 cos θ
5 (i) − ≡ tan θ . M1 Correct addition of fractions
cos θ 1 + sin θ
1 + s − c2 s2 + s s
LHS = = = M1M1 Use of s²+c²=1. (1 + s)cancelled.
c(1 + s ) c(1 + s ) c
= tanθ A1 → answer given.
[4]
(ii) → tanθ + 2 = 0 ie tanθ = −2 M1 Uses part (i). Allow tanθ=±2
→ θ = 116.6° or 296.6° A1 A1 Co. for 180°+ and no other solutions in
[3] the range.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

 Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 12

6 (i) GP 8 8r 8r²
AP 8 8 + 8d 8 + 20d
8r = 8 + 8d and 8r 2 = 8 + 20d B1 B1 B1 for each equation.
Eliminates d → 2r 2 − 5r + 3 = 0 M1 Correct elimination.
→ r = 1.5 ( or 1) A1 co (no penalty for including r = 1)
[4]
(ii) 4th term of GP = ar³ = 8 × 27/8 = 27 B1 co
If r = 1.5, d = 0.5
4th term of AP = a + 3d = 9½ M1A1 needs a +3d and correct method for d
[3]

 − 2  3
   
7 (i) (b − a).(b − c) =  − 1  .  2  M1 AB = b − a once (a – b is ok)
 2   4 M1 Use of x1x2... with AB and CB
   
→ −6 − 2 + 8 = 0 → 90° A1 All correct
[3]
 2 
 
(ii) Unit vector = ⅓  1  M1 Method for unit vector.
 − 2
 
 8 
 
CD = 12 × unit vector = ±  4  M1 Knows to multiply by 12 or ±4BA
 − 8
 
12
 
 
OD = OC + CD =  9  M1 A1 Correct method. co
 − 2 [4]
 

d2 y
8 = 2x − 1
dx 2
dy
→ ∫ = x² − x +c B1 Correct integration (ignore +c)
dx
= 0 when x = 3 → c = − 6 M1 A1 Uses a constant of integration. co
x 2 − x − 6 = 0 when x = − 2 (or 3) A1 Puts dy/dx to 0
→ ∫ y = 1 3 x 3 − 1 2 x 2 − 6 x (+k) B1 B1 first 2 terms, for cx.
= −10 when x =3 M1 Correct method for k
→ k = 3½
→ y = 10 65 A1 Co –r 10.8
[8]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

 Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 12

9 y =8− 4− x
dy 1 1
= − (4 − x ) 2 × −1
−
(i) B1 B1 Without (−1). For (×−1).
dx 2
3

∫y dx = 8x −
(4 − x )2 ÷ −1
3
3 × B1 B1 for "8x" and +c". B1 for all except
2 ÷(−1). B1 for ÷(−1).
[5] (n.b. these 5 marks can be gained in(ii) or
(ii) Eqn y − 7 = 1 2 (x − 3) (iii))
→ y = ½x + 5½ M1A1 M1 unsimplified. A1 as y=mx+c
[2]
(iii) Area under curve = ∫ from 0 to 3 (58/3) M1 Use of limits – needs use of “0”
Area under line = ½(5½ + 7)×3 M1 Correct method
 11x 
Or  1 4 x 2 + from 0 to 3 M1 A1 M1 Subtraction. A1 co
 2  [4]
58 75 7
→ − =
3 4 12

10 f : x a 2x − 3, x ∈
,
g : x a x² + 4x, x ∈
.

(i) ff = 2(2x − 3) −3 Either forms ff correctly, or solves 2

Solves = 11 → x = 5 M1 equations co
(or 2x−3 =11, x = 7. 2x−3=7 → x = 5) A1
[2]
(ii) min at x = − 2
Any valid method – could be guesswork.
→ Range [ −4 M1 A1
[2]
Makes quadratic = 0 + 2 solutions
(iii) x ² + 4x − 12 ( > 0) M1
Correct limits – even if >,<,[,Y,=
→ x = 2 or − 6 A1
co
→ x < − 6 , x > 2. A1
[3]
co unsimplified
(iv) gf(x) = (2x − 3)² + 4(2x − 3) = p B1
→ 4x² − 4x − 3 − p = 0
Use of discriminant
Uses "b² − 4ac" 16 = 16(−3 −p) M1
co
→ p=−4 A1
[3]
co
(v) − 2 B1
[1]
−1 for each error
y = (x + 2) − 4
2
(vi) B2,1
Correct order of operations
y+4 = x+2 M1
co with x, not y. ± left A0.
h −1 (x) = x+4 −2 A1
[4]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2014 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/13 Paper 1, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2014 series for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level components.
 Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 13

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on
from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only. A
and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

 Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 13

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

part question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question
remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through ”
marks. MR is not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is
regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

 Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 13

5
− 2 
 
1  x2


x
3 3
Term in x is 10 × (x²)² ×  − 2  B1 10 or 5C2 or 5C3, B1  − 2 
   
x  B1 B1 x 
 
Coefficient = −80(x) B1 co Must be identified
[3]

2 36, 32, ...

(i) r = 8 S∞ = (their a) ÷ (1 – their r) M1 Method for r and S∞ ok. (│r│< 1)
9
S∞ = 36 ÷ 1 = 324 A1 co
9
[2]

(ii) d = −4 B1 co
0 = n (72 + (n – 1)(–4)) Sn formula ok and a value for d  ≠ 8 
 

2 M1
 9
→ n = 19 A1 Condone n = 0 but no other soln
[3]

3 (i) s = r θ M1 Used with major or minor arc

Angle of major arc = 2π – 2.2 = (4.083) B1 Could be gained in (ii).
Perimeter = 12 + 24.5 = 36.5 or 12π − 1.2 A1 co
(or full circle − minor arc B1)
[3]

1
(ii) Area of major sector = r ² θ = (73.49) M1 Used with major / minor sector.
2
1
Area of triangle = . 6 ² sin 2.2 = (14.55) M1 Correct formula or method.
2 (2π – 2.2) / sin 2.2 gets M1M1
Ratio = 5.05 : 1 (Allow 5.03 → 5.06) A1 co
[3]

4 tan x + 1 ≡ sin x + cos x

sin x tan x + cos x
s
  + 1
(i) LHS c = s2 + c 2 M1 Use of t = s / c twice
 s2  s +c M1 Correct algebra and use of s² + c² = 1

 c
+ c 
 

= RHS A1 AG all ok
[3]

(ii) s + c = 3s − 2c

→ tanx = 3 Allow cos2 = 4 , sin2 = 9 M1 Uses (i) and t = s t = 2 or 0 is M0

2 13 13 c 3
→ x = 0.983 and 4.12 or 4.13 A1 A1 co. 1st + π, providing no excess solns in
range. Allow 0.313π, 1.31π
[3]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

 Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 13

5 f(x) = 15
2x + 3
(i) f '(x) = −15 ×2
 2 x + 3
2 B1 B1 Without the “×2”. For “×2”
  (indep of 1st B1).
( )² always +ve → f '(x) < 0
(No turning points) – therefore an inverse B1 providing ( )² in f '(x). 1–1 insuff.
[3]

(ii) y = 15 → 2x + 3 = 15
y M1 Order of ops – allow sign error
2x + 3
15 − 3
→x= y → 15 − 3x A1 co as function of x. Allow y = …
2 2x
(Range) 0=Y f −1(x) Y 6.
Allow 0 Y yY 6, [0,6] B1 For range / domain ignore letters
(Domain) 1 Y x Y 5. Allow [1, 5] B1 unless range / domain not identified
[4]

dy 12
6 = P (2, 14) Normal 3y + x = 44
dx 4x + a
(i) m of normal = − 1 B1 co
3
dy 12
=3= → a=8 M1 A1 Use of m1m₂ = −1. AG.
dx 4x + a
[3]
1
1
(ii) ∫ y = 12(4x + a) ÷ 2 ÷ 4 (+c) B1 B1 Correct without “÷4”. for “÷4”.
2
Uses (2, 14) M1 Uses in an integral only. Dep ‘c’.
c = −10 A1 co All 4 marks can be given in (i)
[4]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

 Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 13

7 (i) Angle BAC needs sides AB,AC or BA,CA

AB.AC = (b − a).(c − a) Ignore their labels:
 4   0
   
   
=  − 2 .  3 = 10 B1 One of AB, BA, AC, CA correct
   
    M1 Use of x₁x₂ + y₁y₂, etc.
 4   4
   

= √36 × √25 cos BAC M1M1 M1 prod of moduli. M1 all linked

→ BAC = cos−1 1 AG A1 If e.g. BA.OC max B1M1M1. If both
3
vectors wrong 0 / 5. If e.g. BA.AC
 1
used → cos–1  − 3  final mark A0
 

[5]

1
(ii) sinBAC = 1 − B1 Use of s² + c² = 1 − not decimals
9
1
Area = × 6 × 5 × 8 = 5√8 oe M1 A1 Correct formula for area. Decimals seen A0
2 9
[3]

8 2x2 – 10x + 8 → a(x + b)2 + c

2
1 1 1
Or 2  x − 2 1  – 4
 
(i) a = 2, b = −2 , c = −4 3 × B1
2 2  2 2
1 1 1 1
→ min value is −4 Allow (2 ,−4 ) B1 Can score by sub x = 2 into original but
2 2 2 2
not by differentiation
[4]

(ii) 2x2 – 10x + 8 – kx = 0 Sets equation to 0 and uses

Use of “b² − 4ac” M1 discriminant correctly
(−10 − k)² − 64 < 0 or k² + 20 k + 36 < 0 M1 Realises discriminant < 0. Allow Y
→ k = − 18 or − 2 A1 co Dep on 1st M1 only
−18 < k < −2 A1 co
[4]

9 (i) 3x²y = 288 y is the height B1 co

A = 2(3x² + xy + 3xy) M1 Considers at least 5 faces (y ≠ x)

Sub for y → A = 6x2 + 768 A1 co answer given

x
[3]

(ii) dA =12x − 768

B1 co
dx x2
= 0 when x = 4 → A = 288. Allow (4 , 288) M1 A1 Sets differential to 0 + solution. co
d2 A =12 + 1536
M1 Any valid method
dx2 x3
(= 36) > 0 Minimum A1 co www dep on correct f″ and x = 4
[5]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

 Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2014 9709 13

10 pts of intersection 2 x + 1= −x² + 12x − 20 M1A1 Attempt at soln of sim eqns. co

→ x = 3, 7
1
Area of trapezium = (4)(7 + 15) = 44 M1A1 Either method ok. co
2
(or ∫ (2x+1) dx from 3 to 7 = 44)

Area under curve = − 1 x³ + 6x² − 20x B2,1 −1 each term incorrect

3
Uses 3 to 7 → (54 2 ) DM1 Correct use of limits (Dep 1st M1)
3

Shaded area = 10 2 A1 co
3
[8]
OR

+ 10x − 21) = − x + 5x 2 − 21x 

7 3 
Functions subtracted before integration
∫  − x2

3  3 

M1 subtraction, A1A1A1 for integrated terms, Subtraction reversed allow A3A0.

DM1 correct use of limits, A1 Limits reversed allow DM1A0

11 Sim eqns → A (1, 3) M1 A1 co Allow answer only B2

Vectors or mid-point → C (12, 14) M1 A1 Allow answer only B2

Eqn of BC 4y = x + 44 or CD y = 3x − 22 M1 equation ok – unsimplified

Sim eqns → B(4, 12) or D (9, 5) DM1A1 Sim eqns. co
Vectors or mid-point → B(4, 12) or D (9, 5) DM1A1 Valid method (or sim eqns) co
[9]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2014

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2013 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/11 Paper 1, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2013 series for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level
components.
 Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 11

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not
usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or
just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in
hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application
of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work
only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

 Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 11

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

part question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question
remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through ”
marks. MR is not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is
regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

 Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 11

1 (i) 64 + 576 x + 2160 x 2 B1B1B1 Can score in (ii)

[3]
(ii) ( )
576a x 2 + 2160 x 2 = 0 ( ) M1
2160 15
a=− oe (eg − ) or ‒3.75 A1
576 4 [2]

2 Attempt integration M1
1 6
f (x ) = 2(x + 6) 2 − (+ c ) A1A1 Accept unsimplified terms
x
6
2(3) − + c = 1 M1 Sub.x = 3, y = 1. c must be present
3
c = –3 A1
[5]

3 (i) DB = 6i + 4j – 3k cao B1
DE = 3i +2j – 3k cao B1
[2]
(ii) DB.DE = 18 + 8 + 9 = 35 M1 Use of x1 x 2 + y1 y 2 + z1 z 2
│DB│= √61 or │DE│= √22 M1 Correct method for moduli
35 = 61 × 22 × cos θ oe M1 All connected correctly
θ = 17.2° (0.300 rad) cao A1 Use of e.g. BD. DE can score M
[4] marks (leads to obtuse angle)

4 (i) ( )
4 1 − cos 2 x + 8 cos x − 7 = 0 M1 Use c 2 + s 2 = 1
4c 2 − 8c + 3 = 0 → (2 cos x − 1)(2 cos x − 3) = 0 M1 Attempt to solve
x = 60° or 300° A1A1
[4]
(ii) 1 θ = 60° (or 300°) M1 Allow 300° in addition
2
θ = 120 ° only A1
[2]

5 (i) x = (± ) y − 1 B1 OR y 2 = x − 1 (x/y interchange 1st)

f −1 : x a x − 1 for x > 1 B1B1
[3]
(ii) (
ff (x ) = x + 1 + 1
2
)
2
B1 Or x 4 + 2 x 2 − (153 / 16 ) = 0
x 2 + 1 = (± )13 / 4 M1 Or x 2 = 9 / 4, (− 17 / 4 )
x = 3/2 A1 www. Condone ± 3/2
[3]
Alt. (ii) f (x ) = f −1
(185 / 16) = 13 / 4 M1 Alt.(ii) f(3/2) = 13/4 B1
x=f −1
(13 / 4) M1 f(13/4) = 185/16 B1
x = 3/ 2 A1 x = 3/2 B1
SC.B2 answer 1.5 with no working

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

 Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 11

6 (i) r (2π − α ) + 2 rα + 2 r B1B1

2πr + rα + 2r B1 ft for rα instead of 2rα or omission 2r
SC1 for 2rα + 4r . (Plate = shaded
[3] part)

(ii) 1
2
(2r )2 α + πr 2 − 1 2 r 2α B1B1 Either B1 can be scored in (iii)
3r 2α
+ πr 2 B1
2 [3]

(iii) πr 2 − 1 r 2α = 2r 2α M1 For equating their 2 parts from (ii)

2
2
α= π A1
5
[2]

7 (i) mid-point = (3, 4) B1 soi

Grad. AB = –½ → grad. of perp., = 2 M1 For use of −1/m soi
y − 4 = 2( x − 3 ) M1 ft on their (3, 4) and 2
y = 2x − 2 A1
[4]
(ii) q = 2p − 2 p 2 + q 2 = 4 oe B1 B1 ft for 1st eqn.
p 2 + (2 p − 2 ) = 4 → 5 p 2 − 8 p = 0
2
M1 Attempt substn (linear into quadratic)
{OR ¼ (q + 2 ) + q = 4 → 5q + 4q − 12 = 0 }
2 2 2 & simplify

8 6
(0,−2) and  ,  A1A1
5 5 [5]

8 (i) A = 2 xr + πr 2 B1
2 x + 2πr = 400 (⇒ x = 200 − πr ) B1
A = 400 r − πr 2 M1A1 Subst & simplify to AG (www)
[4]
dA
(ii) = 400 − 2πr B1 Differentiate
dr
=0 M1 Set to zero and attempt to find r
200
r= oe A1
π
x = 0 ⇒ no straight sections AG A1
d2 A
= −2π ( < 0 ) Max B1 Dep on − 2π , or use of other valid
dr 2 [5] reason

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

 Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 11

10
9 (a) (2a + 9d ) = 400 oe B1 → 2a + 9d = 80
2
20
(2a + 19d ) = 1400 OR
2
10
[2(a + 10d ) + 9d ] = 1000 B1 → 2a + 19 d = 140 or 2a + 29 d = 200
2
d = 6 a = 13 M1A1A1 Solve sim. eqns both from S n
[5] formulae
a 2a B1B1
(b) =6 =7
1− r 1− r2
12(1 − r ) 1 − r 2 12
=7 or = M1 Substitute or divide
1− r2 1− r 7
5
r = or 0.714 A1
7
12 A1 Ignore any other solns for r and a
a= or 1.71(4)
7 [5]

10 (i)
dy
dx
[ ]
= 3(3 − 2 x ) × [− 2]
2
B1B1 OR − 54 + 72 x − 24 x 2 B2,1,0

1 dy
At x = , = −24 M1
2 dx
 1
y − 8 = −24 x −  DM1
 2
y = −24 x + 20 A1
[5]
 (3 − 2 x )4   1 
(ii) Area under curve =   × −  B1B1 OR 27 x − 27 x 2 + 12 x 3 − 2 x 4 B2,1,0
 4   2 
 81  M1
− 2 − −  Limits 0→ ½ applied to integral with
 8 intention of subtraction shown
Area under tangent = ∫ (− 24x + 20) M1 or area trap =½(20 + 8) × ½

= − 12 x 2 + 20 x or 7 (from trap) A1 Could be implied

9 A1 Dep on both M marks
or 1.125
8 [6]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2013 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/12 Paper 1, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2013 series for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level
components.
 Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2012 9709 12

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not
usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or
just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in
hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application
of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work
only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2012

 Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2012 9709 12

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

part question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question
remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through ”
marks. MR is not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is
regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2012

 Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 12

1 (i) sinx = √(1 − p²) B1 Allow 1 – p if following √(1 − p²)

[1] ± is B0.
sin x 1 − p2
(ii) tan x = = B1 [1] for answer to (i) used.
cos x p

p
(iii) tan(90 − x ) = B1
1 − p2 [1] for reciprocal of (ii)

2 (i) slant length = 10 cm. B1

circumference of base = 12π B1
arc length = 10θ ( = 12π) B1 Use of rθ, θ calculated, not 6 or 8.
→ θ = 1.2π or 3.77 radians. B1
[4]
(ii) ½r²θ = 188.5 cm ² or 60π. M1 A1 Use of ½r²θ with radians and
[2] r = calculated ‘10’, not 6 or 8.

2
3 y=
5x − 6
dy −3
(i) = 2 × −½ × (5 x − 6) 2 × 5 B1 B1 B1 without ‘×5’. B1 For ‘×5’
dx B1 Use of ‘uv’ or ‘u/v’ ok.
→ − 85 [3]
2 5x − 6
(ii) integral = 1
÷5 B1 B1 B1 without ‘÷5’. B1 for ‘÷ 5’
2
Uses 2 to 3 → 2.4 − 1.6 = 0.8 M1 A1 Use of limits in an integral.
[4]

4 OA = i + 2 j and OB = 4i + pk ,

(i) AB = b − a = 3i − 2j + 6k B1 Must be AB = b − a
Unit vector = (3i − 2j + 6k) ÷ 7 M1 A1 Divides by modulus. √ on vector AB.
[3]

(ii) Scalar product = 4 M1 Use of x1x2 + y1y2 + z1z2

= √5 × √(16 + p²) × cos θ M1 M1 For modulus. All linked correctly
including correct use of cosθ=1/5.
→ p = ±8 A1
[4]

5 A (0, 8) B (4, 0) 8y + x= 33
m of AB = −2 B1
m of BC = ½ M1 Use of m1m2 = −1for BC or AD
Eqn BC → y − 0 = ½(x − 4) M1 Correct method for equation of BC
Sim eqns → C (16, 6) M1 A1 Sim Eqns for BC, AC.

Vector step method → D (12, 14) M1 A1 M1 valid method.

(or AD y = ½x +8, CD y = −2x + 38) [7]
(or M = (8, 7) → D = (12, 14) )

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

 Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 12

6
y 12
(i) Sim triangles = (or trig) M1
16 − x 16 Trig, similarity or eqn of line
→ y = 12 − ¾x A1 (could also come from eqn of line)
A = xy = 12x − ¾x². A1 ag – check working.
[3]
dA 6x
(ii) = 12 − B1
dx 4
= 0 when x = 8. → A = 48. M1 A1
Sets to 0 + solution.
This is a Maximum. B1
From −ve quadratic or 2nd differential. [4] Can be deduced without any working.
Allow even if ‘48’ incorrect.

7 (a) (i) a = 300, d = 12

→ 540 = 300 + (n − 1)12 → n = 21 M1 A1 Use of nth term. Ans 20 gets 0.
[2] Ignore incorrect units
(ii) S26 = 13 (600 + 25×12) = 11700 M1 Correct use of sn formula.
→ 3 hours 15 minutes. A1
[2]
(b) ar = 48 and ar² = 32 → r = ⅔ M1 Needs ar and ar² + attempt at a and r.
→ a =72. A1
S∞ = 72 ÷ ⅓ = 216. M1 Correct S∞ formula with │r│ < 1
A1
[4]

8 f : x a 3 cos x − 2 for 0 Y x Y 2π.

(i) 3cosx − 2 = 0 → cos x = ⅔ M1 Makes cos subject, then cos –1

→ x = 0.841 or 5.44 A1 A1 for 2π − 1st answer.
[3]
(ii) range is −5 Y f(x) Y 1 B2,1 B1 for [ − 5. B1 for Y 1.
[2]
(iii)
y B1,B1 B1 starts and ends at same point. Starts
decreasing. One cycle only.
[2] B1 for shape, not ‘V’ or ‘U’.
0 2π x
B1
[1]

M1 Make x the subject, copes with ‘cos’.

(iv) max value of k = π or 180º. A1 Needs to be in terms of x.
[2]
 x+2
(iv) g −1(x) = cos −1  
 3 

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

 Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 12

8
9 y= + 2x
x
dy −8
(i) = 2 +2 M1 Attempt at differentiation.
dx x A1 algebraic – unsimplified.
(− 6 at A)
dy dy dy
= × M1 Ignore notation – needs product of 0.04
dt dx dt
A1 dy
→ − 0.24 and ‘his’ .
[4] dx

64
∫y ∫x
2
(ii) = 2
+ 4 x 2 + 32 M1 Use of integral of y² (ignore π)

− 64 4 x 3
=( + + 32 x ) A3,2,1 3 terms → −1 each error.
x 3
Limits 2 to 5 used correctly DM1 Uses correct limits correctly.
→ 271.2π or 852 A1
(allow 271π or 851 to 852) [6] (omission of π loses last mark )

10 f : x a 2 x 2 − 3x , g : x a 3x + k ,

(i) 2 x 2 − 3x − 9 > 0
→ x =3 or −1½ M1 A1 For solving quadratic. Ignore > or [
Set of x x > 3 , or x < −1½ A1 condone [ or Y
[3]
3 9
(ii) 2x² − 3x = 2( x − ) 2 − B3,2,1 – x² in bracket is an error.
4 8
3 9
Vertex ( ,− ) B1 on ‘c’ and ‘b’.
4 8 [4]

(iii) gf(x) = 6x² − 9x + k = 0 B1

27
Use of b² − 4ac → k = oe. M1 A1 Used on a quadratic (even fg).
8
[3]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the October/November 2013 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/13 Paper 1, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the October/November 2013 series for most IGCSE,
GCE Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level
components.
 Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 13

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not
usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or
just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in
hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application
of a formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more “method” steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following on
from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only. A
and B marks are not given for fortuitously “correct” answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

 Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 13

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no “follow through” from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only – often written by a ‘fortuitous’ answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR –1 A penalty of MR –1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

part question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question
remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become “follow through ”
marks. MR is not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures – this is
regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR –2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA –1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA –1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

 Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 13

1 (x + 1) (x – 2) or other valid method M1 Attempt soln of eqn or other method

−1, 2 A1
x < –1, x > 2 A1 Penalise ≤ , ≥
[3]

1 1
− −
2 f (x) = 2 x + x (+c)
2
M1A1 Attempt integ x 2 or + x needed for M
1
5 = –2 × + 4 + c M1 Sub (4, 5). c must be present
2
c=2 A1
[4]

3 (i) gradient of perpendicular = ‒½ soi B1

y – 1 = – ½ (x – 3) B1
[2]

(ii) C = (‒9, 6) B1 soi in (i) or (ii)

AC2 = [3 – (–9)]2 + [1 – 6]2 (ft on their C) M1 OR AB² = [3−(−21)]² + [1−11]² M1
AC = 13 A1 AB = 26 A1
[3] AC = 13 A1

4 (i) OD = 4i + 3j B1
CD = 4i + 3j ‒10k B1 for OD – 10k
[2]

(ii) OD.CD = 9 + 16 = 25 M1 Use of x1 x2 + y1y2 + z1z2

│OD│= √25 or │CD│= √125 M1 Correct method for moduli
25 = 25 × 125 × cosθ oe M1 All connected correctly
ODC = 63.4˚ (or 1.11 rads) A1 cao
[4]

a
5 (a) = 8a ⇒ 1(a) = 8(a) (1 − r ) B1
1− r
଻
‫ ݎ‬ൌ oe B1
଼
[2]

(b) a + 4d = 197 B1 Or 2a + 9d = 408

10
[2a + 9d ] = 2040 B1 Attempt to solve simultaneously
2
d = 14 M1A1
[4]

1 2 1 2
6 (i) sector areas are 11 α , 5 α B1 Sight of 112, 52
2 2
1 1
× 112 α − × 52 α
112 − 5 2
k= 2 2 M1 Or
1 2 52
×5 α
2
96
k= or 3.84 A1
25
[3]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

 Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 13

(ii) perimeter shaded region= 11α + 5α + 6 + B1

6 = 16α + 12
perimeter unshaded region = 5α + 5 + 5 = B1
5α + 10
16α + 12 = 2 (5α + 10) M1
α = 4/3 or 1.33 A1
[4]

π M1
7 (a) x2 – 1 = sin
3
x = ± 1.366 A1A1 for negative of 1st answer
[3]

π 5π  13π π 
(b) 2θ + =  or or  B1 1 correct angle on RHS is sufficient
3 6  6 6
π  11π 
2θ = =  or  M1 Isolating 2θ
2  6 
π 11π
θ= , A1A1 SC decimals 0.785 & 2.88 scores M1B1
4 12 [4]

8 (i) 81 (x8) B1
[1]

(ii) 10 × 33 (x8) soi leading to their answer B1B1 B1 for 10, 5C2 or 5C3. B1 for 33. But must
be multiplied.
270 (x8) B1
[3]

(iii) k × (i) M1 k ≠ 1,0

405 soi A1
+ (ii) DM1
675 (x8) A1
[4]

dy
= −k 2 (x + 2) + 1 = 0
−2
9 M1A1 Attempt differentiation & set to zero
dx
x+2=±k DM1 Attempt to solve
x = –2 ± k A1 cao
d2 y
= 2k 2 (x + 2 )
−3
M1 Attempt to differentiate again
2
dx
d2 y
M1 Sub their x value with k in it into
dx 2
d2 y  2 
When x = –2 = k, =   which is (> 0) min A1 Only 1 of bracketed items needed for each
dx 2  k 
d2 y  2  d2 y
When x = –2 – k, =  which is (< 0) A1 but and x need to be correct.
dx 2  − k  dx 2
max
[8]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

 Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE A LEVEL – October/November 2013 9709 13

10 (i) Range is (y) ≥ c2 + 4c B1 Allow >

dy
x2 + 4x = (x + 2)2 – 4 M1 OR = 2x + 4 = 0
dx
(Smallest value of c is) ‒2 A1 ‒2 with no (wrong) working gets B2
[3]

(ii) 5a + b = 11 B1
(a + b)2 + 4 (a + b) = 21 B1
(11 – 5a + a)2 + 4 (11 – 5a + a) = 21 M1 OR corresponding equation in b
(8) (2a2 – 13a + 18) = (8) (2a – 9) (a – 2) M1 OR (8) (2b + 23) (b – 1) = 0
=0
9  23 
a = , 2 OR b =  −  , 1 A1 A1 for either a or b correct. Condone 2nd
2  2 
A1 value. Spotted solution scores only B marks.
[6]

Alt. (ii) Last 5 marks

f–1 (x) = x + 4 − 2 B1 Alt. (ii) Last 4 marks
g (1) = f–1 = (21) used M1 (a + b + 7) (a + b – 3) = 0 M1A1
a + b = 25 – 2 = 3 A1 (Ignore solution involving a + b = –7)
Solve a + b = 3, 5a + b = 11 M1 Solve a + b = 3, 5a + b = 11 M1
a = 2, b = 1 A1 a = 2, b = 1 A1

dy  1 − 
[ ]
1
11 (i) =  (x 4 + 4 x + 4) 2  × 4 x 3 + 4 B1B1
dx  2 
dy 1 1
At x = 0, = × × 4 = (1) M1 Sub x = 0 and attempt eqn of line following
dx 2 2 differentiation.
Equation is y – 2 = x A1
[4]

(ii) x + 2 = x 4 + 4 x + 4 ⇒ (x + 2)2 B1 AG www

= x4 + 4x + 4
x2 – x4 = 0 oe B1
x = 0, ± 1 B2,1,0
[4]
 x5 
(iii) (π )  + 2 x 2 + 4 x  M1A1 Attempt to integrate y2
5 

(π ) 0 −  − 1 + 2 − 4  DM1

  5 
11π
(6.91) oe A1 Apply limits − 1 → 0
5
[4]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2013 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/11 Paper 1, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2013 series for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level components.
Page 2 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2013 9709 11

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method
marks are not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units.
However, it is not usually sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention
of using some method or just to quote a formula; the formula or idea must be
applied to the specific problem in hand, e.g. by substituting the relevant
quantities into the formula. Correct application of a formula without the
formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some cases an M
mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly

obtained. Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method
mark is earned (or implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more "method" steps, the M marks are
generally independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly
when there are several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used
to indicate that a particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B
(asterisked) mark in the scheme. When two or more steps are run together by the
candidate, the earlier marks are implied and full credit is given.

• The symbol √ implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly
following on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for
correct work only. A and B marks are not given for fortuitously "correct" answers or
results obtained from incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt
whether a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the
doubt. Unless otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost,
e.g. wrong working following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless
the scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct
to 3 s.f., or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an
angle). As stated above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer
arises fortuitously from incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B
marks for correct answers which arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of
10.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Page 3 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2013 9709 11

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to

ensure that the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be
absolutely clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no "follow through" from a

previous error is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only - often written by a “fortuitous” answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is

insufficiently accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same
question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong

solution, or a case where some standard marking practice is to be varied
in the light of a particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR -1 A penalty of MR -1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a

question or part question are genuinely misread and the object and
difficulty of the question remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks
then become "follow through " marks. MR is not applied when the
candidate misreads his own figures - this is regarded as an error in
accuracy. An MR-2 penalty may be applied in particular cases if agreed
at the coordination meeting.

PA -1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature

approximation. The PA -1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

 Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2013 9709 11

2
2  5 B1 for 3( 2 x − 5) 2 , B1 for (×2 + 1)
1 f ' ( x) = ( 2 x − 5) × 2 + 1 or 24 x −  + 1 B1B1
 2 SC B1 for 24x2 – 120x + 151
> 0 (allow ≥ ) B1 Dep on k (2x – 5)2 + c (k > 0), (c ≥ 0)
[3] Subst of particular values is B0

2 (i) 1 – 6px +15p2x2 B1B1 Simplificn of n∁r can be scored in (ii)

[2]

(ii) 15p2 × 1 – 6p × –1 M1
3p(5p + 2) = 0 DM1 Obtain & attempt to solve quadratic
2
p = − oe A1 Allow p = 0 in addition
5 [3]

3 (i) (OAB ) = 1 × 82 α , (OAC ) = 1 × π × 4 2 B1B1 Accept 25.1 (for OAC)

2 2
π
α= B1
8 [3]

1
(ii) 8 + 8 × their α + ×8× π B1 23.7 gets B1B0
2
8 + 5π B1 SC B1 for e.g. 5 π (omitted OB)
[2]

4 (i) ar2 = –108, ar5 = 32 B1

32  8 
r3 = =−  M1 Eliminating a
− 108  27 
 2 2 3
r =  −  or –0.666 or –0.667 A1 − from little or no working → www
3 3
 3 [3]

 108 32 
(ii) a = –243 B1 ft on their r  − 2 or 5 
 r r 
[1]

− 243 729
(iii) S ∞ = = − or –145.8 M1A1
2 5 Accept –146. For M1 r must be < 1
1+ [2]
3

sin θ (sin θ − cos θ ) + cos θ (sin θ + cos θ )

5 (i) M1
(sin θ + cos θ )(sin θ − cos θ )

sin 2 θ − sin θ cosθ + cosθ sin θ = cos 2 θ

A1
sin 2 θ − cos 2 θ

1
AG A1 www
sin θ − cos 2 θ
2
[3]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

 Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2013 9709 11

1 1
(ii) s 2 − (1 − s 2 ) = or 1 − c 2 − c 2 = M1 Applying c2 + s2 = 1
3 3
or 3(s2 – c2) = c2 + s2
2 1
sin θ = (±) or cosθ = (±) A1 Or s = (±) 0.816, c = (±) 0.577,
3 3 t = (±) 1.414
or tan θ = (± ) 2
θ = 54.7°, 125.3°, 234.7°, 305.3° A1A1 any 2 solutions for 1st A1
[4] >4 solutions in range max A1A0

6 (i) OA.OC = –4p2 – q2 + 4p2 + q2 M1 Attempt scalar product. Allow M1 even

=0 A1 for e.g. OA.OB = 2pq – 2pq etc.
[2]

(ii) CA = OA – OC = ( ± )(1 + 4 p 2 + q 2 ) (i) M1 Ignore CA = OC–OA

CA = 1 + 4 p 2 + q 2 A1 Not (1 + 4 p 2
+ q2 )
2

[2]

(iii) BA = OA – OB = i + 6j + 2k – (2j – 6k) M1 Allow subtn reversed for both M marks

= (±)(i + 4j + 8k)

xi + yj + z k 1 M1A1 M1 independent of 1st M1

→ (i + 4 j + 8k ) [3]
x2 + y2 + z 2 9

7 (i) x2 − 4 x + 4 = x ⇒ x2 − 5x + 4 = 0 M1 Eliminate y to reach 3-term quadratic

( x − 1)( x − 4)(= 0) or other valid method M1 Attempt solution
A1
(1, 1), (4, 4)
A1 ft dependent on 1st M1
Mid-point = (2½, 2½)
[4]

(ii) x 2 − (4 + m) x + 4 = 0 → (4 + m) 2 − 4(4) = 0 M1 Applying b2 – 4ac = 0

4 + m = ±4 or m(8 + m) = 0 DM1 Attempt solution
m = −8 A1 Ignore m = 0 in addition
M1 Sub non-zero m and attempt to solve
x2 + 4x + 4 = 0
x = –2, y = 16 A1 Ignore (2, 0) solution from m = 0
[5]

Alt (ii) 2x – 4 = m M1 OR 2x – 4 = m
m+4 m ( m + 4)
x2 – 4x + 4 = (2x – 4)x DM1 Sub x = ,y= into quad
2 2
x = –2 (ignore +2) A1 m = –8 from resulting quad m(m + 8)=0
m = –8 (ignore 0) A1 x = –2
y = 16 A1 y = 16

8 (i) 2(x – 3)2 – 5 or a = 2, b = –3, c = –5 B1B1B1

[3]

(ii) 3 B1 ft on – their b. Allow k ≥ 3 or x ≥ 3

[1]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

 Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2013 9709 11

(iii) (y) ≥ 27 B1 Allow >. Allow 27 ≤ y ≤ ∞ etc.

[1] OR (x/y interchange as 1st operation)

(iv) 2( x − 3) = ( y + 5)
2
M1 x = 2( y − 3) 2 − 5
1 1
x − 3 = (±) ( y + 5) M1 ( y − 3) 2 = (x + 5)
2 2
1 1
x = 3 + /± ( y + 5) A1 y − 3 = (±) ( x + 5)
2 2
1
(f -1 ( x)) = 3 + ( x + 5) for x ≥ 27 A1B1 ft on their 27 from (iii)
2 [5]

3 Or 3x − 10 x + 3 = 0
9 (i) 3u + − 10 = 0 B1
u Or (3 x − 1)( x − 3) or apply formula
etc.
3u 2 − 10u + 3 = 0 ⇒ (3u − 1)(u − 3) = 0 M1
1
x = or 3 A1
3
1
x = or 9 A1
9 [4]
1 3
3 −2 3 −2
(ii) f ′′(x) = x − x B1 Allow anywhere
2 2
1
At x =
9
3 3
f ′′(x) = (3) − (27) (= –36) < 0 → Max M1 Valid method. Allow innac subs, even
2 2 1
At x = 9 3,
3
3 1 3 1 4
f ′′(x) = × − × (= ) > 0 → Min A1 Fully correct. No working, no marks.
2 3 2 27 9 [3]
3 1
(iii) f(x) = 2 x 2 + 6 x 2 − 10 x (+ c) B2 B1 for 2/3 terms correct. Allow in (i)
–7 = 16 + 12 – 40 + c M1 Sub (4, –7). c must be present.
c=5 A1
[4]

dy
10 (i) = 4( x − 2) 3 B1 Or 4 x 3 − 24 x 2 + 48x − 32
dx
Grad of tangent = –4 M1 Sub x = 1 into their derivative
Eq. of tangent is y – 1 = –4(x – 1) M1 Line thru (1, 1) and with m from deriv
5
→ B ( , 0) A1
4
1
Grad of normal = M1 Use of m1m2 = –1
4
1 3
Eq. of normal is y – 1 = ( x − 1) → C(0, ) A1
4 4 [6]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

Page 7 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2013 9709 11

2
2 1
2
(ii) AC = 1 +   M1
4
17
17 A1 Allow
[2] 16
4

(iii) ∫ (x − 2) dx =
4 (x − 2)5 B1 Or
x5
− 2 x 4 + 8 x 3 − 16 x 2 + 16 x
5 5
 1  1
M1 Apply limits 1 → 2 for curve
0 − ( − 5 )  = 5
  5
1 5 1 4 1
∆ = × 1 × (their − 1) = M1 Or ∫ (− 4x + 5) dx =
2 4 8 1 8
1 1 3 A1
− = or 0.075
5 8 40 [4]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

CAMBRIDGE INTERNATIONAL EXAMINATIONS
GCE Advanced Subsidiary Level and GCE Advanced Level

MARK SCHEME for the May/June 2013 series

9709 MATHEMATICS
9709/12 Paper 1, maximum raw mark 75

This mark scheme is published as an aid to teachers and candidates, to indicate the requirements of
the examination. It shows the basis on which Examiners were instructed to award marks. It does not
indicate the details of the discussions that took place at an Examiners’ meeting before marking began,
which would have considered the acceptability of alternative answers.

Mark schemes should be read in conjunction with the question paper and the Principal Examiner
Report for Teachers.

Cambridge will not enter into discussions about these mark schemes.

Cambridge is publishing the mark schemes for the May/June 2013 series for most IGCSE, GCE
Advanced Level and Advanced Subsidiary Level components and some Ordinary Level components.
 Page 2 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2012 9709 12

Mark Scheme Notes

Marks are of the following three types:

M Method mark, awarded for a valid method applied to the problem. Method marks are
not lost for numerical errors, algebraic slips or errors in units. However, it is not usually
sufficient for a candidate just to indicate an intention of using some method or just to
quote a formula; the formula or idea must be applied to the specific problem in hand,
e.g. by substituting the relevant quantities into the formula. Correct application of a
formula without the formula being quoted obviously earns the M mark and in some
cases an M mark can be implied from a correct answer.

A Accuracy mark, awarded for a correct answer or intermediate step correctly obtained.
Accuracy marks cannot be given unless the associated method mark is earned (or
implied).

B Mark for a correct result or statement independent of method marks.

• When a part of a question has two or more "method" steps, the M marks are generally
independent unless the scheme specifically says otherwise; and similarly when there are
several B marks allocated. The notation DM or DB (or dep*) is used to indicate that a
particular M or B mark is dependent on an earlier M or B (asterisked) mark in the scheme.
When two or more steps are run together by the candidate, the earlier marks are implied and
full credit is given.

• The symbol √ implies that the A or B mark indicated is allowed for work correctly following
on from previously incorrect results. Otherwise, A or B marks are given for correct work only.
A and B marks are not given for fortuitously "correct" answers or results obtained from
incorrect working.

• Note: B2 or A2 means that the candidate can earn 2 or 0.

B2/1/0 means that the candidate can earn anything from 0 to 2.

The marks indicated in the scheme may not be subdivided. If there is genuine doubt whether
a candidate has earned a mark, allow the candidate the benefit of the doubt. Unless
otherwise indicated, marks once gained cannot subsequently be lost, e.g. wrong working
following a correct form of answer is ignored.

• Wrong or missing units in an answer should not lead to the loss of a mark unless the
scheme specifically indicates otherwise.

• For a numerical answer, allow the A or B mark if a value is obtained which is correct to 3 s.f.,
or which would be correct to 3 s.f. if rounded (1 d.p. in the case of an angle). As stated
above, an A or B mark is not given if a correct numerical answer arises fortuitously from
incorrect working. For Mechanics questions, allow A or B marks for correct answers which
arise from taking g equal to 9.8 or 9.81 instead of 10.

© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2012

 Page 3 Mark Scheme: Teachers’ version Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2012 9709 12

The following abbreviations may be used in a mark scheme or used on the scripts:

AEF Any Equivalent Form (of answer is equally acceptable)

AG Answer Given on the question paper (so extra checking is needed to ensure that
the detailed working leading to the result is valid)

BOD Benefit of Doubt (allowed when the validity of a solution may not be absolutely
clear)

CAO Correct Answer Only (emphasising that no "follow through" from a previous error
is allowed)

CWO Correct Working Only - often written by a ‘fortuitous' answer

ISW Ignore Subsequent Working

MR Misread

PA Premature Approximation (resulting in basically correct work that is insufficiently

accurate)

SOS See Other Solution (the candidate makes a better attempt at the same question)

SR Special Ruling (detailing the mark to be given for a specific wrong solution, or a
case where some standard marking practice is to be varied in the light of a
particular circumstance)

Penalties

MR -1 A penalty of MR -1 is deducted from A or B marks when the data of a question or

part question are genuinely misread and the object and difficulty of the question
remain unaltered. In this case all A and B marks then become "follow through √"
marks. MR is not applied when the candidate misreads his own figures - this is
regarded as an error in accuracy. An MR-2 penalty may be applied in particular
cases if agreed at the coordination meeting.

PA -1 This is deducted from A or B marks in the case of premature approximation. The

PA -1 penalty is usually discussed at the meeting.

© University of Cambridge International Examinations 2012

 Page 4 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2013 9709 12

dy 6
1 = 2
dx x
B1 Integration only – unsimplified
y = −6 x −1 + c M1 Uses (2, 9) in an integral
Uses (2, 9) → c = 12 A1
y = −6 x −1 + 12 [3]

6
 1 
2  2x − 
 2 x
(i) Coeff of x² = 15×16×(−½)² = 60 B1 B1 B1 for 2/3 parts. B1
[2]
(ii) Constant term is 20 × 8x³ ×(−1 ÷ 8x³) B1 B1 unsimplified
×(1 + x²) needs to consider 2 terms M1 Needs to consider the constant term
→ 60 − 20 = 40 A1
[3]

12
3 mx + 14 = + 2 → mx 2 + 12 x − 12 = 0
x
M1 Eliminates x (or y)
Uses b 2 = 4ac → m = −3
M1 Any use of discriminant
− 3 x 2 + 12 x − 12 = 0 → P (2, 8) A1
DM1 A1 Any valid method.
[Or m = −12x−2 M1 Sub M1 x = 2 A1] [5]
[→ m = −3 and y = 8 M1 A1]

4 (i) BOC = 2tan−1½ = 0.9273 M1 A1 Correct trigonometry. (ans given)

[2]
(ii) OB = √(10² + 5²) or 11.2 = r B1 Use of trig (or Pyth) for the OB = √125.
Arc BXC = √125 × 0.9273 M1 Use of s = rθ with θ in rads , r ≠10
→ Perimeter = 20.4 cm A1
[3]

(iii) Area = ½r²θ M1 Correct formula used with rads, r ≠ 10.

− ½.10.10 → 7.96 cm². A1 Allow 7.95 or 7.96
[2]

5 a = sin θ − 3 cosθ , b = 3 sin θ + cosθ

(i) a ² + b² =
( s 2 + 9c 2 − 6sc) + (9s 2 + c 2 + 6sc) B1 Correct squaring
M1 A1 Use of s² + c² =1 to get constant.
10c² + 10s² = 10
[3] (can get 2/3 for missing 6sc)
(ii) 2s − 6c = 3s + c → s = −7c M1 Collecting and t = s÷c
→ tanθ = −7 A1
→ 98.1° A1
and 278.1° A1 For 180⁰ + first answer, providing no extra
[4] answers in the range.

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

 Page 5 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2013 9709 12

6 OA = i − 2 j + 2k , OB = 3i + pj + qk
(i) p = −6, q = 6 B1 B1
[2]
(ii) dot product = 0 → 3 − 2 p + 4p = 0 M1 Use of x1x2 + y1y2 + z1z2 = 0
→ p = −1.5 A1
[2]
(iii) AB = b − a = 2i + 3j + 6k B1 not for b – a.
Unit vector = (2i + 3j + 6k) ÷ 7 M1 A1 M1 for division by modulus. on B1.
[3]

7 3 y + 2 x = 33.
Gradient of line = −⅔ B1
Gradient of perpendicular = 3/2 M1 Use of m1m2 = −1 with gradient of line
Eqn of perp y − 3 = 32 ( x + 1) M1 Correct form of perpendicular eqn.
M1 A1 Sim eqns.
Sim Eqns → (3, 9)
M1 A1 Vectors or other method.
(−1, 3) → (3, 9) → (7, 15) [7]

250
8 (i) πr 2 h = 250π → h =
r2
→ S = 2πrh + 2πr 2
M1 Makes h the subject. πr 2 h must be right
500π
→ S = 2πr 2 + M1 Ans given – check all formulae..
r [2]
dS 500π
(ii) = 4πr − 2 B1 B1
dr r B1 for each term
= 0 when r³ = 125 → r=5
M1 Sets differential to 0 + attempt at soln
→ S= 150π
A1
[4]
d2S 1000π
(iii) = 4π +
dr 2
r3 M1 Any valid method.
This is positive → Minimum A1 2nd differential must be correct – no need for
[2] numerical answer or correct r.

5
9 f(x) = , x≥1
1 − 3x
−5
(i) f ′(x) = × −3 B1 B1 B1 without × −3. B1 for ×−3, even if first B
(1 − 3 x) 2 [2] mark is incorrect

(ii) 15 > 0 and (1 − 3x)² >0, f′(x) > 0 B1 providing ( )² in denominator.

→ increasing [1]
5 5
(iii) y = → 3x = 1 − M1 Attempt to make x the subject.
1 − 3x y A1 Must be in terms of x.
x−5 5
→ f −1(x) = or ⅓–
3x 3x
Range is ≥ 1 B1 must be ≥
Domain is − 2.5 ≤ x < 0 B1 B1 condone <
[5]

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013

 Page 6 Mark Scheme Syllabus Paper
GCE AS/A LEVEL – May/June 2013 9709 12

10 (a) 57 = 2(24 + 3d) → d = 1.5

48 = 12 + (n − 1)1.5 → n = 25 M1 A1 Use of correct Sn formula.
M1 A1 Use of correct Tn formula.
(b) ar² = 4a r = ±2 [4]
a ( r 6 − 1) B1 (allow for r = 2)
= ka B1
r −1
→ k = 63 or k = − 21
B1 B1
[4]

11 y = 1 + 4x
dy 1 −1
(i) = 2 (1 + 4 x) 2 × 4 B1 B1 B1 Without “×4”. B1 for “×4” even if first B
dx mark lost.
= 2 at B (0, 1)
Gradient of normal = −½ M1 Use of m1m2=−1
Equation y − 1 = −½ x M1 A1 Correct method for eqn.
[5]
(ii) At A x = −¼ B1
3
(1 + 4 x) 2 B1 B1 B1 Without the “÷4”. For “÷4” even if first B
∫ 1 + 4 x dx = 3
2
÷4
mark lost.
B1
1
Limits −¼ to 0 → 6
Area BOC = ½ × 2 × 1 = 1 B1 For 1 + his “1/6”.
7 [5]
→ Shaded area =
6

© Cambridge International Examinations 2013